The replacement end cap kit consists of a captive nut and bolt or termination screw, which allows you to terminate wires without the need to use terminal lugs.
Description Frame
Size
3-Pole Cat. No. 4-Pole Cat. No.
Replacement End Cap Kits
• End Caps are supplied as standard for G, H,I,J,K,M,N & NS frames. Pr ovide connections for ring type or bolt-on terminals.
• Pkg qty. 3 or 4
G 140G-G-ECM 140G-G-ECM4
G (MCP) 140MG-G-ECM —
H 140G-H-ECM 140G-H-ECM4
I 140G-I-ECM 140G-I-ECM4
J 140G-J-ECM 140G-J-ECM4
K 140G-K-ECM 140G-K-ECM4
M 140G-M-ECM 140G-M-ECM4
N 140G-N-ECM 140G-N-ECM4
Insulators
Supplied as standard for G, H, I, J, K, and M frames. Provide insulating barrier for MCCB applications, required for all applications with a Ue>440V . Pkg Qty 10.
G 140G-G-BP3 140G-G-BP4
H 140G-H-BP3 140G-H-BP4
I 140G-I-BP3 140G-I-BP4
J 140G-J-BP3 140G-J-BP4
K 140G-K-BP3 140G-K-BP4
M 140G-M-BP3 140G-M-BP4
Replacement Mounting Hardware
Metric threads
G, I 140G-G-MH3(1)
(1) Pkg. Qty. 2
140G-G-MH4(2)
(2) Pkg. Qty. 3
H, J 140G-H-MH4 (1) 140G-H-MH4(1)
K 140G-K-MH4 (3)
(3) Pkg. Qty.4
140G-K-MH4(3)
M 140G-M-MH4 (3) 140G-M-MH4(3)
N, NS 140G-N-MH4 (3) 140G-N-MH4(3)
I .:,
100 Rockwell Automation Publication 140G-SG001E-EN-P - March 2017 Replacement Parts
Replacement Parts for Flex Cable Operator
Replacement Parts, R Frame
Internal Electrical Accessories
Auxiliary/Trip Unit Contact (AX1/AX2/AX3/AX4)
• Auxiliary Contacts (AX) : Indicate ON/OFF status of the MCCB. • AX are Form C-style switches for internal MCCB wiring and are terminated with a 3-pin quick connector.
Shunt Trip (SNT)
• Allows remote tripping of the MCCB by applying control voltage to the shunt trip coil. • Wired internal to the breaker and terminated with a 3-pin quick connector.
Description Frame Size Cat. No.
Non-metallic Flange Handle with mounting hardware
G, H, I, K, M
140G-P1
Stainless Steel Flange Handle with mounting hardware 140G-S1 Painted Metal Flange Handle with mounting hardware 140G-M1 Long non-metallic Flange Handle with mounting hardware N 140G-P2 Flange Handle hardware G, H, I, K 140G-FH1
Actuator mounting hardware
G, I 140G-BH1
H, J 140G-BH2
K 140G-BH3
Description Designation Diagram
(page 82)
Frame Size Cat. No.
(3) Auxiliary contacts, 400V , (1) auxiliary contact, 24V AX1/AX2/AX3/AX4 K R 140G-R-EA3A1J Description Diagram Frame Size Cat. No.
24V DC
See page 82 R
140G-R-SNJ
48V AC/DC 140G-R-SNKY
110…120V AC/DC 140G-R-SND
220…240V AC/DC 140G-R-SNA
380…400V AC 140G-R-SNB
-I I
-
- -
-
~
- -
-
~
0 '
Rockwell Automation Publication 140G-SG001E-EN-P - March 2017 101 Replacement Parts
Shunt Close (SNC)
• Allows remote closing of the MCCB when the spring motor is charged.
The shunt close unit is wired internal to the MCCB and terminated with a 3-pin quick connect.
Undervoltage Release (UVR)
• Opens the MCCB when supply voltage drops below 0.7 of the UV relay, with a trip rating from 0.7…0.35. • The MCCB can be reset when the supply voltage is higher than 0.85 of the relay rating. • When the UV is de- energized it is not possible to close the main contacts on the MCCB. • R Resistor is supplied with the MCCB when reset is required.
Additional Replacement Parts
Description Diagram Frame Size Cat. No.
24V AC/DC
See page 82 R
140G-R-SNCJ
48V AC/DC 140G-R-SNCKY
110…120V AC/DC 140G-R-SNCD
220…240V AC/DC 140G-R-SNCA
380…400V AC 140G-R-SNCB
Description Diagram Frame Size Cat. No.
24V AC/DC
See page 91 R
140G-R-UVJ
60V AC/DC 140G-R-UVKY
110…120V AC/DC 140G-R-UVD
220…240V AC/DC 140G-R-UVA
380…400V AC 140G-R-UVB
415…440V AC 140G-R-UVC
Description Frame Size Cat. No.
Spring Charging Motor
220…250V DC
R
140G-R-SCMA
110…130V AC/DC 140G-R-SCMD
24…30V DC 140G-R-SCMJ
48…60V AC/DC 140G-R-SCMKY
Trip Reset
Auxiliary contact allows remote reset of MCCB following an overcurren
t trip
Form C, 24…30V AC/DC, PLC
R
140G-R-RRJ
Form C, 110…130V AC/DC 140G-R-RRD
Form C, 200…240V AC/DC 140G-R-RRA
Battery Unit
Used to interrogate the last trip of the MCCB when supplemental control power is not present or is lost.
R 140G-ELBU
102 Rockwell Automation Publication 140G-SG001E-EN-P - March 2017 Replacement Parts
Notes:
Rockwell Automation Publication 140G-SG001E-EN-P - March 2017 103 Specifications
Topic Page
Bulletin 140G MCCB Specifications 104
Performance Characteristics 104
Bulletin 140G Current-limiting MCCB Specifications 107
Performance Characteristics 107
Let-through Current Tables 108
Definitions 108
MCP Performance Characteristics 109
Type D Combination Ratings 110
MPCB Performance Characteristics 111
Bulletin 140G/MG MCCB Specifications 112
Temperature Performance 112
Watt Loss 119
Accessory Specifications 122
Auxiliary Contacts 122
Shunt Trip Devices 124
Undervoltage Release Devices 125
Motor Operators 126
104 Rockwell Automation Publication 140G-SG001E-EN-P - March 2017 Specifications
Bulletin 140G MCCB Specifications
Performance Characteristics
Table 103 - Ics Ratings for 15, 16, and 20 A G-Frame Devices G-Frame H-Frame I-Frame
Max. Rated Current [A] 125 / 160 (IEC version with a 160 A Icu rating) 125 / 160 (IEC version with a 160 A Icu rating) 225 Rated insulation voltage, Ui, IEC [V] 800 1000 800
Rated impulse withstand voltage, Uimp [kV] 88 8
NEMA, UL, CSA Ratings
Interrupting Rating Code(1)
(1) Explanation of Interrupting Code. Example: code G2, G=G-Fr ame; 2= 25 kA@480V . See product selection for complete ratings G2 G3 G6 H2 H3 H6 H0 H15 I2 I3
240V AC, 50/60 Hz [kA] 50 65 100 65 100 150 200 200 50 65 480V AC, 50/60 Hz [kA] 25 35 65 25 35 65 100 150 25 35
600Y/347V AC, 50/60 Hz [kA] 10 14 2 5 ————— 10 10
600V AC, 50/60 Hz [kA] — — — 1 41 82 53 54 2 25 35
IEC 60947-2 Ratings
Rated ultimate short-circuit breaking capacity, Icu
220…230V AC, 50/60 Hz [kA] 65 85 100 65 85 100 150 200 50 85 380V AC, 50/60 Hz [kA] 36 50 70 36 50 70 120 150 30 50
400…415V AC, 50/60 Hz [kA] 36 50 70 36 50 70 120 150 36 50 440V AC, 50/60 Hz [kA] 36 50 65 36 50 65 100 150 25 40
500V AC, 50/60 Hz [kA] 30 36 50 30 35 50 60 70 20 30
525V AC, 50/60 Hz [kA] 22 35 35 20 25 30 36 50 13 20
690V AC, 50/60 Hz [kA] 6 8 10 10 12 15 18 20 5 6
250V DC- 2 poles in series, thermal-mag trip units only [kA] 36 50 70 36 50 70 85 100 36 50 500V DC- 3 poles in series, thermal-mag trip units only [kA] 36 (4 p in series) 50 (4 p in series) 7 0 ( 4 p i n s e r i e s ) 3 65 07 08 5 1 0 0 36 50 Rated service short-circuit breaking capacity, Ics
220…230V AC, 50/60 Hz % Icu 75% (50) 75% 75% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 75% 50% 380V AC, 50/60 Hz % Icu 100% 100% 75% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 75% 50% (27) 400…415V AC, 50/60 Hz % Icu 100% 100% 50%(2)
(2) See Table 103.
100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 75% 50% (27)
440V AC, 50/60 Hz % Icu 50% 50% 50% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 75% 50% 500V AC, 50/60 Hz % Icu 50% 50% 50% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 75% 50% 525V AC, 50/60 Hz % Icu 50% 50% 50% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 75% 50% 690V AC, 50/60 Hz % Icu 75% 50% 50%(2) 100% 100% 100% 100% 75% 50% 50% 250V DC- 2 poles in series, thermal-mag trip units only % Icu 100% 100% 75%(2) 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 75% 500V DC- 3 poles in series, thermal-mag trip units only % Icu 100% 100% 75%(2) 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 75% 400…415V 690V 250V DC 500V DC
Ics 100% 75% 100% 100%
G-Frame H-Frame I-Frame
Mechanical Life [No. of Operations] 25000 25000 25000
[Operations/hour] 240 240 240
Electrical Life @ 415V (AC) [No. of Operations] 8000 8000 8000 [Operations/hour] 120 120 120
Wire Temperature Rating (1)
(1) Wire Temperature Rating is determined by testing the circuit breaker under full load current with the conductors sized for 7 5°C Cu 75ºC Cu 75ºC Al or Cu 75ºC
Ambient Temperature w/out derating 104ºF [40ºC] 104ºF [40ºC] 104ºF [40ºC] Storage T emperature -40...176ºF [-40…+80ºC] -40...176ºF [-40…+80ºC] -40...176ºF [-40…+80ºC] Dimensions
Width/Depth/Height
3-pole [mm] 76.2 x 70 x 130 90 x 82.5 x 130 105 x 70 x 150 4-pole [mm] 101.6 x 70 x 130 120 x 82.5 x 130 140 x 70 x 150 Weight 3-pole [lb. (kg)] 2.42 (1.1) 2.65 (1.2) 3.75 (1.7) 4-pole [lb. (kg)] 3.08 (1.4) 3.53 (1.6) 5.73 (2.1)
1 I I I I I I I I I I
I I I I
Rockwell Automation Publication 140G-SG001E-EN-P - March 2017 105 Specifications
J-Frame K-Frame M-Frame
Max. Rated Current [A] 250 400 800
Rated insulation voltage, Ui, IEC [V] 1000 1000 1000
Rated impulse withstand voltage, Uimp [kV] 8 8 8
NEMA, UL, CSA Ratings
Interrupting Rating Code(1)
(1) Explanation of Interrupting Code. Example: code G2, G=G-Fr ame; 2= 25 kA@480V . See product selection for complete ratings J2 J3 J6 J0 K3 K6 K0 K15 M5 M6 M0
240V AC, 50/60 Hz [kA] 65 100 150 200 100 150 200 200 100 200 200 480V AC, 50/60 Hz [kA] 25 35 65 100 35 65 100 150 50 65 100 600V AC, 50/60 Hz [kA] 14 18 25 35 25 35 65 100 25 35 42 500V DC- 2 poles in series (2)
(2) DC rating is applicable for thermal-magnetic trip units only [kA] — — — — 35 50 65 100 — — —
600V DC - 3 poles in series(2) [kA] — — — — 25 35 50 65 20 35 50 IEC 60947-2 Ratings
Rated ultimate short-circuit breaking capacity, Icu
220…230V AC, 50/60 Hz [kA] 65 85 100 150 85 100 200 200 85 100 200 380V AC, 50/60 Hz (AC) [kA] 36 50 70 120 50 70 120 200 50 70 100 400…415V AC, 50/60 Hz [kA] 36 50 70 120 50 70 120 200 50 70 100 440V AC, 50/60 Hz [kA] 36 50 65 100 40 65 100 180 45 50 80 500V AC, 50/60 Hz [kA] 30 36 50 60 30 50 85 150 35 50 65 525V AC, 50/60 Hz [kA] 20 25 45 50 25 40 70 100 25 35 42 690V AC, 50/60 Hz [kA] 10 12 15 20 25 40 70 100 22 25 30 250V DC- 2 poles in series(2) [kA] 36 50 70 85 50 70 100 150 50 70 100 500V DC- 2 poles in series (2) [kA] 36 50 70 85 36 50 70 100 35 50 65 500V DC- 3 poles in series(2) [kA] 36 50 70 85 — — — — — — — 750V DC- 3 poles in series(2) [kA] — — — — 25 36 50 70 20 36 50 Rated service short-circuit breaking capacity, Ics
220…230V AC, 50/60 Hz % Icu 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 380V AC, 50/60 Hz % Icu 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 400…415V AC, 50/60 Hz % Icu 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 440V AC, 50/60 Hz % Icu 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 500V AC, 50/60 Hz % Icu 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 525V AC, 50/60 Hz % Icu 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 75%(80kA) 75% (18kA) 50% (19kA) 50% (22.5kA) 690V AC, 50/60 Hz % Icu 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 75% 75% 75% 250V DC- 2 poles in series(2) % Icu 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 75% 75% 75% 500V DC- 2 poles in series(2) % Icu 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 75% 75% 75% 500V DC- 3 poles in series(2) % Icu 100% 100% 100% 100% — — — — — — — 750V DC- 3 poles in series(2) % Icu — — — — 100% 100% 100% 100% 75% 75% 75% J-Frame K-Frame M-Frame
Mechanical Life [No. of Operations] 25000 20000 20000
[Operations/hour] 240 120 120
Electrical Life @ 415V (AC) [No. of Operations] 8000 7000 (400 A)/5000 (600 A) 7000 (600…630 A) /5000 (800 A) [Operations/hour] 120 60 60
Wire Temperature Rating(1)
(1) Wire Temperature Rating is determined by testing the circuit breaker under full load current with the conductors sized for 7 5°C Al or Cu 75ºC Al or Cu 75ºC Al or Cu 75ºC
Ambient Temperature w/out derating 104ºF [40ºC] 104ºF [40ºC] 104ºF [40ºC] Storage T emperature -40...176ºF [-40…+80ºC] -40...176ºF [-40…+80ºC] -40...176ºF [-40…+80ºC] Dimensions
Width/Depth/Height
3-pole [mm] 105 x 82.5 x 160 140 x 108.5 x 205 210 x 103.5 x 268 4-pole [mm] 140 x 82.5 x 160 185 x 103.5 x 205 280 x 103.5 x 268 Weight 3-pole [lb. (kg)] 5.51 (2.5) 7.17 (3.25) 26.68 (12.1) 4-pole [lb. (kg)] 7.72 (3.5) 9.15 (4.15) 33.29 (15.1)
106 Rockwell Automation Publication 140G-SG001E-EN-P - March 2017 Specifications
N, NS-Frame R-Frame
Max. Rated Current [A] 1200 2000/2500/3000
Rated insulation voltage, Ui, IEC [V] 1000 1000
Rated impulse withstand voltage, Uimp [kV] 8 12
NEMA, UL, CSA Ratings
Interrupting Rating Code(1)
(1) Explanation of Interrupting Code. Example: code G2, G=G-Fr ame; 2= 25 kA@480V . See product selection for complete ratings N5 N6 N0 R12
240V AC, 50/60 Hz [kA] 65 100 150 125
480V AC, 50/60 Hz [kA] 50 65 100 125
600V AC, 50/60 Hz [kA] 25 50 65 100
IEC 60947-2 Ratings
Rated ultimate short-circuit breaking capacity, Icu
220…230V AC, 50/60 Hz [kA] 85 100 200 130
380V AC, 50/60 Hz [kA] 50 70 120 80
400…415V AC, 50/60 Hz [kA] 50 70 120 80
440V AC, 50/60 Hz [kA] 50 65 100 80
500V AC, 50/60 Hz [kA] 40 50 85 40
525V AC, 50/60 Hz [kA] 30 50 65 —
690V AC, 50/60 Hz [kA] 30 42 50 40
Rated service short-circuit breaking capacity, Ics
220…230V AC, 50/60 Hz % Icu 100% 100% 100% 100%
380V AC, 50/60 Hz (AC) % Icu 100% 100% 100% —
400…415V AC, 50/60 Hz % Icu 100% 100% 100% 100%
440V AC, 50/60 Hz % Icu 100% 100% 100% 100%
500V AC, 50/60 Hz % Icu 100% 100% 75% 100%
525V AC, 50/60 Hz % Icu 75% (30 kA) 50% (31.5 kA) 50% (37.5 kA) — 690V AC, 50/60 Hz % Icu 100% 75% 75% 100%
N-Frame NS-Frame R-Frame
Mechanical Life [No. of Operations] 10000 15000
[Operations/hour] 60 60
Electrical Life @ 415V (AC) [No. of Operations] 2000 4500 (2000 A) /4000 (2500 A)/3000 (3200 A) [Operations/hour] 60 60
Wire Temperature Rating(1)
(1) Wire Temperature Rating is determined by testing the circuit breaker under full load current with the conductors sized for 7 5°C Al or Cu 75ºC Al or Cu 75ºC
Ambient Temperature w/out derating 104ºF [40ºC] 104ºF [40ºC] Storage T emperature -40...176ºF [-40…+80ºC] -40...176ºF [-40…+80ºC] Dimensions
Width/Depth/Height
3-pole [mm] 210 x 154 x 268 210 x 178 x 268 427 x 282 x 382 4-pole [mm] 280 x 154 x 268 280 x 178 x 268 553 x 282 x 382 Weight 3-pole [lb. (kg)] 21.39 (9.7) 24.25 (11) 175 (79) 4-pole [lb. (kg)] 27.56 (12.5) 30.86 (14) —
Rockwell Automation Publication 140G-SG001E-EN-P - March 2017 107 Specifications
Bulletin 140G Current-limiting MCCB Specifications
Performance Characteristics
HC-Frame JC-Frame KC-Frame
Max. Rated Current [A] 125 / 160 (IEC version with a 160 A Icu rating) 250 400 Rated insulation voltage, Ui, IEC [V] 1000 1000 1000
Rated impulse withstand voltage, Uimp [kV] 8 8 8
NEMA, UL, CSA Ratings
Interrupting Rating Code(1)
(1) Explanation of Interrupting Code. Example: code HC6, HC = Cu rrent-limiting H-Frame; 6= 65 kA@480V . See product selection for complete ratings HC6 HC0 JC6 JC0 KC6 KC0
240V AC, 50/60 Hz [kA] 150 200 150 200 150 200
480V AC, 50/60 Hz [kA] 65 100 65 100 65 100
600V AC, 50/60 Hz [kA] — — 25 35 35 65
500V DC- 2 poles in series (2)
(2) DC rating is applicable for thermal-magnetic trip units only [kA] 25 35 — — 50 65
600V DC - 3 poles in series(2) [kA] — — — — 35 50
IEC 60947-2 Ratings
Rated ultimate short-circuit breaking capacity, Icu
220…230V AC, 50/60 Hz [kA] 100 150 100 150 100 200
380V AC, 50/60 Hz (AC) [kA] 70 120 70 120 70 120
400…415V AC, 50/60 Hz [kA] 70 120 70 120 70 120
440V AC, 50/60 Hz [kA] 65 100 65 100 65 100
500V AC, 50/60 Hz [kA] 50 60 50 60 50 85
525V AC, 50/60 Hz [kA] 30 36 45 50 40 70
690V AC, 50/60 Hz [kA] 15 18 15 20 40 70
250V DC- 2 poles in series(2) [kA] 70 85 70 85 70 100
500V DC- 2 poles in series (2) [kA] 70 85 70 85 50 70
500V DC- 3 poles in series(2) [kA] — — 70 85 — —
750V DC- 3 poles in series(2) [kA] — — — — 36 50
Rated service short-circuit breaking capacity, Ics
220…230V AC, 50/60 Hz % Icu 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 380V AC, 50/60 Hz % Icu 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100%
400…415V AC, 50/60 Hz % Icu 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 440V AC, 50/60 Hz % Icu 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100%
500V AC, 50/60 Hz % Icu 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100%
525V AC, 50/60 Hz % Icu 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100%
690V AC, 50/60 Hz % Icu 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100%
250V DC- 2 poles in series(2) % Icu 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 500V DC- 2 poles in series(2) % Icu 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 500V DC- 3 poles in series(2) % Icu — — 100% 100% — —
750V DC- 3 poles in series(2) % Icu — — — — 100% 100%
HC-Frame JC-Frame KC-Frame
Mechanical Life [No. of Operations] 25000 25000 20000
[Operations/hour] 240 240 120
Electrical Life @ 415V (AC) [No. of Operations] 8000 8000 7000 (400 A)/5000 (600 A) [Operations/hour] 120 120 60
Wire Temperature Rating(1)
(1) Wire Temperature Rating is determined by testing the circuit breaker under full load current with the conductors sized for 7 5°C Cu 75ºC Al or Cu 75ºC Al or Cu 75ºC
Ambient Temperature w/out derating 104ºF [40ºC] 104ºF [40ºC] 104ºF [40ºC] Storage T emperature -40...176ºF [-40…+80ºC] -40...176ºF [-40…+80ºC] -40...176ºF [-40…+80ºC] Dimensions (Width/Depth/Height) 3-pole [mm] 90 x 82.5 x 130 105 x 82.5 x 160 140 x 108.5 x 205 Weight 3-pole [lb (kg)] 2.65 (1.2) 5.51 (2.5) 7.17 (3.25) 108 Rockwell Automation Publication 140G-SG001E-EN-P - March 2017 Specifications
Let-through Current Tables
See page 171 for let-through energy curves.
Definitions
Threshold current: the rms symmetrical prospective at the highest interrupting capacity of the current limiting range, where:
• the peak current let-through in each phase is less than the peak o f that symmetrical prospective current, and • the I2t in each phase is less than the I2t of a 1/2 cycle wave of the symmetrical current Interrupting rating: the highest c urrent at rated voltage that a device is intended to interrupt under standard test conditions I2t (Amperes squared seconds): an expression related to the energy that is let through for a specific short circuit event. With respect to circuit breakers, the I2t [A2s] is expressed for the current flow between the initiation of the fault current and the clearing of the circuit.
Ip peak current: the maximum (or peak) instantaneous current that is allowed to pass during a specific short-circuit event. The value is determined from either a table as shown above or evaluated from a SCCR table based upon the available short circuit current at a specific voltage.
I
rms short-circuit current rating: the maximum rms prospective (available) current to which a device can interrupt. The rating is expressed in Amperes and volts.
Table 104 - 140G-HC Frame Let-through Current
Frame Size Rated Current
In [A]
Rated voltage
[V AC]
Threshold Current Intermediate Point Interrupting Rating Irms [kA] Ip [kA] I2t [x103] Irms [kA] Ip [kA] I2t [x103] Irms [kA] Ip [kA] I2t [x103] 140G-HC6 up to 125 A 480 6 10 266 30 19 480 65 23.2 512 600 6 10 301 14 14.1 472 25 18 655
140G-HC0 up to 125 A 480 6 10 266 50 21 486 100 31.1 704 600 6 10 301 22 18 655 35 20 650
Table 105 - 140G-JC Frame Let-through Current
Frame Size Rated Current
In [A]
Rated voltage
[V AC]
Threshold Current Intermediate Point Interrupting Rating Irms [kA] Ip [kA] I2t [x103] Irms [kA] Ip [kA] I2t [x103] Irms [kA] Ip [kA] I2t [x103] 140G-JC6 up to 250 A 480 10 14.4 499 42 26.4 853 65 30 980 600 10 13.7 582 18 91.1 791 25 22.3 990
140G-JC0 up to 250 A 480 10 14.4 499 50 26.4 853 100 44.5 1142 600 10 13.7 582 30 24.2 1058 50 30.4 1162
Table 106 - 140G-KC Frame Let-through Current
Frame Size Rated Current
In [A]
Rated voltage
[V AC]
Threshold Current Intermediate Point Interrupting Rating Irms [kA] Ip [kA] I2t [x103] Irms [kA] Ip [kA] I2t [x103] Irms [kA] Ip [kA] I2t [x103] 140G-KC6 up to 400 A 480 10 20 1.4 65 43.9 2.8 100 47.3 3 600 10 21 1.5 30 36 2.6 65 44 3
140G-KC0 up to 400 A 480 10 20 1.4 30 35 2.4 65 43.9 2.8 600 10 21 1.5 22 31 2.2 35 38 2.8
Rockwell Automation Publication 140G-SG001E-EN-P - March 2017 109 Specifications
MCP Performance Characteristics
Table 107 - Ics/Ics Ratings, 3…7 A, G- and H-Frame
G-Frame H-Frame I-Frame J-Frame K-Frame M-Frame N-Frame Frame Size [A] 125 125 225 250 400 800 1200
Poles 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
Instantaneous Trip Settings [A] 3…125 3...125 100…150 150…250 300 & 400 600 & 800 1200(1) (1) Adjustable between 1…10x motor FLA. Value based on 1200 A rating plug.
Rated insulation voltage, Ui IEC [V] 800 1000 800 1000 1000 1000 1000 Rated impulse withstand voltage, Uimp [kV] 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 NEMA, UL, CSA Ratings —UL 489 Instantaneous Trip Circuit Breaker (Magnetic Only) Max SCCR. Combination Controller Rating (2) (2) The Short Circuit value is based on a combined of MCP , motor contactor and overload relay as a UL60497-4-1 T ype D Combination Motor Controller, consult the Global SCCR tool from Rockwell Automation. 480V AC [kA] 65 65 35 65 65 65 —
600Y/347V AC [kA] 25 — 10 — — — —
600V AC [kA] — 25 — 25 35 35 —
IEC 60947-2 GB14048.2 Ratings
Rated ultimate short-circuit breaking capacity, Icu
(3)
(3) These ratings represent the standalone values for the MCP . For Type 2 coordinations values (per IEC60947-4) with Allen-Bradley contactors and overload relays, see the combination ratings in Table 108. Consult the Global SCCR tool from Rockwell Automation for specific product catalog numbers. 220-230V AC [kA] 65(4)
(4) See Table 107
65(4) 85 100 100 100 100
380V AC [kA] 36(4) 36(4) 50 70 70 70 70
400-415V AC [kA] 36(4) 36(4) 50 70 70 70 70
440V AC [kA] 36(4) 36 (4) 40 65 65 50 65
500V AC [kA] 30(4) 30 (4) 30 50 50 50 50
525V AC [kA] 22(4) 20 (4) 20 45 40 25 42
690V AC [kA] 6 (4) 10 (4) 6 15 40 25 42
(DC) 250V - 2 poles in series [kA] — — 50 70 — — —
(DC) 500V - 3 poles in series [kA] — — 50 70 — — —
Rated service short-circuit breaking ca pacity, Ics
(3)
220-230V AC % Icu 75%(4) 100% (4) 50% 100% 100% 100% 100% 380V AC % Icu 100% (4) 100%(4) 50% (27) 100% 100% 100% 100% 400-415V AC % Icu 100% (4) 100%(4) 50% (27) 100% 100% 100% 100% 440V AC % Icu 50%(4) 100% (4) 50% (27) 100% 100% 100% 100% 500V AC % Icu 50% (4) 100% (4) 50% 100% 100% 100% 100%
525V AC % Icu 50% (4) 100% (4) 50% 100% 100% 75% 75%
690V AC % Icu 75% (4) 100% (4) 50% 100% 100% 75% 75%
(DC) 250V - 2 poles in series % Icu — — 75% 100% — — —
(DC) 500V - 3 poles in series % Icu — — 75% 100% — — —
Mechanical Life [No. of Ops] 25000 25000 25000 25000 20000 20000 10000 [Ops /Hour] 240 240 240 240 120 120 60
Electrical Life @ 415V (AC) [No. of Ops] 8000 8000 8000 8000 7000 5000 2000 [Ops /Hour] 120 120 120 120 60 60 60
Wire Temperature Rating(5)
(5) Wire Temperature Rating is determined by testing the circuit breaker under full load current with the conductors sized for 4 0°C Cu 75ºC Al or Cu 75ºC Al or Cu 75ºC Al or Cu 75ºC Al or Cu 75ºC Al or Cu 75ºC Al or Cu 75ºC Ambient Temperature w/out derating 104ºF (40ºC) 104ºF (40ºC) 104ºF (40ºC) 104ºF (40ºC) 104ºF (40ºC) 104ºF (40ºC) 104ºF (40ºC) Operating Temperature -13…+158ºF
(-25…+70ºC)
-13…+158ºF
(-25…+70ºC)
-13…+158ºF
(-25…+70ºC)
-13…+158ºF
(-25…+70ºC)
-13…+158ºF
(-25…+70ºC)
-13…+158ºF
(-25…+70ºC)
-13…+158ºF
(-25…+70ºC)
Storage T emperature -40...158ºF
(-40…+70ºC)
-40...158ºF
(-40…+70ºC)
-40...158ºF
(-40…+70ºC)
-40...158ºF
(-40…+70ºC)
-40...158ºF
(-40…+70ºC)
-40...158ºF
(-40…+70ºC)
-40...158ºF
(-40…+70ºC)
Dimensions
[Width/Depth/Height]
[mm] 76.2 x 70 x 130 90 x 82.5 x 130 105 x 70 x 150 105 x 82.5 x 160 140 x 108.5 x 205 210 x 103.5 x 268 210 x 154 x 268 [inches] 3 x 2.76 x 5.12 3.54 x 3.25 x 5.12 4.13 x 2.76 x 5.9 4.13 x 3.25 x 6.3 5.51 x 4.27 x 8.07 8.27 x 4.07 x 10.55 8.27 x 6.06 x 10.55 Weight (approx.) [lb. (kg)] 2.4 (1.1) 2.6 (1.2) 3.7 (1.7) 5.5 (2.5) 7.2 (3.25) 21 (9.5) 21.4 (9.7) 230V 415V 440V 500V-525V 690V 250V DC 500V DC (H-Frame only) Icu 5 5 3 3 3 5 5
Ics % 100 100 100 100 100 100 100I I
110 Rockwell Automation Publication 140G-SG001E-EN-P - March 2017 Specifications
Type D Combination Ratings
The short-circuit value is based on a combination of MCP , motor contactor, and overload relay, rated as a UL 60947-4-1 Type D Combination Motor Controller. Values in Table 108 are for Type 2 coordination with Allen-Bradley contactors and overload relays.
Combination motor controller components:
• Circuit breaker—Bul. 140MG MCP , G-, H-, J-, K-, M-Frame • Contactor—Bul. 100-C, 100S-C, 100-D, 100S-D
• Overload relay—Bul 193/592 E1 Plus™, E3™, E3 Plus, E300™ Table 108
- Type D Combination Ratings per IEC 60947-2/GB 14048.2 Attribute Bul 140MG MCP
G H J K M
Rated ultimate short-circuit breaking capacity, Icu
220-230V AC [kA] 100 100 100 65 65
380V AC [kA] 100 100 100 65 65
400-415V AC [kA] 100 100 100 65 65
440V AC [kA] 65 65 65 65 65
500V AC [kA] 50 50 50 50 50
525V AC [kA] 50 50 50 50 50
690V AC [kA] — 50 50 25 25
Rated service short-circuit breaking capacity, Ics
(3)
220-230V AC % Icu 100% 100% 100% 100% 100%
380V AC % Icu 100% 100% 100% 100% 100%
400-415V AC % Icu 100% 100% 100% 100% 100%
440V AC % Icu 100% 100% 100% 100% 100%
500V AC % Icu 100% 100% 100% 100% 100%
525V AC % Icu 100% 100% 100% 100% 100%
690V AC % Icu 100% 100% 100% 100% 100%
Rockwell Automation Publication 140G-SG001E-EN-P - March 2017 111 Specifications
MPCB Performance Characteristics
H-Frame J-Frame
Max. Rated Current [A] 100 150
Rated insulation voltage, Ui, IEC [V] 1000 1000
Rated impulse withstand voltage, Uimp [kV] 8 8
NEMA, UL, CSA Ratings
Interrupting Rating Code(1)
(1) Explanation of Interrupting Code. Example: code H8, H=H-Fr ame; 8= 65 kA@480V . See product selection for complete ratings H8 J8
240V AC, 50/60 Hz [kA] 150 150
480V AC, 50/60 Hz [kA] 65 65
600V AC, 50/60 Hz [kA] 25 25
IEC 60947-2 Ratings
Rated ultimate short-circuit breaking capacity, Icu
220…230V AC, 50/60 Hz [kA] 100 100
380V AC, 50/60 Hz [kA] 70 70
400…415V AC, 50/60 Hz [kA] 70 70
440V AC, 50/60 Hz [kA] 65 65
525V AC, 50/60 Hz [kA] 15 45
550V AC, 50/60 Hz [kA] 15 45
690V AC, 50/60 Hz [kA] 15 15
250V DC- 2 poles in series [kA] 70 70
500V DC- 3 poles in series [kA] 70 70
Rated service short-circuit breaking capacity, Ics
220…230V AC, 50/60 Hz % Icu 100% 100%
380V AC, 50/60 Hz % Icu 100% 100%
400…415V AC, 50/60 Hz % Icu 100% 100%
440V AC, 50/60 Hz % Icu 100% 100%
525V AC, 50/60 Hz % Icu 100% 100%
550V AC, 50/60 Hz % Icu 100% 100%
690V AC, 50/60 Hz % Icu 100% 100%
250V DC- 2 poles in series % Icu 100% 100%
500V DC- 3 poles in series % Icu 100% 100%
Mechanical Life [No. of Operations] 25000 25000
[Operations/hour] 240 240
Electrical Life @ 415V (AC) [No. of Operations] 8000 8000 [Operations/hour] 120 120
Wire Temperature Rating(2)
(2) Wire Temperature Rating is determined by testing the circuit breaker under full load current with the conductors sized for 7 5°C Cu 75ºC Al or Cu 75ºC
Ambient Temperature w/out derating 104ºF (40ºC) 104ºF (40ºC) Operational Temperature -13...158ºF (-25…+70ºC) -13...158ºF (-25…+70ºC) Storage T emperature -40...158ºF (-40…+70ºC) -40...158ºF (-40…+70ºC) Dimensions
Width/Depth/Height
[mm] 90 x 82.5 x 130 105 x 82.5 x 160
[in.] 3.54 x 3.25 x 5.12 4.13 x 3.25 x 6.3
Weight (approx.) [lb. (kg)] 2.6 (1.2) 5.5 (2.5)
112 Rockwell Automation Publication 140G-SG001E-EN-P - March 2017 Specifications
Bulletin 140G/MG MCCB Specifications
Temperature Performance
140G G-Frame Thermal Magnetic Circuit Breakers
The G frame thermal magnetic circuit breaker is calibrated at 40 °C (104 °F). For applications at other temperatures there is a variation in the thermal tripping as shown in Table 109.
Table 109 - 140G G-Frame Temperature/Thermal Trip Ratings Molded Case Switches and Motor Circuit Protectors
Molded case switches and motor circuit protectors do not undergo tripping variatio ns because of ambient temperature.
However, even though ambient temperature does not affect the tripping characteristic, for temperatures exceeding +40 °C it is advisable to reduce the maximum current to prevent terminal overheating.
Table 110 shows the maximum current to prevent terminal overheating.
Table 110 - Maximum Operating Current above 40 °C (104 °F)—G-Frame Devices Rated Current In [A]
Ambient Temperature
40 °C 50 °C 60 °C 70 °C
Max. Thermal Trip [A] Max. Thermal Trip [A] Max. Thermal Trip [A] Max. Thermal Trip [A] 15 15 14 13 12
16 16 15 14 13
20 20 19 18 16
25 25 23 22 20
30 30 28 26 24
32 32 30 28 26
40 40 38 35 33
45 45 42 40 37
50 50 47 44 41
60 60 56 52 49
63 63 59 55 51
70 70 66 61 57
80 80 75 70 65
90 90 85 79 73
100 100 94 88 81
110 110 103 96 90
125 125 117 109 102
160(1)
(1) IEC only.
160(1) 150(1) 140(1) 130(1)
North American (UL) Ratings IEC Ratings
40 °C (104 °F) 50 ˚C (122 ˚F) 60 ˚C (140 ˚F) 70 ˚C (158 ˚F) 40 °C (104 °F) 50 ˚C (122 ˚F) 60 ˚C (140 ˚F) 70 ˚C (158 ˚F) In [A]
3 3 3 3
In [A]
3 3 3 3
7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7
15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15
30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30
50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50
70 70 70 70 70 70 70 70
80 80 79 79 80 80 80 80
100 93 84 79 100 100 100 100
125(1)
(1) Molded case switch rated current
112(1) 97(1) 79(1) 125 125 125 125
160(1) 160(1) 125(1) 136(1)
Rockwell Automation Publication 140G-SG001E-EN-P - March 2017 113 Specifications
140G H-Frame Thermal Magnetic Circuit Breakers
The H frame thermal magnetic circuit breaker is calibrated at 40 °C (104 °F). For applications at other temperatures there is a variation in the thermal tripping as shown in Table 111.
Table 111 - 140G H-Frame Temperature/Thermal Trip Ratings Electronic Trip Circuit Breakers, Molded Case Switches, and Motor Circuit Protectors The electronic trip circuit breakers do not undergo tripping variations ba sed on ambient temperature. However, even though ambient temperature does not affect the tripping characteristic, for temperatures exceeding +40 °C it is advisable to reduce the maximum current to prevent terminal overheating.
The same considerations are appropriate for molded case switches and mo tor circuit protectors.
Table 112 shows the maximum current to prevent terminal overheating.
Table 112 - Maximum Operating Current above 40 °C (104 °F)—H-Frame Devices Rated Current In [A]
Ambient Temperature
40 °C 50 °C 60 °C 70 °C
Max. Thermal Trip [A] Max. Thermal Trip [A] Max. Thermal Trip [A] Max. Thermal Trip [A] 15 15 14 13 12
16 16 15 14 13
20 20 19 17 16
25 25 23 22 20
30 30 28 26 24
32 32 30 28 26
40 40 37 35 32
50 50 47 43 40
60 60 56 52 49
63 63 59 55 51
70 70 66 61 57
80 80 75 70 65
90 90 86 78 73
100 100 93 87 81
110 110 103 96 89
125 125 117 109 101
160* 160* 150* 139* 129*
North American (UL) Ratings IEC Ratings
40 °C (104 °F) 50 ˚C (122 ˚F) 60 ˚C (140 ˚F) 70 ˚C (158 ˚F) 40 °C (104 °F) 50 ˚C (122 ˚F) 60 ˚C (140 ˚F) 70 ˚C (158 ˚F) In [A]
3 3 3 3
In [A]
3 3 3 3
7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7
15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15
30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30
50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50
70 70 70 70 70 70 70 70
80 80 79 79 80 80 80 80
100 93 84 79 100 100 100 100
125(1)
(1) Molded case switch rated current
112(1) 97(1) 79(1) 125 125 125 125
160(1) 160(1) 146(1) 131(1)
114 Rockwell Automation Publication 140G-SG001E-EN-P - March 2017 Specifications
140G I-Frame Thermal Magnetic Circuit Breakers
The I frame thermal magnetic circuit breaker is calibrated at 40 °C (104 °F). For applications at other temperatures there is a variation in the thermal tripping as shown in Table 113.
Table 113 - 140G I-Frame Temperature/Thermal Trip Ratings Molded Case Switches and Motor Circuit Protectors
Molded case switches and motor circuit protectors do not undergo tripping variations based on ambient temperature.
However,
even though ambient temperature does not affect the tripping characteristic, for temperatures exceeding +40 °C it is advisable to reduce the maximum current to prevent terminal overheating.
Table 114 shows the maximum current to prevent terminal overheating.
Table 114 - Maximum Operating Current above 40 °C (104 °F)—I-Frame Devices Rated Current In [A]
Ambient Temperature
40 °C 50 °C 60 °C 70 °C
Max. Thermal Trip [A] Max. Thermal Trip [A] Max. Thermal Trip [A] Max. Thermal Trip [A] 60 60 56 52 49
63 63 59 55 51
70 70 66 60 56
80 80 75 69 64
90 90 84 78 72
100 100 93 87 80
110 110 102 95 88
125 125 116 108 100
150 150 140 130 121
160 160 149 139 129
200 200 186 173 161
225 225 210 196 181
North American (UL) Ratings IEC Ratings
40 °C (104 °F) 50 ˚C (122 ˚F) 60 ˚C (140 ˚F) 70 ˚C (158 ˚F) 40 °C (104 °F) 50 ˚C (122 ˚F) 60 ˚C (140 ˚F) 70 ˚C (158 ˚F) In [A]
100 100 100 100
In [A]
100 100 100 100
110 110 110 110 110 110 110 110
125 125 125 125 125 125 125 125
150 148 153 142 150 150 150 150
200 181 161 142 200 200 200 200
225(1)
(1) Molded case switch rated current
199(1) 175(1) 142(1) 225(1) 225(1) 214(1) 204(1)
Rockwell Automation Publication 140G-SG001E-EN-P - March 2017 115 Specifications
140G J-Frame Thermal Magnetic Circuit Breakers
The J frame thermal magnetic circuit breaker is calibrated at 40 °C (104 °F). For applications at other temperatures there is a variation in the thermal tripping as shown in Table 115.
Table 115 - 140G J-Frame Temperature/Thermal Tr ip Ratings Electronic Trip Circuit Breakers, Molded Case Switches, and Motor Circuit Protectors The electronic trip circuit breakers do not undergo tripping variations ba sed on ambient temperature. However, even though ambient temperature does not affect the tripping characteristic, for temperatures exceeding +40 °C it is advisable to reduce the maximum current to prevent terminal overheating.
The same considerations are appropriate for molded case switches and motor circuit protectors.
Table 116 shows the maximum current to prevent terminal overheating.
Table 116 - Maximum Operating Current above 40 °C (104 °F)—J-Frame Devices Rated Current In [A]
Ambient Temperature
40 °C 50 °C 60 °C 70 °C
Max. Thermal Trip [A] Max. Thermal Trip [A] Max. Thermal Trip [A] Max. Thermal Trip [A] 25 25 23 21 19
30 30 25 23 20
32 32 27 24 21
35 35 32 30 26
40 40 37 34 30
50 50 46 42 39
60 60 56 51 45
63 63 58 53 48
70 70 65 58 51
80 80 74 66 58
90 90 86 77 68
100 100 95 85 75
110 110 101 92 84
125 125 115 105 95
160 160 150 137 140
175 175 166 153 142
200 200 190 175 160
225 225 208 190 170
250 250 240 230 220
North American (UL) Ratings IEC Ratings
40 °C (104 °F) 50 ˚C (122 ˚F) 60 ˚C (140 ˚F) 70 ˚C (158 ˚F) 40 °C (104 °F) 50 ˚C (122 ˚F) 60 ˚C (140 ˚F) 70 ˚C (158 ˚F) In [A]
150 150 150 150
In [A]
150 150 150 150
175 175 164 158 175 175 175 175
200 200 172 158 200 200 200 200
225 225 180 158 225 225 221 213
250(1)
(1) Molded case switch rated current
250(1) 222(1) 158(1) 250(1) 250(1) 238(1) 213(1)
116 Rockwell Automation Publication 140G-SG001E-EN-P - March 2017 Specifications
140G K-Frame Thermal Magnetic Circuit Breakers
The K frame thermal magnetic circuit breaker is calibrated at 40 °C (104 °F). For applications at other temperatures there is a variation in the thermal tripping as shown in Table 117.
Table 117 - 140G K-Frame Temperature/Thermal Trip Ratings Electronic Trip Circuit Breakers, Molded Case Switches, and Motor Circuit Protectors The electronic trip circuit breakers do not undergo tripping variations based on ambient te mperature. However, even though ambient temperature does not affect the tripping characteristic, for temperatures exceeding +40 °C it is advisable to reduce the maximum current to prevent terminal overheating.
The same considerations are appropriate for molded case switches and mo tor circuit protectors.
Table 118 shows the maximum current to prevent terminal overheating.
Table 118 - Maximum Operating Current above 40 °C (104 °F)—K-Frame Devices Rated Current In [A]
Ambient Temperature
40 °C 50 °C 60 °C 70 °C
Max. Thermal Trip [A] Max. Thermal Trip [A] Max. Thermal Trip [A] Max. Thermal Trip [A] 300 300 286 267 247
320 320 305 285 263
400 400 380 355 325
North American (UL) Ratings IEC Ratings
40 °C (104 °F) 50 ˚C (122 ˚F) 60 ˚C (140 ˚F) 70 ˚C (158 ˚F) 40 °C (104 °F) 50 ˚C (122 ˚F) 60 ˚C (140 ˚F) 70 ˚C (158 ˚F) In [A] 300 264 228 189 In [A] 320 320 320 320
400(1)
(1) Molded case switch rated current
352(1) 304(1) 252(1) 400(1) 400(1) 400(1) 352(1)
Rockwell Automation Publication 140G-SG001E-EN-P - March 2017 117 Specifications
140G M-Frame Thermal Magnetic Circuit Breakers
The M frame thermal magnetic circuit breaker is calibrated at 40 °C (104 °F). For applications at other temperatures there is a variation in the thermal tripping as shown in Table 119.
Table 119 - 140G M-Frame Temperature/Thermal Trip Ratings Electronic Trip Circuit Breakers, Molded Case Switches, and Motor Circuit Protectors The electronic trip circuit breakers do not undergo tripping variations ba sed on ambient temperature. However, even though ambient temperature does not affect the tripping characteristic, for temperatures exceeding +40 °C it is advisable to reduce the maximum current to prevent terminal overheating.
The same considerations are appropriate for molded case switches and mo tor circuit protectors.
Table 120 shows the maximum current to prevent terminal overheating.
Table 120 - Maximum Operating Current above 40 °C (104 °F)—M-Frame Devices Rated Current In [A]
Ambient Temperature
40 °C 50 °C 60 °C 70 °C
Max. Thermal Trip [A] Max. Thermal Trip [A] Max. Thermal Trip [A] Max. Thermal Trip [A] 600 600 552 514 476
630(1)
(1) IEC only.
630 580 540 500
800 800 740 670 610
North American (UL) Ratings IEC Ratings
40 °C (104 °F) 50 ˚C (122 ˚F) 60 ˚C (140 ˚F) 70 ˚C (158 ˚F) 40 °C (104 °F) 50 ˚C (122 ˚F) 60 ˚C (140 ˚F) 70 ˚C (158 ˚F) In [A] 600 528 456 378 In [A] 630 630 598.5 567
800(1)
(1) Molded case switch rated current
704(1) 608(1) 504(1) 800(1) 800(1) 760(1) 720(1)
118 Rockwell Automation Publication 140G-SG001E-EN-P - March 2017 Specifications
140G N/NS-Frame Electronic Trip Circuit Breakers, Molded Case Switches, and Motor Circuit Protectors The N/NS frame electronic trip circuit breakers do not undergo tripping variations based on ambient temperature. However, even though ambient temperature does not affect the tripping characteristic, for temperatures exceeding +40 °C it is advisable to reduce the maximum current to prevent terminal overheating.
The same considerations are appropriate for molded case switches and motor circuit protectors.
Table 121 shows the maximum current to prevent terminal overheating.
Table 121 - Maximum Operating Current above 40 °C (104 °F)—N/NS-Frame Devices 140G R-Frame Electronic Trip Circuit Breakers and Molded Case Switches The R frame electronic trip circuit breakers do not undergo tripping variations based on ambient temperature. However, even though ambient temperature does not affect the tripping characteristic, for temperatures exceeding +40 °C it is advisable to reduce the maximum setting for external thermal protection against overloads per the following.
The same considerations are appropriate for molded case switches, except instead of a current adjustment, the table should be used to reflect the maximum current at the specific temperature.
Table
122 shows the maximum adjustment at which the threshold I1 of the overcurrent protection (L) must be set according to the ambient temperature.
Table 122 - Maximum Operating Current above 40 °C (104 °F)—R-Frame Devices North American (UL) Ratings IEC Ratings
40 °C (104 °F) 50 ˚C (122 ˚F) 60 ˚C (140 ˚F) 70 ˚C (158 ˚F) 40 °C (104 °F) 50 ˚C (122 ˚F) 60 ˚C (140 ˚F) 70 ˚C (158 ˚F) In [A] 1200(1)
(1) Molded case switch rated current
1056(1) 815(1) 756(1) In [A] 1250(1) 1250(1) 1118(1) 980(1) North American (UL) Ratings IEC Ratings
40 °C (104 °F) 50 ˚C (122 ˚F) 60 ˚C (140 ˚F) 70 ˚C (158 ˚F) 40 °C (104 °F) 50 ˚C (122 ˚F) 60 ˚C (140 ˚F) 70 ˚C (158 ˚F) In [A]
2000 1760 1520 1260 In [A] 2000 2000 1826 1633
2500(1)
(1) Molded case switch rated current
2200(1) 1900(1) 1575(1) 2500(1) 2500(1) 2283(1) 2042(1) 3000 2640 2280 1890I I I I
Rockwell Automation Publication 140G-SG001E-EN-P - March 2017 119 Specifications
Watt Loss
140G G-Frame Circuit Breakers
140MG G-Frame Motor Circuit Protectors
140G H-Frame Circuit Breakers
140MG H-Frame Motor Circuit Protectors
Type Rated Current
In [A]
Watt Loss
3 Poles 4 Poles
Thermal Magnetic
15 4.0 5.3
16 4.5
20 5.4
25 6.0
30 5.5
32 6.3
35 6.0
40 7.8
45 9.0
50 11.1
60 11.7
63 12.9
70 11.0
80 14.4
90 17.0
100 21.0
110 24.9
125 32.1
160(1)
(1) IEC only
45.0 Molded Case
Switch
25 1.2
50 4.9
75 11.1
100 19.8
125 30.9
Rat
ed Current In [A] Watt Loss
3 4.2
7 9.9
15 3.3
30 6.9
50 9.3
70 15.9
80 15.9
100 19.8
125 30.9
Type Rated Current
In [A]
Watt Loss
3 Poles 4 Poles
Thermal Magnetic
15 3.4 4.6
16 3.9 5.2
20 4.8 6.4
25 5.4 7.2
30 6.9 9.1
32 7.8 10.4
35 8.5 11.3
40 11.1 14.8
50 12.3 16.4
60 13.3 17.4
63 14.4 19.2
70 13.3 17.8
80 17.4 23.2
90 19.7 26.2
100 24.3 32.4
110 26.5 35.3
125 34.2 45.6
160(1)
(1) IEC only
48.5 64.6
Electronic
10 0.3 0.4
25 2.4 3.2
60 4.5 6.0
100 12.6 16.8
125 19.8 26.4
Molded Case
Switch
25 0.8 1.1
50 3.2 4.2
75 7.1 9.5
100 12.7 16.9
125 19.8 26.4
Rated C
urrent In [A] Watt Loss
3 11.1
7 27.9
15 19.2
30 11.4
50 15
70 16.5
80 20.4
100 24.3
125 42
•·•: .-.
;~ · .
f , T
~ ~
120 Rockwell Automation Publication 140G-SG001E-EN-P - March 2017 Specifications
140G I-Frame Circuit Breakers
140MG I-Frame Motor Circuit Protectors
140G J-Frame Circuit Breakers
140MG J-Frame Motor Circuit Protectors
Type Rated Current
In [A]
Watt Loss
3 Poles 4 Poles
Thermal Magnetic
60 11.7 15.6
63 12.9 17.2
70 11.0 14.7
80 14.4 19.2
90 13.6 18.1
100 16.8 22.4
110 17.4 23.2
125 19.8 26.4
150 20.8 27.8
160 23.7 31.6
175 30.3 40.4
200 39.6 52.8
225 43.2 57.6
Molded Case
Switch
25 0.5 0.7
50 2.1 2.8
75 4.8 6.4
100 8.5 11.4
125 13.3 17.8
150 19.2 25.6
175 26.1 34.8
200 34.1 45.5
225 43.2 57.6
Rate
d Current In [A] Watt Loss
100 13.5
110 9.9
125 12.3
150 19.5
Type Rated Current
In [A]
Watt Loss
3 Poles 4 Poles
Thermal Magnetic
25 8.1 10.7
30 11.6 15.5
32 13.2 17.6
35 13.2 17.6
40 13.5 18.0
50 14.1 18.8
60 14.4 19.2
63 15.9 21.2
70 16.2 21.6
80 16.5 22.0
90 18.0 24.0
100 18.6 24.8
110 20.1 26.8
125 22.2 29.6
150 23.5 31.3
160 26.7 35.6
175 27.3 36.4
200 35.7 47.6
225 39.9 53.1
250 49.2 65.6
Electronic
40 1.8 2.4
60 3.8 5.1
63 4.2 5.6
100 10.5 14.0
150 23.5 31.4
225 53.0 70.6
250 65.4 87.2
Molded Case
Switch
25 0.7 0.9
50 2.6 3.5
75 5.9 7.8
100 10.5 14.0
125 16.4 21.8
150 23.5 31.4
175 32.0 42.7
200 41.9 55.8
225 53.0 70.6
250 65.4 87.2
Rated C
urrent In [A] Watt Loss
150 23.4
175 27.3
200 35.7
225 39.9
250 49.2
- -• • ~ . I . . •
n]J
~ri '~2J
.-•·· • • • . . .
~
. . -
[}
,,
.
·-
Rockwell Automation Publication 140G-SG001E-EN-P - March 2017 121 Specifications
140G K-Frame Circuit Breakers
140MG K-Frame Motor Circuit Protectors
140G M-Frame Circuit Breakers
140MG M-Frame Motor Circuit Protectors
140G N/NS-Frame Circuit Breakers
140MG N-Frame Motor Circuit Protectors
140G R-Frame Circuit Breakers
Type Rated Current
In [A]
Watt Loss
3 Poles 4 Poles
Thermal Magnetic 300 40.8 54.4
400 58.5 78.0
Molded Case
Switch
300 31.8 42.4
400 49.5 66.0
Rat
ed Current In [A] Watt Loss
300 31.8
400 49.5
Type Rated Current
In [A]
Watt Loss
3 Poles 4 Poles
Thermal Magnetic
600 90.0 120.0
630(1)
(1) IEC only
91.8 122.4
800 93.0 124.0
Molded Case
Switch
600 86.4 115.2
630(1) 90.0 120.0
800 96.0 128.0
Rated Current In [A] Watt Loss
600 86.4
800 96.0
Type Rated Current
In [A]
Watt Loss
3 Poles 4 Poles
Electronic 1200 252.0 336.0
Molded Case
Switch 1200 252.0 336.0
R
ated Current In [A] Watt Loss
1200 252.0
Type Rated Current
In [A]
Watt Loss
3 Poles 4 Poles
Electronic
2000 138 184
2500 219 292
3000 351 468
Molded Case
Switch
2000 138 184
2500 219 292
3000 351 468
If
~
.. . • • I •
. •
Ji-
~
.
. L !. ~ . , .
•••• . .
'' . '
.- - ..,.
Ir:.,.,_ ...
• .. I • .. ~
IA~
~i E
. . . . . .
122 Rockwell Automation Publication 140G-SG001E-EN-P - March 2017 Specifications
Accessory Specifications
Auxiliary Contacts
Application Ratings Electrical Operating Ratings (Nominal Values) Order
Code Catalog Number
140G Family
Description
Electrical Specifications (1)
(1) Contacts are wired with 600 V (UL/CSA) insulated wire. No voltage derating of circuit breaker required.
Frame Rated
Volta
ge
Ue [V]
Wire Size Wire
Length
IEC Rating
UL RatingGH I J K MN , N SR A W G m m2 Rated Operational Current (AC)
Rated Operational
Current (DC)
AA
140G-G-EA1R1A X X X X O O O O (1) Aux - Form C
(1) AL - Form C 250V 20 0.5 1 m (39 in.) 6 A @ 250 V AC (2) (2) See Table 123 on page 123 for expanded description of the voltage ratings.
0.5 A @ 110V DC
0.3 A @ 250V DC
(min. 0.03 A
DC)
5 A @ 125V AC
3 A @ 250V AC
140G-K-EA1R1A O O O O X X O O (1) Aux - Form C
(1) AL - Form C 250V 20 0.5 1 m (39 in.) 6 A @ 250V AC (2) 0.5 A @ 110V DC
0.3 A @ 250V DC
(min. 0.03 A DC)
5 A @ 125V AC
6 A @ 250V AC
AB
140G-H-EA1R1ZB O X O X O O O O (1) Aux - Form C
(1) AL - Form C 400V 17 1 1 m (39 in.) 12 A @ 250V AC
3 A @ 400V AC
0.5 A @ 125V DC
0.3 A @ 250V DC
10 A @ 125V AC
10 A @ 250V AC
140G-K-EA1R1B O O O O X X O O (1) Aux - Form C
(1) AL - Form C 400V 17 1 1 m (39 in.) 12 A @ 250V AC
3 A @ 400V AC
0.5 A @ 125V DC
0.3 A @ 250V DC
12 A @ 125V AC
12 A @ 250V AC
140G-N-EA1R1B O O O O O O X
(N only) O (1) Aux - Form C
(1) AL - Form
C 400V 17 1 1 m (39 in.) 12 A @ 250V AC
3 A @ 400V AC
0.5 A @ 125V DC
0.3 A @ 250V DC
12 A @ 125V AC
12 A @ 250V AC
AJ
140G-G-EA1R1J X X X X O O O O ((1) Aux - Form C
(1) AL - Form C 24V 20 0.5 1 m (39 in.) — Max. – 0.1 A @ 24V DC Min. – 0.01 A
@ 5V DC min. Ye s
140G-N-EA1R1J O O O O O O X
(N only) O (1) Aux - Form C
(1) AL - Form
C 24V 20 0.5 1 m (39 in.) — Max. – 0.1 A @ 24V DC
Min. – 0.01
A @ 5V DC min. Ye s
BA 140G-G-EA2R1A X X X X O O O O (2) Aux - Form C
(1) AL - Form C 250V 20 0.5 1 m (39 in.) 6 A @ 250V AC (2) 0.5 A @ 110V DC
0.3 A @ 250V DC
(min. 0.03 A DC)
5 A @ 125V AC
3 A @ 250V AC
CA
140G-H-EA3R1A O X X X O O O O (3) Aux - Form C
(1) AL - Form C 250V 20 0.5 1 m (39 in.) 6 A @ 250V AC (2) 0.5 A @ 110V DC
0.3 A @ 250V DC
(min. 0.03 A DC)
5 A @ 125V AC
3 A @ 250V AC
140G-K-EA3R1A O O O O X X O O (3) Aux - Form C
(1) AL - Form C 250V 20 0.5 1 m (39 in.) 6 A @ 250V AC (2) 0.5 A @ 110V DC
0.3 A @ 250V DC
(min. 0.03 A DC)
5 A @ 125V AC
6 A @ 250V AC
CJ
140G-H-EA3R1J O X X X O O O O (3) Aux - Form C
(1) AL - Form C 24V 20 0.5 1 m (39 in.) — Max. – 0.1 A @ 24V DC Min. – 0.01
A @ 5V DC min. Ye s
140G-K-EA3R1J O O O O X X O O (3) Aux - Form C
(1) AL - Form C 24V 20 0.5 1 m (39 in.) — Max. – 0.1 A @ 24V DC Min. – 0.01
A @ 5V DC min. Ye s
DA 140G-H-EA1TA O X O X O O O O (1) TU AL - Form C
(Thermal
) 250V 20 0.5 1 m (39 in.) 6 A @ 250V AC (2) 0.5 A @ 110V DC
0.3 A @ 250V DC
(min. 0.03 A DC)
5 A @ 125V AC
3 A @ 250V AC
DJ 140G-H-EA1TJ O X O X O O O O (1) TU AL - Form C
(Thermal
) 24V 20 0.5 1 m (39 in.) — Max. – 0.1 A @ 24V DC
Min. – 0.01
A @ 5V DC min. Ye s
FB
140G-H-EA2B O X O X O O O O (2) Aux - Form C 400V 17 1 1 m (39 in.) 12 A @ 250V AC 3 A @ 400V AC
0.5 A @ 125V DC
0.3 A @ 250V DC
12 A @ 125V AC
12 A @ 250V AC
140G-K-EA2B O O O O X X O O (2) Aux - Form C 400V 17 1 1 m (39 in.) 12 A @ 250V AC 3 A @ 400V AC
0.5 A @ 125V DC
0.3 A @ 250V DC
10 A @ 125V AC
10 A @ 250V AC
KA 140G-G-EA1A X X X X O O O O (1) Aux - Form C 250V 20 0.5 1 m (39 in.) 6 A @ 250V AC (2) 0.5 A @ 110V DC
0.3 A @ 250V DC
(min. 0.03 A DC)
5 A @ 125V AC
3 A @ 250V AC
TA 140G-G-EA1AU X X X X O O O O
(1) Aux - Form C
or
(1) AL - Form C
250V 20 0.5 1 m (39 in.) 6 A
@ 250V AC (2) 0.5 A @ 110V DC
0.3 A @ 250V DC
(min. 0.03 A DC)
—
— 140G-G-EA1J X X X X O O O O (1) Aux - Form C
or (1) AL
- Form C 24V 20 0.5 1 m (39 in.) — Max. – 0.1 A @ 24V DC Min. – 0.01 A @ 5V DC min. Ye s
Rockwell Automation Publication 140G-SG001E-EN-P - March 2017 123 Specifications
Table 123 - 250 V AC/DC Expanded Description
Application Ratings Electrical Operating Ratings (Nominal Values) Order
Code Catalog Number
140G Family Electrical Specifications (1)
(1) Contacts are wired with 600 V (UL/CSA) insulated wire. No voltage derating of circuit breaker required.
Frame
Description
Rated
Voltage
Ue
[V]
Wire Size
Wire Length
IEC Rating
UL RatingG H I J K M N, NS R AWG mm2 Rated Operational
Current (AC)
Rated Operational
Current (DC)
— 140G-H-EA2R2TA O X O X O O O O
(2) Aux - Form C
(2) AL - Fo
rm C
(Thermal)
250V 20 0.5 1 m (39 in.) 6 A @ 250V AC (2)
(2) See Table 123 on page 123 for expanded description of the voltage ratings
0.5 A @ 110V DC
0.3 A @ 250V DC
(min. 0.03
A DC)
5 A @ 125V AC
3 A @ 250V AC
— 140G-H-EA3R2A O X O X O O O O (3) Aux - Form C
(2) AL - Fo
rm C 250V 20 0.5 1 m (39 in.) 6 A @ 250V AC (2) 0.5 A @ 110V DC
0.3 A @ 250V DC
(min. 0.03 A DC)
5 A @ 125V AC
3 A @ 250V AC
— 140G-N-EA1TA O O O O O O X O (1) AL - Form C
(Thermal
) 250V 20 0.5 1 m (39 in.) 6 A @ 250V AC (2) 0.5 A @ 110V DC
0.3 A @ 250V DC
(min. 0.03 A DC)
—
— 140G-N-EA2B O O O O O O X O (2) Aux - Form C 400V 17 1 1 m (39 in.) 12 A @ 250V AC 3 A @ 400V AC
0.5 A @ 125V DC
0.3 A @ 250V DC
12 A @ 125V AC
12 A @ 250V A
C
— 140G-N-EA2J O O O O O O X O (2) Aux - Form C 24V 20 0.5 1 m (39 in.) — Max. – 0.1 A @ 24V DC Min. – 0.01 A
@ 5V DC min. Yes
— 140G-R-EA1TA O O O O O O O X (1) AL - Form C
(Thermal
) 250V (3)
(3) Contact your local Rockwell Automation sales office or Allen-Bradley distributor. (3) (3) 6 A @ 250V AC (2) 0.5 A @ 110V DC
0.3 A @ 250V DC
(min. 0.03 A DC)
—
— 140G-R-EA4A O O O O O O O X (4) Aux - Form C 400V (3) (3) (3) 12 A @ 250V AC 3 A @ 400V AC
0.5 A @ 125V DC
0.3 A @ 250V DC
15 A
@ 125V AC
15 A @ 250V A
C
— 140G-R-EA4J O O O O O O O X (4) Aux - Form C 24V (3) (3) (3) — Max. – 0.1 A @ 24V DC Min. – 0.01 A
@ 5V DC min. Yes
— 140G-G-EAB1B
X X X X O O O O Quantity 2
Each (1) N
.C.
Early Break
400 V 17 1
1 m (39 in.) 12 A @ 250V AC
3 A @ 400V AC
0.5 A @ 125V DC
0.3 A @ 250V DC
12 A @ 125V AC
12 A @ 250V A
C(4)
(4) For use with 140G-G-RMB, -RMY ,-RMX 140G-H-RMB, -RMY , RMX handle mechanisms. — 1 m (39 in.)
— 140G-G-EAM1B
X X X X O O O O Quantity 2
Each (1) N
.O.
Early Make
400 V 17 1
1 m (39 in.) 12 A @ 250V AC
3 A @ 400V AC
0.5 A @ 125V DC
0.3 A @ 250V DC
12 A @ 125V AC
12 A @ 250V A
C(4) — 1 m (39 in.)
— 140G-K-EAM1A —
X O O O Quantity 2
Each (1) N
.O.
Early Make
250V 20 0.5
1 m (39 in.)
6 A @ 250V AC (2) 0.5 A @ 110V DC
0.3 A @ 250V DC
(min. 0.03 A DC)
—
(5)
(5) For use with 140G-K-RMB, -RMY , -RMX handle mechanisms. 1 m (39 in.)
140G-M-EAM1A —
O X O O Quantity 2
Each (1) N
.O.
Early Make
250V 20 0.5
1 m (39 in.)
6 A @ 250V AC (2) 0.5 A @ 110V DC
0.3 A @ 250V DC
(min. 0.03 A DC)
—
(5) 1 m (39 in.)
250 V AC/DC Expanded Description
Voltage Class of use AC DC
110V DC DC-12 — 0.5 A
DC-14 — 0.05 A
125V AC/DC AC-12, AC-13, AC-14 6 A —
250V AC/DC
AC-15 5 A —
AC-12 and DC-12 6 A 0.3 A
AC-13 6 A —
AC-14, DC-14 5 A 0.03 A
AC-15 4 A —
124 Rockwell Automation Publication 140G-SG001E-EN-P - March 2017 Specifications
Shunt Trip Devices
All shunt trip devices are wired with 600V (UL/CSA) insulated wire. No voltage derating is required.
Application Ratings Electrical Operating Ratings (Nominal Values) 140G Frames G, H, I, J
Order
Code Catalog Number Rated Voltage Ue
[V] Wire Length (Size)
Shunt Open
Release
Operation Voltage [V] Inrush Power Consumption Opening Time [ms]Min. Max. AC
[VA] DC [W]
— 140G-G-SNR 12V DC 1 m ( 0.5 mm2 /20 AWG) 8.4 13.2 — 50 ≤ 15
SJ 140G-G-SNJ 24…30V AC/DC 1 m ( 0.5 mm2 /20 AWG) 16.8 33 50 50 SK 140G-G-SNKY 48…60V AC/DC 1 m ( 0.5 mm2 /20 AWG) 33.6 66 60 60 SD 140G-G-SND 110…127V AC
110…125V DC 1 m ( 0.5 mm2 /20 AWG) 77 139 AC
137 DC 50 50
SA 140G-G-SNA 220…240V AC
220…250V DC 1 m ( 0.5 mm2 /20 AWG) 154 278 AC
274 DC 50 50
SB 140G-G-SNB 380…440V AC 1 m (1 mm2/17 AWG) 266 484 55 — SC 140G-G-SNC 480…525V AC 1 m (1 mm2/17 AWG) 336 577 55 — 140G Frames K, M
— 140G-K-SNR 12V DC 1 m ( 0.5 mm2 /20 AWG)
Shunt Open
Release
8.4 13.2 — 50
≤ 15
SJ 140G-K-SNJ 24…30V AC/DC 1 m ( 0.5 mm2 /20 AWG) 16.8 33 50 50 SK 140G-K-SNKY 48…60V AC/DC 1 m ( 0.5 mm2 /20 AWG) 33.6 66 60 60 SD 140G-K-SND 110…127V AC
110…125V DC 1 m ( 0.5 mm2 /20 AWG) 77 139 AC
137 DC 50 50
SA 140G-K-SNA 220…240V AC
220…250V DC 1 m ( 0.5 mm2 /20 AWG) 154 278 AC
274 DC 50 50
SB 140G-K-SNB 380…440V AC 1 m (1 mm2/17 AWG) 266 484 55 — SC 140G-K-SNC 480…525V AC 1 m (1 mm2/17 AWG) 336 577 55 — Application Ratings Electrical Operating Ratings (Nominal Values) 140G Frames N, NS
Order Code Catalog Number Rated Voltage Ue [V] Wire Length (Size) Shunt Open
Release
Operation Voltage [V] Inrush Power Consumption Opening Time [ms]Min. Max. AC [VA] DC [W] SJ 140G-N-SNJ 24V AC/DC 1 m ( 0.5 mm2 /20 AWG) 16.8 26.4 — 300 ≤ 20
SK 140G-N-SNKY 48V AC/DC 1 m ( 0.5 mm2 /20 AWG) 33.6 52.8 300 300 SD 140G-N-SND 110…120V AC/DC 1 m ( 0.5 mm2 /20 AWG) 77 132 300 300 SA 140G-N-SNA 220…240V AC/DC 1 m ( 0.5 mm2 /20 AWG) 154 264 300 300 SB 140G-N-SNB 380…400V AC 1 m (1 mm2/17 AWG) 266 440 300 — RJ 140G-NS-SNCJ 24V AC/DC 1 m ( 0.5 mm2 /20 AWG)
Shunt Close
Release
20.4 26.4 300 300
≤ 80
RK 140G-NS-SNCKY 48V AC/DC 1 m ( 0.5 mm2 /20 AWG) 40.8 52.8 300 300 RD 140G-NS-SNCD 110…120V AC/DC 1 m ( 0.5 mm2 /20 AWG) 93.5 126.5 300 300 RA 140G-NS-SNCA 220…240V AC/DC 1 m ( 0.5 mm2 /20 AWG) 187 196.5 300 300 RB 140G-NS-SNCB 380…400V AC 1 m (1 mm2/17 AWG) 323 440 300 — 140G Frame R
SJ 140G-R-SNJ 24V AC/DC 1 m ( 0.5 mm2 /20 AWG)
Shunt Open
Release
16.8 26.4 — 200
≤ 60
SK 140G-R-SNKY 48V AC/DC 1 m ( 0.5 mm2 /20 AWG) 33.6 52.8 200 200 SD 140G-R-SND 110…120V AC/DC 1 m ( 0.5 mm2 /20 AWG) 77 132 200 200 SA 140G-R-SNA 220…240V AC/DC 1 m ( 0.5 mm2 /20 AWG) 154 264 200 200 SB 140G-R-SNB 380…400V AC/DC 1 m (1 mm2/17 AWG) 266 440 200 — RJ 140G-R-SNCJ 24V AC/DC 1 m ( 0.5 mm2 /20 AWG)
Shunt Close
Release
20.4 26.4 — 200
≤ 80
RK 140G-R-SNCKY 48V AC/DC 1 m ( 0.5 mm2 /20 AWG) 40.8 52.8 200 200 RD 140G-R-SNCD 110…120V AC/DC 1 m ( 0.5 mm2 /20 AWG) 93.5 126.5 200 200 RA 140G-R-SNCA 220…240V AC/DC 1 m ( 0.5 mm2 /20 AWG) 187 196.5 200 200 RB 140G-R-SNCB 380…400V AC/DC 1 m (1 mm2/17 AWG) 323 440 200 — Rockwell Automation Publication 140G-SG001E-EN-P - March 2017 125 Specifications
Undervoltage Release Devices
All undervoltage release devices are wired with 600V (UL/CSA) insulated wire. No voltage derating is required.
Application Ratings Electrical Operating Ratings (Nominal Values) 140G Frames G, H, I, J
Order
Code Catalog Number Rated Voltage Ue [V] Wire Length (Size) Electrical Specifications
Dropout Voltage [V] Pickup Voltage
Max. [V]
UVR P ower Absorbed During
Normal O
peration Opening Time
[ms]Min. Max. AC [VA] DC [W]
UJ 140G-G-UVJ 24…30V AC/DC 1 m ( 0.5 mm2 /20 AWG) 8.4 21 25.5 1.5 1.5 ≤ 15
UR 140G-G-UVR 48V AC/DC 1 m ( 0.5 mm2 /20 AWG) 16.8 33.6 40.8 1 1 — 140G-G-UVKY 60V AC/DC 1 m ( 0.5 mm2 /20 AWG) 21 42 51 1 1 UD 140G-G-UVD 110…127V AC
110…125V DC 1 m ( 0.5 mm2 /20 AWG) 38.5 88.9 AC
87.5 DC
108 AC
106 DC 2 2
UA 140G-G-UVA 220…240V AC
220…250V DC 1 m ( 0.5 mm2 /20 AWG) 77 154 AC
175 DC
208 AC
212.5 DC 2.5 2.5
UB 140G-G-UVB 380…440V AC 1 m (1 mm2/17 AWG) 133 308 374 3 — UC 140G-G-UVC 480…525V AC 1 m (1 mm2/17 AWG) 168 367.5 446 4 — 140G Frames K, M
UJ 140G-K-UVJ 24…30V AC/DC 1 m ( 0.5 mm2 /20 AWG) 8.4 21 25.5 1.5 1.5 ≤ 25
UR 140G-K-UVR 48V AC/DC 1 m ( 0.5 mm2 /20 AWG) 16.8 33.6 40.8 1 1 — 140G-K-UVKY 60V AC/DC 1 m ( 0.5 mm2 /20 AWG) 21 42 51 1 1 UD 140G-K-UVD 110…127V AC
110…125V DC 1 m ( 0.5 mm2 /20 AWG) 38.5 88.9 AC
87.5 DC
108 AC
106 DC 2 2
UA 140G-K-UVA 220…240V AC
220…250V DC 1 m ( 0.5 mm2 /20 AWG) 77 154 AC
175 DC
208 AC
212.5 DC 2.5 2.5
UB 140G-K-UVB 380…440V AC 1 m (1 mm2/17 AWG) 133 308 374 3 — UC 140G-K-UVC 480…525V AC 1 m (1 mm2/17 AWG) 168 367.5 446 4 — Application Ratings Electrical Operating Ratings (Nominal Values) 140G Frames N, NS
Order
Code Catalog Number Rated Voltage Ue [V] Wire Length (Size) Electrical Specifications
Dropout Voltage [V] Pickup Voltage
Max. [V]
UVR P ower Absorbed During
Normal O
peration Opening Time
[ms]Min. Max. AC [VA] DC [W]
UJ 140G-N-UVJ 24V AC/DC 1 m ( 0.5 mm2 /20 AWG) 8.4 21 25.5 — 5 ≤ 20
— 140G-N-UVKY 60V AC/DC 1 m ( 0.5 mm2 /20 AWG) 21 42 51 5 5 UD 140G-N-UVD 110…120V AC/DC 1 m ( 0.5 mm2 /20 AWG) 38.5 88.9 AC
87.5 DC
108 AC
106 DC 5 5
UA 140G-N-UVA 220…240V AC/DC 1 m ( 0.5 mm2 /20 AWG) 77 154 AC 175 DC
208 AC
212.5 DC 5 5
UB 140G-N-UVB 380…400V AC 1 m (1 mm2/17 AWG) 133 308 374 5 — UC 140G-N-UVC 415…440V AC 1 m (1 mm2/17 AWG) 168 367.5 446 5 — 140G Frame R
UJ 140G-R-UVJ 24V AC/DC 1 m ( 0.5 mm2 /20 AWG) 8.4 21 25.5 — 5 ≤ 30
— 140G-R-UVKY 60V AC/DC 1 m ( 0.5 mm2 /20 AWG) 21 42 51 5 5 UD 140G-R-UVD 110…120V AC/DC 1 m ( 0.5 mm2 /20 AWG) 38.5 88.9 AC
87.5 DC
108 AC
106 DC 5 5
UA 140G-R-UVA 220…240V AC/DC 1 m ( 0.5 mm2 /20 AWG) 77 154 AC 175 DC
208 AC
212.5 DC 5 5
UB 140G-R-UVB 380…400V AC 1 m (1 mm2/17 AWG) 133 308 374 5 — UC 140G-R-UVC 415…440V AC 1 m ( 0.5 mm2 /20 AWG) 168 367.5 446 5 — 126 Rockwell Automation Publication 140G-SG001E-EN-P - March 2017 Specifications
Motor Operators
All motor operators are wired with 600V (UL/CSA) insulated wire. No voltage derating is required.
Application Ratings Application Specifications, Electrical Operating Ratings (Nominal Values) Catalog Number Rated Voltage Ue
[V]
140G Frame Wire Length (Size) Operating Voltage Opening Time [s]
Closing
Time [s]
Resetting
Time
[s]
Mi
n. Control
Impulse Time
(opening
and
closing) [ms]
Inrush Power
UVR Power Absorbed
During Normal
Opera
tion
G H I J Min. [V] Max. [V] AC [VA] DC [W] AC [VA] DC [W] 140G-G-EOPJ 24 V DC X O X O 1 m ( 0.5 mm2 /20 AWG)
(1)
(1) Contact your local Rockwell Automation sales office or Allen-Bradley distributor. (1) (1) (1) (1) (1) (1) (1) — (1)
140G-H-EOPJ O X O X 20.4 26.4 0.1 0.1 (1) ≥ 150 — 500 — 350 140G-G-EOPKY 48…60 V DC X O X O 1 m ( 0.5 mm2 /20 AWG)
(1) (1) (1) (1) (1) (1) — (1) — 350
140G-H-EOPKY O X O X 40.8 66 0.1 0.1 (1) ≥ 150 — 500 — 350 140G-G-EOPD 110…125 V AC/DC X O X O 1 m ( 0.5 mm2 /20 AWG) (1) (1) (1) (1) (1) (1) (1) (1) (1) (1)
140G-H-EOPD O X O X 106.3 137 0.1 0.1 (1) ≥ 150 500 500 350 350 140G-G-EOPA 220…250 V AC/DC X O X O 1 m ( 0.5 mm2 /20 AWG) (1) (1) (1) (1) (1) (1) (1) (1) (1) (1)
140G-H-EOPA O X O X 212.6 275 0.1 0.1 (1) ≥ 150 500 500 350 350 140G-G-EOPB 380…440 V AC X O X O 1 m (1 mm2/17 AWG)
(1) (1) (1) (1) (1) (1) (1) — (1) —
140G-H-EOPB O X O X 374 484 0.1 0.1 (1) ≥ 150 500 — 350 — 140G-G-EOPC 480…525 V AC X O X O 1 m (1 mm2/17 AWG)
(1) (1) (1) (1) (1) (1) (1) — (1) —
140G-H-EOPC O X O X (1) (1) (1) (1) (1) (1) (1) (1) (1) (1) Application Ratings Application Specifications, Electrical Operating Ratings (Nominal Values) Catalog Number Rated Voltage Ue
[V]
140G Frame Wire Length (Size) Operating Voltage Opening Time [s]
Closing
Time [s]
Resetting
Time [s]
Mi
n. Control
Impulse T
ime
(opening and
closing) [ms]
Inrush Power
UVR Power Absorbed
During Norma
l
Operation
K M Min. [V] Max. [V] AC [VA] DC [W] AC [VA] DC [W]
140G-K-EOPJ 24 V DC X O 1 m ( 0.5 mm2 /20 AWG) 20.4 26.4 1.5 < 0.1 3 ≥ 100 — 300 — 150 140G-M-EOPJ O X 20.4 26.4 3 < 0.1 5 ≥ 100 — 300 — 150
140G-K-EOPKY 48…60 V DC X O 1 m ( 0.5 mm2 /20 AWG) 40.8 66 1.5 < 0.1 3 ≥ 100 — 300 — 150 140G-M-EOPKY O X 40.8 66 3 < 0.1 5 ≥ 100 — 300 — 150
140G-K-EOPD 110…125 V AC/DC X O 1 m ( 0.5 mm2 /20 AWG) 106.3 137 1.5 < 0.1 3 ≥ 100 300 300 150 150 140G-M-EOPD O X 106.3 137 3 < 0.1 5 ≥ 100 300 300 150 150 140G-K-EOPA 220…250 V AC/DC X O 1 m ( 0.5 mm2 /20 AWG) 212.6 275 1.5 < 0.1 3 ≥ 100 300 300 150 150 140G-M-EOPA O X 212.6 275 3 < 0.1 5 ≥ 100 300 300 150 150 140G-K-EOPB 380 V AC X O 1 m (1 mm2/17 AWG) 374 484 1.5 < 0.1 3 ≥ 100 300 — 150 — 140G-M-EOPB O X 374 484 3 < 0.1 5 ≥ 100 300 — 150 —
Application Ratings Application Specifications, Electrical Operating Ratings (Nominal Values) Cat. No. Spring
Charging Motor Rated Voltage Ue [V] 140G Frame Wire Length (Size) Operating Voltage Charging Time [s] Inrush Power N NS Min. [V] Max. [V] AC [VA] DC [W]
140G-NS-SCMJ 24…30 V AC/DC O X 1 m ( 0.5 mm2 /20 AWG) 20.4 33 8 - 10 — ≤ 400 140G-NS-SCMKY 48…60 V AC/DC O X 40.8 66 8 - 10 ≤ 400 ≤ 400 140G-NS-SCMD 100…130 V AC/DC O X 1 m ( 0.5 mm2 /20 AWG) 106.3 143 8 - 10 ≤ 400 ≤ 400 140G-NS-SCMA 220…250 V AC/DC O X 212.6 275 8 - 10 — ≤ 400 140G-NS-SCMB 380…415 V AC O X 1 m (1 mm2/17 AWG) 323 456 8 - 10 ≤ 400 — Application Ratings Application Specifications, Electrical Operating Ratings (Nominal Values) Cat. No. Spring
Charging Motor Rated Voltage Ue [V] 140G Frame Wire Length (Size) Operating Voltage Inrush Time [s]
Charging
Time [s]
Inrush Power
R Min. [V] Max. [V] AC [VA] DC [W]
140G-R-SCMJ 24…30 V AC/DC X 1 m ( 0.5 mm2 /20 AWG) 20.4 33 0.2 4 - 5 500 500 140G-R-SCMKY 48…60 V AC/DC X 40.8 66 0.2 4 - 5 500 500
140G-R-SCMD 100…130 V AC/DC X 1 m ( 0.5 mm2 /20 AWG) 106.3 143 0.2 4 - 5 500 500 140G-R-SCMA 220…250 V AC/DC X 212.6 275 0.2 4 - 5 500 500 Rockwell Automation Publication 140G-SG001E-EN-P - March 2017 127 Specifications
Busbar and Terminals
Busbar
140G
Frame Size
Busbar Dimensions Terminal Torque
Hex Tool
SizeWidth (A) Thickness (B) Terminal Hole
Diameter (C)
Ho le
Center (
D) Fastener [lb•in.] [N•m]Min. Max. Min. Max.
G [in.] 0.512 0.630 0.138 0.197 0.138 0.63
M6 53 6 M5[mm] 13 16 3.5 5 6.5 7.5
H [in.] 0.512 0.787 0.098 0.197 0.138 0.63
[mm] 13 20 2.5 5 6.5 7.5
I [in.] 0.669 0.984 0.197 0.315 0.335 0.374
M8 71 8 M6[mm] 17 25 5 8 8.5 9.5
J [in.] 0.669 0.984 0.197 0.315 0.335 0.3974
[mm] 17 25 5 8 8.5 9.5
K
[in.] 1.38 1.38 0.19 5 0.41 0.43
M8 248 28 M8[mm] 35 35 0.39 10 10.5 0.11
140G
Frame Size
Busb
ar Dimensions Terminal Torque
Hex Tool
SizeWidth (A) Thickness (B) Terminal Holes
(two) Diameter
(C)
Hole
Center (D)
Dista nce Between
Terminal Holes (E)) Fas tener [lb•in.] [N•m]Min. Min. Max.
M
[in.] 1.57 0.19 0.39 0.25 (each) 0.47 0.88
(2) M6 80 9 M5
[mm] 50 5 10 6.5 (each) 12 22.5
N
[in.] 1.96 0.4 0.78 0.433 0.55 0.984
(2) M10 161 18 M5
[mm] 50 10 20 11 (each) 14 25
140G-R Frame
Size
Qty.
Required
Busbar
Dimensions Ter
minal Torque
Wrench
SizeWidth
(A) Thickness (B)
Terminal
Holes (four)
Dia
meter (C)
Hole
Center
(D)
Distance Between
Terminal
Holes (E) Fastener [lb•in.] [N•m]
Front Busbar
2000 A 2 [in.] 4 0.25 0.59 0.79 1.57
Fasteners supplied by customer[mm] 102 6.4 15 20 40
2500 A, 80% 2 [in.] 4 0.25 0.59 0.79 1.57
[mm] 102 6.4 15 20 40
Rear Busbar(1)
(1) Always use two wrenches (to av oid straining the insulating parts of the breaker), and apply the tightening torque of the terminals using high-strength fasteners. Check tightness after 24 hours. 2000 A 2 [in.] 4 0.25 0.59 4.5 1.57
Fasteners supplied by customer[mm] 102 6.4 15 114 40
2500 A, 80% 2 [in.] 4 0.25 0.59 4.5 1.57
[mm] 102 6.4 15 114 40
2500 A, 100% 4 [in.] 4 0.25 0.512 3.87 1.75 M12 Stud 615 70 19 mm[mm] 102 6.4 13 98 44.45 3000 A, 80% 4 [in.] 4 0.25 0.512 3.87 1.75 M12 Stud 615 70 19 mm[mm] 102 6.4 13 98 44.45 3000 A,
100% 4 [in.] 4 0.25 0.512 3.87 1.75 M12 Stud 615 70 19 mm[mm] 102 6.4 13 98 44.45 D
A
C (dia.)
B
B
D
A
C (dia.)
E
D
A
C (dia.)E
B
E
128 Rockwell Automation Publication 140G-SG001E-EN-P - March 2017 Specifications
Cable (Ring) Terminals
140G Frame
Size
Cable (Ring) Terminal Dimensions No. of
Cables
Cable (R ing) Terminal Torque Fastener
Terminal
ToolWidth (A) Terminal Hole Diameter
(B) Fastener [lb•in.] [N•m]
G [in.] 0.630 0.25 1
M6 53 6 CH5[mm] 16 6.5
H [in.] 0.787 0.25 1[mm] 20 6.5
I [in.] 0.984 0.335 1
M8 71 8 CH6[mm] 25 8.5
J [in.] 0.984 0.335 1[mm] 25 8.5
K [in.] 1.38 0.41 1 M8 248 28 CH8[mm] 35 10.5
M [in.]
See Extender/Spreader table[mm]
N [in.]
[mm]
B
A
1 Rockwell Automation Publication 140G-SG001E-EN-P - March 2017 129 Trip and Let-through Current Curves
Using Trip Curves
One of the most common questions asked after, “How is an MCCB properly sized?” is, “How do I interpret the trip curves?” A logical starting point is to explain what the curve actually is. The curve is a representation of how the circuit breaker will react to overcurrents and short-circuit currents. The curve is determined by a specific set of test conditions, and as such, you should use the curve as a guideline; real-world deviations from the test criteria may alter the individual results as compared to the curve.
Trip Curve for a Thermal-Magnetic MCCB
The most commonly selected form of thermal protection is the bimetallic version. This works similarly to a traditional overload relay in which a bimetallic element is heated, causing a deflection, which then exerts pressure on a trip bar and causes the circuit breaker to trip.
Figure 16 - Example Bimetallic Trip Curve
Topic Page
Using Trip Curves 129
Bulletin 140G Thermal-magnetic Molded Case Circuit Breakers 131 Bulletin 140G Electronic Molded Case Circuit Breakers 157 Let-through Current Curves 171
Bulletin 140G Current-limiting Molded Case Circuit Breakers 174 Bulletin 140MG Motor Circuit Protectors 179
Bulletin 140MG Motor Protection Circuit Breakers 187
2x 5x
3 min
10 sec Time
Maximum
Time
Minimum
Time
Using the bimetallic model, we can provide a thermal protection curve as shown here
t
130 Rockwell Automation Publication 140G-SG001E-EN-P - March 2017 Trip and Let-through Current Curves
Figure 17 - Example Thermal-magnetic MCCB Trip Curve
Trip Curve for an Electronic MCCB
An alternative to using fixed-thermal protection is to use electronic overcurrent protection, which electronically replicates the function of the mechanical overcurrent device.
One of the benefits of using electronic trip units is their ability to tailor the tripping characteristics of the circuit breaker for the application.
The electronic trip unit has the ability to provide adva nced protection in the form of additional trip functionality such as adjustable:
• Long Time – Allows the long time between 1.05 and ~1.3 x the thermal rating to be delayed, similar to how an adjustable relay changes clas
ses
• Short Time – Adjustable short time between thermal and short-circuit • Instantaneous Trip – Adjustable instantaneous short-circuit trip time • Ground Fault – Adjustable time and value of ground fault tripping Figure 18 shows an example trip curve for electronic MCCBs.
Figure 18 - Example Electronic MCCB Trip Curve
Electronic trip units are available in a variety of trip settings. The mos t common combinations are LSI, LSIG and M-LIV trip settings; therefore a wide variety of options exist for customizing the protection the circuit breaker provides within the control panel.
3x 40x
1 min
0.01 sec
Time
Magnetic
Action
Thermal
Action
Combining the short-circuit and overcurrent protection
provides us with a protection curve that looks like this.
0.1 kA 1 kA
Current
10 kA 100 kA
1E2 s
0.1 s
10 s
100 s
1E3 s
1E4 sTime (sec)
L
SG
I
L - Overcurrent protection long time delay
S – Short-circuit protection short time delay
I – Short-circuit protection instantaneous trip
G – Ground fault protection
f
' :::,
~
■ II
~
Rockwell Automation Publication 140G-SG001E-EN-P - March 2017 131 Trip and Let-through Current Curves
Bulletin 140G Thermal-magnetic Molded Case Circuit
Breakers
Time-Current Curves
Figure 19 - 140G-G Time-Current Curve
• Maximum voltage: 600Y/347V AC
• Maximum current: 15…30 A
• Instantaneous (magnetic) trip tolerance: -20% / +30%
Table 124 - C
urrent Ratings
Rated Current In [A] Magnetic Trip Im [A]
15…30 500
Current in Multiples of In
Cold Trip
Hot Trip
t [s]
30 A
20 A
15 A
0.01 0.1
1 10
100
1000
10000
1 HOUR
10 MIN
1 MIN
0.1 1 10 100 1000
'
I
\
_\
_\
\ ,
\ r-..
_1 \: ~ .
_, ' "
_, \ ' J. ,- I\ IL
~ ' ~ ',
' " -~" "t: l'l.
/ ~
' I ~ '..,, " ' '
I'
I'\-~· _,
~ " I"-
++--------.
t~
• _I
l
' l_
I I 111
132 Rockwell Automation Publication 140G-SG001E-EN-P - March 2017 Trip and Let-through Current Curves
Figure 20 - 140G-G Time-Current Curve
• Maximum voltage: 600Y/347V AC
• Maximum current: 32 A
• Instantaneous (magnetic) trip tolerance: -20% / +30%
Current in Multiples of In
Cold Trip
Hot Trip
0.1 1 10 100 1000
t [s]
0.01 0.1
1 10
100
1000
10000
1 HOUR
10 MIN
1 MIN
I
\
\
\
·. ; .
' \
'
'/
\ ~
\ \.
- ·
'\
\t' 1, [\
.
/ ... ....
/
" '\..
' ' \.
' ~ ~ ~
'
" '
Rockwell Automation Publication 140G-SG001E-EN-P - March 2017 133 Trip and Let-through Current Curves
Figure 21 - 140G-G Time-Current Curve
• Maximum voltage: 600Y/347V AC
• Maximum current: 35…50 A
• Instantaneous (magnetic) trip tolerance: -20% / +30%
Table 125 - C
urrent Ratings
Rated Current In [A] Magnetic Trip Im [A]
35…50 500
Current in Multiples of In
Cold Trip
Hot Trip
0.1 1 10 100 1000
t [s]
0.01 0.1
1 10
100
1000
10000
1 HOUR
10 MIN
1 MIN
50 A
40 A
35 A
-
• '\
t' \
~ -
.. , ... • ' \. '\.
" \ '- , .. ~
~
\ "', 11
.n
-...
'
" /
' \ / ~
~ ri\
D
,-,-
-
I I
-~ u
I I I
134 Rockwell Automation Publication 140G-SG001E-EN-P - March 2017 Trip and Let-through Current Curves
Figure 22 - 140G-G Time-Current Curve
• Maximum voltage: 600Y/347V AC
• Maximum current: 60…100 A
• Instantaneous (magnetic) trip tolerance: -20% / +30%
Table 126 - C
urrent Ratings
Rated Current In [A] Magnetic Trip Im [A]
60 600
63 630
70 700
80 800
90 900
100 1000
Current in Multiples of In
Cold Trip
Hot Trip
0.1 1 10 100 1000
t [s]
0.01 0.1
1 10
100
1000
10000
1 HOUR
10 MIN
1 MIN
l
~ .
\
' l "
\ \
-- ~ ""
a ' ' .. J
I.
" a
\ '
1• "
'
'\.
) \ \
+
f
' "'-
f -
f- '"
" ' ' \.
"\
r
f
f
+
a
I
I
Rockwell Automation Publication 140G-SG001E-EN-P - March 2017 135 Trip and Let-through Current Curves
Figure 23 - 140G-G Time-Current Curve
• Maximum voltage: 600Y/347V AC
• Maximum current: 125 A
• Instantaneous (magnetic) trip tolerance: -20% / +30%
Current in Multiples of In
Cold Trip
Hot Trip
0.1 1 10 100 1000
t [s]
0.01 0.1
1 10
100
1000
10000
1 HOUR
10 MIN
1 MIN
1250 A (10 x In)
l
~ ,. .. ,
l- x \ '
"-
~ . ,,
ll .. ,,, /
' ' ...
\
'
,. I'
' \ '\,. I "\,
\
"'
'
/,..
-/ - -, "I~ -
/
' ... "I
' \.
",
- v i I
-/
I#"
-~ -
136 Rockwell Automation Publication 140G-SG001E-EN-P - March 2017 Trip and Let-through Current Curves
Figure 24 - 140G-G Time-Current Curve
• Maximum voltage: 600Y/347V AC
• Maximum current: 160 A
• Instantaneous (magnetic) trip tolerance: -20% / +30%
Current in Multiples of In
Cold Trip
Hot Trip
0.1 1 10 100
t [s]
0.01 0.1
1 10
100
1000
10000
1 HOUR
10 MIN
1 MIN
x I1
-
•
~
\
\ \
\ '\.
. -- -~ \ ' ... ,,
' "
' "
/"'-.
\ ". ' \
"'
... ,
-~
" " -, ... ... ... .....
I"-.
' ..._"- ...... , -
... " ... ,_
- ~
I
Rockwell Automation Publication 140G-SG001E-EN-P - March 2017 137 Trip and Let-through Current Curves
Figure 25 - 140G-H Time-Current Curve
• Maximum voltage: 600V AC
• Maximum current: 15…30 A
• Instantaneous (magnetic) trip tolerance: -20% / +30%
Table 127 -
Current Ratings
Rated Current In [A] Magnetic Trip Im [A]
15…30 400
Current in Multiples of In
Cold Trip
Hot Trip
0.1 11 0 100
0.01 0.1
1 10
100
1000
10000
1 HOUR
10 MIN
1 MIN
15 A
t [s]
30 A
20 A25 A
138 Rockwell Automation Publication 140G-SG001E-EN-P - March 2017 Trip and Let-through Current Curves
Figure 26 - 140G-H Time-Current Curve
• Maximum voltage: 600V AC
• Maximum current: 35…50 A
• Instantaneous (magnetic) trip tolerance: -20% / +30%
Table 128 - C
urrent Ratings
Rated Current In [A] Magnetic Trip Im [A]
35 400
40 400
50 500
Current in Multiples of In
Cold Trip
Hot Trip
0.1 1 10 100
t [s]
0.01 0.1
1 10
100
1000
10000
1 HOUR
10 MIN
1 MIN
50 A
35 A
~\
\ \\
,, \~, /
\. "~---'• )c '
' /
' "
~
__ ..,
- -.... ....
" '-
' ,,
'- ' -
1_J
q - -
~
I
Rockwell Automation Publication 140G-SG001E-EN-P - March 2017 139 Trip and Let-through Current Curves
Figure 27 - 140G-H Time-Current Curve
• Maximum current: 32 A
• Instantaneous (magnetic) trip: 400 A
• Instantaneous (magnetic) trip tolerance: -20% / +30%
Hot Trip
Cold Trip
Current in Multiples of In
0.1 1 10 100
t [s]
0.01 0.1
1 10
100
1000
10000
1 HOUR
10 MIN
1 MIN
x I1
I
: •
' \
\
.. -...
' ' \ \
'
I I
\ \ I". /I I
...
' ... - ' - " . ' -~
' ' ~ "\,.,,. .... ,
i.....
- ~
-/ ... ...
lj ... '-
I
' "
' ' ....
-1--- -- -~ -
I
140 Rockwell Automation Publication 140G-SG001E-EN-P - March 2017 Trip and Let-through Current Curves
Figure 28 - 140G-H Time-Current Curve
• Maximum voltage: 600V AC
• Maximum current: 60…70 A
• Instantaneous (magnetic) trip tolerance: -20% / +30%
Table 129 - C
urrent Ratings
Rated Current In [A] Magnetic Trip Im [A]
60 600
63 630
70 700
Current in Multiples of In
Cold Trip
Hot Trip
0.1 1 10 100
t [s]
0.01 0.1
1 10
100
1000
10000
1 HOUR
10 MIN
1 MIN
-
~ -- -~
\
..
I \
\ \Q
/
V
~ - ~-- \ -=-f--'-. - ~--
... '
~
" "
f--
...... ""-
/
' "
... ~
' --..... ...
' ' ' I'.~ ",
~
-~
~ - ~ -- - --~ ' ... - ~ --
~
_l_ I I I I I I I
Rockwell Automation Publication 140G-SG001E-EN-P - March 2017 141 Trip and Let-through Current Curves
Figure 29 - 140G-H Time-Current Curve
• Maximum voltage: 600V AC
• Maximum current: 80…100 A
• Instantaneous (magnetic) trip tolerance: -20% / +30%
Current in Multiples of In
Cold Trip
Hot Trip
0.1 1 10 100
t [s]
0.01 0.1
1 10
100
1000
10000
1 HOUR
10 MIN
1 MIN
5...10 x In
142 Rockwell Automation Publication 140G-SG001E-EN-P - March 2017 Trip and Let-through Current Curves
Figure 30 - 140G-H Time-Current Curve
• Maximum voltage: 600V AC
• Maximum current: 110…125 A
• Instantaneous (magnetic) trip tolerance: -20% / +30%
Current in Multiples of In
Cold Trip
Hot Trip
0.1 1 10 100
t [s]
0.01 0.1
1 10
100
1000
10000
1 HOUR
10 MIN
1 MIN
5...10 x In
I
\
\
~\
I
' \ \ \.
\ \ '\ /
' " '
' ' '\.
' ' .x ~~
\..
/ \. '"'" " '' ...
- ' '\e---1-
'
'-
"
'-
''" '
--
-f- 1'
i"
I--- f-
- - I I
I
Rockwell Automation Publication 140G-SG001E-EN-P - March 2017 143 Trip and Let-through Current Curves
Figure 31 - 140G-H Time-Current Curve
• Maximum voltage: 600V AC
• Maximum current: 160 A
• Instantaneous (magnetic) trip tolerance: -20% / +30%
Current in Multiples of In
Cold Trip
Hot Trip
0.1 1 10 100
t [s]
0.01 0.1
1 10
100
1000
10000
1 HOUR
10 MIN
1 MIN
x I1
I . .
I
\
\
\-
. '
' ' --
\ "
- --f-
"
V
. ' . ' - -' '- - '
\
'- '
- -
"'"
.......
' --/ - -, .... _
/
' / ....... ...
........ ....
~
.... -- --....
-- - -
'
- --~
144 Rockwell Automation Publication 140G-SG001E-EN-P - March 2017 Trip and Let-through Current Curves
Figure 32 - 140G-I Time-Current Curve
• Maximum voltage: 600Y/347V AC
• Maximum current: 60…100 A
• Instantaneous (magnetic) trip tolerance: -20% / +30%
Current in Multiples of In
Cold Trip
Hot Trip
0.1 1 10 100
t [s]
0.01 0.1
1 10
100
1000
10000
1 HOUR
10 MIN
1 MIN
Rockwell Automation Publication 140G-SG001E-EN-P - March 2017 145 Trip and Let-through Current Curves
Figure 33 - 140G-I Time-Current Curve
• Maximum voltage: 600Y/347V AC
• Maximum current: 110…150 A
• Instantaneous (magnetic) trip tolerance: -20% / +30%
Current in Multiples of In
Cold Trip
Hot Trip
0.1 1 10 100
t [s]
0.01 0.1
10 100
1000
10000
1 HOUR
10 MIN
1 MIN
I
" '
'
"',
'\. ... '
-~
' '
'-'
'i.. '~ \
'
r'\. ...
"
/ ..... '-/
, ... '
V
' .\ '
' '$ \ )' \ \
"' ' '
\
\
\
-
I
I
\
146 Rockwell Automation Publication 140G-SG001E-EN-P - March 2017 Trip and Let-through Current Curves
Figure 34 - 140G-I Time-Current Curve
• Maximum voltage: 600Y/347V AC, 480V AC
• Maximum current: 160…225 A
• Instantaneous (magnetic) trip tolerance: -20% / +30%
Current in Multiples of In
Cold Trip
Hot Trip
0.1 1 10 100
t [s]
0.01 0.1
10 100
1000
10000
1 HOUR
10 MIN
1 MIN
~
+
'\"
"\.
1'1'.
1'.
' ' ' ' '
.... "1" '\ /
'r--._ "\. +
-i---1--
"
'\
I'-. I'\..
\ +
' . . -• t=...-'-\.-
A
1'..sp \ /
I/
'. ~ \
+
\. -,
\
+
\
-
I
.
Rockwell Automation Publication 140G-SG001E-EN-P - March 2017 147 Trip and Let-through Current Curves
Figure 35 - 140G-J Time-Current Curve
• Maximum voltage: 600V AC
• Maximum current: 25…50 A
• Instantaneous (magnetic) trip tolerance: -20% / +30%
Table 130 -
Current Ratings
Rated Current In [A] Magnetic Trip Im [A]
25…40 400
50 500
Current in Multiples of In
Cold Trip
Hot Trip
0.1 1 10 100
t [s]
0.01 0.1
1 10
100
1000
10000
1 HOUR
10 MIN
1 MIN
50 A
25 A
148 Rockwell Automation Publication 140G-SG001E-EN-P - March 2017 Trip and Let-through Current Curves
Figure 36 - 140G-J Time-Current Curve
• Maximum voltage: 600V AC
• Maximum current: 60…70 A
• Instantaneous (magnetic) trip tolerance: -20% / +30%
Table 131 - C
urrent Ratings
Rated Current In [A] Magnetic Trip Im [A]
60 600
63 630
70 700
Current in Multiples of In
Cold Trip
Hot Trip
0.1 1 10 100
t [s]
0.01 0.1
1 10
100
1000
10000
1 HOUR
10 MIN
1 MIN
- -
-~
-~ -r-,----+L---+---1-----I~J-'--J~= -
I--- .__ _L__ - '--
- - - --1--L_L
c--- -==-~--
'----
___ -----,- -==---L,.._-1-
L__ _ - C--
1--~ - -:====:-,==::::Ct:-"--~ --'--' _ -=--'- '
- - ---r-+-----j-t-+-□7 = - '--,r-1---_- -
-,-t---1------l-_L I
I I
I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 1 I I I
Rockwell Automation Publication 140G-SG001E-EN-P - March 2017 149 Trip and Let-through Current Curves
Figure 37 - 140G-J Time-Current Curve
• Maximum voltage: 600V AC
• Maximum current: 80…100 A
• Instantaneous (magnetic) trip tolerance: -20% / +30%
1 HOUR
10 MIN
1 10
1000
10000
t [s]
Current in Multiples of In
Cold Trip
Hot Trip
0.1 1 10 100
0.01 0.1
100
1 MIN
5...10 x In
- l -
\
-
l \ \
\ \" \ \
\\ \ /
' ~-'
" . ' '
'\ "
'I,.
/ -, \. '\
/ '\ ""
r\
' ' ' - --
'
....
' ....
' " ~\ ""
'
~ ~
I I
I
150 Rockwell Automation Publication 140G-SG001E-EN-P - March 2017 Trip and Let-through Current Curves
Figure 38 - 140G-J Time-Current Curve
• Maximum voltage: 600V AC
• Maximum current: 110…150 A
• Instantaneous (magnetic) trip tolerance: -20% / +30%
1 HOUR
10 MIN
10 1000
1000
t [s
Current in Multiples of In
Cold Trip
Hot Trip
0.1 1 10 100
0.01 0.1
100
1 MIN
5...10 x In
1 l
l
\ t . . '
1. 1.
\ \
\ \ \.
\ \ \ /
\c !!ii:
\ ~ r ',
' \ " " ./ \. \ - r\.
/
' "
~1\.
' '
' ' ' " '\ ",
' ~
~ +---I I
- l _L I I I _ _L
Rockwell Automation Publication 140G-SG001E-EN-P - March 2017 151 Trip and Let-through Current Curves
Figure 39 - 140G-J Time-Current Curve
• Maximum voltage: 600V AC
• Maximum current: 160…225 A
• Instantaneous (magnetic) trip tolerance: -20% / +30%
1 HOUR
10 MIN
10 1000
1000
t [s
Current in Multiples of In
Cold Trip
Hot Trip
0.1 1 10 100
0.01 0.1
100
1 MIN
5...10 x In
1 I i
\
\ \
\ ~ \ 1\.
\ \ \.
\ \\. \ ~ V
'\
~ .t-' ' ''
' ' " ,
"
II,.
A\..
'\
- ,II,.
/ ,,
II,. "'-
1'.
' " "
' " ' "\
II,.
- ~ +---I I
-~ - -
152 Rockwell Automation Publication 140G-SG001E-EN-P - March 2017 Trip and Let-through Current Curves
Figure 40 - 140G-J Time-Current Curve
• Maximum voltage: 600V AC
• Maximum current: 250 A
• Instantaneous (magnetic) trip tolerance: -20% / +30%
1 HOUR
10 MIN
1 10
1000
1000
t [s]
Current in Multiples of In
Cold Trip
Hot Trip
0.1 1 10 100
0.01 0.1
100
1 MIN
5...10 x In
~~~
Rockwell Automation Publication 140G-SG001E-EN-P - March 2017 153 Trip and Let-through Current Curves
Figure 41 - 140G-K Time-Current Curve
• Maximum voltage: 600V AC
• Maximum current: 300, 400 A
• Adjustable thermal/ adjustable magnetic release
• Instantaneous (magnetic) trip tolerance: -20% / +30%
1 HOUR
10 MIN
1 10
1000
1000
t [s]
Current in Multiples of In
Cold Trip
Hot Trip
0.1 1 10 100
0.01 0.1
100
1 MIN
I3 = 5...10 x In
I
\
\
\
\
\ \-=~
\ '
~ _ \:,
\
- \:
\ ' 'Y/ \
'\. - f--
' - ' " - f--
\
' \ \. I'\.
y
\: r\
\
' ' ' '
" '\: \
\
'
"
' ',
I ~
~-~
·1
154 Rockwell Automation Publication 140G-SG001E-EN-P - March 2017 Trip and Let-through Current Curves
Figure 42 - 140G-M Time-Current Curve
• Maximum voltage: 600V AC
• Maximum current: 600 A
• Instantaneous (magnetic) trip tolerance: -20% / +30%
1 HOUR
10 MIN
1 10
1000
1000
t [s]
Current in Multiples of In
Cold Trip
Hot Trip
0.1 1 10 100
0.01 0.1
100
1 MIN
I3 = 5...10 x In
-
\
\
\ \
...
' ...
' '-
l \.
" \ \ [\.. V
\
.... ,><:
tlll.
' ' ' ... ' ..
' ',_ '
/
·~ ',-~
"- , ...
-
'
.... ~
~,
- - -
--► .. I I--~-
-
- -- -- f-- - --
Rockwell Automation Publication 140G-SG001E-EN-P - March 2017 155 Trip and Let-through Current Curves
Figure 43 - 140G-M Time-Current Curve
• Maximum voltage: 600V AC
• Maximum current: 630 A
• Instantaneous (magnetic) trip tolerance: -20% / +30%
0.01 0.1
1 10
100
1000
10000
0.1 1 10 100
t [s]
Hot Trip
Cold Trip
I3 = 5...10 x In
Current in Multiples of In
\
\
\ \
• , ... • ...
' '
I I
I \.
"
A I
\ ~ /
" • , ..
~
. -... .... ..
' - ' ...
~
/ I'\. "r,,...
I/ "\ ', .. I ...
- -
' ' ''.,,.
~
""""
156 Rockwell Automation Publication 140G-SG001E-EN-P - March 2017 Trip and Let-through Current Curves
Figure 44 - 140G-M Time-Current Curve
• Maximum voltage: 600V AC
• Maximum current: 800 A
• Adjustable thermal/ adjustable magnetic release
• Instantaneous (magnetic) trip tolerance: -20% / +30%
0.01 0.1
1 10
100
1000
10000
0.1 1 10 100
t [s]
Hot Trip
Cold Trip
I3 = 5...10 x In
Current in Multiples of In
1 HOUR
10 MIN
1 MIN
, ,
\
\
\
-~
' ..
' ..
' '-
\
\
_ ,
\ '\. /
\ '
'~ • \ "-- - ...
-.. " ,.,.
\• '\ ' ,_
/ \. I',...
/ '
,,
" -
' "
'\.
" " '
- -~
--~
~
1--~
- ~
Rockwell Automation Publication 140G-SG001E-EN-P - March 2017 157 Trip and Let-through Current Curves
Bulletin 140G Electronic Molded Case Circuit
Breakers
Figure 45 - 140G-H Time-Current Curve
• Maximum voltage: 600V AC, 50/60 Hz
• Available sensors (In): 40 A, 60 A, 100 A, 150 A, 250 A • Electronic trip unit. Long delay response, short delay with I2t response, and instantaneous curve Table 132 - Tolerance Values
Notes:
1. Curve accuracy applies from -20° C to +55° C am bient. For possible continuous ampere derating for ambient above 40° C, consult Rockwell Automation.
2. The
right portion of the curve is determined by the interrupting rating of the circuit breaker.
3. Total clearing times shown include the response times of the trip unit, the br eaker opening, and the interruption of the current.
4. For high fault current levels an additional fixed instantaneous hardware override is provided at10.5 x In.
Protection Trip Threshold Trip Time
L 1.05 ≤ x I1 ≤ 1.25 ± 20%
S ± 10% ± 20%
I ± 15% ≤ 60 ms
Others ± 20%
0.001
0.01 0.1
1 10
100
1000
10000
0.1 1 10 100
t [s]
0,4 1
1 10
S
I2t ON
I2t OFF
L
I
1 10
0.001
0.01 0.1
1 11 0
t [s]
I [kA]
Current in Multiples of In
I2=In X Ʃ
1 2
5.5t2 (s)
0 S
0.05 0.2
0.40.1 I=10In
1.5 L
I I
I1=In X (0.4+Ʃ)
0.02 0.08
0.16 t1 (s)
0 L I
3 36
6012
0.04 I=3I1
0.32 I3=In X Ʃ1
1.5 2
5.5 0
- -
~
-
• .. •
... """ I .....
"i-... ,, ' ,.
- -- -..... """ , .....
, J - - -
-
.....
'
-~ - ~
-
.... -"" .... ...
"'
.... , i-.,
-
~- ~
-.....:-
~- - ---
.........
-
,_
~- I- --
,-
I
11 12 13 I
158 Rockwell Automation Publication 140G-SG001E-EN-P - March 2017 Trip and Let-through Current Curves
Figure 46 - 140G-H Ground Fault Protection Curve
• Maximum voltage: 600V AC, 50/60 Hz
• Available sensors (In): 25 A, 60 A, 100 A, 125 A
Table 133 - Tolerance Values
Protection Trip Threshold Trip Time
G ± 10% ± 20%
Current in Multiples of In
0.001
0.01 0.1
1 10
100
1000
10000
0.100 1.000 10.000 100.000
t [s]
10,2
G
Supressed for I>2In
Ground Fault Protection Curve
~ ■
~ =+=F~A-i±±tt===i::=• ff+::j::::j::1:1R====±==±t::t+:+:m G ~nx ■
('! lQ t8 t4(s) ooo
o 0.1 .. ~0.4
0.2~ !""l0.8
t
14 11 12
Rockwell Automation Publication 140G-SG001E-EN-P - March 2017 159 Trip and Let-through Current Curves
Table 134 - Ground Fault Current Ratings
I4 [In]
In [A] 0.2 0.25 0.45 0.55 0.75 0.8 1
25 5 6.25 11.3 13.8 18.8 20 25
60 12 15 27 33 45 48 60
100 20 25 45 55 75 80 100
125 25 31.3 56.3 68.8 93.8 100 125
160(1)
(1) IEC only.
32 40 75 88 120 128 160
160 Rockwell Automation Publication 140G-SG001E-EN-P - March 2017 Trip and Let-through Current Curves
Figure 47 - 140G-J Time-Current Curve
• Maximum voltage: 600V AC, 50/60 Hz
• Available sensors (In): 40 A; 60 A; 100 A; 150 A; 250 A • Electronic trip unit. Long delay response, short delay with I2t response, and instantaneous curve Table 135 - Tolerance Values
Notes:
1. Curve accuracy applies from -20° C to +55° C am bient. For possible continuous ampere derating for ambient above 40° C, consult Rockwell Automation.
2. The
right portion of the curve is determined by the interrupting rating of the circuit breaker.
3. Total clearing times shown include the response times of the trip unit, the br eaker opening, and the interruption of the current.
4. For high fault current levels an additional fixed instantaneous hardware override is provided at10.5 x In.
Protection Trip Threshold Trip Time
L 1.05 ≤ x I1 ≤ 1.25 ± 20%
S ± 10% ± 20%
I ± 15% ≤ 60 ms
Others ± 20%
0.001
0.01 0.1
1 10
100
1000
10000
0.1 1 10 100
t [s]
0,4 1
S I2t ON
I2t OFF
L
I1 10
Current in Multiples of In
1 HOUR
10 MIN
1 MIN
0.001
0.01 0.1
1 11 0
t [s]
I [kA]
II2=In X Ʃ1
2 5.5t2 (s)
0 S
0.05 0.2
0.40.1 I=10In
1.5 L
I I
I1=In X (0.4+Ʃ)
0.02 0.08
0.16 t1 (s)
0 L
3 36
6012
0.04 I=3I1
0.32 I3=In X Ʃ
1 1.5
2 5.5
0 .. •
-" -..... '~ ',:" "'"
-
- f= - - " ...... .. ,, - -
'
I -
""" '
', " • '
I Ill I ■
~=
===-= -
....
-- -.. ~
~ ~
""'~ ""
--
-
,,
~
I 7 I
11 12 13 I
Rockwell Automation Publication 140G-SG001E-EN-P - March 2017 161 Trip and Let-through Current Curves
Figure 48 - 140G-J Ground Fault Protection Curve for LSIG MCCBs • Maximum voltage: 600V AC, 50/60 Hz • Available sensors (In): 40 A, 60 A, 100 A, 150 A, 250 A Example:
– In = 100 A
– I4 = 100 x (0.2 + 0.25) = 45 A
– t4 = 0.2 s @ I > I4
Table 136 - Ground Fault Current Ratings
0.001
0.01 0.1
1 10
100
1,000
10,000
0.100 1.000 10.000 100.000
t [s ]
10,2
G
Current in Multiples of In
Supressed for I>2In
I4 [In]
In [A] 0.2 0.25 0.45 0.55 0.75 0.8 1
25 8 10 18 22 30 32 40
60 12 15 27 33 45 48 60
100 20 25 45 55 75 80 100
150 30 37.5 67.5 82.5 113 120 150
250 50 62.5 113 138 188 200 250
~
•
■
LSJG
~
Test/Prg
162 Rockwell Automation Publication 140G-SG001E-EN-P - March 2017 Trip and Let-through Current Curves
Figure 49 - 140G-K Time-Current Curve
• Maximum voltage: 600V AC, 50/60 Hz
• Available sensors (In): 300 A; 400 A
• Electronic trip unit. Long delay response , short delay with I2t response, and instantaneous curve
Table 137 - Tolerance Values Notes:
1. Curve accuracy applies from -20° C to +55° C ambient. For possible continuous ampere derating for ambient above 40° C, consult Rockwell A
utomation.
2. The right portion of the curve is determined by the interrupting rating of the cir
cuit breaker.
3. Total clearing times shown include the response times of the trip unit, the breake
r opening, and the interruption of the current.
4. For high fault current levels an additional fixed instantaneous hardware
override is provided at10.5 x In.
Table 138 - Current Ratings
0.001
0.01 0.1
1 10
100
1000
10000
0.1 1 10 100
t [s]
L
0,4 1
0,6
10 S
I2t ON
I2t OFF
121,5
I
0,4..1
0,6..10
1,5..12
Current in Multiples of In
0.001
0.01 0.1
1 11 0
t [s]
I [kA]
Protection Trip Threshold Trip Time
L 1.05 ≤ x I1 ≤ 1.25 ± 20%
S ± 10% ± 20%
I ± 15% ≤ 60 ms
Others ± 20% —
Example:
In = 300 A
I3 = 300 x (1.5+3) = 135
I3 (In )
In [A] 1.5 2.5 3 4 4.5 5 5.5 6.5 7 7.5 8 9 9.5 10.5 12
300 450 750 900 1200 1350 1500 1650 1950 2100 2250 2400 2700 2850 3150 3600 400 600 1000 1200 1600 1800 2000 2200 2600 2800 3000 3200 3600 3800 4200 4800 iii
I
• -.. "
~
I ·, ... ","" i... I
H
"
- .. -
I"'-,.. ....... "- ,""'
~ - -
~
.... .... .... I", I I I I I
...... ... I".. I"',,,. ""'~ I I I I
I I
-
~- ·-....
" ..
I I
I I
I I I
I I I
I
I
: G: S
14: • 12
•• • I
I I :
'
' ' 14 11 12 13 I
I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I
Rockwell Automation Publication 140G-SG001E-EN-P - March 2017 163 Trip and Let-through Current Curves
Figure 50 - 140G-K Ground Fault Protection Curve for LSIG MCCBs • Maximum voltage: 600V AC, 50/60 Hz • Available sensors (In): 300 A, 400 A Example:
– In = 300 A
– I4 = 300 x (0.2 + 0.25) = 135 A
– t4 = 0.2 s @ I > I4
Table 139 - Ground Fault Current Ratings
0.001
0.01 0.1
1 10
100
1,000
10,000
0.1 1 10 100
t [s ]
0,2 1
G
Current in Multiples of In
I4 =0,2..0,49 Supressed at I>4In
I4 =0,5..0,79 Supressed at I>6In
I4 =0,8..1 Supressed at I>8In
I4 [In]
In [A] 0.2 0.25 0.45 0.55 0.75 0.8 1
300 60 75 135 165 225 240 300
400 80 100 180 220 300 320 400
~
-- .....
1'.
'l'-
■
---
aj0.1s rn
lc90.2s
B:j0.4s
[c9o.as
~
.....
'"-
" ...
I I I I I I
164 Rockwell Automation Publication 140G-SG001E-EN-P - March 2017 Trip and Let-through Current Curves
Figure 51 - 140G-M Time-Current Curve
• Maximum voltage: 600V AC, 50/60 Hz
• Available sensors (In): 600 A
• Electronic trip unit. Long delay response , short delay with I2t response, and instantaneous curve
Table 140 - Tolerance Values Notes:
1. Curve accuracy applies from -20° C to +55° C ambient. For possible continuous ampere derating for ambient above 40° C, consult Rockwell A
utomation.
2. The right portion of the curve is determined by the interrupting rating of the cir
cuit breaker.
3. Total clearing times shown include the response times of the trip unit, the breake
r opening, and the interruption of the current.
4. For high fault current levels an additional fixed instantaneous hardware
override is provided at10.5 x In.
0.001
0.01 0.1
1 10
100
1000
10000
0.1 1 10 100
t [s]
L
0,4 1
0,6
10 S
I2t ON
I2t OFF
121,5
I
0,4..1
0,6..10
1,5..12
Current in Multiples of In
0.001
0.01 0.1
1 11 0
t [s]
I [kA]
Protection Trip Threshold Trip Time
L 1.05 ≤ x I1 ≤ 1.25 ± 20%
S ± 10% ± 20%
I ± 15% ≤ 60 ms
Others ± 20% —
Example:
In = 600 A
I3 = 300 x (1.5+3) = 1350 A
Test/Prg
•1 ~:L~
11 s
• 12
'. I
I : ••
11 12 ;3 I
Rockwell Automation Publication 140G-SG001E-EN-P - March 2017 165 Trip and Let-through Current Curves
Figure 52 - 140G-M Ground Fault Protection Curve for LSIG MCCBs • Maximum voltage: 600V AC, 50/60 Hz
• Available sensors (In): 600 A, 800 A
Example:
– In = 100 A
– I4 = 100 x (0.2 + 0.25) = 45 A
– t4 = 0.2 s @ I > I4
0.001
0.01 0.1
1 10
100
1000
10000
0.1 1 10 100
t [s ]
Current in Multiples of In
0.2...1xIn
I4 =0,2..0,49
I4 =0,5..0,79
I4 =0,8..1
Supressed at I>4In
Supressed at I>6In
Supressed at I>8In
• G
• fu'L,1
t. : ! ' ..
14 11 12 13
166 Rockwell Automation Publication 140G-SG001E-EN-P - March 2017 Trip and Let-through Current Curves
Figure 53 - 140G-N, 140G-NS Time-Current Curve
• Maximum voltage: 600V AC, 50/60 Hz
• Available sensors (In): 1200 A
• Electronic trip unit. Long delay response , short delay with I2t response, and instantaneous curve
Table 141 - Trip Threshold Tolerance Values
For all cases not covered by Table 141, the tolerance values in Table 142 apply.
Table 142 - Tolerance Values
Notes:
1. The minimum value of this trip is 1 s regardless of curve type (self- protection)
2. These tolerances apply under the following conditions:
– self-powered relay at full power (without start-up)
– presence of auxiliary power supply
– two-phase or three-phase power supply
– preset trip time ≥ 100 ms
3. The value of this trip is ensured between 40 and 500 ms from circuit breaker closing; this setting must be done by the customer
4. Curve accuracy applies from -20 °C to +55 °C ambient. For possible continuous ampere
derating for ambient above 40 °C, consult
Rockwell Automation.
5. The right portion of the curve is determined by the interrupting rating of the cir
cuit breaker.
6. Total clearing times shown include the response times of the trip unit, the breake
r opening, and the interruption of the current.
7. For high fault current levels an additional fixed instantaneous hardware
override is provided at 18 kA.
0.001
0.01 0.1
1 10
100
1000
10000
0.1 1 10 100
t [s]
0.001
0.01 0.1
1 11 0 1 0 0
t [s]
I [kA]
1.5...15xIn
L
S
I2t ON
I2t OFF I
0,4 10,4..1
0,6..10
Current in Multiples of In
Protection Disable Trip Threshold Trip Time Trip Threshold Tolerance Trip Time Tolerance L (t = k/I2) I1 = 0.4-0.425-0.45-0.475-0.5-1 x In t1=3-12-24-36-48-72-108-144 s(1) @ 3I1 Release between 1.05 and 1.2 I1 ±10% Ig ≤ 6 x In S (t = k) I2 = 0.6-0.8-1.2-1.8-2.4- 3-3.36-4.2-5-
5.8-6.6-7.4-8.2-9-10 x In
with I > I2
t2=0.1-0.2-0.3-0.4-0.5-0.6-0.7-0.8 s ±7% Ig ≤ 6 x In ; ±10% Ig > 6 x In The best of ±10% or ±40 ms S (t = k/I2) I2 = 0.6-0.8-1.2-1.8-2.4- 3-3.36-4.2-5-
5.8-6.6-7.4-8.2-9-10 x In
t2=0.1-0.2-0.3-0.4-0.5-0.6-0.7-0.8 s @ 10 In ±7% Ig ≤ 6 x In ; ±10% Ig > 6 x In ±15% Ig ≤ 6 x In ; ±20% Ig > 6 x In I (t = k) I3 = 1.5-2-3-4-5-6-7-8-9-10-11-12-13-
14-15 x In
≤ 30 ms ±10% —
Protection Trip Threshold Trip Time
L 1.05 ≤ x I1 ≤ 1.25 ± 20%
S ± 10% ± 20%
I ± 15% ≤ 60 ms
Others ± 20% —
II • i
-
11111 11111
......
i •
1111111
I' ..... ~
'"" '" "
I 11111
• ~
I .... I ...... "" ,....
.... f"'lr,,, ........ ............ ...... ....
I ... ~
.... ""' " "'
I 11111 I I 1111111
-
- - - ... , ... ...... - ...
' """' '
r,.. ""
~ -- I I
l""r,,, - • I
Rockwell Automation Publication 140G-SG001E-EN-P - March 2017 167 Trip and Let-through Current Curves
Figure 54 - 140G-N, 140G-NS Ground Fault Protection Curve for LSIG MCCBs • Maximum voltage: 600V AC, 50/60 Hz
• Available sensors (In): 1200 A
Table 143 - Trip Threshold Tolerance Values
For all cases not covered by Table 143, the tolerance values in Table 144 apply.
Table 144 - Tolerance Values
Protection Disable Trip Threshold Trip Time Trip Threshold Tolerance Trip Time Tolerance G (t = k) I4 = 0.2-0.3-0.4-0.6-0.8-0.9-1 x In
with I > I4
t4=0.1-0.2-0.4 s ±7% The best of ±10% or ±40 ms
G (t = k/I2) I4 = 0.2-0.3-0.4-0.6-0.8-0.9-1 x In
t4=0.1 @ 4.47I4
t4=0.2 @ 3.16 I4
t4=0.4 @ 2.24 I4
t4=0.8 @ 1.58 I4
±7% ±15%
Protection Trip Threshold Trip Time
G ± 10% ± 20%
Others ± 20% —
0.001
0.01 0.1
1 10
100
1000
10000
0.1 1 10 100
t [s]
I4= 0.2 -0.3-0.4 In disabled at 4 In
I4= 0.6 In disabled at 6 In
I4= 0.8 -0.9-1 In disabled at 8 In
Current in Multiples of In
' ' .... .....
"' ....
"i-,,i... "'i-,,i...
168 Rockwell Automation Publication 140G-SG001E-EN-P - March 2017 Trip and Let-through Current Curves
Figure 55 - 140G-N, 140G-NS Time-Current Curve for LSIG-MM MCCBs • Maximum voltage: 600V AC, 50/60 Hz • Available sensors (In): 400 A, 600 A, 800 A, 1000 A, 1200 A, 1250 A (IEC)
Table 145 - Trip Threshold Tolerance Values
For all cases not covered by Table 145, the tolerance values in Table 146 apply.
Table 146 - Tolerance Values
Notes:
1. The minimum value of this trip is 1 s regardless of curve type (self- protection)
2. These tolerances apply under the following conditions:
– self-powered relay at full power (without start-up)
– presence of auxiliary power supply
– two-phase or three-phase power supply
– preset trip time ≥ 100 ms
3. The value of this trip is ensured between 40 and 500 ms from circuit breaker closing; this setting must be done by the customer
4. Curve accuracy applies from -20 °C to +55 °C ambient. For possible continuous ampere
derating for ambient above 40 °C, consult
Rockwell Automation.
5. The right portion of the curve is determined by the interrupting rating of the cir
cuit breaker.
6. Total clearing times shown include the response times of the trip unit, the breake
r opening, and the interruption of the current.
7. For high fault current levels an additional fixed instantaneous hardware
override is provided at 18 kA.
0.001
0.01 0.1
1 10
100
1000
10000
0.1 1 10 100
t [s]
1.5...15 x In
L
S
I 2t ON
I2t OFF I
0,4 10,4..1
0,6..10
0.001
0.01 0.1
1 11 0 1 0 0
t [s]
I [kA]
Current in Multiples of In
Protection Disable Trip Threshold Trip Time Trip Threshold Tolerance Trip Time Tolerance L (t = k/I2) 0.4 x In ≤ I1 ≤ 1 x In
3 s ≤ t1≤ 144 s(1) , step 3 s
t1 @ 3 x I1
Release between 1.05 and 1.2 I1 ±10% Ig ≤ 6 x In
S (t = k)
0.6 x In ≤ I2 ≤ 10 x In
0.6 x In ≤ I2 startup ≤ 10 x In
step 0.1 x In
Min. 0.05 s ≤ t2 ≤ 0.8 s, step 0.01 s
0.10 s ≤ t2 startup <30 s, step 0.01 s
0.04 s ≤ t2 sel ≤ 0.20 s, step 0.01 s
±7% Ig ≤ 6 x In ; ±10% Ig > 6 x In The best of ±10% or ±40 ms S (t = k/I2) 0.6 x In ≤ I2 ≤ 10 x In; step 0.1 x In 0.05 s ≤ t2 ≤ 0.8 s, step 0.01 @ 10 x In ±7% Ig ≤ 6 x In ; ±10% Ig > 6 x In ±15% Ig ≤ 6 x In ; ±20% Ig > 6 x In I (t = k) 1.5x In ≤ I3 ≤ 15 x In ; step 0.1 x In ≤ 30 ms ±10% — Protection Trip Threshold Trip Time
L 1.05 ≤ I1 ≤ 1.25 ± 20%
S ± 10% ± 20%
I ± 15% ≤60 ms
Others ± 20% —
~~~
• --
"""" ...... "" r-,,..
-.. --. .....
~
..... ""i"o ......
' , .. ~ ..
;a
- - - ... ... --. .... --. ..... I I I I I I I
r-....
"""
... , ....... .....
- ... I I ,_ ___
... -
Rockwell Automation Publication 140G-SG001E-EN-P - March 2017 169 Trip and Let-through Current Curves
Figure 56 - 140G-N, 140G-NS Ground Fault Protection Curve for LSIG-MM MCCBs • Maximum voltage: 600V AC, 50/60 Hz • Available sensors (In): 400 A, 600 A, 800 A, 1000 A, 1200 A, 1250 A (IEC)
Table 147 - Trip Threshold Tolerance Values
For all cases not covered by Table 147, the tolerance values in Table 148 apply.
Table 148 - Tolerance Values
Note:
Protection G is disabled for current values:
• greater than 4 x In, where I4 < 0.4 x In
• greater than 6 x In, where 0.5 In ≤ I4 < 0.8 In
• greater than 8 x In, where I4 ≥ 0.8 x In
0.001
0.01 0.1
1 10
100
1000
10000
0.1 1 10 100
t [s]
I4= 0.2...0.48 In disabled at 4 In
I4= 0.5...0.78 In disabled at 6 In
I4= 0.8...1.0 In disabled at 8 In
Current in Multiples of In
Protection Disable Trip Threshold Trip Time Trip Threshold Tolerance Trip Time Tolerance G (t = k) 0.2 x In ≤ I4 ≤ 1 x In
step 0.02 x In when I > I4
0.1 s ≤ t4 ≤ 1 s, step 0.05 s
0.10 s ≤ t4 startup ≤ 1 s,, step 0.02 s
0.04 s ≤ t4 sel ≤ 0.20 s, step 0.01 s
±7% The best of ±10% or ±40 ms
G (t = k/I2) 0.2 x In ≤ I4 ≤ 1 x In
step 0.02 x In
0.1 s ≤ t4 ≤ 1 s, step 0.05 @ Ig > 4x In ±7% ±15%
Protection Trip Threshold Trip Time
G ± 10% ± 20%
Others ± 20% —
~ ~
.... ..... .... ..... .... ,...
"
170 Rockwell Automation Publication 140G-SG001E-EN-P - March 2017 Trip and Let-through Current Curves
Figure 57 - 140G-R Time-Current Curve for LSIG MCCBs
• Maximum voltage: 600V AC, 50/60 Hz
• Available sensors (In): 2000 A, 2500 A, 3000 A
• Electronic trip unit. Long delay response , short delay with I2t available sensors
Table 149 - Trip Threshold Tolerance Values
For all cases not covered by Table 149, the tolerance values in Table 150 apply.
Table 150 - Tolerance Values
Notes:
1. The minimum value of this trip is 1 s regardless of curve type (self- protection)
2. These tolerances apply under the following conditions:
– self-powered relay at full power (without start-up)
– presence of auxiliary power supply
– two-phase or three-phase power supply
– preset trip time ≥ 100 ms
3. The value of this trip is ensured between 40 and 500 ms from circuit breaker closing; this setting must be done by the customer
4. Curve accuracy applies from -20 °C to +55 °C ambient. For possible continuous ampere
derating for ambient above 40 °C, consult
Rockwell Automation.
5. The right portion of the curve is determined by the interrupting rating of the cir
cuit breaker.
6. Total clearing times shown include the response times of the trip unit, the breake
r opening, and the interruption of the current.
7. For high fault current levels an additional fixed instantaneous hardware
override is provided at 18 kA.
0.001
0.01 0.1
1 10
100
1000
10000
0.1 1 10 100
0,4 1
L
0,6 10
S
t=k/ I2
151,5
I
t=k
0,4..1
0,6..10
1,5..15
G
Current in Multiples of In
0.001
0.01 0.1
1 11 0 1 0 0
t [s]
I [kA]
t [s]
Protection Disable Trip Threshold Trip Time Trip Threshold Tolerance Trip Time Tolerance L (t = k/I2) I1 = 0.4-0.425-0.45-0.475-0.5-…1 x In t1 = 3-12-24-36-48-72-108-144 s(1) @ 3 x I1 Release between 1.05 and 1.2 I1 ±10% Ig ≤ 6 x In S (t = k) I2 = 0.6-0.8-1.2-1.8-2.4-3-3.6-4.2-5-
5.8-6.6-7.4-8.2-9-10 x In
with I > I2
t2 = 0.1-0.2-0.3-0.4-0.5-0.6-0.7-0.8 s ±7% Ig ≤ 6 x In ; ±10% Ig > 6 x In The best of ±10% or ±40 ms S (t = k/I2) I2 = 0.6-0.8-1.2-1.8-2.4-3-3.6-4.2-5-
5.8-6.6-7.4-8.2-9-10 x In
t2 = 0.1-0.2-0.3-0.4-0.5-0.6-0.7-0.8 s
@ 10 x In
±7% Ig ≤ 6 x In ; ±10% Ig > 6 x In ±15% Ig ≤ 6 x In ; ±20% Ig > 6 x In I (t = k) I3 = 1.5-2-3-4-5-6-7-8-9-10-11-12-13-
14-15 x In
≤ 30 ms ±10% —
G (t = k) I4 = 0.2-0.3-0.4-0.6-0.8-0.9-1 x In with I > I4 ; t4= 0.1-0.2-0.4-0.8 s ±7% The best of ±10% or ±40 ms G (t = k/I2) I4 = 0.2-0.3-0.4-0.6-0.8-0.9-1 x In
t4=0.1 @ 4.47I4; t4=0.2 @ 3.16 I4
t4=0.4 @ 2.24 I4; t4=0.8 @ 1.58 I4
±7% ±15%
Protection Trip Threshold Trip Time
L 1.05 ≤ I1 ≤ 1.25 ± 20%
S ± 10% ± 20%
I ± 15% ≤60 ms
G ± 10% ± 20%
Others ± 20% —
-•
I
''- ' ..........
" "
I
Rockwell Automation Publication 140G-SG001E-EN-P - March 2017 171 Trip and Let-through Current Curves
Let-through Current Curves
Figure 58 - Let-through Current Curve for MCCBs,240V
Figure 59 - Peak Let-through Current Curve for MCCBs,240V Available Short-circuit Current, kA rms
1,000,000,000
100,000,000
10,000,000
1,000,000
100,000
1 10 100 1000
N
M
H
J
Let-through Current I2t (A2s)
Ip [kA]
1 kA
10 kA
100 kA
1000 kA
1 10 100 1000
N
M
H
J
Available Short-circuit Current, kA rms
Let-through Current I2t (A2s)
-L
---~ ,,,,,,,,, ,,,,-
- - I I -
~
--,,,,,,,,,~
,,./'
I I
~~
iill""'"
LJ -.....
I I
172 Rockwell Automation Publication 140G-SG001E-EN-P - March 2017 Trip and Let-through Current Curves
Figure 60 - Let-through Current Curve for MCCBs, 480V
Figure 61 - Peak Let-through Current Curve for MCCBs, 480V 1,000,000,000
100,000,000
10,000,000
1,000,000
100,000
1 10 100 1000
N
M
R
H
J
K
G
480V
Available Short-circuit Current, kA rms
Let-through Current I2t (A2s)Peak Let-through Current I p [kA] 1 kA
10 kA
100 kA
1000 kA
1 10 100 1000
N
M
R
H
JK
G
480V
Available Short-circuit Current, kA rms
-'I I
/
1~'
/
~
-,_
- 1 I
~ -J,•" ... I
"" ...... ""
/ ...... ~
--,,,_
-..... l
/ __J
v- 7 n
...... L-
~ .-..-
-
I
1......-I I
~
,....,.,.
~ □ ........ ~--
- -
~~ ...... - I ,---... -.-J --- 1 ----............... 1...-- -- i
~ ~ ..---- L_
L_
--~
Rockwell Automation Publication 140G-SG001E-EN-P - March 2017 173 Trip and Let-through Current Curves
Figure 62 - Let-through Current Curve for MCCBs, 600V
Figure 63 - Peak Let-through Current Curve for MCCBs, 600V 1,000,000,000
100,000,000
10,000,000
1,000,000
100,000
1 10 100 1000
N
M
R
H
J
K
G
600V
Available Short-circuit Current, kA rms
Let-through Current I2t (A2s)
1 kA
10 kA
100 kA
1000 kA
1 10 100 1000
N
M
R
H
J
K
G
600V
Available Short-circuit Current, kA rms
Peak Let-through Current I p [kA]
r 1
~' LJ
~
i,-'
-
1~ I
/ -
/
~ ' []
--.,
/ r,
/ ~ - 1 I
~ ~-f l r7
-- I I
,~ ---
r7
~ ... "' L..J
I,.,' ~ -7
~...-
- I I
./' ~
--- I I
~ --1 I
~~
- -rL i ~--
174 Rockwell Automation Publication 140G-SG001E-EN-P - March 2017 Trip and Let-through Current Curves
Bulletin 140G Current-limiting Molded Case Circuit
Breakers
Let-through Current Curves
Figure 64 - Peak Let-through Current Curve for 65 kA Current-limiting MCCBs, 480V 1 10
100
11 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0
KC6
JC6
HC6
480V
Available Short-circuit Current, kA rms
Peak Let-through Current I p [kA]
I
I
---.---i,..---- ;,====;
~ ---- ~
_,,. ~
---
~
~
i.,., ... i,..
Rockwell Automation Publication 140G-SG001E-EN-P - March 2017 175 Trip and Let-through Current Curves
Figure 65 - Peak Let-through Current Curve for 100 kA Current-limiting MCCBs, 480V Figure 66 - Peak Let-through Current Curve for 65 kA Cu rrent-limiting MCCBs, 600V 1 10
100
1 10 100 1000
KC0
JC0
HC0
480V
Available Short-circuit Current, kA rms
Peak Let-through Current I p [kA]
1 10
100
11 0 1 0 0
KC6
JC6
HC6
600V
Available Short-circuit Current, kA rms
Peak Let-through Current I p [kA]
I
~ I
~~ ; -
,/
~
~~' -
~ ,/ V
~
,~ -___. i..--
~
~
,,,,,,,,-
....... ~~
I
t I
~ - I
~ -~ ----
i--
-
I,,.-
176 Rockwell Automation Publication 140G-SG001E-EN-P - March 2017 Trip and Let-through Current Curves
Figure 67 - Peak Let-through Current Curve for 100 kA Current-limiting MCCBs, 600V Figure 68 - Let-through Current Curve for 65 kA Current-limiting MCCBs, 480V 1 10
100
11 0 1 0 0
KC0
JC0
HC0
600V
Available Short-circuit Current, kA rms
Peak Let-through Current I p [kA]
0.01 0.10
1.00 10.00
11 0 1 0 0
KC6
JC6
HC6
480V
Available Short-circuit Current, kA rms
Let-through Current I2t (A2s)
I
F I
-
~ ~ ~
~ ~ ~
i-
=
~
i---- --
,,,,,.. ,,,,,... i--
-
t
-
-~ I I I
~ I I I
--
I I I -
I I I_
- -
..--
Rockwell Automation Publication 140G-SG001E-EN-P - March 2017 177 Trip and Let-through Current Curves
Figure 69 - Let-through Current Curve for 100 kA Current-limiting MCCBs, 480V Figure 70 - Let-through Current Curve for 65 kA Current-limiting MCCBs, 600V
0.01 0.10
1.00 10.00
11 0 1 0 0
KC0
JC0
HC0
480V
Available Short-circuit Current, kA rms
Let-through Current I2t (A2s)
0.01 0.10
1.00 10.00
11 0 1 0 0
KC6
JC6
HC6
600V
Available Short-circuit Current, kA rms
Let-through Current I2t (A2s)
t
_,,,,...---
~ L.-
~
- .--
-------
I t
~
--
~
~
~~
-----
178 Rockwell Automation Publication 140G-SG001E-EN-P - March 2017 Trip and Let-through Current Curves
Figure 71 - Let-through Current Curve for 100 kA Current-limiting MCCBs, 600V
0.01 0.10
1.00 10.00
11 0 1 0 0
KC0
JC0
HC0
600V
Available Short-circuit Current, kA rms
Let-through Current I2t (A2s)
I ~
I
~---- :=]-
~ -
~ I
--
I
-----
~
--
Rockwell Automation Publication 140G-SG001E-EN-P - March 2017 179 Trip and Let-through Current Curves
Bulletin 140MG Motor Circuit Protectors
Time-Current Curves
Note: Motor circuit protectors are for use only in combination controllers. For DC applications, pick-up settings are approximately 40% higher.
Figure 72 - 140MG-G Time-Current Curve
• Maximum voltage: 600Y/347V AC, (50/60 Hz) • Maximum current: 3…125 A Table 151 -
Instantaneous Pick-up Setting (Amperes)
Table 152 - Typical Trip Unit Nameplate
See Table 151 for trip setting values.
0.01 0.1
1 10
100
1000
10000
0.1 1 10 100 1000
t [s]
1 HOUR
10 MIN
1 MIN
4...11x In (In= 3, 7 A)
3...11x In (In=15...125 A)
Current in Multiples of In
Catalog
Number ABCDEFGH I
140MG-G8P-B30 9 12 15 18 21 24 27 30 33
140MG-G8P-B70 21 28 35 42 49 56 63 70 77
140MG-G8P-C15 45 60 75 90 105 120 135 150 165
140MG-G8P-C30 90 120 150 180 210 240 270 300 330
140MG-G8P-C50 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 550
140MG-G8P-C70 210 280 350 420 490 560 630 700 770
140MG-G8P-C80 240 320 400 480 560 640 720 800 880
140MG-G8P-D10 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 1000 1100
140MG-G8P-D12 375 500 625 750 875 1000 1125 1250 1375
I3 [A]
ABCDE FGH I
300 400 500 600 700 800 900 1000 1100
I
I
I
I I I I I I
180 Rockwell Automation Publication 140G-SG001E-EN-P - March 2017 Trip and Let-through Current Curves
Figure 73 - 140MG-H Time-Current Curve
• Maximum voltage: 600V AC, (50/60 Hz) • Maximum current: 3…100 A Table 153 -
Instantaneous Pick-up Setting (Amperes)
Table 154 - Typical Trip Unit Nameplate
See Table 153 for trip setting values.
0.01 0.1
1 10
100
1000
10000
0.1 1 10 100
t [s]
1 HOUR
10 MIN
1 MIN
3...11x In (In=15...100 A)
4...11x In (In=3,7 A)
Current in Multiples of In
Catalog
Number ABCDE FGH I
140MG-H8P-B30 9 12 15 18 21 24 27 30 33
140MG-H8P-B70 21 28 35 42 49 56 63 70 77
140MG-H8P-C15 45 60 75 90 105 120 135 150 165
140MG-H8P-C30 90 120 150 180 210 240 270 300 330
140MG-H8P-C50 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 550
140MG-H8P-C70 210 280 350 420 490 560 630 700 770
140MG-H8P-C80 240 320 400 480 560 640 720 800 880
140MG-H8P-D10 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 1000 1100
I3 [A]
ABCDE FGH I
300 400 500 600 700 800 900 1000 1100
1-1
- -- -
I I I I I I
Rockwell Automation Publication 140G-SG001E-EN-P - March 2017 181 Trip and Let-through Current Curves
Figure 74 - 140MG-H Time-Current Curve
• Maximum voltage: 600V AC, (50/60 Hz)
• Maximum current: 125 A
Table 155 - T
ypical Trip Unit Nameplate
I3 [A]
ABCDE FGH I
625 703 781 859 938 1016 1094 1172 1250
0.01 0.1
1 10
100
1000
10000
0.1 1 10 100
t [s]
1 HOUR
10 MIN
1 MIN
5...10 x In
Current in Multiples of In
I
,_ ~
I
I I I I
182 Rockwell Automation Publication 140G-SG001E-EN-P - March 2017 Trip and Let-through Current Curves
Figure 75 - 140MG-I Time-Current Curve
• Maximum voltage: 600Y/347V AC, (50/60 Hz) • Maximum current: 100…150 A Table 156 -
Instantaneous Pick-up Setting (Amperes)
Table 157 - Typical Trip Unit Nameplate
See Table 156 for trip setting values.
0.01 0.1
1 10
100
1000
10000
0.1 1 10 100
t [s]
1 HOUR
10 MIN
1 MIN
6...12 x In
Current in Multiples of In
Catalog
Number ABCDE FGH I
140MG-I8P-D10 600 675 750 825 900 975 1050 1125 1200
140MG-I8P-D11 660 743 825 908 990 1073 1155 1238 1320
140MG-I8P-D12 750 844 938 1031 1125 1219 1313 1406 1500 140MG-I8P-D15 900 1013 1125 1238 1350 1463 1575 1688 1800 I3 [A]
ABCDE FGH I
600 675 750 825 900 975 1050 1125 1200
-
-
I I
I I I I I I I I
Rockwell Automation Publication 140G-SG001E-EN-P - March 2017 183 Trip and Let-through Current Curves
Figure 76 - 140MG-J Time-Current Curve
• Maximum voltage: 600V AC, (50/60 Hz) • Maximum current: 150…200 A Table 158 -
Instantaneous Pick-up Setting (Amperes)
Table 159 - Typical Trip Unit Nameplate
See Table 158 for trip setting values.
0.01 0.1
1 10
100
1000
1 HOUR
10 MIN
1 MIN
10000
0 0 10 111 . 0
t [s]
5...10 x In
Current in Multiples of In
Catalog
Number ABCDE FGH I
140MG-J8P-D15 750 844 938 1031 1125 1219 1313 1406 1500 140MG-J8P-D17 875 984 1094 1203 1313 1422 1531 1641 1750 140MG-J8P-D20 1000 1125 1250 1375 1500 1625 1750 1875 2000 140MG-J8P-D22 1125 1266 1406 1547 1688 1828 1969 2109 2250 140MG-J8P-D25 1250 1406 1563 1719 1875 2031 2188 2344 2500 I3 [A]
ABCDE FGH I
750 844 938 1031 1125 1219 1313 1406 1500I I I I I I
184 Rockwell Automation Publication 140G-SG001E-EN-P - March 2017 Trip and Let-through Current Curves
Figure 77 - 140MG-K Time-Current Curve
• Maximum voltage: 600V AC, (50/60 Hz)
• Maximum current: 300, 400 A
0.001
0.01 0.1
1 10
100
1000
10000
0.1 1 10 100
t [s]
1...10 x In
Current in Multiples of In
0.001
0.01 0.1
1 11 0
t [s]
I [kA]
-~
I~ I
I= =~
Rockwell Automation Publication 140G-SG001E-EN-P - March 2017 185 Trip and Let-through Current Curves
Figure 78 - 140MG-M Time-Current Curve
• Maximum voltage: 600V AC, (50/60 Hz)
• Maximum current: 600, 800 A
0.001
0.01 0.1
1 10
100
1000
10000
0.1 1 10 100
t [s]
1...10 x In
Current in Multiples of In
0.001
0.01 0.1
1 11 0 1 0 0
t [s]
I [kA]
I
186 Rockwell Automation Publication 140G-SG001E-EN-P - March 2017 Trip and Let-through Current Curves
Figure 79 - 140MG-N Time-Current Curve
• Maximum voltage: 600V AC, (50/60 Hz) • Maximum current: 1200 A 1 HOUR
10 MIN
1 MIN
0.001
0.01 0.1
1 10
100
1000
10000
0.1 1 10 100
t [s]
1...10 x In
Current in Multiples of In
0.001
0.01 0.1
1 1 10 100
t [s]
I [kA]
I
I
I
Rockwell Automation Publication 140G-SG001E-EN-P - March 2017 187 Trip and Let-through Current Curves
Bulletin 140MG Motor Protection Circuit Breakers
Time-Current Curves
Figure 80 - 140MG-H Time-Current Curve
• Maximum voltage: 600V AC, 50/60 Hz • Available Current Sensors: 25 A, 60 A, 100 A Notes:
1. Curve accuracy applies from -20° C to +55° C ambient. For possible continuous ampe
re derating for ambient above 40° C, consult
Rockwell A
utomation.
2. Set L function value equal to the motor FLA.
3. Total clearing times shown include the response times of the trip unit, the breake
r opening, and the interruption of the current.
4. For high fault current levels an additional fixed instantaneous hardware
override is provided at 2.2 kA.
Current in Multiples of In
6...13 x In
Cold Max.
Hot Max.
Cold Min.
Hot Min.
0.1 10
100
1000
10000
t [s]
1 10.1 10 100
1 HOUR
10 MIN
[20E]
[3E]
I [kA]
t [s]
I•
-I • ..
- l's. /
"- /
,, vv
.....
' ' '
/
... .....
- -
/
'x ',
'
'- / --
/ " )I
"" " '
'><'.v -
' ' ' ' ' / ..... ..... ..... /
V '- '- '- /
"- ' ' ""
.......... , ,, I I I
' ' ' '
------ ------ ---
,_ __ ....
100
10 0.1
0.01 0.001 +-~~~L4-~~~-
0.1 10
188 Rockwell Automation Publication 140G-SG001E-EN-P - March 2017 Trip and Let-through Current Curves
Figure 81 - 140MG-J Time-Current Curve
• Maximum voltage: 600V AC, 50/60 Hz • Available Current Sensors: 40 A, 60 A, 100 A, 150 A Notes:
1. Curve accuracy applies from -20° C to +55° C ambient. For possible continuous ampe
re derating for ambient above 40° C, consult
Rockwell A
utomation.
2. Set L function value equal to the motor FLA.
3. Total clearing times shown include the response times of the trip unit, the breake
r opening, and the interruption of the current.
4. For high fault current levels an additional fixed instantaneous hardware
override is provided at 3 kA.
Current in Multiples of In
6...13 x In
Hot Max.
Hot Min.
0.1 10
100
1000
10000
t [s]
1 10.1 10 100
1 HOUR
10 MIN Cold Max.
Cold Min.
[20E]
[3E]
t [s]
I [kA]
I •
-I •
-
- "-
/
/
'
/
~ l/
- -
✓ /
....
'
/
- IW /
'x, .... ,
'
.... ,
/
/ "' ""-""
~~
'
'><v -.. ..... , _ -
.... , -/ ..... ,..... /
~ -"' ~' /
'" I"
~ "" '
I I I
' ' ,_
- ------ -r·-I ------r --r-- --r-
t I
-
I I
0.1 r
I t
$
L
0.01 i------1 -----------,
0.001 r t
0.1 10
Rockwell Automation Publication 140G-SG001E-EN-P - March 2017 189 Approximate Dimensions
Bulletin 140G/MG G-Frame
Dimensions are in millimeters (inches). Dimensions are not intended to be used for manufacturing purposes.
Figure 82 - Panel Mounted Molded Case Circuit Breaker
Figure 83 - DIN Rail Mounted Molded Case Circuit Breaker 101.2 (3.98) (4P)
96 (3.77)
38.1 (1.5)
25 (0.98)
25 (0.98) 25
(0.98)
1 (0.04)
1 (0.04)
1 (0.04)
130
(5.12)
65 (2.56)
71 (2.79)
45 (1.77)
76.2 (3) (3P)
≥ 3 (0.11)
≤ 2
(0.08)
1.1 N•m
83 (3.27)
78 (3.07)
70 (2.76)
101 (3.97)
45 (1.77)41
(1.61)
14 (0.55)
16 (0.63)
‡ Overall dimensions of optional side covers.
§ Required 25 mm insulating phase barriers provided.
Description No. of Poles A
With escutcheon 3…4 74 (2.91)
Without escutcheon 3…4 71 (2.80)
3…4 79 (3.11)
1.1 N•m
1 (0.04)1 (0.04)
1 (0.04)
45 (1.77)
25 (0.98)
25 (0.98)
25 (0.98)
38.1 (1.5)
130
(5.12)
76.2 (3) (3P)
101.2 (3.98) (4P)
1.5 (0.06)
107
(4.21) 35
(1.37)
5.5 (0.22)
102.5 (4.04)
21.5 (0.85)
83.5 (3.29)
71.5 (2.81)
⋆ Mounting bracket.
‡ Overall dimensions of optional side covers.
§ Required 25 mm insulating phase barriers provided.
♣ Optional front cover for DIN Rail.
♠ Flexible insulator.
§
:j:
I I I
A
:j:
7 .s
190 Rockwell Automation Publication 140G-SG001E-EN-P - March 2017 Approximate Dimensions
Figure 84 - Drilling Template for Molded Case Circuit Breaker Mounting Figure 85 - Cat. Nos. 140G-G-ECM, -ECM4 Terminals
F
igure 86 - Cat. Nos. 140G-G-EXT3, -EXT4 Extended Terminals 25 (0.98)
53.5 (2.10)
107 (4.21)
4.5 (0.177) -M4
25 (0.98)
25 (0.98)
53.5 (2.10)
107 (4.21)
4.5 (0.177) -M4
3 Poles 4 Poles
⋆ End cap terminals for ring or busbar connection.
♠ Required 25 mm insulating phase barriers provided.
25 (0.98)
25 (0.98)
25 (0.98)
24.5 (0.96) 5 (0.2)
6 N•m
17 (0.67)
~100
(3.94) 8.5
(0.33)
130
(5.11)
190 (7.48)
171 (6.73)
50 (1.97)
‡ Extended terminals
§ Optional T erminal covers with IP40 protection provided Δ Required 100 mm insulating phase barriers provided
Internal insulating plate required with phase barriers (customer provided) when mounted through the enclosure door
\
I I
X· --'--- J. ·X x-1 -
Ll
l
I
I $
- ----¢
y
A
I
I
I
I
I y
I
-.1.-x
I
¢
It)
....
It)
1,
Tr
X
,, ,,
Jl
Rockwell Automation Publication 140G-SG001E-EN-P - March 2017 191 Approximate Dimensions
Figure 87 - Cat. Nos. 140G-G-EXS3, -EXS4 Spreader Terminals Figure 88 - Cat. Nos. 140G-G-TLC13, 140G-G-TLC14 Terminals (Copper Only Lug) Figure 89 - Cat. No. 140G-G-MTL63, -MTL64 Terminal (Multi-Cable Terminal Lug) 25 (0.98)
24.5 (0.96) 5 (0.2)
6 N•m
25 (0.98)
25 (0.98)25
(0.98)
25 (0.98)
25 (0.98)
25 (0.98) 8.5
(0.33)
107.5
(4.23)
107.5
(4.23)
117.5
(4.63)
117.5
(4.63)
47.5 (1.87) 47.5 (1.87)
120 (4.72)
~200
(7.87)
~200
(7.87)
145 (5.71)
40 (1.57) 40 (1.57)40 (1.57)
♠ Extended spread terminals
for busbar connection
♦ Required 200 mm insulating
phase barriers provided
25 (0.98)
24.5 (0.96)25
(0.98)
25 (0.98)
57.5 (2.26)
7 N•m
12 x 12 (0.47 x 0.47)
‡ Terminals.
25 (0.98)
25 (0.98)
25 (0.98)
7 N•m
6 N•m
65 (2.56)
50 (1.97)
71.5 (2.81)
10 (0.39)
10 (0.39)
10 (0.39)
20 (0.79) 29
(1.14)
31.5 (1.24)
8.2 (0.32)
21.5 (0.85)
34 (1.34)
46.5 (1.83)
♣ Required terminal covers with IP40 protection
provided
Δ Terminal lugs for multi-cable connection
y
=I=
\
X X X
y
X
y
192 Rockwell Automation Publication 140G-SG001E-EN-P - March 2017 Approximate Dimensions
Figure 90 - Cat. No. 140G-G-RMB or 140G-G-RMY Direct Rotary Operating Handle Figure 91 - 140G-H-RVM... Minimum/Maximu m Enclosure Depth 101.2 (3.98) 4P
76.2 (3) 3P
1.1 N•m
≥ 3 (0.12) ≤ 2 (0.08)
2 (0.08)
38.1 (1.5)
14.5 (0.57)
130
(5.12)
108 (4.25)
14.5 (0.57)
70 (2.76)
110 (4.33)
113.75 (4.48)
159.25 (6.27)
Min. doorrotation radius
14.5 (0.57)
14 (0.55)
Drilling: See Detail “A”
88 (3.46)
59.5 (2.34)
52.8 (2.08)
81 (3.19)
R min. 200 (7.87)
80°
Det. “A”
Ø 3.5 (0.14)
‡ Rotary handle operating mechanism
on molded case circuit breaker.
♣ Door drilling template with direct
rotary handle.
♦ Required 25 mm insulating phase
barriers provided.
1 Enclosure Depth
Minimum Maximum
12 in. Shaft 7.25 in. (191 mm) 17.75 in. (451 mm)
21 in. Shaft 26.75 in. (679 mm)
12 in. Shaft w/NFPA 9 in. (229 mm) 17.75 in. (451 mm)
21 in. Shaft w/NFPA 26.75 in. (679 mm)
Note: this figure depicts the minimum and maximum enclosure sizes that will accommodate the MCCB, operator, and handle. See Figure 92 for overall assembly dimension and handle cutout.
I
X-+- -
I
r-
1----------------- 7
I I
I ,1
I I
I 1------1
I I I
I I I I
I I I I
-7 r- 1 I I
~~~~~~~r~: :
J._..J l-: I I
: [ __ ~ :
I I I I ------1
I I
I L
I I I __________________ I
Rockwell Automation Publication 140G-SG001E-EN-P - March 2017 193 Approximate Dimensions
Figure 92 - Cat. No. 140G-G-RVM… Variable Depth Rotary Mechanism Front of Cover
50 (1.97)
50 (1.97)
25 25
(0.98)
(2) - ø 5.5
(2) - ø (0.22)
ø 35
(ø 1.37)
63 (2.47)
31.5 (1.23)
25 (0.98)
(2) - ø 5.5
(2) - ø (0.22)
ø 35
(ø 1.37)
12 in. shaft: 289 (11.38)
21 in. shaft: 517.8 (20.38)161.8 (6.37)
68 (2.68)
76.2 (3.00)
130.0
(5.12)
10.5 (0.41)
2.0 (0.08)
3-Pole 4-Pole
14.5 (0.57)
101.2 (3.98)
130.0
(5.12)
39 (1.54)
35.8 (1.41)
1.8 (0.07)
(0.98)
14.5 (0.57)
39 (1.54)
,- -J
L
r-
L
◄-
194 Rockwell Automation Publication 140G-SG001E-EN-P - March 2017 Approximate Dimensions
Figure 93 - Cat. No. 140G-G-EOP … Motor Operator
101.2 (3.98) 4P
76.2 (3) 3P
1.1 N•m
1.1 N•m ≥ 3 (0.12)
≤ 2 (0.08)
70 (2.76)
130
(5.12)
28.5 (1.12)
38.1 (1.5)
12.6 (0.49)
172 (6.77)
77 (3.01)
38.5 (1.51)
87 (3.42)
49 (1.93)49
(1.93)
98 (3.86) 108
(4.25)
43.5 (1.71)
♣ Motor operator.
Δ Door drilling template (without escutcheon).
♦ Door drilling template (with escutcheon)
♠ Cable connection
Required 25 mm insulating phase barriers provided
'1 1@
X
I I
L---~-1
y
y
I
--~--
I
I -@- X
I I
+
X
•
Rockwell Automation Publication 140G-SG001E-EN-P - March 2017 195 Approximate Dimensions
Figure 94 - Cat. No. 140G-G-ELP1603 Residual Current Release Module for 3-Pole Molded Case Circuit Breakers 101.2 (3.98) 4P
76.2 (3) 3P
38.1 (1.5)
7 N•m
12 x 12
(0.47 x 0.47)
24.5 (0.96)
70 (2.76)
25 (0.98)
25 (0.98)
1.1 N•m
25 (0.98)
≥ 3 (0.12)
≤ 2
(0.08)
101 (3.98)
115
(4.53)
11.5 (0.45)
45 (1.77)
16 (0.63)
187
(7.36)
67 (2.64)
4.5 (0.18) -M4
83 (3.27)
70 (2.76)
53.5 (2.11)
107
(4.21)
124
(4.88)105.6 (4.16)
36.5 (1.44) 17
(0.67)
47 (1.85)
113.5 (4.46)
40.5 (1.59)
21 (0.83)
55 (2.16)
53 (2.08)
⋆ T erminals for ring or busbar connection.
‡ IP40 terminal covers.
§ Drilling template — door with direct rotary
mechanism and escutcheon.
♣ Drilling template — door with direct rotary
mechanism, without escutcheon.
Δ Drilling template — molded case circuit
breaker mounting on mounting plate.
Description No. of
Poles
A
With escutcheon 3 74 (2.91)
Without escutcheon 3 71 (2.80)
X
.J__H
• [•I mofrffi
----1 -
y
*
A
I I I
I
I
X ----t- X
I
I
I
$ - +-------'---
196 Rockwell Automation Publication 140G-SG001E-EN-P - March 2017 Approximate Dimensions
Figure 95 - Cat. No. 140G-G-ELP1604 Residual Current Release Module for 4-Pole Molded Case Circuit Breakers 25 (0.98)
1.1 N•m
≥ 3 (0.12)
≤ 2
(0.08)
101 (3.98)
115
(4.53)
11.5 (0.45)
25 (0.98)
25 (0.98)
7 N•m
45 (1.77)
16 (0.63)
12 x 12
(0.47 x 0.47)
24.5 (0.96)
70 (2.76)
101.2 (3.98) 4P
131.2 (5.17)
38.1 (1.5)
187
(7.36)
67 (2.64)
83 (3.27)
70 (2.76)
130.6 (5.14)
36.5 (1.44)
17 (0.67)
47 (1.85)
25 (0.98)
4.5 (0.18) -M4
53.5 (2.11)
107
(4.21)
124
(4.88)
78 (3.07)
25 (0.98)
138.5 (5.45)
40.5 (1.59)
21 (0.83)
55 (2.17)
⋆ End cap terminals for ring or busbar connection.
‡ IP40 terminal covers.
§ Drilling template — door with direct rotary
mechanism and escutcheon.
♣ Drilling template — door with direct rotary
mechanism, without escutcheon.
Δ Drilling template — molded case circuit
breaker mounting on mounting plate.
Description No. of
Poles
A
With escutcheon 4 74 (2.91)
Without escutcheon 4 71 (2.80)
• 1· B
11 JI ~0 El[1
§ 1· Et
·1ei~•lCJ
\ ~f=~
I I
x-~---+
I I
I l ._J
¢~--t
I I I
Rockwell Automation Publication 140G-SG001E-EN-P - March 2017 197 Approximate Dimensions
Figure 96 - G-Frame Flex Cable Operator and Actuator
130
(5.12)
155.7
(6.13)
260.7
(10.26)
76.2 (3.00)
3-Pole 63.4
(2.49)
63.4 (2.49)
131.4
(5.17)
181.4
(7.14)
68 (2.68)
8.8 (0.34)
26.4 (1.01)
52.4 (2.06)
32.3 (1.27)
161.7
(6.37)
111.1
(4.38)
210.8
(8.30)
215.4
(8.48)
267.4
(10.53)
- ·- - -- - -- - - --
J _
0 0
0 198 Rockwell Automation Publication 140G-SG001E-EN-P - March 2017 Approximate Dimensions
Bulletin 140G/MG H-Frame
Figure 97 - Panel Mounted Molded Case Circuit Breaker
‡ Overall dimensions of optional side covers.
Figure 98 - DIN Rail Mounted Molded Case Circuit Breaker ⋆ Mounting bracket.
§ Required 25 mm insulating phase barriers provided.
♣ Flexible insulator.
120 (4.72) [4P]
114 (4.49)
30 (1.18) 30 (1.18)30 (1.18)
1 (0.04)
1 (0.04)
1 (0.04)
1.1 N•m
130
(5.11)
65 (2.52)
45 (1.77)
84 (3.30)
90 (3.54) [3P]
≥ 3 (0.11)
≤ 2 (0.08)116 (4.57)
16 (0.63)
41 (1.61)
24 (0.94)
73 (2.87)
95.5 (3.60)
90.5 (3.56)
82.5 (3.25)
45 (1.77)
‡ Overall dimensions of optional side covers.
§ Required 25 mm insulating phase barriers provided.
Description No. of
Poles
A
With escutcheon 3…4 86 (3.39)
Without escutcheon 3…4 83.5 (3.29)
3…4 91.5 (3.60)
120 (4.72)
114 (4.49)
45 (1.77)
30 (1.18) 30 (1.18)30 (1.18)
1.5 (0.06)
1.1 N•m
130
(5.11)
65 (2.52)
45 (1.77) 116 (4.57)
16 (0.63)
41 (1.61)
24(0.94)
73 (2.87)
95.5 (3.60)
90.5 (3.56)
82.5 (3.25)
130
(5.11)
65 (2.52)
45 (1.77)
30 (1.18)30 (1.18)
84 (3.31)
90 (3.54)
45 (1.77)
35 (1.38)
3.5 (0.138)
7.5 (0.30)
X
Rockwell Automation Publication 140G-SG001E-EN-P - March 2017 199 Approximate Dimensions
Figure 99 - Drilling Template for Molded Case Circuit Breaker Mounting Figure 100 - Cat. Nos. 140G-H-ECM, -ECM4 Terminals
⋆ Required 25 mm insulating phase barriers provided.
‡ End Cap terminals for ring or busbar connection.
15 (0.59)
15 (0.59)
55.5 (2.19)
111
(4.37)
Ø 4.5 (0.18) - M4
15 (0.59)
55.5 (2.19)
111
(4.37)
Ø 4.5 (0.18) - M4
45 (1.77)
3 Poles 4 Poles
Ø 6 (0.24)
7 (0.28) max.
6 N•m
20 (0.79) max.
12 (0.47)
65 (2.56)
25 (0.98)
18 (0.71)
5 (0.20) max.
58 (2.28)
r ___ Y
' ' ' ' '
I I I I I
X--+------------- X X---<---- -•-X X
I I l I I
' ' l ' '
Ll l I
y y
X
y
200 Rockwell Automation Publication 140G-SG001E-EN-P - March 2017 Approximate Dimensions
Figure 101 - Cat. Nos. 140G-H-EXT3, -EXT4 Extended Terminals § Extended terminals.
♣Optional terminal covers with IP40 protec tion provided.
Δ Required 100 mm insulating phase barriers provided.
♦ Supplied
insulator panel, required for Ue >440V applications.
♠ Drilling template for 3-pole molded case circuit breaker, Ue>440V (required). Drilling template for 4-pole molded case circuit breaker, Ue>440V (required). 3 Poles 4 Poles
30 (1.18) 30 (1.18)30 (1.18) 30 (1.18)30 (1.18)
Ø 8.2 (0.32) Ø 8.2 (0.32)
17.5 (0.69) 17.5 (0.69)
~100
(3.94) ~100
(3.94)
130
(5.11)
130
(5.11)
50 (1.97)
50 (1.97)
25.5 (1.00)
5 (0.20)
6 N•m
180
(7.09)
1 (0.04)
Ø 4.5 (0.18)
45 (1.77)
15 (0.59)
90 (3.54)
150 (5.90)
119
(4.69)
119
(4.69)
111
(4.37)
119
(4.69)
119
(4.69)
Ø 2.65 (1.04) Ø 2.65 (1.04)
111
(4.37)
Ø 4.5 (0.18)
15 (0.59)
15 (0.59)
120 (4.72)
♦
§
y
'( '(
0 I 0--,:::,---,- 0 -::::,,-----,,
I
I
I
I
I
I ______ , X
I
I
~------<-------+- $ ~--+--------+-$
o--+---~
y y
Rockwell Automation Publication 140G-SG001E-EN-P - March 2017 201 Approximate Dimensions
Figure 102 - Cat. Nos. 140G-H-EXS3, -EXS4 Spreader Terminals ★ Drilling template for 3-pole molded case circuit breaker, Ue>440V (required). ‡ Drilling template for 4-pole molded case circuit breaker, Ue>440V (required). § Extended spread terminals.
♣ Required 200 mm insulating phase barriers provided.
Δ Supplied
insulator panel, required for Ue >440V applications.
6 N•m
Ø 10.5 (0.41)
1 (0.04)
25.5 (1.00)
5 (0.20)
45 (1.77)
30 (1.18) 30 (1.18)30 (1.18) 30 (1.18)
45 (1.77)45 (1.77)
165 (6.50)
Ø 10.5 (0.41)
~200
(7.87) ~200
(7.87)
108
(4.25)
123
(4.84)
108
(4.25)
123
(4.84)
30 (1.18) 30 (1.18)30 (1.18)
52.5 (2.07) 52.5 (2.07)
135 (5.31)
Ø 4.5 (0.18)
45 (1.77) 15 (0.59)
112.5 (4.43)
195 (7.68)
111
(4.37)
55.5 (2.19)
141
(5.55)
141
(5.55)
Ø 2.65 (0.10)
15 (0.59)
Ø 4.5 (0.18)
15 (0.59)
111
(4.37)
141
(5.55)
141
(5.55)
Ø 2.65 (0.10)
165 (6.50)
3 Poles4 Poles
y =I= *
I
I
I _______ J_ X ---- X X _____ ,
I
I
X
I I
I
I • •
I
I
I
I
I 0 0
y y
202 Rockwell Automation Publication 140G-SG001E-EN-P - March 2017 Approximate Dimensions
Figure 103 - Cat. Nos. 140G-H-TLC13, -TLC14 Terminals
§ Required 25 mm insulating phase barriers provided
♦ Copper terminals.
Figure 104 - Cat. Nos. 140G-H-MTL63, -MTL64 Terminals
§ Copper terminals
♦ Multi-cable terminals
30 (1.18) 30 (1.18)30 (1.18)
~25 (0.98)
25 (0.98)
7 N•m
14 x 14
(0.55 x 0.55)
65 (2.56) 58
(2.28)
30 (1.18) 30 (1.18)30 (1.18)
Ø 8.2 (0.32)
7 N•m
7 N•m
6 N•m
14 x 14
(0.55 x 0.55)
25 (0.98)
65 (2.56)
115
(4.53)
58 (2.28)
72 (2.83)
10 (0.39) 10
(0.39)
40 (1.57)
10 (0.39)
27.5 (1.08)
15 (0.59)
20 (0.71)
29 (1.14)
32 (1.26)
1--,o--a_--,.U
I
1~ ---
1'
x-~=
h- ---
1,
\I
x- t'-- -,, ,, ,,
H---
"
§
-x
y
-x
y
Rockwell Automation Publication 140G-SG001E-EN-P - March 2017 203 Approximate Dimensions
Figure 105 - Cat. No. 140G-H-RMB, -RMY Direct Rotary Operating Handle ‡ Rotary handle operating mechanism on molded case circuit breaker ♦ Required 25 mm insulating phase barriers provided
Figure 106 - 140G-H-RVM… Minimum/Maximum Enclosure Depth Min. door
rotation radius
Drilling: See Detail “A”
R min. 200 (7.87)
81 (3.19)
88 (3.46)
56 (2.20)
49.3 (1.94)
14 (0.55)14.5 (0.57)
Ø 3.5
(0.14)
80°
Detail “A”
≥ 3 (0.11) ≤ 2 (0.08)
1.1 N•m
2 (0.08)
90 (3.54) [3P]
120 (4.72) [4P]
45 (1.77)
120 (4.72)
16.5 (0.65)
48.8 (1.92)
130
(5.11)
171.8 (6.76)
126.3 (4.97) 45.5 (1.79)
16.5 (0.65)
1 Enclosure Depth
Minimum Maximum
12 in. Shaft 8 in. (205 mm) 18.25 in. (464 mm)
21 in. Shaft 27.25 in. (692 mm)
12 in. Shaft w/NFPA 9.25 in.
(235 mm)
18.25 in. (464 mm)
21 in. Shaft w/NFPA 27.25 in.(692 mm)
Note: this figure depicts the minimum and maximum enclosure sizes that will accommodate the MCCB, operator, and handle. See Figure 107 for overall assembly dimensions and cutout..
I
j
X i~ ---Ul-'~llt-t~
y
r-
I
I
I
I
I
I
I I I
I I I
~ -=--=--=--=-~~f J :
...1. -....J I I
I l __ J
I I
: ~-----:
I I
I L I
I I l __
204 Rockwell Automation Publication 140G-SG001E-EN-P - March 2017 Approximate Dimensions
Figure 107 - Cat. No. 140G-H-RVM… Rotary Handle Operating Mechanism 3-Pole 4-Pole
6.86 (174.3)
Front of Cover (50)
1.97 (25)
(2) - (ø 5.5)
(ø 35)
(63)
(31.5)
(mm)
in.
3.17 (80.5)
3.54 (90.0)
5.12 (130.0)
1.44 (36.5)
0.08 (2.0)
4.88 (124.0)
1.57 (40.0)
0.65 (16.5)
5.12 (130.0)
12 in. shaft: 10.75 (274) max.
22 in. shaft: 20.75 (527) max.
(2) - ø 0.22
ø 1.37
0.98 2.47
1.23 1.57
(40.0)
0.65 (16.5)
1.57 (40.0)
(ø 35)
ø 1.37
(50)
1.97 (25)
0.98 (25)
0.98 (2) - (ø 5.5)
(2) - ø 0.22
1 (25.4)
t-
0 Rockwell Automation Publication 140G-SG001E-EN-P - March 2017 205 Approximate Dimensions
Figure 108 - Cat. No. 140G-H-EOP … Motor Operator
⋆ Motor operator
Δ Drilling template for 3-pole molded case circuit breaker, mounted on mounting plate ♦ Drilling template for 4-pole molded case circuit breaker, mounted on mounting plate ♠ Required 25 mm insulating phase barriers provided
Figure 109 - Door Drilling Template
4 Poles3 Poles
90 (3.54) [3P]
120 (4.72) [4P]
30 (1.18) 30 (1.18)30 (1.18)
45 (1.77)
1.1 N•m
130
(5.11)
12 (0.47)
33.5 (1.32)
28 (1.10)
1.8 (0.07)
14.8 (0.58)
14.2 (0.56) 38.8 (1.53)
Ø 4.5 (0.18) - M4
≥ 3 (0.11) ≤ 2 (0.08) 172 (6.77)
15 (0.59)15
(0.59)
82.5 (3.25)
178.3 (7.02)
37.5 (1.48)
26.5 (1.04)
61.5 (2.42)
48 (1.89)
77.3 (3.04)
Ø 4.5 (0.18) - M4
15 (0.59)45 (1.77)
55.5 (2.19)
111
(4.37)
55.5 (2.19)
111
(4.37)
91 (3.58)
45.5 (1.79)
48.7 (1.92)
79 (3.11)
101 (3.98)
50.5 (1.99)
54.7 (2.15)
91 (3.58)
Door drilling template (without escutcheon). Door drilling template (with escutcheon).
X
.I
-,u ■
I] - - _j
I
I I
b : :
X
r---
-
I
I
.J. - I
¢:::i
. r
i i i
xl17x
I I
~~
i
, - - 7-1
/,f" I
-+-~
~ X
~
I L-..\aaai=~~=-~-~ L----'-
~ ---
\
*
1'
1-e---------->
fE---,
-
-
--
·,q
I I
I I x-,----,--- X
I
I
L• __
L ___ J ___ _j L:: __
y
206 Rockwell Automation Publication 140G-SG001E-EN-P - March 2017 Approximate Dimensions
Figure 110 - H-Frame Flex Cable Operator and Actuator
10.53 (267.4)
6.37 (161.7)
2.06 (52.4)
1.27 (32.3)
4.38 (111.1)
8.48 (215.4)8.30
(210.8)
3.54 (90)
(3 Pole)
2.46 (62.6)
1.01 (25.6)
3.17 (80.5)
.36
(9)
7.12 (180.8)
5.63 (143.1)2.46
(62.6)
10.17 (258.4)
6.12 (155.4)5.12
(130)
I
I
I
I
_,,,,,,,, .. -··--
/···/ .. _ ----/' ··-----••
/ '-
Rockwell Automation Publication 140G-SG001E-EN-P - March 2017 207 Approximate Dimensions
Figure 111 - Cat. No. 140G-H-ELP1604 Residual Current Release Module ⋆ Residual current module.
‡ End cap terminals for ring or busbar connection.
♠ D
rilling template — door with direct rotary m echanism and escutcheon. ▶ Drilling template — door with direct rotary me chanism, without escutcheon. & Drilling template — molded case circuit breaker mounting on mounting plate.
Description No. of Poles A
With escutcheon 4 86 (3.39)
Without escutcheon 4 83.5 (3.25)
4 Poles
120 (4.72) [4P]
Ø 4.5 (0.18) - M4
≥ 3 (0.11) ≤ 2 (0.08)
Ø 7
(0.28)
Ø 6 (0.24)
30 (1.18) 30 (1.18)30 (1.18)
20 (0.79) Max.
65 (2.56)
205
(8.07)
7 max.
(0.28)
58 (2.28)
1.1 N•m
18 (0.71)
6 N•m
191
(7.52)
73 (2.87) 66
(2.60)
148
(5.83)
7 max.
(0.28)
58 (2.28)
18 (0.71) max. 5 (0.20) max.18 (0.71)
114 (4.49)
5 (0.20) max.
45 (1.77)
15 (0.59)
55.5 (2.19)
186
(7.32)
124 (4.88)
47 (1.85)
29 (1.14)
158
(6.22)
116 (4.57)
43 (1.69)
116 (4.57)
43 (1.69)
75 (2.95)
25 (0.98)
65 (2.56)
60 (2.36)
~ - - ----L--_/ &
I
I
I I
HH----------r--------.- J - - -_I - X
I I
I I
I I
I I
I I
I I
I
~------~-- I ----t-------&--+--~
J•"• A .ii.
[_rJ t
I
_-- _ 4-x
I Q □□ i
I
I
~ i O i
I I
---- __ J
y y
208 Rockwell Automation Publication 140G-SG001E-EN-P - March 2017 Approximate Dimensions
Bulletin 140G/MG I-Frame
Figure 112 - Panel Mounted Molded Case Circuit Breaker
‡ Overall dimensions of optional side covers.
§ Required 25 mm insulating phases barriers provided.
Figure 113 - DIN Rail Mounted Molded Case Circuit Breaker Description No. of Poles A
With escutcheon 3…4 74 (2.91)
Without escutcheon 3…4 71 (2.80)
3…4 79 (3.11)
140 (5.52) [4P]
134.8 (5.31)
52.5 (2.07)
35 (1.38)
35 (1.38)
35 (1.38)
1 (0.04)
1 (0.04)
150
(5.90)
75 (2.95)
1.1 N•m
45 (1.77)
99.8 (3.93)
105 (4.13) [3P]
101 (3.98)
45 (1.77)
41 (1.61)
10.5 (0.42)
12.5 (0.49)
83 (3.27)
78 (3.07)
70 (2.76)
1 (0.04)
≥ 3
(0.11)
≤ 2
(0.08)
140 (5.52) [4P]
35 (1.38)
105 (4.13) [3P]
35 (1.38)
35 (1.38)
52.5 (2.07)
1.1 N•m
70 (2.76)
35 (1.38)
150
(5.90)
101 (3.98)
45 (1.77)
82 (3.23)
1.5 (0.06)
9 (0.35)
7.5 (0.30)
21.5 (0.85)
⋆ Mounting bracket.
‡ Optional side covers.
§ Optional front cover for DIN Rail.
♣ Required 25 mm insulating phase
barriers provided.
♦ Flexible insulator.
I §
•s-+---1l-----+-----1~1
I
I Ii+~, -~-+--Z-....:....¥....:::...JiU
I I
111
II ,(~J ·
~ -_.,_ -.,._...:,,:;~~~
I
I
I
I
;f ~~-----=- ;:::..:.,_.....u
+ _/ ; : ~; : ~_____,,,,1.--__J
II: ~
+
♦
:j:
ctl
*
______,.
~
x1
~
(
_/
- - I
--l~
X' '-"--.
~
- '
'\ §
\.._ +
¢::J
Rockwell Automation Publication 140G-SG001E-EN-P - March 2017 209 Approximate Dimensions
Figure 114 - Drilling Template for Molded Case Circuit Breaker Mounting Figure 115 - Cat. Nos. 140G-I-ECM, -ECM4 Terminals
★ End cap terminals for ring or busbar connection.
♠ Re quired
25 mm insulating phase barriers provided.
Figure 116 - Cat. Nos. 140G-I-EXS3, -EXS4 Terminals ★
♣ Extended spread terminals.
♦ Required 200 mm insulating phase barriers provided.
★Ue >440V requires supplied insulator panel (not shown in illustration). 35 (1.38)
61 (2.40)
122
(4.80)
Ø 4.5 (0.18) - M4
35 (1.38)
61 (2.40)
122
(4.80)
Ø 4.5 (0.18) - M4
35 (1.38)
3 Poles 4 Poles
Max. 16 (0.63)
Max. 5 (0.2)
6 N•m
57.5 (2.26)
11 (0.43)
6.5 (0.26)
65 (2.56)
Max. 7.5 (0.3)
24.5 (0.96)
165 (6.50)
45 (1.77) 45 (1.77)45 (1.77)
Ø 10.5 (0.41) Ø 10.5 (0.41)
6 N•m
5 (0.20)
30 (1.18)
30 (1.18)
30 (1.18)
30 (1.18)
30 (1.18)
30 (1.18)
30 (1.18)
~200
(7.88) ~200
(7.88)
118
(4.65)
133
(5.24)
118
(4.65)
133
(5.24)
130 (5.11)
50 (1.97) 50 (1.97)
25 (0.98)
6 (0.24)
y
1· l =t ·1
"' "' = =
I I I
y
I
' ----+- 7
I
i i
XI --1- X
I
I -----+----fl>--+--~
♦
210 Rockwell Automation Publication 140G-SG001E-EN-P - March 2017 Approximate Dimensions
Figure 117 - Cat. Nos. 140G-I-EXT3, -EXT4 Extended Terminals ‡ Extended terminals
§ Optional terminal covers with IP40 protection provided Δ Required 100 mm insulating phase barriers provided
Figure 118 - Cat. Nos. 140G-I-TLA1A3, -TLA1A4 Terminals ★ 30…150 mm2 terminals.
‡ Required 25 mm insulating phase barriers prov ided.
Figure 119 - Cat. Nos. 140G-I-TLA3, -TLA4 Terminals
6 N•m
25 (0.98)
6 (0.24)
35 (1.38) 35 (1.38)35 (1.38)
~100
(3.93)
150
(5.91)
60 (2.36)
19.5 (0.77)
17.5 (0.69)
Ø 10 (0.39)
230
(9.06)
202
(7.95)
35 (1.38)35 (1.38)35 (1.38)
25 (0.98)
75 (2.96)
31 N•m
Ø 17 (0.67)
33.5 (1.32)
58 (2.28)
35 (1.38)35 (1.38)35 (1.38)
28 (1.10) 18 x 18
(0.71 x 0.71)
30 N•m
58 (2.28)
75 (2.95)
★Terminals for AlCu wire.
§ Required 25 mm insulating phase barriers provided.
IL ___ _
x--~:----
;f'
11 l•--11 l'
~-~-----..... -----
'
I
,r - - -
x-::
y
X
y §
:j:
X
y
/
&
Rockwell Automation Publication 140G-SG001E-EN-P - March 2017 211 Approximate Dimensions
Figure 120 - Cat. Nos. 140G-I-TLC13, -TLC14 Terminals
♦ T erminals for copper wire.
& Required 25 mm insulating phase barriers provided.
Figure 121 - Cat. Nos. 140G-I-MTL63, -MTL64 Terminals
Δ Multi-cable terminal lugs.
§ Required 25 mm insulating phase barriers. Opti onal terminal covers with IP40 protection provided. 28 (1.10)
18 x 18
(0.71 x 0.71)
58 (2.28)
10 N•m
8 N•m
7 N•m
135
(5.31)
82 (3.23)
15 (0.59)
15 (0.59)
28 (1.10)
Ø 8.2 (0.32)
26.5 (1.04)
45.5 (1.79)
II
II
II
I~ - - - -
1111
y
212 Rockwell Automation Publication 140G-SG001E-EN-P - March 2017 Approximate Dimensions
Figure 122 - Cat. No. 140G-G-RMB, -RMY Direct Rotary Operating Handle (For I- and G-Frame Molded Case Circuit Breaker)
‡ Rotary handle operating mechanism on molded case circuit breaker ♣ Door drilling template with direct rotary handle
♦ Required 25 mm insulating phase barriers provided
Figure 123 - 140G-G-RVM… Minimum/Maximum Enclosure Depth (for I-Frame Molded Case Circuit Breaker) Min. door rotation radius
Drilling: See Detail “A”
R min. 200 (7.87)
81 (3.19)
88 (3.46)
56 (2.20)
49.3 (1.94)
14 (0.55)14.5 (0.57)
1.1 N•m
Ø 3.5 (0.14)
≥ 3 (0.12) ≤ 2 (0.08)
11 (0.43)
80°
108 (4.25)
150
(5.91)
11 (0.43)
70 (2.76)
110 (4.33)
159.25 (6.27)
52.5 (2.07)
105 (4.13) [3P]
140 (5.51) [4P]
1 Enclosure Depth
Note: this figure depicts the minimum and maximum enclosure sizes that will accommodate the MCCB, operator, and handle. See Figure 124 for overall assembly dimensions and handle cutout.
Minimum Maximum
12 in. Shaft 7.25 in. (191 mm) 17.75 in. (451 mm)
21 in. Shaft 26.75 in. (679 mm)
12 in. Shaft w/NFPA 9 in. (229 mm) 17.75 in. (451 mm)
21 in. Shaft w/NFPA 26.75 in. (679 mm)
r-
7 I
,, , ,
,------1 I
I : : :
-7 I I I I
~.:-.:-.:-.:-.J~ l-.J : : :
..1_...J 1-1 I I I
I I I I I
I l __ J I I
I I [ I
I I 1 1
I -1 I
I I I
I L I
L__ I I
Rockwell Automation Publication 140G-SG001E-EN-P - March 2017 213 Approximate Dimensions
Figure 124 - Cat. No. 140G-G-RVM… Variable Depth Rotary Handle Operating Mechanism (For I-Frame Molded Case Circuit Breaker)
5.91 (150,0)
4.13 (105,0)
6.37 (161,8)
2.20 (55,9)
0.61 (15,5)
0.08 (2,0)
0.61 (15,6)
5.51 (140,0)
5.91 (150,0)
0.20 (5,1)
2.20 (55,9)
0.61 (15,5)
0.08 (2.0)
3-Pole 4-Pole
12 in. shaft: 11.38 (289)
21 in. shaft: 20.38 (517.8)
Front of Cover
50 (1.97)
50 (1.97)
25 25
(0.98)
(2) - ø 5.5
(2) - ø 0.22)
ø 35
(ø 1.37)
63 (2.47)
31.5 (1.23)
25 (0.98)
(2) - ø 5.5
(2) - ø 0.22)
ø 35
(ø 1.37)
mm
(in.)
(0.98)
r
I
___l___ _
0 ◄-
L
J
I
t
214 Rockwell Automation Publication 140G-SG001E-EN-P - March 2017 Approximate Dimensions
Figure 125 - Cat. No. 140G-G-EOP … Motor Operator (I-Frame) ♣ Motor operator
♠ Required 25 mm insulating phase barriers provided
Figure 126 - Door Drilling Template
140 (5.51) [4P]
105 (5.31) [3P] 70 (3.07)
1.1 N•m
≥ 3 (0.11) ≤ 2 (0.08)172 (6.77)
52.5 (2.07)
150
(5.90)
1.1 N•m
25 (0.98)
87 (3.43)
43.5 (1.71)
50.5 (1.99)
108
(4.25)
77 (3.03)
38.5 (1.52)
45.5 (1.79)
98 (3.86)
With Escutcheon Without Escutcheon
II ~ ~ - - -1rr-111111.:.1_~-F"'\.-llaJI x, ,-- ~
,, ,, ,,
11-- - - -
I
~-¥--lr-~~~=~~-::::::;:i!-,1
I\
, 1· r :1 ,
I
I
x-, '@-
I I
·X
I
I
L__ - --.L --- ____J
y
l
I
x- + I
l l
•
c__ ___ .L ___ ____J
y
· X
Rockwell Automation Publication 140G-SG001E-EN-P - March 2017 215 Approximate Dimensions
Figure 127 - Cat. No. 140G-I-ELP2503 Residual Current Release Module ★ Terminals for cable connection
‡ Terminal covers with IP40 protection
Δ Drilling template — molded case circuit breaker mounting on mounting plate Description No. of Poles A
With escutcheon 3 74 (2.91)
Without escutcheon 3 71 (2.80)
135 (5.31)
105 (4.13) [3P]
52.5 (2.07)
1.1 N•m
10 N•m
≥ 3 (0.12)
≤ 2
(0.08)
99.8 (3.93)
45 (1.77)
77 (3.03)
217
(8.54) 49.9 (1.96)
35 (1.38)
35 (1.38)
70 (2.76)
19 (0.75)
19 (0.75)
116
(4.57)
12.5 (0.49)
45 (1.77)
83 (3.27)
101 (3.98)
70 (2.76)
Ø 4.5 (0.177) - M4
67.5 (2.66)
35 (1.38)
61 (2.40)
122
(4.80)
141.5
(5.57)
18 x 18
(0.71 x 0.71)
*
II
"
X ---
:j:
y
A
- - - ---===='..
O II lloll lloll I J
= =
y
t
I
I I
I I I
x- L ---- 1 -x
I I
I I
I I
---- =.J
y
216 Rockwell Automation Publication 140G-SG001E-EN-P - March 2017 Approximate Dimensions
Figure 128 - Cat. No. 140G-I-ELP2504 Residual Current Release Module for 4-Pole Molded Case Circuit Breakers ★ T erminals for cable connection.
‡ Terminal covers with IP40 protection.
Δ Drilling template — molded case circuit breaker mounting on mounting plate.
Description No. of Poles A
With escutcheon 4 74 (2.91)
Without escutcheon 4 71 (2.80)
52.5 (2.07)
1.1 N•m
10 N•m
70 (2.76)
19 (0.75)
18 x 18
(0.71 x 0.71)
116
(4.57)
12.5 (0.49)
45 (1.77)
19 (0.75)
≥ 3 (0.12)
≤ 2
(0.08)
101 (3.98)
45 (1.77)
35 (1.38)
35 (1.38)
35 (1.38)
140 (5.51) [4P]
170 (6.70)
77 (3.03)
223.5
(8.80)
134.8 (5.31)
49.9 (1.96)
83 (3.27)
70 (2.76)
Ø 4.5 (0.177) - M4
35 (1.38)
35 (1.38)
61 (2.40)
122
(4.80)141.5
(5.57)
102.5 (4.04)
*
A
I
I I
I I
J___ ---1 -- X
I
I I
I I
I
y
Rockwell Automation Publication 140G-SG001E-EN-P - March 2017 217 Approximate Dimensions
Figure 129 - I-Frame Flex Cable Operator and Actuator
10.77 (273.5)
6.92 (175.7)
5.91 (150)
4.13 (105)
(3 Pole)
2.38 (60.4)
.92
(23.4)
2.68 (68)
.46
(11.7)
7.93 (201.4)
5.06 (128.4)
2.38 (60.4)
2.06 (52.4)
1.27 (32.3)
10.53 (267.4)
6.37 (161.7)
4.52 (114.7)
8.30 (210.8)
8.48 (215.4)
/
/
/_.,,,-·
- --- ·· ----- ---
218 Rockwell Automation Publication 140G-SG001E-EN-P - March 2017 Approximate Dimensions
Bulletin 140G/MG J-Frame
Figure 130 - Panel Mounted Molded Case Circuit Breaker
‡ Overall dimensions of optional wiring ducts.
§ Required 25 mm insulating phase barriers provided.
Figure 131 - DIN Rail Mounted Molded Case Circuit Breaker ★ Mounting bracket
§ Required 25 mm insulating phase barriers provided
Description No. of Poles A
With escutcheon 3…4 86 (3.39)
Without escutcheon 3…4 83.5 (3.29)
3…4 91.5 (3.60)
105 (4.13) [3P]
≥ 3 (0.12)
≤ 2
(0.08)
35 (1.38)
35 (1.38)
35 (1.38)
52.5 (2.07)
140 (5.51) [4P]
1.1 N•m
135 (5.31) 95.5 (3.76)
90.5 (3.56)
82.5 (3.25)
117 (4.60)
16 (0.63)
41 (1.61)
24 (0.94)
87 (3.42)
80 (3.14)
160
(6.30)
45 (1.77)
100 (3.93)
1 (0.04)
1 (0.04)
1 (0.04)
1.1 N•m
16 (0.63)
41 (1.61)
24 (0.94)
87 (3.42)
117 (4.60)
7.5 (0.30)
35 (1.38)
35 (1.38)
35 (1.38)
35 (1.38)
35 (1.38)
35 (1.38)
3.5 (0.14)
45 (1.77) 45 (1.77)
80 (3.14)
160
(6.30)
80 (3.14)
160
(6.30)
52.5 (2.07)
52.5 (2.07)
140 (5.51) [4P] 105 (4.13) [3P]
135 (5.31)
1.5 (0.06)
82.5 (3.25)
90.5 (3.56)
95.5 (3.76)
17.5 (0.69)
69.5 (2.74)
lr----_:=:-----1 I_I
Rockwell Automation Publication 140G-SG001E-EN-P - March 2017 219 Approximate Dimensions
Figure 132 - Drilling Template for Molded Case Circuit Breaker Mounting Figure 133 - Cat. Nos. 140G-J-ECM, -EC M4 Terminals
★ Required 25 mm insulating phase barriers provided.
‡ End cap terminals for ring or busbar connection.
Ø 4.5 (0.177) - M4
17.5 (0.69) 17.5 (0.69)
69.5 (2.74)
139
(5.48)
Ø 4.5 (0.177) - M4
17.5 (0.69)
69.5 (2.74)
139
(5.48)
52.5 (2.07)
3 Poles 4 Poles
24 (0.94) max.
25 (0.98)
Ø 8 (0.32)
17.5 (0.69)
80 (3.15)
9 (0.35) max.
19 (0.75) 5 (0.20) max.
8 N•m
70 (2.76)
y
t
' e --,---l---+-----
l I I ' '
I
~ X
I
'
I
L_~t
I
X ---1-r X
i I
y
y
220 Rockwell Automation Publication 140G-SG001E-EN-P - March 2017 Approximate Dimensions
Figure 134 - Cat. Nos. 140G-J-EXT3, -EXT4 Extended Terminals § Extended terminals.
♣ Optional terminal covers with IP40 protection provided.
Δ Required 100 mm insul
ating phase barriers provided.
♦ Supplied insula
tor panel, required for Ue>440V applications.
♠ Drilling template for 3-pole molded case circuit breaker. Drilling template for 4-pole molded case circuit breaker. 4 Poles3 Poles
35 (1.38)
35 (1.38)
35 (1.38)
35 (1.38)
35 (1.38)
8 N•m
1 (0.04)
160
(6.30)160
(6.30)
~100
(3.93)
19.5 (0.77)
Ø 10 (0.39) Ø 10 (0.39)
19.5 (0.77)
60 (2.36)
60 (2.36)
226
(8.90)
25 (0.93)
6 (0.24)
Ø 4.5 (0.177) - M4
Ø 4.5 (0.177) - M4
~100
(3.93)
17.5 (0.69)
17.5 (0.69)
17.5 (0.69)
139
(5.47)
Ø 2.65 (0.10)
Ø 2.65 (0.10)
139
(5.47)
140.5
(5.53)
140.5
(5.53)
140.5
(5.53)
140.5
(5.53)
52.5 (2.07)
67.5 (2.66)
135 (5.31)
102.5 (4.04)
170 (6.69)
7 X
Rockwell Automation Publication 140G-SG001E-EN-P - March 2017 221 Approximate Dimensions
Figure 135 - Cat. Nos. 140G-J-EXS3, -EXS4 Spreader Terminals ★ Drilling template for 3-pole molded case circuit breaker. ‡ Drilling template for 4-pole molded case circuit breaker. § Extended spread terminals.
♣ Required 200 mm insulating phase barriers provided .
Δ Supplied insulator panel, required for Ue>440V applications. 4 Poles3 Poles
8 N•m
Ø 10.5 (0.41)
Ø 10.5 (0.41)
1 (0.04)
165 (6.50)
45 (1.77) 45 (1.77)45 (1.77)
~200
(7.88)
~200
(7.88)
30 (1.18) 30 (1.18)30 (1.18)30 (1.18)
30 (1.18) 30 (1.18) 30 (1.18)
5 (0.20)
130
(5.12)
145
(5.71) 130
(5.12)
145
(5.71)
50 (1.97) 50 (1.97)
130 (5.12)
25 (0.98)
6 (0.24)
Ø 4.5 (0.177) - M4
17.5 (0.69)
17.5 (0.69)
17.5 (0.69)
77.5 (3.05)
155 (6.10)
139
(5.47)
139
(5.47)
Ø 2.65 (0.10) Ø 2.65 (0.10)
163
(6.41)
163
(6.41)
163
(6.41)
163
(6.41)
52.5 (2.07)
115 (4.52)
195 (7.68)
* :j:
222 Rockwell Automation Publication 140G-SG001E-EN-P - March 2017 Approximate Dimensions
Figure 136 - Cat. Nos. 140G-J-TLA13, -TLA14 Terminal Lugs ★T erminals for aluminum or copper wire.
§ Required 25 mm insulating phase barriers provided.
Figure 137 - Cat. Nos. 140G-J-TLC13, -TLC14 Terminal Lugs ★ Terminals for copper wire.
♣ Required 25 mm insulating phase barriers provided.
Figure 138 - Cat. Nos. 140G-J-MTL63, -MTL64 Terminals
‡ Multi-cable terminal lugs.
§ Required 25 mm insulating phase barriers. Opti onal terminal covers with IP40 protection provided. 35 (1.38)
35 (1.38)
35 (1.38)
10 N•m
~25
(0.98)
80 (3.15) 70
(2.76)
27.5 (1.08)
17 x 17
(0.67 x 0.67)
35 (1.38)
35 (1.38)
35 (1.38)
10 N•m
70 (2.76)
27.5 (1.08)
80 (3.15)
35 (1.38)
35 (1.38)
35 (1.38)
140
(5.51)
7 N•m
8 N•m
Ø 8.2 (0.32)
45.5 (1.79)
26.5 (1.04)
15 (0.59)
15 (0.59)
30 (1.18) 38
(1.50)
94 (3.70)
if- -.i -
~f~1__ ~•jl,li,l,,llL...;:::;....,lll!l:;_~....;ilLl.r.111 I
'
:, - - -
j,... - - -
jl
jl
X-t
~;----~
,,
:~}.<;;~
:~!# r- -
y
y
~~ ,~1:- -;:t, tr---,,1:r-t-"1111:r--"11111
I \•-t,+ I
r~ ai.".. __
I
I
I j r - - -
IL - - - --j
j I
X-t~
y
X
§
X
X
18 x, 8
Rockwell Automation Publication 140G-SG001E-EN-P - March 2017 223 Approximate Dimensions
Figure 139 - Cat. No. 140G-H-RMB, -RMY Direct Rotary Operating Handle (For H- and J-Frame Molded Case Circuit Breaker)
‡ Rotary handle operating mechanism on molded case circuit breaker. ♦ Required 25 mm insulating phase barriers provided .
Figure 140 - Escutcheon Mount Drill Template.
Figure 141 - 140G-H-RVM… Minimum/Maximum Enclosure Depth (for J-Frame Mo lded Case Circuit Breakers) Ø 3.5
(0.14)
80°120 (4.72) [4P]
90 (3.54) [3P]
2 (0.08) 45 (1.77)
16.5 (0.65) 48.8
(1.92)
1.1 N•m
130
(5.12)
171.58 (6.76)
≥ 3 (0.12) ≤ 2 (0.08) 120 (4.72)
16.5 (0.65)
126.3 (4.97) 45.5 (1.79)
82.5 (3.25)
Min. Door
Rotation Radius
2 x Ø 3.5 (0.14)
82 (3.23)
61.5 (2.42)
55.3 (2.18)
89 (3.50)
41 (1.61)
14.5 (0.57) 14 (0.55)
R min. 200 (7.87)
1 Enclosure Depth
Minimum Maximum
12 in. Shaft 8 in. (205 mm) 18.25 in. (464 mm)
21 in. Shaft 27.25 in. (692 mm)
12 in. Shaft w/NFPA 9.25 in. (235 mm) 18.25 in. (464 mm) 21 in. Shaft w/NFPA 27.25 in. (692 mm)
Note: this figure depicts the minimum and maximum enclosure sizes that will accommodate the MCCB, operator, and handle. See Figure 142 for overall assembly dimensions and handle cutout.
j
x~~ H-lll--'-,\'13i+-'
,, ,,
H, - -
"'
r-
r, ,,,
Lr
I
.rl,--
:~-------l--
~ -=-=---:= __ •_1 ______ _
1----------------- 7
I I
I ,1
I I
I 1-----7
I I I
I I I I
I I I I
- 7 r-1 I I
D~~~~~~f~: :
I I I I
I l--~ :
I I I I ------1
I I
I L
I I I __________________ I
DET "A"
224 Rockwell Automation Publication 140G-SG001E-EN-P - March 2017 Approximate Dimensions
Figure 142 - Cat. No. 140G-H-RVM… Variable Depth Rotary Handle Operating Mechanism (For J-Frame Molded Case Circuit Breaker)
3-Pole 4-Pole
3.2 (83)
6.86 (174.3)
0.08 (2.0)0.61
(15.5)
2.09 (53.0)
6.30 (160.0)
4.13 (105.0)
2.09 (53.0)
6.30 (160.0)
1.99 (50.5)
5.51 (140.0)
Front of Cover (50)
1.97 (25)
(2) - (ø 5.5)
(ø 35)
(63)
(31.5)
(mm)
in.
(2) - ø 0.22
ø 1.37
0.98 2.47
1.23 (ø 35)
ø 1.37
(50)
1.97 (25)
0.98 (25)
0.98 (2) - (ø 5.5)
(2) - ø 0.22
12 in. shaft: 10.75 (274) max.
22 in. shaft: 20.75 (527) max.
0.65 (16.5)
0.65 (16.5)
1 (25.4)
-
I
t--t--
◄--------
I
- +'-'----------'--------'---~
I t
0 Rockwell Automation Publication 140G-SG001E-EN-P - March 2017 225 Approximate Dimensions
Figure 143 - Cat. No. 140G-H-EOP … Motor Operator – For H- & J-Frame Molded Case Circuit Breaker ★ Motor operator.
♠ Required 25 mm insulating phase barriers provided.
Figure 144 - Door Drilling Template
§ Door drilling template (with escutcheon).
♣ Door drilling template (without escutcheon).
Δ Dril
ling template for 3-pole molded case circuit breake r, mounted on mounting plate. ♦ Drilling template for 4-pole molded case circuit breake r, mounted on mounting plate. 35 (1.38)
140 (5.51) [4P]
105 (4.13) [3P]
35 (1.38)35 (1.38)
12 (0.47)
33.5 (1.32)
28 (1.10)
1.7 (0.07)
14.3 (0.56)
14.8 (0.58)
38.8 (1.53)
≥ 3 (0.12) 172 (6.77) ≤ 2 (0.08)
1.1 N•m
178.3 (7.02)
82.5 (3.25)
26.5 (1.04)
61.5 (3.42)
4 Poles3 Poles
91 (3.58)
91 (3.58)
45 (1.79)
79.5 (3.11)
49 (1.92)
54.7 (2.15)
101 (3.98)
50.5 (1.99)
35 (1.38)
Ø 4.5 (0.177) - M4 Ø 4.5 (0.177) - M4
69.5 (2.74)
139
(5.47)
69.5 (2.74)
139
(5.47)
52.5 (2.07) 17.5 (0.69)
With Escutcheon Without Escutcheon
,,
t--- 111_--l--H-nn
X
y
♦
\
I
I I I
I I I X-+- --x
l •-11
I
I I
y
226 Rockwell Automation Publication 140G-SG001E-EN-P - March 2017 Approximate Dimensions
Figure 145 - Cat. No. 140G-J-EP2504 Residual Current Release Module for 4-Pole Molded Case Circuit Breakers ★Residual current module.
‡ End cap terminals for ring or busbar connection.
♠Dr
illing template — door with direct rotary mechanism with escutcheon. Drilling template — door with direct rotary mechanism, without escutcheon. & Drilling template — molded case circuit breaker mounting on mounting plate.
Description No. of Poles A
With escutcheon 4 86 (3.39)
Without escutcheon 4 83.5 (3.29)
140 (5.51) [4P]
35 (1.38)35 (1.38)35 (1.38)
24 (0.94) max.
Ø 8 (0.31)
236
(9.29)
80 (3.15)
9 (0.35)
max.
70 (2.76)
9 (0.35)
max.
Ø 8 (0.31)
24 (0.94) max.
134 (5.28) 3 (0.12) ≥ 3 (0.12)
1.1 N•m
19 (0.75) 6 (0.24) max.
8 N•m
215
(8.47)
87 (3.43)
81 (3.19)
58 (2.28)
163
(6.42)
≤ 2 (0.08)
19 (0.75) 6 (0.24) max.
Ø 4.5 (0.177) - M4
215
(8.47)
52.5 (2.07) 17.5 (0.69)
145 (5.71)
54.5 (2.15)
29 (1.14)
173
(6.81)
137 (5.39)
51 (2.01)
89 (3.50)
25 (0.98)
80 (3.15)
60 (2.36)
50 (1.97)
136 (5.35)
y
I
I "' & ,;,
I (0
x- _J_
X I I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
A
I y
~:1 V ---(
I
1-x
I
Rockwell Automation Publication 140G-SG001E-EN-P - March 2017 227 Approximate Dimensions
Figure 146 - J-Frame Flex Cable Operator and Actuator
4.13 (105)
(3 Pole)
6.30 (160)
7.30 (185.4)
10.62 (269.7)
2.43 (61.6)
5.59 (142.1)
8.30 (210.8)
.40
(10)
3.17 (80.5)
.97
(24.6)
2.43 (61.6)
2.06 (52.4)
1.27 (32.3)
6.37 (161.7)
10.53 (267.4)
4.52 (114.7)
8.48 (215.4)
8.30 (210.8)
---------- ··-/ · -
\
228 Rockwell Automation Publication 140G-SG001E-EN-P - March 2017 Approximate Dimensions
Bulletin 140G/MG K-Frame
Figure 147 - Panel Mounted Molded Case Circuit Breaker
★ Overall dimensions with optional shunt trip or undervoltage relay installed. ‡ Overall dimensions with optional auxiliary contacts installed.
Figure 148 - Drilling Templates for Molded Case Circuit Breaker Mounting 139.5 (5.49) [3P]
69.75 (2.75)
46.5 (1.83)
46.5 (1.83)
46.5 (1.83)
102.5
(4.04)
2.7 (0.11)
205
(8.07)
2.7 (0.11)
105
(4.13) 5.5
(0.22)
186 (7.32) [4P] ≥ 3 (0.12)
≤ 2 (0.08)
2 N•m
107
(4.21)
139
(5.47)
112.5
(4.43)
103.5
(4.07)
59.5 (2.34)
105
(4.13)
117
(4.61)
76 (2.99)
138
(5.43)
115
(4.53)
115
(4.53)
64.5 (2.54)
107
(4.21)
107
(4.21)
60.5 (2.38)
Ø 5.5 (0.22) -M5
46.5 (1.83)
176
(6.93)
88 (3.46)
Ø 5.5 (0.22) -M5
176
(6.93)
88 (3.46)
93 (3.66)
23.25 (0.92)
With escutcheon (3…4 poles) Without escutcheon (3…4 poles) Escutcheon for compartment door Drilling template for compartment door Drilling template for mounting plate
3 poles 4 poles
:j:
y y
X
• y y
Rockwell Automation Publication 140G-SG001E-EN-P - March 2017 229 Approximate Dimensions
Figure 149 - Cat. Nos. 140G-K-ECM, -ECM4 Terminals
Figure 150 - Cat. Nos. 140G-K-TLC13, -TLC14 Terminals
• 250…500 MCM (120…240 mm2)
Figure 151 - Cat. Nos. 140G-K-TLA23, -TLA24, -TLC23, -TLC24 Terminals • (2) 2/0…250 MCM ((2) 95…120 mm2)
★ Terminal covers with IP40 protection
Figure 152 - Cat. Nos. 140G-K-TLA13, -TLA14 Terminals
• 250…500 MCM (120…240 mm2)
Max. 35
(1.38)
17.5 (0.69)
Ø 10.5 (0.41)
Max. 11
(0.43)
20 (0.79)
86.25 (3.4)
28 N•m
Max. 10
(0.39)
Min. 5
(0.2)
y
2_~0~..,__---+-~- 18 x18
0.19 0.11 X0.11
25Nm
~ 103.5
I 4.07
0 21 .5 * 0 0.85
E z
230 Rockwell Automation Publication 140G-SG001E-EN-P - March 2017 Approximate Dimensions
Figure 153 - Cat. Nos. 140G-K-TLA2A3 Terminals
• (2) 3/0…500 MCM [(2) 95…240 mm2]
Figure 154 - Cat. Nos. 140G-K-EXT3, -EXT4 Extended Terminals ★ Terminal covers with IP40 protection
‡ Required 100 mm insulating phase barriers provided
8.92 (226.5)
4.88 (124)
0.76 (19.3)
0.50 (12.8)
6.50 (165)
2.27 (57.8)
0~
"'"'
i-'- 139.5 (3P)
I 5.49
46.5 4
y
...j- 69.75
2.75 186 (4P)
1.32 -
f----..,
-
- - □ ~ ~ □-
0 = 0 =o
~ ,___ ~
0 0 0
'1 (
~ o•o•o -
~ -c:::::J
MOINC PIIMI! • •
-- oeoeo
,-
)
0 ~
0 = - □
103.5
4.07 l
0 0 ,___
~
0 =o -
□-
Rockwell Automation Publication 140G-SG001E-EN-P - March 2017 231 Approximate Dimensions
Figure 155 - Cat. Nos. 140G-K-EXS3, -EXS4 Spreader Terminals ★ Required 200 mm insulating phase barriers provided
Figure 156 - Cat. No. 140G-K-RMB, -RMY Rotary Handle Operating Mechanism — Door Mounted Figure 157 - 140G-K-RVM… Minimum/Maximum Enclosure Depth ★ Rotary handle operating mechanism on molded case
circuit breaker
‡ Padlock device for open position (max. 3 padlocks; user provided)
§ Dimensions with cabled early make contact
♣ Compartment door lock
1 Enclosure Depth
Minimum Maximum
12 in. Shaft 9 in. (229 mm) 17.75 in. (450 mm)
21 in. Shaft 26.75 in. (679 mm)
12 in. Shaft w/NFPA 11 in. (280 mm) 17.75 in. (450 mm)
21 in. Shaft w/NFPA 26.75 in. (679 mm)
Note: this figure depicts the minimum and maximum enclosure sizes that will accommodate the MCCB, operator, and handle. See Figure 158 for overall assembly dimensions and handle cutout.
~~~
54 54
2.13 2.131
3.75 40
0 11 0.15 1.51
0 183 33.25
1.21 1.31
146 ..,. <c
~ •
:j:
*
?. 3 140.5 ~2
0.12 5.53 0.08
r-
1----------------- 7
I I
I ,1
I I
I 1-----7
I I I
I I I I
I I I I
-7 r-1 I I
~~~~~~~r~ I I
J._...J [_: : :
: [ __ ~ :
I I I I ------1
I I
I L
I I
I __________________ I
232 Rockwell Automation Publication 140G-SG001E-EN-P - March 2017 Approximate Dimensions
Figure 158 - Cat. No. 140G-K-RVM… Variable Depth Rotary Handle Operating Mechanism ★Optional support bracket
75 (2.95)
4 - 5.5 ø
(4) - 0.22 ø)
75 (2.95)
37.5 (1.47) 65 ø
(2.56 ø)
37.5 (1.47)
Front of Cover
mm
(in.)
3-Pole 4-Pole
4.80 [122.0]
4.00 [101.5]
0.92 (23.3)
0.01 (0.3)
2.69 (68.3)
0.78 (19.7)
8.07 (205.0)
5.49 (139.5)
0.14 (3.5)
2.66 (67.6)
0.80 (20.4)
7.32 (186.0)
8.07 (205.0)
0.78 (19.7)
12 in. shaft: 17.75 (450.8)
21 in. shaft: 26.75 (679.4)
,-
0 Rockwell Automation Publication 140G-SG001E-EN-P - March 2017 233 Approximate Dimensions
Figure 159 - Cat No. 140G-K-EOP ... Motor Operator
★ Additional width with optional shunt trip or UV relay installed. ♦ Additional width with optional auxiliary c ontacts installed.
Figure 160 - Cat. No. 140G-K-ELP Residual Current Release Module for 4-Pole Molded Case Circuit Breakers ★Overall dimensions with cabled auxiliary contacts mounted.
5.5 (0.22)
5.5 (0.22)
105
(4.13)
1.1 N•m
191.5
(7.54)
59.5 (2.34)
105
(4.13)
≥ 3
(0.12)
≤ 2
(0.08)
222
(8.74)
233
(9.17)
[2)
I
X ~
y
)
1 ~3
0.12 ..
-
i
112.5
4.43 I
!, 2
4.21 0.08
139 ~
5.41 l ,I
i
I
,r.
l
~I
234 Rockwell Automation Publication 140G-SG001E-EN-P - March 2017 Approximate Dimensions
Figure 161 - K-Frame Flex Cable Operator and Actuator
8.07 (205)
10.82 (274.8)
5.49 (139.5)
(3 Pole)
2.56 (65)
1.06 (27)
4.00 (101.5)
4.00 (101.5)
2.56 (65)
2.06 (52.4)
1.27 (32.3)
6.37 (161.7)
10.53 (267.4)
4.52 (114.7)
8.48 (215.4)
8.30 (210.8)
7 _J
-·--··--
I
,,/
.. /0· 0
-- -· 0 0
0 0
Rockwell Automation Publication 140G-SG001E-EN-P - March 2017 235 Approximate Dimensions
Bulletin 140G/MG M-Frame
Figure 162 - Panel Mounted Molded Case Circuit Breaker
★ Overall dimensions with optional shunt trip or UV relay installed. ‡ Overall dimensions with optional auxiliary contacts installed.
Figure 163 - Drilling Templates for Molded Case Circuit Breaker Mounting 105
210 (3P)
280 (4P)
5.5 2.7
70 70 70
2.7 134
268
140
= =
2.76 2.76 2.76
4.13 8.27
0.11 0.11
0.22 11.02
5.51 10.55
5.28 105
61.25 107
4.21 3
159
6.26 103.5
4.07 115
4.53 2
0.12 0.08
4.13 2.41
152
= =
77.75 138
3.06 5.98
5.43 149
= =
66.75 116
5.87 2.63
4.57 142
= =
62.25 107
5.59 2.45
4.21 237
5.5 - M5
118.5
70 2.76
Ø 0.22
4.67 9.33
140
237
5.5 - M5 35
118.5
9.33 4.67
Ø 0.22
5.51 1.38
Escutcheon for compartment door Drilling template for compartment door with escutcheon without escutcheon
Drilling template for mounting plate
3 Poles 4 Poles
X
rr .-.t-"'-~--'
' -_-_ -_ ·llllJ
1111
1lll11111U-1111 --r--11111111111 I
L -
I
I
=I=
236 Rockwell Automation Publication 140G-SG001E-EN-P - March 2017 Approximate Dimensions
Figure 164 - Cat. No. 140G-M-ECM Terminals
Figure 165 - Cat. No. 140G-M-TLA23, -TLA24, -TLC23, -TLC24 Terminals Figure 166 - Cat. Nos. 140G-M-EXT3, -EXT4 Extended Terminals Figure 167 - Cat. Nos. 140G-M-EXSLI3, -EXSLO3, -EXS4 Spreader Terminals MAX 12
40 MA X
18 MIN
22.5 ±0 .1
6.5 Ø 0.26
0.89 120.5
23 MIN5 MAX10
0.94.74 20
70 70 70
134 39
2.76 2.76 2.76
0.79 1.53 5.28
19 120.5
25.5 59
4.74 2.32
1 Ø 0.75
134 53.5
70 70 70
50 14
2.76 2.76 2.76
1.97 0.55
2.11 5.28
167.5
833.5
1.32 0.31
6.59 88
13 116 116 45 45
134 116.5
45 23
90 88
1.77 4.57 4.57 1.77
3.54 3.46 3.46
Ø 0.51
0.9 4.59 5.28
1.77 230.5
50 8
1.97 0.31
9.07 134 116.5
45 90
13 4511611611645
23 88 9088
1.77 4.57 4.57 4.57 1.77
3.54 3.543.46 3.46
Ø 0.51
1.77 0.9
4.595.28
X
rr~
"-7 \+' ·
~: 1{ =o-"-i-'ll'-,'L-. ...... '-i-r",-,, ,V1l',"IY
I lmniii'f.==:::::,::::==!=:::::::::!.(~~
I
-r
y
I
I
lx_L_
9 Nm
1 r----
x I - ---cl llff llttttt--
y
+----- ----+---- --+--
r
Rockwell Automation Publication 140G-SG001E-EN-P - March 2017 237 Approximate Dimensions
Figure 168 - Cat. No. 140G-M-RMB, -RMY Rotary Handle Operating Mechanism — Door Mounted ★Rotary handle operating mechanism on molded case circuit breaker ‡ Padlock device for open position ( max. 3 padlocks; user provided) § Dimension with cabled early make contact
♣ Compartment door lock
Figure 169 - Drilling Templates for Molded Case Circuit Breaker Mounting Figure 170 - 140G-K-RVM… Minimum/Maximum Enclosure Depth (for M-Frame Molded Case Circuit Breakers) 103.5
146.5
190 33
≥ 3 140.5 ≤ 2
7.48 5.77
4.07 1.3
5.53≥ 0.12 ≤ 0.08
5.5 2.7
5.5 5.5
140
0.22 0.22
5.51 0.22
0.11 2.7
0.11 41.5
1.63 42.5
1.67 84.5
3.33 140
5.51 Ø 4
Ø 0.16
43 14
85.5 142
142
R min. 200
1.69 0.55
5.59 3.37
5.59 R min. 7.87
96.5 3.8
43 14
90 151
148.5
R min. 200
1.69 0.55
5.94 3.54
5.85 R min. 7.87
96.5 3.8
152
173
100.25
5.98 6.81
3.95 without escutcheon
Drilling template for compartment door
with escutcheon
Escutcheon for compartment door
1 Enclosure Depth
Minimum Maximum
12 in. Shaft 9 in. (229 mm) 17.75 in. (450 mm)
21 in. Shaft 26.75 in. (679 mm)
12 in. Shaft w/NFPA 11 in. (280 mm) 17.75 in. (450 mm)
22 in. Shaft w/NFPA 26.75 in. (679 mm)
Note: this figure depicts the minimum and maximum enclosure sizes that will accommodate the MCCB, operator, and handle. See Figure 158 for overall dimensions and handle cutout.
y
r-
I -
I I 7
I I I ,1
: ,----- I I
I - I i:
,.-,.j_ _J/-.../-t -7 : : I I
~ -=--=--=--=-;~b : : :
1 _J 1-1 I I I
I I I I I
I L_ J I I
I I I I
I I : :
I - -1 I
I I I
l... LI I
_______ I
238 Rockwell Automation Publication 140G-SG001E-EN-P - March 2017 Approximate Dimensions
Figure 171 - Cat. No. 140G-M-RVM… Variable Depth Rotary Handle Operating Mechanism 3-Pole
3.80 [96.5]
8.74 [221.9]
0.24 [6.1]
1.38 [35.0]
2.99 [75.9]
1.68 [42.6]
10.55 [268.0]
8.23 [209.0]
75 (2.95)
4 - 5.5 ø
(4) - 0.22 ø)
75 (2.95)
37.5 (1.47) 65 ø
(2.56 ø)
37.5 (1.47)
Front of Cover
mm
(in.)
12 in. shaft: 17.75 [450.8]
22 in. shaft: 26.75 [679.4]
4-Pole
10.55 [268.0]
10.98 [279.0]
1.79 [45.6]
2.90 [73.8]
0.03 [0.7]
1.68 [42.6]
L
0 Rockwell Automation Publication 140G-SG001E-EN-P - March 2017 239 Approximate Dimensions
Figure 172 - Cat. No. 140G-M-EOP , -ECOP Motor Operator ★Overall dimension with optional shunt trip or undervoltage relay installed. ‡ Overall dimension with optional auxiliary co ntacts installed.
Figure 173 - Drilling Templates for Molded Case Circuit Breaker Mounting 140
= = 5.5 5.5
0.22 5.51
0.22 1.1 Nm
5.5 0.22
3 222 2
233
191.5
140
70 7.54
2.76 5.51
8.74 9.17
0.12 0.08
= =
152
173
86.5 5.98
6.81 3.4
= =
151
148.5
R min. 200
5.94 5.85
R min. 7.87
75.75 2.98
= =
142
142
R min. 200
5.59 5.59
R min. 7.87
71.25 2.8
Escutcheon for compartment door Drilling template for compartment door without escutcheonwith escutcheon
y
+ X
v
240 Rockwell Automation Publication 140G-SG001E-EN-P - March 2017 Approximate Dimensions
Figure 174 - M-Frame Flex Cable Operator and Actuator, Right Hand 342.90
(13.50)
Enclosure Flange
111.25
(4.38)
211.33
(8.32)
24.64 (0.97)
159.77
(6.29)29.5
(1.16)
257.81
(10.15)
303.0
(11.93)
9.12 dia.
(Ø 0.359)
4 mounting holes127.0
(5.00)
490.98
(19.33)
371.35
(14.62)
66.8 (2.63)
137.67
(5.42)
311.15
(12.25)
119.13
(4.69)
17.53 (0.69)
11.17 (0.44)
40.13 (1.58)
47.75 (1.88)
11 7
Rockwell Automation Publication 140G-SG001E-EN-P - March 2017 241 Approximate Dimensions
Figure 175 - M-Frame Flex Cable Operator and Actuator, Left Hand (requires 140G-BML, sold separately) 159.77
(6.29)
211.33
(8.32)
24.64 (0.97)
111.25
(4.38)
342.9
(13.50)
371.34
(14.62)
491
(19.33)
290.32
(11.43)
28.45 (1.12) 257.81
(10.15)
127
(5.00)
9.12 dia.
(Ø 0.359)
4 mounting holes
Enclosure Flange
66.8 (2.63)
311.15
(12.25)
119.13
(4.69)
137.67
(5.42)
17.53 (0.69)
47.75 (1.88)
40.13 (1.58)
11.17 (0.44)
127
(5.00)
------
======- .
0 -- _l
---n
242 Rockwell Automation Publication 140G-SG001E-EN-P - March 2017 Approximate Dimensions
Bulletin 140G/MG N-Frame
Figure 176 - Panel Mounted Molded Case Circuit Breaker
★ End cap terminals for ring or busbar connection.
‡ Busbars.
§ Door escutcheon.
Δ Tightening torque: 18 N•m.
♠ Padlock (optional).
Tighteni
ng torque: 2.5 N•m.
& T ermin
al for customer wiring connection.
Description A
With escutcheon 125…141
Without escutcheon 147
50 25
70 70 70
103.6
6 134
147.5
210
280
268
0.98 1.97
2.762.76 2.76
4.08 0.24
5.81 5.28
8.27 11.02
10.55 4.92
125
5.98 152
6.07 154.25
6.3 160
190
7.48 206
8.11 125
97 10
10 10
24 14.5
105
204
102
18.75 225
2 3
0.12 8.86
0.08 0.94
0.39 0.39
0.39 3.82
4.92 0.58
0.74 4.02
8.03 4.13
Rockwell Automation Publication 140G-SG001E-EN-P - March 2017 243 Approximate Dimensions
Figure 177 - Drilling Templates for Molded Case Circuit Breaker Mounting Figure 178 - 140G-N-RVM... Minimum/Maximum Enclosure Depth 155
6.1 2
0.08 268
10.55 152
5.98 304
11.97 151
5.94 263
10.35 144.5
5.69 144.5
5.69 241
9.49 226
8.9 Ø 4 n°7 HOLES
Ø 0.16
206
8.11 103
4.05 208
8.19 35
1.38 Ø 5.5 - M5
Ø 0.22
245
9.65 122.5
4.82 Escutcheon for compartment door
with escutcheon
Drilling template for mounting plate
Front 206 x 204
Door escutcheon
No. of Poles C
37 0
4 140
1 Enclosure Depth
Minimum Maximum
12 in. Shaft 7.75 in. (196 mm) 17.75 in. (450 mm)
21 in. Shaft 26.75 in. (679 mm)
Note: this figure depicts the minimum and maximum enclosure sizes that will accommodate the MCCB, operator, and handle. See Figure 179 for operator dimensions. y
I
,, , ,
-----1 I
I 11
I 11
I I I -- -t I I
= 1 ----- ~: : : :
~=======1~ I I I
= 1 I : : :
I I I I
---------
~-- '-----1 I
, ,
u
I
I
y
X Effi X
y
1----------il 1----------il
244 Rockwell Automation Publication 140G-SG001E-EN-P - March 2017 Approximate Dimensions
Figure 179 - Cat. No. 140G-N-RVM… Variable Depth Rotary Handle Operating Mechanism 3-Pole 4-Pole
3.82 [97.0]
10.75 [273.0]
0.93 [23.6]
1.38 [35.0]
4.82 [122.5]
0.83 [221.1]
8.27 [210.0]
0.83 [21.0]
4.83 [122.6]
11.02 [280.0]
2.41 [61.1]
1.73 [44.0]
10.55 [268.0]
10.55 [268.0]
12 in. shaft: 17.75 [450.8]
22 in. shaft: 26.75 [679.4]
75 (2.95)
4 - 5.5 ø
(4) - 0.22 ø)
75 (2.95)
37.5 (1.47) 65 ø
(2.56 ø)
37.5 (1.47)
Front of Cover
mm
(in.)
a
0 Rockwell Automation Publication 140G-SG001E-EN-P - March 2017 245 Approximate Dimensions
Figure 180 - Cat. Nos. 140G-N-TLH3, -TLV3, TLH4, TLV4 Terminals ★ Rear horizontal terminals
‡ Rear vertical terminals
♠ Tightening torque: 20 N•m
No. of Poles B C
3 70 192.5
4 140 262.5
59 2.32
18.5 0.73
46.5 1.84
59 2.32
70 2.76
70 2.76
70 2.76 44
1.73 25
0.98 118.5
4.66 237
9.34 273
10.75 15
0.59 46.5
1.84 Ø 11
Ø 0.43
44 1.73
109
4.29 218
8.58 25
0.98 Ø 11 Ø 0.43
70 2.76
70 2.76
70 2.76
15 0.59
61.25 2.41
35 1.38
17.5 0.69
Ø 5.5 - M5
Ø 0.22
245
9.65 52.5
2.07 39.75
1.56 122.5
4.82 8
0.31 Drilling template for mounting plate
I I I
:j: C
I .. I
0 0
lt· .
j
246 Rockwell Automation Publication 140G-SG001E-EN-P - March 2017 Approximate Dimensions
Figure 181 - Cat. No. 140G-N-EXT3, -EXT4 Extended Front Terminals ★ Extended terminals.
Required 100 mm insulating phase barriers provided.
♠ Tighteni
ng torque: 18 N•m.
& Required ins
ulator panel, supplied with extenders.
Figure 182 - Cat. Nos. 140G-N-EXSL13 Top (3-Pole), 140G-N-EXS4 (4-Pole) Rear Spread Terminals (IEC only) ‡ Extended spread terminals.
# Required 200 mm insulating phase barriers provided .
♠ Tightening torque: 18 N•m.
§ Terminal for
auxiliary contacts.
& Required insulator panel, supplied with extenders.
320
250
125
70 70 70
25 44 Ø 11 Y
X X X X
100
29.5 15
250
118.5
229
199.5
160.5
79 12.5
25 1
12.6 9.84
4.92 2.76 2.76 2.76
0.98 1.73 Ø 0.43
6.32 7.85
9.02 9.84
4.66 0.59
29.5 3.94
0.49 0.98
3.11 116 / 4.57 116 / 4.57 116 / 4.57
90 / 3.54 90 / 3.54 90 / 3.54
23 45 45 23 45
1.77 1.77 0.91 1.77
33 79
147.5
144
334
118.5
X X
100
40.5 15
Ø 13
Ø 0.51
~200
100
1.3 3.11
3.94 100
3.94 55
2.17 268
134
~10.16
10.55 5.28
79 3.11
45 1.77
258
189
5.81 5.67
10.16 7.44
Escutcheon
&
§
I ll--------/1" ---,._ --II
x~---, .,._,,__~
#
:j:
Rockwell Automation Publication 140G-SG001E-EN-P - March 2017 247 Approximate Dimensions
Figure 183 - Cat. No. 140G-N-RMB, -RMY Rotary Handle Operating Mechanism ★Rotary handle operating mechanism on molded case circuit breaker. ‡ Compartment door interlock.
§ Door escutcheon.
♦ Tightening torque: 2.5 N•m.
♠ Terminal for
customer wiring connection.
Reduced flang
e of rotary handle for door (optional).
Description A
With escutcheon 125…141
Without escutcheon 147
70 70
280
11.02 210
8.27 103.6
4.08 70
70 70
70 6
0.24 134
5.28 147.5
5.81 268
10.55154
6.06 152
5.98 189.5
7.46 190
7.48 206
8.11 125
4.92 97
3.82 43.5
1.71 33
1.30 18.75
0.74 105
4.13 204
8.03 102
4.01 184
7.24 2
0.08 2
0.08 2
0.08 r---1 --+I ~I
" " " " ,,
,,
11 r-.,
.~. :,
*
248 Rockwell Automation Publication 140G-SG001E-EN-P - March 2017 Approximate Dimensions
Figure 184 - Cat. No. 140G-N-TLA43, -TLA44, -TLC43, -TLC44 Terminals ★ Terminals for cable connection.
‡ Tightening torque: 43 N•m.
♠ Tightening torque: 18 N•m.
Required insulator
panel, suppl ied with extenders.
320
250
125
70 70 70
28 Y
Y
X X
150 79
202
34.75 66.25
101
1 Ø 21.5
Y
X X
2.76 2.76 2.76
1.1 4.92
9.84 12.6
5.9 3.11
3.98 2.61
0.52 0.04
7.95 Ø 0.85
---- _l
--- 1 1- - - - -----...--.........-- ........... --
, I
i ;/--,-~ -:-1--,i
I li- + -+-1-+-+I
: ~'-+'._~+~~ ll t-----+----+---i r-+--+----+--il t--r---1'-JHII :, ,-1-, ,-1-, , 1 1---+-- + -+-1- + -+1 11~"""1 f""=~l-e,,tjll
:: '-l-'_'-1-'j e,g~~~g~
Rockwell Automation Publication 140G-SG001E-EN-P - March 2017 249 Approximate Dimensions
Figure 185 - N-Frame Flex Cable Operator and Actuator, Right Hand
4.38 215.9
(8.50)
211.33
(8.32)
299.21
(11.78)
55.12 (2.17)
342.9
(13.50)
371.34
(14.62)
499.11
(19.65)
25.65 (1.01)
257.81
(10.15)
9.12 dia.
(Ø 0.359)
4 mounting holes
127
(5.00)
Enclosure Flange
311.15
(12.25)
119.13
(4.69)
137.67
(5.42)
17.53 (0.69)
47.75 (1.88)
40.13 (1.58)
11.17 (0.44)
I
~-£~---~---± J _l
0 250 Rockwell Automation Publication 140G-SG001E-EN-P - March 2017 Approximate Dimensions
Figure 186 - N-Frame Flex Cable Operator and Actuator, Left Hand (requires 140G-BML, sold separately)
17.53 (0.69)
47.75 (1.88)
40.13 (1.58)
11.17 (0.44)
215.9
(8.50)
211.33
(8.32)
55.12 (2.17)
342.9
(13.50)
371.34
(14.62)
499.11
(19.65)
257.81
(10.15)
9.12 dia.
(Ø 0.359)
4 mounting holes
127
(5.00)
127
(5.00)
290.32
(11.43)
28.19 (1.11)
111.25
(4.38)
Enclosure Flange
311.15
(12.25)
119.13
(4.69)
137.67
(5.42)
L ±' __ -----------~--' ___ :
- - - - ~---+-+--'-_________ J _-+-+-____._
t-
i
-----------------------n
0 Rockwell Automation Publication 140G-SG001E-EN-P - March 2017 251 Approximate Dimensions
Bulletin 140G NS-Frame
Figure 187 - Panel Mounted Molded Case Circuit Breaker
★ End Cap terminals for ring or busbar connection.
‡ Busbars.
§ Door escutcheon.
♦Tightening torque: 18 N•m.
Padlock (optional).
&
Tighte
ning torque: 2.5 N•m.
Terminals for cable connection.
Description A
With escutcheon 125…184 (4.92…7.24)
Without escutcheon 170 (6.7)
Description B
Standard 208 (8.19)
No. of Poles C
3 70 (2.76)
4 140 (5.51)
125
4.92 97
3.82 10
0.39 10
0.39 10
0.39 24
0.94 118.5
4.66 237
9.34 14.5
0.58 102
4.02 204
8.03 193.5
7.62 ≥ 3
≥ 0.12 2
0.079
50 1.97
25 0.9870
2.76 70
2.76 70
2.76 103.6
4.08 6
0.24 134
5.28 147.5
5.81 210
8.27280
11.02 268
10.55178
7.01 190
7.48 206
8.11 125
4.92 175
6.89 :: : :
" ' " '
* ''
252 Rockwell Automation Publication 140G-SG001E-EN-P - March 2017 Approximate Dimensions
Figure 188 - Drilling Templates for Molded Case Circuit Breaker Mounting § Door escutcheon
# Compartment door with escutcheon
★Compartment door without escutcheon
Figure 189 - Cat. Nos. 140G-N-TLA63, -TLA64, -TLC63, -TLC64 Terminals ★ Terminals for cable connection.
‡ Tightening torque: 43 N•m.
♠ Tightening torque: 18 N•m.
Required insula
tor panel, supplied terminals.
268
10.55 304
11.97 152
5.98 245
9.65 122.5
4.82 35
1.38 Ø 5.5 - M5
Ø 0.22
241
9.49 226
8.9 208
8.19 144.5
5.69 144.5
5.69 151
5.94 263
10.35 103
4.05 206
8.11 Ø 4 n°7 HOLES
Ø 0.16
Drilling template for compartment door Escutcheon for compartment door Drilling template for mounting plate 320
12.6 250
9.84 125
4.92 70
2.76 70
2.76 70
2.76 79
3.11 150
5.9 28
1.1 101
3.98 66.25
2.61 34.75
1.37 1
0.04 202
7.95 Ø 21.5
Ø 0.85
# lv 1 ~ I
y
§
f1
m
l x L x- X
t-x X
y
I
y
y y
X
y
Rockwell Automation Publication 140G-SG001E-EN-P - March 2017 253 Approximate Dimensions
Figure 190 - Cat. Nos. 140G-N-TLV3, -TLV4, -TLH3, -TLH4 Rear Terminals ★Rear horizontal terminals
‡ Rear vertical terminals
♠ Tightening torque: 20 N•m
Figure 191 - Drilling template for mounting plate
109
4.29 25
0.98 X X X X X
Y
Y
X
Y
Y
Ø 11
59 2.32
118.5
4.66 237
9.34 15
0.59 44
1.73 218
8.58 18.5
0.73 46.5
1.84 59
2.32 Ø 11
Ø 0.43
70 2.76
70 2.76
70 2.76
44 1.73
25 0.98
70 2.76
70 2.76
70 2.76 15
0.59 46.5
1.84 Ø 0.43
273
10.75 61.25
17.5 Ø 5.5 - M5 Y
Y
X X
C
B 122.5
245
52.5 39.75
8 R 10
2.41 0.69
Ø 0.22
9.65 2.07
1.56 0.31
4.82 No. of Poles B C
3 70 (2.76) 192.5 (7.58)
4 140 (5.51) 262.5 (10.33)
-ail
* :: • "
r I : 11 1~ 11 1
II "'r7'
" 1 i'
t ~!
L - ----
l ~-
8 ..-------i
I I
254 Rockwell Automation Publication 140G-SG001E-EN-P - March 2017 Approximate Dimensions
Figure 192 - Cat. No. 140G-N-EXSLI3, -EXSL03, -EXS4 Extended Front Spreader Terminals (IEC only) ★ Extended spread terminals.
‡ Tightening torque: 18 N•m.
§ Required 200 mm insulating phase barriers prov ided.
Δ Required insulator panel, supplied with spreaders.
Figure 193 - Cat. Nos. 140G-N-EXT3, -EXT4 Extended Front Terminals (IEC only) ‡ Tightening torque: 18 N•m.
♣Required insulator panel, supplied with ex
tended Terminals.
Δ Extended terminals.
♦ Required 100 mm insulating phase barriers provided.
♠ Terminal for
customer wiring connection.
Ø 13
Ø 0.51
23 0.9
90 3.54
90 3.54
90 3.54
90 3.54
116
4.57 116
4.57 116
4.57 250
9.84 320
12.6 45
1.77 45
1.77 33
1.3 79
3.11 79
3.11 79
3.11 229
9.02 258
10.16 278
10.94 334
13.15 118.5
4.66 40.5
1.59 15
0.59 100
3.94 45
1.77 45
1.77 Ø 13
Ø 0.51
23 0.9
90 3.54
90 3.54
90 3.54
90 3.54
116
4.57 116
4.57 116
4.57 250
9.84 320
12.6 45
1.77 45
1.77 33
1.3 79
3.11 79
3.11 79
3.11 229
9.02 258
10.16 278
10.94 334
13.15 118.5
4.66 40.5
1.59 15
0.59 100
3.94 45
1.77 45
1.77 [J_ __ \,
[: '~''' ,'.'>t>
',,i
: ' '' ----+1-1',------;..-+
' ',
7 ~;;;
: ,,J
1" I 'f
: i :-f[f1"{
I : L ___ _
', ' -~-----
'
X-'---
[L\ ffiu
: .. .-:\ ..... :\ '!\ : '\, r-+--+--___..;
[
:, -~ ,,, l~: __ L;~: • 0
',,i
: ',, ----+-~
' ',
7J~;;;
: (i-:tt,-
1 L ,:p
I I ---
', ' -~-----
'
X-'--- JCil_, ,-
y
~ --------i
§
*
:j:
- - X
~ --------i
§
*
:j:
i
- - X
Rockwell Automation Publication 140G-SG001E-EN-P - March 2017 255 Approximate Dimensions
Bulletin 140G R-Frame
Panel Mounted Breakers
Figure 194 - 2000 A (80/100%)…2500 A (80%) Breakers
Figure 195 - Drilling Templates
Mounting Plate (3 Poles)Mounting Plate (4 Poles)
015
0.59"
554
21.81"
0 15
0.59"
~i !8.,;
120
V
I
428
I 40
1.57' 80
1 3.15"
I 120
4.72" 4.72 " y
0 15
0.59" 4.72" I 4.72 "
y
536
21.1 •
10.71 '
317.5 191.2
12.5 " y i 7.53"
508.7
20.03"
331
13.03"
y 205
8.07"
~ ---------+-----~ "I>-+- +
"- !
"- 09 I c-a;..
0.35" j ;:::::
4~0
- 16.14"
I
272
-10,11 "-
383.4
09 0.35"
I
410
=16.14"=
9.09"
242
9.53 "
284.5
11 .2"
_________ j_ _____ ~-~ -x
i
+--+------- ----<- ------- --+ x
i
i
i
i
i
536 Y
21 .1·
i
y
., .,
_X
256 Rockwell Automation Publication 140G-SG001E-EN-P - March 2017 Approximate Dimensions
Figure 196 - Version with Vertical Rear Terminals, 2500 A (100% rated)/3000 A (80% rated) N
N
554
(21.81)
214
(8.43)
340
(13.39)
90 (3.54)
382
(15.04)
382
(15.04)
70 (2.76)
68.4 (2.69)
88.4 (3.48)
428
(16.85)
536
(21.1)
331
(13.03)
205
(8.07)
6.4 (0.25)
6.4 (0.25)
6 (0.24)
6 (0.24)
132
(5.2)
120
(4.72)
120
(4.72)
120
(4.72)120
(4.72)
43.1 (1.69)
43.1 (1.69)
95 (3.74)
95 (3.74)
162
(6.38) 162
(6.38)
410
(16.14)
383
(15.08)
225
(8.86)
188.5
(7.42)
188.5
(7.42)
225
(8.86)
284.5
(11.2)
284.5
(11.2)
272
(10.71) 272
(10.71)317.5
(12.5)
191.2
(7.53) 383.4
(15.1)
508.7
(20.03)
331
(13.03)
20 (0.79)
20 (0.79)
20 (0.79)
20 (0.79)
112
(4.41) 112
(4.41)
162
(6.38) 162
(6.38)
8 x Ø 9
(0.35) 8 x Ø 9
(0.35)
2 2
515
(20.28) 191.5
(7.54)
205
(8.07)
536
(21.1)
383
(15.08)
410
(16.14)
151
(5.94)
151
(5.94) 151
(5.94)
151
(5.94)
155.5
(6.12) 155.5
(6.12)
153.9
(6.06) 153.9
(6.06)
20 (0.79)
210
(8.27)
25.4 (1)
41.3 (1.63)
19.4 (0.76)
100
(3.94)
20 (0.79)
20 (0.79)
100
(3.94)
44.45 (1.75) 281
(11.06)
112
(4.41)
162
(6.38)
279.4
(11)
231
(9.09)
13 TYP
(0.512)
x---
I
~
~-~
H
x-·- ~-1--·-·
~
~ v.
y
i
y
y
I
i
I
I
!
v '
I
~
.
' I
·- X -·-+-+-----+------- +- X
\ . .
,_ ~
y
Rockwell Automation Publication 140G-SG001E-EN-P - March 2017 257 Approximate Dimensions
Figure 197 - 3000 A Breakers (100% rated)
Figure 198 - Drilling Templates
Mounting Plate (4 Poles) Mounting Plate (3 Poles) Compartment Door
6.4 0.24" I
Nl!l
-ui
·-
.,,is -~
N • .-t-
N'°
331
13.03"
554
21 .81"
536
21 .1"
y
y 205
8.07"
132 120 120
5.2" 4.72" 4.72"
317.5
12.5"
508.7
20.03"
515 !
10.71"
191.2
7.53"
y
20.28' i 191.5
7.54"
331 205
13.03' 536 I 8.07"
21 .1" 1 ------------------·-j-·------------
i
i
i
"' ....
c:i
-...
-- x ~
~ ..
--.----
~
I
rr
8x
T
'1'
410
16.14'
= 383 = 15.08 '
- 383.4-
15.1"
I
v
I
- 3r -15ya·
I
= 41i0 =
16.~4·
I
!
I
I
09 / 0.35"
Vol
v
I
-:!!
r "' ui
:!!
-
O! ..,
:!!
1= -:!!
-x-
"' co
X
ig co
st.
oi-
... -N
8~ _..,
210
8.27 '
25.4 NCl0 co"l _co
168.5
6.63'
20 0.79"
231
9.09'
242
9.53'
284.5
11.2"
y
!
316
12.44"
306
12.05"
150
5.91'
z
j~
"' . o"'
-
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
C')O> I
_I __ - X I -u,~
I ..,_
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I'
258 Rockwell Automation Publication 140G-SG001E-EN-P - March 2017 Approximate Dimensions
Figure 199 - Cat. No. 140G-R-TLV3, -TLV4 Terminals, 2000 A (80/100%)…2500 A (80%) -
• Ill=
111,
Ill CO CO
c,iCX!CD
NCD-
'N ., . =N-
340
317.5
554
21 .81" y 214
8.43"
'
120 I 4.72' I 4.722 y
536
21.1"
- 272 -
1~.71"
191.2
12•5" 508.7 y 7.53"
21.1"
I 191.5
515 7.54"
20.26" I
i
331 i 205
13.03" I 8.07"
i
----------·- 531,·-- ·
21 .1"
y
G
G
X
0, =
• co Mo Ill •
-co
G
.,...~
Ill 0?
-111
0 N
20 0.79"
bi r--ci
~ ~.
~
rt -.,
.f
80 3.15"
80 3.15"
-~ ----
CIC)
M 8x09
'(
= 428
1 .85"
20 i
0.79"
I
y
10.71"
=383.42=
15.1"
y
I
I
=383=
15,f8"
i
=410=
16.,4'
ui ~/r 8x00.35"
~•1 ~ ci
y
G
r
.
G
z z :il:il
20 Ill = oM
0.79' _.-; .,
.,...M
Cl)'"; _,...
II =
X· ---------- MO! X 111-M --
M-
M II
., = • co
°'o r-- . _,...
I
I 231
015 9.09"
00.59" 242
9.53"
284.5
11.2"
-Ill
-
Ill
,.;
Ill
-
l,i
-ui
- -x
0,
c-;
Ill
-
ig
ui
in
-
Rockwell Automation Publication 140G-SG001E-EN-P - March 2017 259 Approximate Dimensions
Bulletin 1494V Variable Depth, Flange-Operated
Circuit Breaker Operating Mechanisms
Dimensions are in inches (mm). Dimensions are not to be used for manufacturing purposes.
Figure 200 - Enclosure with Handle Cutout
140G/MG Frame Size AA BB CC1 CC2 DD EE Wire Bending Space G, H, I, J 5/16 (7.94) 1-41/64 (41.67) 3 (76.2) 3-1/2 (88.9) 7-1/2 (190.5) 6 (152.4) K 29/64 (11.51) 1-47/64 (44.05) 4 (101.6) 4-1/2 (114.3) 9-5/16 (236.54) 12 (304.8) M, N 4-1/2 (114.3) 4-1/32 (102.4) 5 (127) 5 (127) 13-1/2 (342.9) 12 (304.8) CC1
CC2
BB
DD
EEAA
~
7 t
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
i
I
I
. .
+
0 0
rn t
~
ij
~~T rn
<D
. .
I --
_.
260 Rockwell Automation Publication 140G-SG001E-EN-P - March 2017 Approximate Dimensions
Figure 201 - Enclosure without Handle Cutout
140G/MG
Frame Size
Handle Cat.
No.
A (min) B (Min) C (Max) D E F G H J
H 1494F-M1
(Fig
ure A)
3-1/2 (88.9) 29/32 (23.01) 1-3/32 (27.8) 1-5/8 (41.3) 2-11/32 (59.5) 4-11/16 (119.1) 1-9/16 (39.7) 1 (25.4) 7/8 (22.23) J 10-29/32 (277) 29/32 (23.01) 1-3/32 (27.8) 1-5/8 (41.3) 2-11/32 (59.5) 4-11/16 (119.1) 1-9/16 (39.7) 1 (25.4) 7/8 (22.23) K 13-3/32 (332.6) 29/32 (23.01) 1-3/32 (27.8) 1-5/8 (41.3) 2-11/32 (59.5) 4-11/16 (119.1) 1-9/16 (39.7) 1 (25.4) 7/8 (22.23) M 1494F-M2
(Figure B)
17-5/16
(439.74) 1-3/8 (34.9) 1-3/32 (27.8) 2 (50.8) 3-23/32 (94.5) 6-1/2 (165.1) 5/16 (7.94) 5-1/2 (139.7) — N 21-7/8 (555.63) 1-3/8 (34.9) 1-3/32 (27.8) 2 (50.8) 3-23/32 (94.5) 6-1/2 (165.1) 5/16 (7.94) 5-1/2 (139.7) — B
C
A
B
C
A
E
D
E
D
FH
G
0.5 in
(12.7 mm)
F
G
J
H
H
0.25 in
(6.35 mm)
Door Catch
Mounting
Bracket
Figure A Figure B
Door Catch
Mounting
Bracket
To make slot, drill three 0.5 in.
(12.7 mm) holes and remove
burrs
two 0.265 in.
(6.73 mm)
diameter holes square corners or
0.25 in.
(6.35 mm) radius
two 0.328 in.
(8.33 mm)
diameter holes
::j+ II
II
II
II
II
II
II
II
II
II
II
II
II
L-:.-:.-:.-:.':.-:.-:. _______ ,d_i
r-
II
II
II
II
□ II ~ I II
II
II
II
II
II
II
II
II
II
L ==============_JI
i
- ~
JJ _____.. ,__
- 0
I
Publication 140G-SG001E-EN-P - March 2017
Supersedes Publication 140G-SG001D-EN-P - April 2016 Copyright © 2017 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved. Printed in the U.S.A.
Allen-Bradley, E1 Plus, E3, E300, LISTEN. THINK. SOLVE, ProposalWorks, Rockwell Automation, and Rockwell Software are trademarks of Rockwell Automation, Inc.
Trademarks not belonging to Rockwell Automation are property of their respective companies. www.rockwellautomation.com
Power, Control and Information Solutions Headquarters
Americas: Rockwell Automation, 1201 South Second Street, Milwaukee, WI 53204-2496 USA, Tel: { 1) 414.382.2000, Fax: { 1) 414.382.4444 Europe/Middle East/ Africa: Rockwell Automation NY, Pegasus Park, De Kleeclaan 12a, 1831 Diegem, Belgium, Tel: (32) 2 663 0600 , Fax: (32) 2 663 0640 Asia Pacific: Rockwell Automation, Level 14, Core F, Cyberport 3, JOO Cyberport Road, Hong Kong, Tel: (852) 2887 4788 , Fax: {852) 2508 1846 Technical Data
CENTERLINE 2100 Motor Circuit Protection
Catalog Numbers 140MG and 140G
Topic Page
Suffix/Circuit Breaker Frame Explanation 2
Instantaneous Trip Motor Circuit Protectors (MCP) in Combination NEMA Starter 3 MCP Application 3
Motor-circuit Protector Size and Adjustment 3
Push-to-trip Mechanism 4
Horsepower Ratings 4
Inverse Time Circuit Breakers in Combination NEMA Starter, Soft Starter (SMC), and Variable Frequency AC Drive Units 13
Application 13
Circuit Breaker Operation 13
Circuit Breaker Size and Adjustment 14
Push-to-trip Mechanism 14
Horsepower Ratings 14
Time-current Curves 20
• •
..
' .----. ~
.
: -~ ! • =----<
.. ~. ~-..
■
G Allen-Bradley
•
@ Allen-Bradley • Rockwell Software
Rockwell
Automation
2 Rockwell Automation Publication 2100-TD032F-EN-P - January 2016 CENTERLINE 2100 Motor Circuit Protection
Summary of Changes
This publication contains new and updated information as indicated in the following table.
Table 1 - Suffix/Circuit Breaker Frame Explanation
Topic Page
Updated Unit Combination Short-Circuit Current Rating in Table 6 10 GA
Circuit Breaker Series
T
140G Inverse Time Breaker
140MG MCP
Frame
G 125 A Fixed
H 125 A Frame and Trip
J 250 A Frame and Trip
K 400 A Frame and Trip
M 800 A Frame and Trip
N 1200 A Frame
R 3000 A Frame
Circuit Breaker Type
A High Interrupting Motor Circuit Protector (MCP)
M(1) High Interrupting Inverse Time
ML(2) High Interrupting Inverse Time with Electronic Trip (LSI) MG High Interrupting Inverse Time with Ground Fault (LSIG) X
(1) Extra High Interrupting Inverse Time
XL(2) Extra High Interrupting Inverse Time with Electronic Trip (LSI) XG Extra High Interrupting Inverse Time with Ground Fault (LSIG) U
(1) Ultra High Interrupting Inverse Time (600V only)
UL(2) Ultra High Interrupting Inverse Time with Electronic Trip (LSI 600V only)
UG Ultra High Interrupting Inverse Time with Ground Fault (LSIG 600V only)
(1) Electronic (LSI) on K, M, and N Frames
(2) Only available on H and J Frames
T
Rockwell Automation Publication 2100-TD032F-EN-P - January 2016 3 CENTERLINE 2100 Motor Circuit Protection
Instantaneous Trip Motor Circuit Protectors (MCP) in Combination NEMA Starter MCP Application
The motor-circuit protector application is valid for the following CENTERLINE® 2100 MCC products:
• Bulletin 2107 full-voltage reversing combination starters • Bulletin 2113 full-voltage non-reversing combination starters • Bulletin 2123 two-speed non-reversing combination starters The information in this publication applies to Allen-Bradley® motor circuit protectors (MCP) when they are used in NEMA (size 1…6) combination starters. The particular motor-circuit protector (trip range) supplied with a unit depends on the horsepower or kilowatt rating and voltage that was specified when the unit was ordered. T ables 3…7 list the various combinations and voltage. When using T ables 3…7, be sure to use the line that applies to your voltage.
Motor-circuit Protector Size and Adjustment
Rockwell Automation has made engineering evaluations for the protective device (MCP) selection, sizing, and setting range that is based on the protection rules/requirements and motor criteria as stipulated in NEC, CEC, NEMA, UL, and CSA standards. For example, evaluations have been made for items such as motor full-load currents (FLC), X/R ratios, locked rotor currents, and nominal utilization voltages. If the motor application has criteria that deviates from those criteria that are stated in the standards, higher FLC, and/or motor inrush currents (greater than 1300% of the nominal FLC) can be experienced. Examples of non-standard motor applications include the following: special motors, non/off standard NEMA or application-rated motors, Design B energy efficient, Design E motors, and IEC N motors.
The motor full-load current determines the magnetic trip setting of the motor circuit protector. W e recommend selecting an initial trip setting that is approximately eight times the motor nameplate full-load current. The trip setting can be adjusted to a position that corresponds to the determined magnetic trip current.
Trip Settings Current Frame Size
A through I
125 A G and H
250 A J
Electronic Trip 300…3000 A K, M, N, R
4 Rockwell Automation Publication 2100-TD032F-EN-P - January 2016 CENTERLINE 2100 Motor Circuit Protection
T o adjust the trip setting, follow these steps.
1. V erify that the motor-circuit protector operating handle is in the OFF/O position.
2. With a small screwdriver, turn the adjustment pointer clockwise to the determined setting (G, H, and J frames) or adjust DIP switches to the determined setting (K and M frames).
3. V erify that the motor circuit protector does not trip during motor starting.
If the motor-circuit protector trips when attempting to start the motor, turn the pointer clockwise to successively higher positions, until the motor-circuit protector no longer trips when attempting to start the motor.
Per NEC guidelines, set the trip setting of the motor circuit protector to greater than 8, but not more than 13 times the motor full-load current. The controller design is based on this requirement. If Design B or E energy efficient motors (or IEC N motors) are used, you can set the motor circuit protectors higher than 13 times the motor full-load current, but must not exceed 17 times. For these applications, consult the factory for controller and motor circuit protector sizing. See the National Electrical Code (NEC) or the Canadian Electrical Code (CEC) standards for more information.
Push-to-trip Mechanism
The push-to-trip mechanism provides a manual means for tripping the motor circuit protector. When you press the button on the motor-circuit protector cover with a small screwdriver, a plunger rotates the trip bar, which causes the motor circuit protector to trip.
Horsepower Ratings
The horsepower ratings for combination starter units that are listed in T ables 3…7 were determined from full-load currents as specified by the NEC/CEC standards.
Acceptable performance occurs when the motor full-load current is within 15% of the value that corresponds to the horsepower and voltages that are listed in the NEC/CEC standards. Contact your local Allen-Bradley distributor or Rockwell Automation sales representative if the motor full-load current is not within these limits.
IMPORTANT When the devices are energized, motor peak-inrush current can randomly exceed the maximum limit set by the code.
ATTENTION: The horsepower ratings and corresponding trip settings in Tables 3…7 are valid only when the combination starter units are equipped with an Allen-Bradley electronic overload relay or a Bulletin 592 eutectic alloy overload relay that has correctly sized heater elements.
When correctly selected, this combination of motor circuit protector and overload relay protects against short circuit and ground fault damage. This combination provides coordinated overcurrent protection in the motor branch circuit for continuous-duty rated motors, as defined in the NEC and CEC standards.
A motor circuit protector that has tripped can indicate the interruption of a high fault current. To be sure of protection against fire and/ or shock hazard, examine the current carrying parts of the combination starter units, soft starter controller units, and variable frequency drive AC units and replace if damaged. (Refer to NEMA Standards Publication Number ICS 2.2, Maintenance of Motor Controllers After a Fault Condition, and NEMA Standard Publication Number ICS 2, Parts ICS 2-302.) Rockwell Automation Publication 2100-TD032F-EN-P - January 2016 5 CENTERLINE 2100 Motor Circuit Protection
Table 2 - Default Motor Circuit Protectors Used at Given Horse Power and Voltage Ratings 140MG- Voltage
208 240 380 480 600HP KW
0.25 0.125
G8P-B70 (7A) G8P-B70 (7A)
G8P-B30 (3A) G8P-B30 (3A)
H8P-B30 (3A)
0.33 0.25
0.5 0.37
0.75 0.55
10 .75
G8P-C15 (15 A) G8P-B70 (7A) G8P-B70 (7A)1.5 1.1
G8P-C15 (15 A) H8P-B70 (7A)21 .5
3 2.2 G8P-C30 (30 A)
G8P-C30 (30 A) G8P-C15 (15 A) G8P-C15 (15 A)
53 .7
G8P-C50 (50 A)
H8P-C15 (15 A)
7.5 5.5
G8P-C50 (50 A) G8P-C30 (30 A) G8P-C30 (30 A) H8P-C30 (30 A) 10 7.5
15 11
G8P-D10 (100 A)
G8P-D10 (100 A)
G8P-C70 (70 A) G8P-C50 (50 A) H8P-C50 (50 A)20 15 G8P-D10 (100 A) 25 18.5 G8P-D12 (125 A)
G8P-D12 (125 A)
30 22 J8P-D15 (150 A) G8P-D10 (100 A)
G8P-D10 (100 A) H8P-D10 (100 A)40 30 J8P-D25 (250 A) J8P-D20 (200 A) G8P-D12 (125 A)
50 37
K8P-D40 (400 A)
J8P-D25 (250 A)
60 45
K8P-D40 (400 A)
J8P-D20 (200 A) J8P-D15 (150 A)
J8P-D15 (150 A)
75 55 J8P-D25 (250 A) J8P-D17 (175 A)
100 75
M8P-D80 (800 A) K8P-D40 (400 A)
J8P-D25 (250 A) J8P-D20 (200 A)
125 90
M8P-D80 (800 A) K8P-D40 (400 A) K8P-D40 (400 A)150 112
200 150
M8P-D80 (800 A)250 187
M8P-D80 (800 A) M8P-D80 (800 A)
300 224
350 261
400 300
6 Rockwell Automation Publication 2100-TD032F-EN-P - January 2016 CENTERLINE 2100 Motor Circuit Protection
Table 3 - Short-Circuit Current Rating - 208V (cULus Listed) Controller
Type
Device/
Bulletin
Size/Rating Magnetic-only Trip Settings Electronic
Trip 140MG
Catalog
Number
Default
Unit
Combination
Short-Circuit
Current
Rating
140MG
Catalog
Number
Optional
Unit
Combination
Short-Circuit
Current
RatingSize HP A B C D E F G H I Min Max
Bulletin
500
2107,
2113,
2123
#1 0.125 21 28 35 42 49 56 63 70 77
G8P-B70 65 kA H8P-B70 100 kA
0.25 21 28 35 42 49 56 63 70 77 G8P-B70 H8P-B70
0.33 21 28 35 42 49 56 63 70 77 G8P-B70 H8P-B70
0 . 52 12 83 54 24 95 66 37 07 7 G8P-B70 H8P-B70
0.75 21 28 35 42 49 56 63 70 77 G8P-B70 H8P-B70
1 45 60 75 90 105 120 135 150 165 G8P-C15 100 kA H8P-C15
1.5 45 60 75 90 105 120 135 150 165 G8P-C15 H8P-C15
2 45 60 75 90 105 120 135 150 165 G8P-C15 H8P-C15
3 90 120 150 180 210 240 270 300 330 G8P-C30 H8P-C30
5 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 550 G8P-C50 H8P-C50
7.5 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 550 G8P-C50 H8P-C50 #2 10 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 550 G8P-C50 H8P-C50 #3 15 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 1000 1100 G8P-D10 H8P-D10 20 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 1000 1100 G8P-D10 H8P-D10 25 625 703 781 859 938 1016 1094 1172 1250 G8P-D12 H8P-D12 #4 30 750 844 938 1031 1125 1219 1313 1406 1500 J8P-D15 40 1250 1406 1563 1719 1875 2031 2188 2344 2500 J8P-D25 #5 50 400 4000 K8P-D40
60 400 4000 K8P-D40
75 400 4000 K8P-D40
2113 #6 100 800 8000 M8P-D80
125 800 8000 M8P-D80
150 800 8000 M8P-D80
Rockwell Automation Publication 2100-TD032F-EN-P - January 2016 7 CENTERLINE 2100 Motor Circuit Protection
Table 4 - Short-Circuit Current Rating - 240V (cULus Listed) Controller
Type
Device/
Bulletin
Size/Rating Magnetic-only Trip Settings Electronic
Trip 140MG
Catalog
Number
Default
Unit
Combination
Short-Circuit
Current
Rating
140MG
Catalog
Number
Optional
Unit
Combination
Short-Circuit
Current
RatingSize HP A B C D E F G H I Min Max
Bulletin
500
2107,
2113,
2123
#1 0.125 21 28 35 42 49 56 63 70 77
G8P-B70 65 kA H8P-B70 100 kA
0.25 21 28 35 42 49 56 63 70 77 G8P-B70 H8P-B70
0.33 21 28 35 42 49 56 63 70 77 G8P-B70 H8P-B70
0 . 52 12 83 54 24 95 66 3 7 07 7 G8P-B70 H8P-B70
0.75 21 28 35 42 49 56 63 70 77 G8P-B70 H8P-B70
1 2 12 83 54 24 95 66 37 07 7 G8P-B70 H8P-B70
1.5 45 60 75 90 105 120 135 150 165 G8P-C15 100 kA H8P-C15 2 45 60 75 90 105 120 135 150 165 G8P-C15 H8P-C15
3 90 120 150 180 210 240 270 300 330 G8P-C30 H8P-C30
5 90 120 150 180 210 240 270 300 330 G8P-C30 H8P-C30
7.5 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 550 G8P-C50 H8P-C50 #2 10 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 550 G8P-C50 H8P-C50 15 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 1000 1100 G8P-D10 H8P-D10 #3 20 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 1000 1100 G8P-D10 H8P-D10 25 625 703 781 859 938 1016 1094 1172 1250 G8P-D12 H8P-D12 30 625 703 781 859 938 1016 1094 1172 1250 G8P-D12 H8P-D12 #4 40 1000 1125 1250 1375 1500 1625 1750 1875 2000 J8P-D20 50 1250 1406 1563 1719 1875 2031 2188 2344 2500 J8P-D25 #5 60 400 4000 K8P-D40
75 400 4000 K8P-D40
100 400 4000 K8P-D40
2113 #6 125 800 8000 M8P-D80
150 800 8000 M8P-D80
200 800 8000 M8P-D80
8 Rockwell Automation Publication 2100-TD032F-EN-P - January 2016 CENTERLINE 2100 Motor Circuit Protection
Table 5 - Short-Circuit Current Rating - 380V (units at this voltage are not cULus Listed) Controller
Type
Device/
Bulletin
Size/Rating Magnetic-only Trip Settings Electronic Trip Size HP A B C D E F G H I Min Max
140MG
Catalog
Number
Default
Unit
Combination
Short-Circuit
Current
Rating
140MG
Catalog
Number
Optional
Unit
Combination
Short-Circuit
Current
Rating
Bulletin 500 2107,
2113,
2123
#1 0.125 9 12 15 18 21 24 27 30 33
G8P-B30 65 kA H8P-B30 100 kA
0.25 9 12 15 18 21 24 27 30 33 G8P-B30 H8P-B30
0.33 9 12 15 18 21 24 27 30 33 G8P-B30 H8P-B30
0.5 9 12 15 18 21 24 27 30 33 G8P-B30 H8P-B30
0.75 9 12 15 18 21 24 27 30 33 G8P-B30 H8P-B30
1 2 12 83 54 24 95 66 37 07 7 G8P-B70 H8P-B70
1 . 52 12 83 54 24 95 66 3 7 07 7 G8P-B70 H8P-B70
2 2 12 83 54 24 95 66 37 07 7 G8P-B70 H8P-B70
3 45 60 75 90 105 120 135 150 165 G8P-C15 100 kA H8P-C15 5 45 60 75 90 105 120 135 150 165 G8P-C15 H8P-C15
7.5 90 120 150 180 210 240 270 300 330 G8P-C30 H8P-C30
10 90 120 150 180 210 240 270 300 330 G8P-C30 H8P-C30
#2 15 210 280 350 420 490 560 630 700 770 G8P-C70 H8P-C70 20 210 280 350 420 490 560 630 700 770 G8P-C70 H8P-C70
25 210 280 350 420 490 560 630 700 770 G8P-C70 H8P-C70
#3 30 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 1000 1100 G8P-D10 H8P-D10 40 625 703 781 859 938 1016 1094 1172 1250 G8P-D12 H8P-D12 50 625 703 781 859 938 1016 1094 1172 1250 G8P-D12 H8P-D12 #4 60 1000 1125 1250 1375 1500 1625 1750 1875 2000 J8P-D20 75 1250 1406 1563 1719 1875 2031 2188 2344 2500 J8P-D25 #5 100 400 4000 K8P-D40
125 400 4000 K8P-D40
150 400 4000 K8P-D40
200 800 8000 M8P-D80
#6 250 800 8000 M8P-D80
300 800 8000 M8P-D80
Rockwell Automation Publication 2100-TD032F-EN-P - January 2016 9 CENTERLINE 2100 Motor Circuit Protection
Table 6 - Short-Circuit Current Rating - 480V (cULus Listed) Controller
Type
Device/
Bulletin
Size/Rating Magnetic-only Trip Settings Electronic
Trip 140MG
Catalog
Number
Default
Unit
Combination
Short-Circuit
Current
Rating
140MG
Catalog
Number
Optional
Unit
Combination
Short-Circuit
Current
RatingSize HP A B C D E F G H I Min Max
Bulletin
500
2107,
2113,
2123
#1 0.125 9 12 15 18 21 24 27 30 33
G8P-B30 65 kA H8P-B30 100 kA
0 . 2 5 9 1 2 1 51 8 2 12 4 2 73 03 3 G8P-B30 H8P-B30
0 . 3 3 9 1 2 1 51 8 2 12 4 2 73 03 3 G8P-B30 H8P-B30
0.5 9 12 15 18 21 24 27 30 33 G8P-B30 H8P-B30
0 . 7 5 9 1 2 1 51 8 2 12 4 2 73 03 3 G8P-B30 H8P-B30
1 2 12 8 3 54 2 4 95 6 6 37 07 7 G8P-B70 H8P-B70
1 . 5 2 12 8 3 54 2 4 95 6 6 37 07 7 G8P-B70 H8P-B70
2 2 12 8 3 54 2 4 95 6 6 37 07 7 G8P-B70 H8P-B70
3 45 60 75 90 105 120 135 150 165 G8P-C15 100 kA H8P-C15 5 45 60 75 90 105 120 135 150 165 G8P-C15 H8P-C15
7.5 90 120 150 180 210 240 270 300 330 G8P-C30 H8P-C30
10 90 120 150 180 210 240 270 300 330 G8P-C30 H8P-C30
#2 15 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 550 G8P-C50 H8P-C50 20 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 550 G8P-C50 H8P-C50
25 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 550 G8P-C50 H8P-C50
#3 30 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 1000 1100 G8P-D10 H8P-D10 40 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 1000 1100 G8P-D10 H8P-D10 50 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 1000 1100 G8P-D10 H8P-D10 #4 60 750 844 938 1031 1125 1219 1313 1406 1500 J8P-D15 75 875 984 1094 1203 1313 1422 1531 1641 1750 J8P-D17
100 1250 1406 1563 1719 1875 2031 2188 2344 2500 J8P-D25 #5 125 400 4000 K8P-D40
150 400 4000 K8P-D40
200 400 4000 K8P-D40
2113 #6 250 800 8000 M8P-D80
300 800 8000 M8P-D80
350 800 8000 M8P-D80
400 800 8000 M8P-D80
10 Rockwell Automation Publication 2100-TD032F-EN-P - January 2016 CENTERLINE 2100 Motor Circuit Protection
Bulletin
300
2107, 2113
Space
Saving
NEMA
#1 0.25 9 12 15 18 21 24 27 30 33
G8P-B30 65 kA H8P-B30 65 kA
0 . 3 3 9 1 2 1 51 8 2 12 4 2 73 03 3 G8P-B30 H8P-B30
0.5 9 12 15 18 21 24 27 30 33 G8P-B30 H8P-B30
0 . 7 5 9 1 2 1 51 8 2 12 4 2 73 03 3 G8P-B30 H8P-B30
1 2 12 8 3 54 2 4 95 6 6 37 07 7 G8P-B70 H8P-B70
1 . 5 2 12 8 3 54 2 4 95 6 6 37 07 7 G8P-B70 H8P-B70
2 2 12 8 3 54 2 4 95 6 6 37 07 7 G8P-B70 H8P-B70
3 45 60 75 90 105 120 135 150 165 G8P-C15 H8P-C15
5 45 60 75 90 105 120 135 150 165 G8P-C15 H8P-C15
7.5 90 120 150 180 210 240 270 300 330 G8P-C30 H8P-C30
10 90 120 150 180 210 240 270 300 330 G8P-C30 H8P-C30
#2 15 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 550 G8P-C50 H8P-C50 20 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 550 G8P-C50 H8P-C50
25 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 550 G8P-C50 H8P-C50
#3 30 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 1000 1100 G8P-D10 H8P-D10 40 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 1000 1100 G8P-D10 H8P-D10 50 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 1000 1100 G8P-D10 H8P-D10 2113
Space
Saving
NEMA
#4 60 750 844 938 1031 1125 1219 1313 1406 1500
J8P-D15
75 825 984 1094 1203 1313 1422 1531 1641 1750 J8P-D17
100 1250 1406 1563 1719 1875 2031 2188 2344 2500 J8P-D25 Table 6 - Short-Circuit Current Rating - 480V (cULus Listed) Controller
Type
Device/
Bulletin
Size/Rating Magnetic-only Trip Settings Electronic
Trip 140MG
Catalog
Number
Default
Unit
Combination
Short-Circuit
Current
Rating
140MG
Catalog
Number
Optional
Unit
Combination
Short-Circuit
Current
RatingSize HP A B C D E F G H I Min Max
Rockwell Automation Publication 2100-TD032F-EN-P - January 2016 11 CENTERLINE 2100 Motor Circuit Protection
Table 7 - Short-Circuit Current Rating - 600V (cULus Listed) Controller
Type
Device /
Bulletin
Size/Rating Magnetic-only Trip Settings Electronic
Trip 140MG
Catalog
Number
Unit
Combination
Short-Circuit
Current
Rating
140G
Catalog
Number
Optional
Unit
Combination
Short-Circuit
Current
RatingSize HP A B C D E F G H I Min Max
Bulletin
500
2107,
2113,
2123
#1 0.125 9 12 15 18 21 24 27 30 33
H8P-B30 42 kA H15H3-C25 (1) 65 kA
0.25 9 12 15 18 21 24 27 30 33 H8P-B30
0.33 9 12 15 18 21 24 27 30 33 H8P-B30
0.5 9 12 15 18 21 24 27 30 33 H8P-B30
0.75 9 12 15 18 21 24 27 30 33 H8P-B30
1 9 12 15 18 21 24 27 30 33 H8P-B30
1.5 21 28 35 42 49 56 63 70 77 H8P-B70
22 1 2 8 3 5 4 2 4 9 5 6 6 3 7 0 7 7 H8P-B30
32 1 2 8 3 5 4 2 4 9 5 6 6 3 7 0 7 7 H8P-B30
5 45 60 75 90 105 120 135 150 165 H8P-C15 50 kA
7.5 90 120 150 180 210 240 270 300 330 H8P-C30
10 90 120 150 180 210 240 270 300 330 H8P-C30
#2 15 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 550 H8P-C50 H15H3-C60(1) 20 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 550 H8P-C50
25 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 550 H8P-C50
#3 30 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 1000 1100 H8P-D10 H15H3-D10(1) 40 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 1000 1100 H8P-D10
50 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 1000 1100 H8P-D10
#4 60 750 844 938 1031 1125 1219 1313 1406 1500 J8P-D15 65 kA K15H3-D30 (2) 100 kA 75 750 844 938 1031 1125 1219 1313 1406 1500 J8P-D15
100 1000 1125 1250 1375 1500 1625 1750 1875 2000 J8P-D20 #5 125 400 4000 K8P-D40
150 400 4000 K8P-D40
200 400 4000 K8P-D40
#6 250 800 8000 M8P-D80 50 kA
300 800 8000 M8P-D80
350 800 8000 M8P-D80
400 800 8000 M8P-D80
12 Rockwell Automation Publication 2100-TD032F-EN-P - January 2016 CENTERLINE 2100 Motor Circuit Protection
Bulletin
300
2107,
2113
Space
Saving
NEMA
#1 0.25 9 12 15 18 21 24 27 30 33
H8P-B30 35 kA
0.33 9 12 15 18 21 24 27 30 33 H8P-B30
0.5 9 12 15 18 21 24 27 30 33 H8P-B30
0.75 9 12 15 18 21 24 27 30 33 H8P-B30
1 9 12 15 18 21 24 27 30 33 H8P-B30
1.5 21 28 35 42 49 56 63 70 77 H8P-B70
22 1 2 8 3 5 4 2 4 9 5 6 6 3 7 0 7 7 H8P-B70
32 1 2 8 3 5 4 2 4 9 5 6 6 3 7 0 7 7 H8P-B70
5 45 60 75 90 105 120 135 150 165 H8P-C15
7.5 90 120 150 180 210 240 270 300 330 H8P-C30
10 90 120 150 180 210 240 270 300 330 H8P-C30
#2 15 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 550 H8P-C50
20 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 550 H8P-C50
25 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 550 H8P-C50
#3 30 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 1000 1100 H8P-D10
40 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 1000 1100 H8P-D10
50 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 1000 1100 H8P-D10
#4 60 750 844 938 1031 1125 1219 1313 1406 1500 J8P-D15 75 750 844 938 1031 1125 1219 1313 1406 1500 J8P-D15
100 1000 1125 1250 1375 1500 1625 1750 1875 2000 J8P-D20 (1) For details on 140G-H15H3-_ _ _ breakers, see Table 9. (2) For details on 140G-K15H3-_ _ _ breakers, see Table 9.
Table 7 - Short-Circuit Current Rating - 600V (cULus Listed) Controller
Type
Device /
Bulletin
Size/Rating Magnetic-only Trip Settings Electronic
Trip 140MG
Catalog
Number
Unit
Combination
Short-Circuit
Current
Rating
140G
Catalog
Number
Optional
Unit
Combination
Short-Circuit
Current
RatingSize HP A B C D E F G H I Min Max
(continued)
Rockwell Automation Publication 2100-TD032F-EN-P - January 2016 13 CENTERLINE 2100 Motor Circuit Protection
Inverse Time Circuit Breakers in Combination NEMA Starter, Soft Starter (SMC), and Variable Frequency AC Drive Units
Application
Circuit breaker application is valid for the following CENTERLINE 2100 MCC products:
• Bulletin 2107 Full V oltage Reversing Combination Starters • Bulletin 2113 Full V oltage Non-reversing Combination Starters • Bulletin 2123 T wo Speed Non-reversing Combination Starters • Bulletin 2155 Combination Soft Starter Controllers
• Bulletin 2163 V ariable Frequency AC Combination Drive Units The information in this publication applies to Allen-Bradley inverse time, thermal magnetic, or solid-state circuit breakers when they are used in NEMA (size 1…6) combination starter, soft starter controller, and variable frequency AC drive units.
Circuit Breaker Operation
Inverse time circuit-breakers are designed to trip at 100…125% of their continuous current rating. They are also designed to trip, on an inverse-time basis, at overcurrents up to the magnetic or electronic trip current setting of the circuit breaker.
The circuit breaker manufacturer sets the continuous current ratings for the thermal magnetic circuit-breakers. The continuous current rating of circuit breakers with solid-state trip mechanisms depends on the installed rating plug.
Allen-Bradley G-frame and H-frame (up to 70 A) circuit breakers have a non-adjustable, instantaneous magnetic-trip mechanism that is set by the circuit breaker manufacturer. All other frame sizes have an adjustable, instantaneous trip mechanism that can be set to a desired current value. See Ta b l e 8 for the instantaneous trip ranges and settings.
14 Rockwell Automation Publication 2100-TD032F-EN-P - January 2016 CENTERLINE 2100 Motor Circuit Protection
Circuit Breaker Size and Adjustment
Rockwell Automation has made engineering evaluations for the protective device (circuit breaker) selection, sizing, and setting range that is based on the protection rules/requirements and motor criteria as stipulated in NEC, CEC, NEMA, UL, and CSA standards. For example, evaluations have been made for items such as motor full-load currents (FLC), X/R ratios, locked rotor currents, and nominal utilization voltages. If the motor application has criteria that deviates from the criteria that are stated in the standards, higher FLC and/or motor inrush currents (greater than 1300% of the nominal FLC) can be experienced. Examples of non-standard motor applications include the following: special motors, non/off standard NEMA motors, energy efficient motors, Design B energy efficient, Design E motors, and IEC N motors.
For circuit breakers with adjustable instantaneous trip, determine the desired instantaneous trip current by using the National Electrical Code (NEC) or Canadian Electrical Code (CEC) standard, and the instructions that are provided with the combination starter unit. See Ta b l e 8
and choose the trip setting that has the desired trip current. See Ta b l e 9 for other optional breaker choices for the given trip current.
Follow these steps to adjust the trip setting.
1. V erify that the circuit breaker operating-handle is in the OFF/O position.
2. With a small screwdriver, turn each trip setting dial clockwise (or adjust DIP switches) to the determined setting.
If there are multiple dials on the circuit breaker, set all dials to the same value.
3. V erify that the circuit breaker does not trip during motor starting.
Push-to-trip Mechanism
The push-to-trip mechanism provides a manual means for tripping the motor circuit protector. When you press the test button on the circuit breaker cover with a small screwdriver, a plunger rotates the trip bar, which causes the motor circuit protector to trip.
Horsepower Ratings
The horsepower ratings for combination starter units, soft starter controller units, and variable frequency AC drive units that are listed in Ta b l e 8 were determined from full-load currents as specified in the NEC/CEC standards.
Acceptable performance occurs when the motor full-load current is within 15% of the value that corresponds to the horsepower ratings and voltages that are listed in the NEC/CEC standards. Contact your local Allen-Bradley distributor or Rockwell Automation sales representative if the motor full-load current is not within these limits.
Rockwell Automation Publication 2100-TD032F-EN-P - January 2016 15 CENTERLINE 2100 Motor Circuit Protection
ATTENTION: The horsepower ratings and corresponding trip settings in Table 8 are valid only when the combination starter units are equipped with an Allen-Bradley solid-state or electronic overload relay or a Bulletin 592 eutectic alloy overload relay with correctly sized heater elements.
When correctly selected, this combination of circuit breaker and overload relay protects against short circuit and ground fault damage. This combination provides coordinated overcurrent protection in the motor branch circuit for continuous-duty rated motors, as defined in the NEC and CEC standards.
The circuit breaker that has tripped can indicate the interruption of a high fault current. To be sure of protection against fire and/or shock hazard, examine the current carrying parts of the combination starter units, soft starter controller units, and variable frequency AC drive units and replace if damaged. (Refer to NEMA Standards Publication Number ICS 2.2, Maintenance of Motor Controllers After a Fault Condition, and NEMA Standard Publication Number ICS 2, Parts ICS 2-302.) 16 Rockwell Automation Publication 2100-TD032F-EN-P - January 2016 CENTERLINE 2100 Motor Circuit Protection
Table 8 - Default Inverse-time Breakers Used at Given Horse Power and Voltage Ratings 140G-(1)
(1) See Table 9 for more detailed information about the breaker.
Voltage (breaker trip rating)
208 240 380 480 600 (2)
(2) For units that use the 140G-H15 circuit breake rs (indicated by THUL catalog string), see Table 7 for correct circuit breaker information.
HP KW
0.25 0.125
G6C3-C15 (15 A)
G6C3-C15 (15 A)
G6C3-C15 (15 A) G6C3-C15 (15 A)
H0C3-C15 (15 A)
0.33 0.25
0.5 0.37
0.75 0.55
10 .75
1.5 1.1
2 1.5 G6C3-C20 (20 A)
3 2.2 G6C3-C30 (30 A) G6C3-C20 (20 A)
5 3.7 G6C3-C40 (40 A) G6C3-C30 (30 A) G6C3-C20 (20 A) G6C3-C20 (20 A)
7.5 5.5
G6C3-C70 (70 A)
G6C3-C50 (50 A) G6C3-C30 (30 A)
G6C3-C30 (30 A)
H0C3-C20 (20 A)
10 7.5 G6C3-C70 (70 A) G6C3-C40 (40 A) H0C3-C30 (30 A)
15 11
G6C3-D12 (125 A)
G6C3-D10 (100 A) G6C3-C60 (60 A)
G6C3-C60 (60 A)
H0C3-C40 (40 A)
20 15
G6C3-D12 (125 A)
G6C3-C80 (80 A) H0C3-C60 (60 A)
25 18.5
30 22
J6F3-D22 (225 A)
G6C3-D10 (100 A) G6C3-D10 (100 A) H0C3-C70 (70 A)
40 30
J6F3-D25 (250 A) G6C3-D12 (125 A) G6C3-D12 (125 A) H0F3-D10 (100 A) 50 37
K6H3-D40 (400 A)60 45
K6H3-D40 (400 A)
J6F3-D25 (250 A)
J6F3-D20 (200 A) J0F3-D17 (175 A)
75 55
J6F3-D25 (250 A) J0F3-D20 (200 A)
100 75 M6H3-D60 (600 A)
K6H3-D40 (400 A)125 90
M6H3-D80 (800 A)
M6H3-D80 (800 A) K6H3-D40 (400 A) K0H3-D40 (400 A)150 112 200 150
M6H3-D80 (800 A)250 187
M6H3-D80 (800 A)
M0H3-D60 (600 A)
300 224
M0H3-D80 (800 A)350 261
400 300
Rockwell Automation Publication 2100-TD032F-EN-P - January 2016 17 CENTERLINE 2100 Motor Circuit Protection
Table 9 - Inverse Time Table
Amps Size/Rating Short-Circuit Current Rating at
Given Voltage(1)
Circuit Breaker
Part No.
208/
240V
380/
480V
600V Protection
Type
Magnetic
Trip
Setting
Min Mid Max Magnetic
Trip
Setting
Min
Magnetic
Trip
Setting
Max
MCC
Catalog
String
Suffix
Code
Fixed Thermal-magnetic Adjustable Electronic Trip
Adjustable
15 140G-G6C3-C15 100 kA 65 kA ------ TMF 500
N/A N/A TGM
140G-H6C3-C15 100 kA 65 kA ------ 400 N/A N/A THM
140G-H0C3-C15 ------ 100 kA 35 kA N/A N/A THX
140G-J15H3-C15 ------ ------ 100 kA LSI (3) N/A N/A N/A TJUL 20 140G-G6C3-C20 100 kA 65 kA ------ TMF 500 N/A N/A TGM 140G-H6C3-C20 100 kA 65 kA ------ 400 N/A N/A THM
140G-H0C3-C20 ------ 100 kA 35 kA N/A N/A THX
25 140G-H6H3-C25 100 kA 65 kA ------ LSI (3) N/A N/A 25 250 THML 140G-H0H3-C25 ------ 100 kA 35 kA N/A N/A THXL
140G-H15H3-C25 ------ ------ 42 kA (2) N/A N/A THUL
30 140G-G6C3-C30 100 kA 65 kA ------ TMF 500 N/A N/A TGM 140G-H6C3-C30 100 kA 65 kA ------ 400 N/A N/A THM
140G-H0C3-C30 ------ 100 kA 35 kA N/A N/A THX
140G-J15C3-C30 ------ ------ 100 kA N/A N/A TJU
40 140G-G6C3-C40 100 kA 65 kA ------ TMF 500 N/A N/A TGM 140G-H6C3-C40 100 kA 65 kA ------ 400 N/A N/A THM
140G-H0C3-C40 ------ 100 kA 35 kA N/A N/A THX
140G-J15C3-C40 ------ ------ 100 kA N/A N/A N/A TJU
140G-J15H3-C40 ------ ------ 100 kA LSI (3) N/A N/A N/A TJUL 50 140G-G6C3-C50 100 kA 65 kA ------ TMF 500 N/A N/A TGM 140G-H6C3-C50 100 kA 65 kA ------ 500 N/A N/A THM
140G-H0C3-C50 ------ 100 kA 35 kA N/A N/A THX
140G-J15C3-C50 ------ ------ 100 kA N/A N/A N/A TJU
60 140G-G6C3-C60 100 kA 65 kA ------ TMF 600 N/A N/A TGM 140G-H6C3-C60 100 kA 65 kA ------ 600 N/A N/A THM
140G-H0C3-C60 ------ 100 kA 35 kA N/A N/A N/A THX
140G-H6H3-C60 100 kA 65 kA ------ LSI (3) N/A N/A 60 600 THML 140G-H0H3-C60 ------ 100 kA 35 kA N/A N/A THXL
140G-H15H3-C60 ------ ------ 42 kA (2) N/A N/A THUL
140G-J15C3-C60 ------ ------ 100 kA TMF N/A N/A N/A TJU 140G-J15H3-C60 ------ ------ 100 kA LSI (3) N/A N/A N/A TJUL 70 140G-G6C3-C70 100 kA 65 kA ------ TMF 700 N/A N/A TGM 140G-H6C3-C70 100 kA 65 kA ------ 700 N/A N/A THM
140G-H0C3-C70 ------ 100 kA 35 kA N/A N/A THX
140G-J6C3-C70 100 kA 65 kA ------ 700 N/A N/A TJM
140G-JOC3-C70 ------ 100 kA 35 kA N/A N/A TJX
140G-J15C3-C70 ------ ------ 100 kA N/A N/A N/A TJU
(1) Short-circuit current rating that is shown indicates quick-delivery offering. (2) Except with 2107, 2113, and 2123 units. See Table 7 for combination rating. (3) Adjustable from 40…100% of breaker rating in 2% increments. 18 Rockwell Automation Publication 2100-TD032F-EN-P - January 2016 CENTERLINE 2100 Motor Circuit Protection
Table 9 - Inverse Time Table (continued)
Amps
Size/Rating Short-Circuit Current Rating at
Given Voltage(1)
(1) Short-circuit current rating that is shown indicates quick-delivery offering.
Circuit Breaker
Part No.
208/
240V
380/
480V 600V Protection
Type
Magnetic
Trip
Setting
Min Mid Max
Magnetic
Trip
Setting
Min
Magnetic
Trip
Setting
Max
MCC Catalog
String Suffix
Code
Fixed Thermal-magnetic Adjustable Electronic Trip
Adjustable
80 140G-G6C3-C80 100 kA 65 kA ------ TMF 800
N/A N/A TGM
140G-H6F3-C80 100 kA 65 kA ------ TMA N/A 400 500 600 700 800 N/A THM 140G-H0F3-C80 ------ 100 kA 35 kA N/A THX
140G-J15F3-C80 ------ ------ 100 kA N/A N/A N/A TJU
90 140G-G6C3-C90 100 kA 65 kA ------ TMF 900 N/A N/A TGM 140G-H6F3-C90 100 kA 65 kA ------ TMA N/A 450 562.5 675 787.5 900 N/A THM 140G-H0F3-C90 ------ 100 kA 35 kA N/A N/A THX
140G-J6F3-C90 100 kA 65 kA ------ N/A 450 562.5 675 787.5 900 TJM 140G-J0F3-C90 ------ 100 kA 35 kA TJX
140G-J15F3-C90 ------ ------ 100 kA N/A N/A N/A TJU
100 140G-G6C3-D10 100 kA 65 kA ------ TMF 1000 N/A N/A TGM 140G-H6F3-D10 100 kA 65 kA ------ TMA N/A 500 625 750 875 1000 N/A THM 140G-H0F3-D10 ------ 100 kA 35 kA N/A THX
140G-H6H3-D10 100 kA 65 kA ------ LSI (3)
(3) Adjustable from 40…100% of breaker rating in 2% increments.
N/A 100 1000 THML
140G-H0H3-D10 ------ 100 kA 35 kA N/A THXL
140G-H15H3-D10 ------ ------ 42 kA (2)
(2) Except with 2107, 2113, and 2123 units. See Table 7 for combination rating.
N/A THUL
140G-J6F3-D10 100 kA 65 kA ------ TMA N/A 500 625 750 875 1000 N/A TJM 140G-J0F3-D10 ------ 100 kA 35 kA TJX
140G-J6H3-D10 100 kA 65 kA ------ LSI (3) N/A 100 1000 TJML 140G-J0H3-D10 ------ 100 kA 35 kA TJXL
140G-J15F3-D10 ------ ------ 100 kA TMA N/A TJU
140G-J15H3-D10 ------ ------ 100 kA LSI (3) N/A TJUL
125 140G-G6C3-D12 100 kA 65 kA ------ TMF 1200 N/A N/A TGM 140G-H6F3-D12 100 kA 65 kA ------ TMA N/A 625 781.25 937.5 1093.75 1250 N/A THM 140G-H0F3-D12 ------ 100 kA 35 kA N/A N/A THX
140G-H6H3-D12 100 kA 65 kA ------ LSI (3) N/A N/A 125 1250 THML 140G-H0H3-D12 ------ 100 kA 35 kA N/A N/A THXL
140G-J6F3-D12 100 kA 65 kA ------ TMA N/A 625 781.25 937.5 1093.75 1250 N/A TJM 140G-J0F3-D12 ------ 100 kA 35 kA TJX
140G-J15F3-D12 ------ ------ 100 kA N/A N/A TJU
150 140G-J6F3-D15 100 kA 65 kA ------ TMA N/A 750 937.5 1125 1312.5 1500 N/A TJM 140G-J0F3-D15 ------ 100 kA 35 kA N/A N/A TJX
140G-J6H3-D15 100 kA 65 kA ------ LSI (3) N/A N/A 150 1500 TJML 140G-J0H3-D15 ------ 100 kA 35 kA N/A N/A TJXL
140G-J15F3-D15 ------ ------ 100 kA TMA N/A N/A TJU
140G-J15H3-D15 ------ ------ 100 kA LSI (3) N/A TJUL
Rockwell Automation Publication 2100-TD032F-EN-P - January 2016 19 CENTERLINE 2100 Motor Circuit Protection
Table 9 - Inverse Time Table (continued)
Amps
Size/Rating Short-Circuit Current Rating at
Given Voltage(1)
Circuit
Breaker Part
No.
208/
240V
380/
480V 600V Protection
Type
Magnetic
Trip
Setting
Min Mid Max
Magnetic
Trip
Setting
Min
Magnetic
Trip
Setting
Max
MCC
Catalog
String
Suffix
Code
Fixed Thermal-magnetic Adjustable Electronic Trip
Adjustable
175 140G-J6F3-D17 100 kA 65 kA ------ TMA N/A 875 1094 1313 1532 1750 N/A TJM 140G-J0F3-D17 ------ 100 kA 35 kA N/A N/A TJX
140G-J6H3-D17 100 kA 65 kA ------ LSI (3) N/A N/A 175 1750 TJML 140G-J0H3-D17 ------ 100 kA 35 kA N/A N/A TJXL
200 140G-J6F3-D20 100 kA 65 kA ------ TMA N/A 1000 1250 1500 1750 2000 N/A TJM 140G-J0F3-D20 ------ 100 kA 35 kA N/A N/A TJX
140G-J6H3-D20 100 kA 65 kA ------ LSI (3) N/A N/A 200 2000 TJML 140G-J0H3-D20 ------ 100 kA 35 kA N/A N/A TJXL
250 140G-J6F3-D25 100 kA 65 kA ------ TMA N/A 1250 1563 1875 2188 2500 N/A TJM 140G-J0F3-D25 ------ 100 kA 35 kA N/A N/A TJX
140G-J6H3-D25 100 kA 65 kA ------ LSI (3) N/A N/A 250 2500 TJML 140G-J0H3-D25 ------ 100 kA 35 kA N/A N/A TJXL
300 140G-K6H3-D30 100 kA 65 kA ------ LSI (2) N/A N/A 450 3600 TKM 140G-K0H3-D30 ------ 100 kA 65 kA N/A N/A TKX
140G-K15H3-D30 ------ ------ 100 kA N/A N/A TKU
400 140G-K6H3-D40 100 kA 65 kA ------ LSI (2) N/A N/A 600 4800 TKM 140G-K0H3-D40 ------ 100 kA 65 kA N/A N/A TKX
140G-K15H3-D40 ------ ------ 100 kA N/A N/A TKU
600 140G-M6H3-D60 100 kA 65 kA ------ LSI (3) N/A N/A 900 7200 TMM 140G-M0H3-D60 ------ 100 kA 42 kA N/A N/A TMX
140G-M6I3-D60 100 kA 65 kA ------ LSIG (3) N/A N/A TMMG 140G-M0I3-D60 ------ 100 kA 42 kA N/A N/A TMXG
800 140G-M6H3-D80 100 kA 65 kA ------ LSI (3) N/A N/A 1200 9600 TMM 140G-M0H3-D80 ------ 100 kA 42 kA N/A N/A TMX
140G-M6I3-D80 100 kA 65 kA ------ LSIG (3) N/A N/A TMMG 140G-M0I3-D80 ------ 100 kA 42 kA N/A N/A TMXG
1200 140G-N6H3-E12 100 kA 65 kA ------ LSI (3) N/A N/A 1200 12000 TNM 140G-N0H3-E12 ------ 100 kA 65 kA N/A N/A TNX
140G-N6I3-E12 100 kA 65 kA ------ LSIG (4) N/A N/A TNMG 140G-N0I3-E12 ------ 100 kA 65 kA N/A N/A TNXG
2000 140G-R12I3-E20 100 kA 100 kA 100 kA LSIG (4) N/A N/A 2000 20000 TRUG 2500 140G-R12I3-E25 100 kA 100 kA 100 kA LSIG (4) N/A N/A 2500 25000 TRUG 3000 140G-R12I3-E30 100 kA 100 kA 100 kA LSIG (4) N/A N/A 3000 30000 TRUG (1) Short-circuit current rating that is shown indicates quick-delivery offering. (2) Adjustable from 40…100% of breaker rating in 2% increments. (3) Adjustable from 40…100% of breaker rating in 4% increments. (4) Adjustable from 40…100% of breaker rating in 2.5% increments. 20 Rockwell Automation Publication 2100-TD032F-EN-P - January 2016 CENTERLINE 2100 Motor Circuit Protection
Time-current Curves
See Molded Case Circuit Breakers, Motor Protection Circuit Breakers, and Motor Circuit Protectors T echnical Data, publication 140G-TD100, to view the time-current curves that are associated with the following equipment.
Topic
Time-current Curves for Bulletin 140MG-G Motor Circuit Protectors, 600Y/347V AC (50/60 Hz), 3…125 A Time-current Curves for Bulletin 140MG-H Motor Circuit Protectors, 600V AC (50/60 Hz), 3…100 A Time-current Curves for Bulletin 140MG-H Motor Circuit Protectors 600V AC (50/60 Hz), 125 A Time-current Curves for Bulletin 140MG-J Motor Circuit Protectors, 600V AC (50/60 Hz), 150…250 A Time-current Curves for Bulletin 140MG-K Motor Circuit Protectors, 600V AC (50/60 Hz), 300 A, 400 A Time-current Curves for Bulletin 140MG-M Motor Circuit Protectors, 600V AC (50/60 Hz) 600 A, 800 A Time-current Curves for Bulletin 140G-G Thermomagnetic Molded Case Circuit Breaker, 600Y/347V AC, 15…30 A Time-current Curves for Bulletin 140G-G Thermomagnetic Molded Case Circuit Breaker, 600Y/347V AC, 35…50 A Time-current Curves for Bulletin 140G-G Thermomagnetic Molded Case Circuit Breaker, 600Y/347V AC, 60…100 A Time-current Curves for Bulletin 140G-G Thermomagnetic Molded Case Circuit Breaker, 600Y/347V AC, 125 A Time-current Curves for Bulletin 140G-H Thermomagnetic Molded Case Circuit Breaker, 600V AC, 15…30 A Time-current Curves for Bulletin 140G-H Thermomagnetic Molded Case Circuit Breaker, 600V AC, 35…50 A Time-current Curves for Bulletin 140G-H Thermomagnetic Molded Case Circuit Breaker, 600V AC, 60…70 A Time-current Curves for Bulletin 140G-H Thermomagnetic Molded Case Circuit Breaker, 600V AC, 80…100 A Time-current Curves for Bulletin 140G-H Thermomagnetic Molded Case Circuit Breaker, 600V AC, 110…125 A Time-current Curves for Bulletin 140G-H Thermomagnetic Molded Case Circuit Breaker, 600V AC (50/60 Hz), 25 A, 60 A, 100 A, 125 A Time-current Curves for Bulletin 140G-H Thermomagnetic Molded Case Circuit Breaker, Ground Fault Protection Curve, 600V AC (50/60 Hz), 25 A, 60 A, 100 A, 125 A
Time-current Curves for Bulletin 140G-J Thermomagnetic Molded Case Circuit Breaker, 600V AC, 25…50 A Time-current Curves for Bulletin 140G-J Thermomagnetic Molded Case Circuit Breaker, 600V AC, 60…70 A Time-current Curves for Bulletin 140G-J Thermomagnetic Molded Case Circuit Breaker, 600V AC, 80…100 A Time-current Curves for Bulletin 140G-J Thermomagnetic Molded Case Circuit Breaker, 600V AC, 110…150 A Time-current Curves for Bulletin 140G-J Thermomagnetic Molded Case Circuit Breaker, 600V AC, 160…225 A Time-current Curves for Bulletin 140G-J Thermomagnetic Molded Case Circuit Breaker, 600V AC, 250 A Time-current Curves for Bulletin 140G-J Molded Case Circuit Breaker, 600V AC (50/60 Hz), 40 A, 60 A, 100 A, 150 A, 250 A Time-current Curves for Bulletin 140G-J Molded Case Circuit Breaker, Ground Fault Protection Curve 600V AC (50/60 Hz), 25 A, 60 A, 100 A, 125 A
Time-current Curves for Bulletin 140G-K Molded Case Circuit Breaker, 600V AC, (50/60 Hz) 300 A, 400 A Time-current Curves for Bulletin 140G-K Molded Case Circuit Breaker, Ground Fault Protection Curve, 600V AC, (50/60 Hz) 300 A, 400 A Time-current Curves for Bulletin 140G-M Molded Case Circuit Breaker, 600V AC (50/60 Hz) 600 A, 800 A Time-current Curves for Bulletin 140G-M Molded Case Circuit Breaker, Ground Fault Protection Curve, 600V AC (50/60 Hz) 600 A, 800 A Time-current Curves for Bulletin 140G-N (-NS) Molded Case Circuit Breaker, 600V AC (50/60 Hz) 1200 A Time-current Curves for Bulletin 140G-N (-NS) Molded Case Circuit Breaker, Ground Fault Protection Curve Time-current Curves for Bulletin 140G-R Molded Case Circuit Breaker, 600V AC (50/60 Hz) 2000 A, 2500 A, 3000 A Rockwell Automation Publication 2100-TD032F-EN-P - January 2016 21 CENTERLINE 2100 Motor Circuit Protection
Additional Resources
These documents contain additional information concerning related products from Rockwell Automation.
Y ou can view or download publications at http://www.rockwellautomation.com/global/literature-library/ overview.page. T o order paper copies of technical documentation, contact your local Allen-Bradley distributor or Rockwell Automation sales representative.
Resource Description
CENTERLINE 2100 Low Voltage Motor Control Centers Instruction Manual, publication 2100-IN012 Provides general instructions for MCC Units.
Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines, publication 1770-4.1 Provides general guidelines for installing a Rockwell Automation® industrial system.
Product Certifications website, http://www.ab.com Provides declarations of conformity, certificates, and other certification details.
Allen-Bradley, Rockwell Software, Rockwell Automation, CENTERLINE, and LISTEN. THINK. SOLVE. are trademarks of Rockwell Automation, Inc.
Trademarks not belonging to Rockwell Automation are property of their respective companies.
Publication 2100-TD032F-EN-P - January 2016
Supersedes Publication 2100-TD032E-EN-P - November 2015 Copyright © 2016 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved. Printed in the U.S.A.
Rockwell Automation Support
Use the following resources to access support information.
Documentation Feedback
Y our comments will help us serve your documentation needs better. If you have any suggestions on how to improve this document, complete the How Are W e Doing? form at http://literature.rockwellautomation.com/idc/groups/literature/documents/du/ra-du002_-en-e.pdf.
Technical Support Center Knowledgebase Articles, How-to Videos, FAQs, Chat, User Forums, and Product Notification Updates. www.rockwellautomation.com/knowledgebase Local Technical Support Phone Numbers Locate the phone number for your country. www.rockwellautomation.com/global/support/get-support- now.page
Direct Dial Codes
Find the Direct Dial Code for your product. Use the
code to route your call directly to a technical support engineer.
www.rockwellautomation.com/global/support/direct-
dial.page
Literature Library Installation Instructions, Manuals, Brochures, and Technical Data. www.rockwellautomation.com/literature
Product Compatibility and Download Center
(PCDC)
Get help determining how products interact, check
features and capabilities, and find associated
firmware.
www.rockwellautomation.com/global/support/pcdc.page
Rockwell Otomasyon Ticaret A.Ş., Kar Plaza İş Merkezi E Blok Kat:6 34752 İçerenköy, İstanbul, T el: +90 (216) 5698400 Rockwell Automation maintains current product environmental information on its website at http://www.rockwellautomation.com/rockwellautomation/about-us/sustainability-ethics/product-environmental-compliance.page. www.rockwellautomation.com
Power, Control and Information Solutions Headquarters
Americas: Rockwell Automation, 1201 South Second Stteet, Milwaukee, WI 53204-2496 USA, Tel: ( 1) 414.382.2000, Fax: ( 1) 414.382.4444 Europe/Middle East/ Africa: Rockwell Automation NV, Pegasus Park, De Kleetlaan 12a, 1831 Diegem, Belgium, Tel: (32) 2 663 0600, Fax: {32) 2 663 0640 Asia Pacific: Rockwell Automarion, Level 14, Core F, Cyberporr 3, 100 Cyberporr Road, Hong Kong, Tel: {852) 2887 4788, Fax: {852) 2508 1846 Drive Communications & Accessories
20-COMM-E EtherNet/IP Adapter User Manual
Catalog Number 20-COMM-E, Series A FRN 2.xxx, Series B FRN 4.xxx User Manual
e Allen-Bradley
Rockwell
@ Allen-Bradley • Rockwell Software Automation
Important User Information
Read this document and the documents listed in the additional resources section about installation, configuration, and operation of this equipment before you install, configure, operate, or maintain this product. Users are required to familiarize themselves with installation and wiring instructions in addition to requirements of all applicable codes, laws, and standards.
Activities including installation, adjustments, putting into service, use, assembly, disassembly, and maintenance are required to be carried out by suitably trained personnel in accordance with applicable code of practice.
If this equipment is used in a manner not specified by the manufacturer, the protection provided by the equipment may be impaired.
In no event will Rockwell Automation, Inc. be responsible or liable for indirect or consequential damages resulting from the use or application of this equipment.
The examples and diagrams in this manual are included solely for illustrative purposes. Because of the many variables and requirements associated with any particular installation, Rockwell Automation, Inc. cannot assume responsibility or liability for actual use based on the examples and diagrams.
No patent liability is assumed by Rockwell Automation, Inc. with respect to use of information, circuits, equipment, or software described in this manual.
Reproduction of the contents of this manual, in whole or in part, without written permission of Rockwell Automation, Inc., is prohibited.
Throughout this manual, when necessary, we use notes to make you aware of safety considerations.
Labels may also be on or inside the equipment to provide specific precautions.
Allen-Bradley, Rockwell Software, and Rockwell Automation are trademarks of Rockwell Automation, Inc.
T rademarks not belonging to Rockwell Automation are property of their respective companies.
WARNING: Identifies information about practices or circumstances that can cause an explosion in a hazardous environment, which may lead to personal injury or death, property damage, or economic loss.
ATTENTION: Identifies information about practices or circumstances that can lead to personal injury or death, property damage, or economic loss. Attentions help you identify a hazard, avoid a hazard, and recognize the consequence.
IMPORTANT Identifies information that is critical for successful application and understanding of the product.
SHOCK HAZARD: Labels may be on or inside the equipment, for example, a drive or motor, to alert people that dangerous voltage may be present.
BURN HAZARD: Labels may be on or inside the equipment, for example, a drive or motor, to alert people that surfaces may reach dangerous temperatures.
ARC FLASH HAZARD: Labels may be on or inside the equipment, for example, a motor control center, to alert people to potential Arc Flash. Arc Flash will cause severe injury or death. Wear proper Personal Protective Equipment (PPE). Follow ALL Regulatory requirements for safe work practices and for Personal Protective Equipment (PPE). 20-COMM-E EtherNet/IP Adapter User Manual
Publication 20COMM-UM010H-EN-P
Summary of Changes
The information below summarizes the changes made to this manual since its last release (May 2013):
Description of Changes Page
Updated the information about parameter 46 to reflect a new maximum value of 200s. B-6 Added information about a new parameter, parameter 59 (PCCC CTL Timeout). B-8 soc-ii Summary of Changes
20-COMM-E EtherNet/IP Adapter User Manual
Publication 20COMM-UM010H-EN-P
Notes:
20-COMM-E EtherNet/IP Adapter User Manual
Publication 20COMM-UM010H-EN-P
Table of Contents
Preface About This Manual
Conventions Used in This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P-1 Rockwell Automation Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P-2 Additional Resources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P-2 Chapter 1 Getting Started
Components. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2 Compatible Products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 -3 Required Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 -3 Safety Precautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5 Quick Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6 Chapter 2 Installing the Adapter
Preparing for an Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2- 1 Setting the Web Pages Switch (only Series B Adapter, Firmware 3.xxx or Later). . . . . . 2-2 Connecting the Adapter to the Drive. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3 Connecting the Adapter to the Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6 Applying Power. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6 Commissioning the Adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8 Chapter 3 Configuring the Adapter
Configuration Tools. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1 Using the PowerFlex 7-Class HIM to Access Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2 Using BOOTP Server to Set the IP Address, Subnet Mask, and Gateway Address . . . . . 3-3 Using Parameters to Set the IP Address, Subnet Mask, and Gateway Address . . . . . . . . 3-5 Setting the Data Rate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7 Setting the I/O Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7 Selecting Master-Slave or Peer-to-Peer Hierarchy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8 Setting the Reference Adjustment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13 Setting a Fault Action . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 -14 Setting Web Access Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15 Resetting the Adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16 Viewing the Adapter Status Using Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17 Updating the Adapter Firmware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17 Chapter 4 Configuring the I/O
Using RSLinx Classic Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 ControlLogix Controller Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2 Limitations Using a PLC-5, SLC 500, or MicroLogix 1100/1400 Controller . . . . . . . . 4-22 PLC-5 Controller Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23 SLC 500 Controller Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31 MicroLogix 1100/1400 Controller Example. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-39 ii Table of Contents
20-COMM-E EtherNet/IP Adapter User Manual
Publication 20COMM-UM010H-EN-P
Chapter 5 Using the I/O
About I/O Messaging. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 -1 Understanding the I/O Image. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2 Using Logic Command/Status. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6 Using Reference/Feedback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6 Using Datalinks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9 Example Ladder Logic Program Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11 ControlLogix Controller Example. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11 PLC-5, SLC 500, or MicroLogix 1100/1400 Controller Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21 Chapter 6 Using Explicit Messaging
About Explicit Messaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2 Performing Explicit Messages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3 ControlLogix Controller Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4 PLC-5 Controller Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-23 SLC 500 Controller Examples. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-29 MicroLogix 1100/1400 Controller Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-53 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting
Understanding the Status Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1 PORT Status Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2 MOD Status Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 -2 NET A Status Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3 NET B Status Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 -3 Viewing Adapter Diagnostic Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4 Viewing and Clearing Events. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6 Chapter 8 Viewing the Adapter Web Pages
Enabling the Adapter Web Pages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1 Viewing the Web Pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1 Process Display Pop-up Window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4 TCP/IP Configuration Web Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5 Configure E-mail Notification Web Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6 Device Information Pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9 Chapter 9 Using the Adapter in a DPI External Comms Kit (20-XCOMM-DC-BASE) Installing the Adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1 I/O Board Option (20-XCOMM-IO-OPT1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2 Understanding the I/O Image (Drive + I/O Option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2 Configuring the Adapter to Use the Optional I/O Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3 Viewing Optional I/O Diagnostic Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4 Appendix A Specifications
Communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1 Electrical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1 Mechanical. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-2 Environmental . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-2 Regulatory Compliance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-2 Table of Contents iii
20-COMM-E EtherNet/IP Adapter User Manual
Publication 20COMM-UM010H-EN-P
Appendix B Adapter Parameters
Parameter List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-1 Appendix C EtherNet/IP Objects
Identity Object. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-2 Assembly Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-3 Register Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-4 Parameter Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-5 Parameter Group Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-7 PCCC Object. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-8 DPI Device Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-13 DPI Parameter Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-16 DPI Fault Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-22 DPI Alarm Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-24 DPI Diagnostic Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-26 DPI Time Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-28 Host DPI Parameter Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-30 TCP/IP Interface Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-36 Ethernet Link Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-37 Appendix D Logic Command/Status Words
PowerFlex 70/700/700H, and 700L (with 700 Control) Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-1 PowerFlex 700S (Phase II Control) and 700L (with 700S Control) Drives . . . . . . . . . . . D-3 PowerFlex 750-Series Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-5 PowerFlex Digital DC Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-7 Glossary
Index
iv Table of Contents
20-COMM-E EtherNet/IP Adapter User Manual
Publication 20COMM-UM010H-EN-P
20-COMM-E EtherNet/IP Adapter User Manual
Publication 20COMM-UM010H-EN-P
Preface
About This Manual
This manual provides information about the adapter and using it with PowerFlex 7-Class (Architecture-Class) drives. The adapter can be used with other products that support a DPI™ adapter, such as the DPI External Comms Kit (20-XCOMM-DC-BASE). See the documentation for your product for specific information about how it works with the adapter.
Conventions Used in This
Manual
The following conventions are used throughout this manual:
Parameter names are shown in the format Parameter xx - [*]. The xx represents the parameter number. The * represents the parameter name— for example Parameter 01 - [DPI Port].
Menu commands are shown in bold type face and follow the format Menu > Command. For example, if you read ‘Select File > Open’, you should click the File menu and then click the Open command. The firmware revision number (FRN) is displayed as FRN X.xxx, where ‘X’ is the major revision number and ‘xxx’ is the minor revision number. The screen images in this manual resulted from using the following software:
– RSLinx® Classic software, version 2.51
– RSLogix™ 5 software, version 7.20
– RSLogix 500 software, version 7.20
– RSLogix 5000 software, version 16.00
Different versions of the software may have screens that vary in appearance, and differences in procedures.
Topic Page
Conventions Used in This Manual P-1
Rockwell Automation Support P-2
Additional Resources P-2
P-2 About This Manual
20-COMM-E EtherNet/IP Adapter User Manual
Publication 20COMM-UM010H-EN-P
Rockwell Automation
Support
Rockwell Automation offers support services worldwide, with over 75 sales and support offices, over 500 authorized distributors, and over 250 authorized systems integrators located through the United States alone. In addition, Rockwell Automation representatives are in every major country in the world.
Local Product Support
Contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for the following:
Sales and order support
Product technical training
Warranty support
Support service agreements
Technical Product Assistance
For technical assistance, please review the information in Chapter 7, Troubleshooting.
Additional Resources These documents contain additional information concerning related products from Rockwell Automation.
Resource Description
PowerFlex 7-Class DPI (Drive Peripheral Interface) Network Communication Adapter Installation Instructions, publication 20COMM-IN004
Information on the installation of PowerFlex® 20-COMM-x Network Communication Adapters.
EtherNet/IP Media Planning and Installation Manual, ODVA publication 148 (1) Information on the planning, installation, and techniques used to implement an EtherNet/IP network.EtherNet/IP Network Infrastructure Guidelines, ODVA publication 35 (1) Ethernet Design Considerations Reference Manual, publication ENET -RM002 Connected Components Workbench website http://www.ab.com/support/abdrives/webupdate/ software.html, and online help
Information on the Connected Components Workbench™
software tool—and includes a link for free software download.
DriveExplorer website http://www.ab.com/drives/driveexplorer/ , and online help (2) Information on using the DriveExplorer™ software tool.
DriveExecutive website http://www.ab.com/drives/drivetools/, and online help (2) Information on using the DriveExecutive™ software tool.
PowerFlex 20-HIM-A3/-A5/-C3S/-C5S HIM Quick Reference, publication 20HIM-QR001 Information on using the PowerFlex 20-HIM-A3, 20-HIM-A5, 20-HIM-C3S, and 20-HIM-C5S HIMs.
PowerFlex 20-HIM-A6/-C6S HIM (Human Interface Module) User Manual, publication 20HIM-UM001 Information on installing and using the PowerFlex 20-HIM-A6 and 20-HIM-C6S HIMs.
PowerFlex 70 User Manual, publication 20A-UM001
PowerFlex 70/700 Reference Manual, publication PFLEX-RM001 PowerFlex 70 Enhanced Control and 700 Vector Control Reference Manual, publication PFLEX-RM004 Information on installing and programming PowerFlex 70
standard control and enhanced control drives.
PowerFlex 700 Series A User Manual, publication 20B-UM001 PowerFlex 700 Series B User Manual, publication 20B-UM002 PowerFlex 70/700 Reference Manual, publication PFLEX-RM001 PowerFlex 70 Enhanced Control and 700 Vector Control Reference Manual, publication PFLEX-RM004 Information on installing and programming PowerFlex 700 standard control and vector control Series A drives, and PowerFlex 700 vector control Series B drives.
PowerFlex 700H Installation Instructions, publication PFLEX-IN006
PowerFlex 700H Programming Manual, publication 20C-PM001 Information on installing and programming PowerFlex 700H drives.
About This Manual P-3
20-COMM-E EtherNet/IP Adapter User Manual
Publication 20COMM-UM010H-EN-P
Documentation can be obtained online at http://
literature.rockwellautomation.com. To order paper copies of technical documentation, contact your local Rockwell Automation distributor or sales representative.
To find your local Rockwell Automation distributor or sales representative, visit http://www.rockwellautomation.com/locations.
PowerFlex 700S w/Phase I Control Installation Manual (Frames 1…6), publication 20D-IN024 PowerFlex 700S w/Phase I Control Installation Manual (Frames 9 and 10), publication PFLEX-IN006 PowerFlex 700S w/Phase I Control User Manual (All Frame Sizes), publication 20D-UM001 PowerFlex 700S w/Phase I Control Reference Manual, publication PFLEX-RM002 PowerFlex 700S w/Phase II Control Installation Manual (Frames 1…6), publication 20D-IN024 PowerFlex 700S w/Phase II Control Installation Manual (Frames 9…14), publication PFLEX-IN006 PowerFlex 700S w/Phase II Control Programming Manual (All Frame Sizes), publication 20D-PM001 PowerFlex 700S w/Phase II Control Reference Manual, publication PFLEX-RM003 Information on installing and programming PowerFlex 700S drives.
PowerFlex 700L User Manual, publication 20L-UM001 Information on installing and programming PowerFlex 700L Liquid-Cooled AC drives.
PowerFlex 750-Series Drive Installation Instructions, publication 750-IN001
PowerFlex 750-Series Drive Programming Manual, publication 750-PM001 PowerFlex 20-750-ENETR Dual-port EtherNet/IP Option Module, publication 750COM-UM008 PowerFlex 755 Drive Embedded EtherNet/IP Adapter User Manual, publication 750COM-UM001 20-750-20COMM and 20-750-20COMM-F1 Communication Carrier Cards Installation Instructions, publication 750COM-IN001
Information on installing and programming PowerFlex
750-Series AC drives.
PowerFlex Digital DC Drive User Manual, publication 20P-UM001 Information on installing and programming PowerFlex Digital DC drives.
Getting Results with RSLinx Guide, publication LINX-GR001 , and online help (2) Information on using RSLinx Classic software.
RSLogix Emulate 5/500 Getting Results Guide, publication EMULAT -GR002, and online help Information on instal ling and navigating the RSLogix Emulate software for ladder logic programming with Allen-Bradley® PLC-5® and SLC™ 500 processors.
RSLogix 500 Getting Results Guide, publication LG500-GR002, and online help (2) Information on using RSLogix 500 software tool.
RSLogix 5000 PIDE Autotuner Getting Results Guide, publication PIDE-GR001, and online help (2) Information on using RSLogix 5000 software tool.
EtherNet/IP Modules in Logix5000 Control Systems User Manual, publication ENET -UM001 Information on using the ControlLogix ® 1756-ENBT or 1756-EN2T EtherNet/IP communication modules with the
Logix5000 controller and communicating with various devices on the EtherNet/IP network.
Enhanced and Ethernet PLC-5 Programmable Controllers User Manual, publication 1785-UM012 Information to help design, operate and maintain an Enhanced and Ethernet PLC-5 programmable controller system.
SLC 500 Modular Hardware Style User Manual, publication 1747-UM011 Information on installing, using, and troubleshooting the SLC 500 controller with 1747-L5-xxx module.
MicroLogix 1100 Programmable Controllers User Manual, publication 1763-UM001
MicroLogix 1400 Programmable Controllers User Manual, publication 1766-UM001 Information on installing, using, and troubleshooting the MicroLogix™ 1100 and MicroLogix 1400 controllers.
(1) Use this link to the ODVA EtherNet/IP library: http://odva.org/Home/ODVATECHNOLOGIES/EtherNetIP/EtherNetIPLibrary/tabid/76/Default.aspx (2) The online help is installed with the software.
Resource Description
P-4 About This Manual
20-COMM-E EtherNet/IP Adapter User Manual
Publication 20COMM-UM010H-EN-P
Notes:
20-COMM-E EtherNet/IP Adapter User Manual
Publication 20COMM-UM010H-EN-P
Chapter 1
Getting Started
The adapter is intended for installation in a PowerFlex 7-Class drive and is used for network communication. The 20-COMM-E Series B adapter, firmware 3.xxx or later, can also be installed in an External DPI Comms Kit (20-XCOMM-DC-BASE).
For PowerFlex 750-Series drives, we recommend using the 20-750-ENETR Dual-port EtherNet/IP option module or the embedded EtherNet/IP adapter (only in PowerFlex 755 drives) instead of the 20-COMM-E adapter.
However, this manual does include information about using the 20-COMM-E adapter with PowerFlex 750-Series drives—but there are operating limitations. For details, see Compatible Products on page 1-3.
Components
Topic Page
Components 1-1
Features 1-2
Compatible Products 1-3
Required Equipment 1-3
Safety Precautions 1-5
Quick Start 1-6
Item Part Description
➊ Status Indicators Four status indicators that indicate the status of the DPI, the adapter, and network connection. See Chapter 7, Troubleshooting. ➋ DPI Connector A 20-pin, single-row shrouded male header. An Internal Interface cable is connected to this connector and a connector on the drive. ➌ Ethernet Connector RJ-45 connector for the Ethernet network cable. The connector is CAT -5 compliant to ensure reliable data transfer on 100Base-TX Ethernet connections.
➍ Web Pages Switch
(SW2)
Enables or disables the adapter web pages. See Setting the Web Pages Switch (only Series B Adapter, Firmware 3.xxx or Later) on page 2-2. SW1 is unused.
➊
➋
➌➍ Not provided on Series A adapter
1-2 Getting Started
20-COMM-E EtherNet/IP Adapter User Manual
Publication 20COMM-UM010H-EN-P
Features The features of the adapter include the following:
Typical mounting in a PowerFlex 7-Class drive. The 20-COMM-E Series B adapter, firmware 3.xxx or later, can also be installed in a DPI External Comms Kit and used with the kit’s optional I/O board. See Chapter 9, Using the Adapter in a DPI External Comms Kit
(20-XCOMM-DC-BASE) for more information.
DPI External Comms Kit Compatibility
Captive screws to secure and ground the adapter to the drive or, when mounted in a DPI External Comms Kit, to the kit’s metal enclosure. Compatibility with various configuration tools to configure the adapter and connected host drive, including the following tools:
– PowerFlex HIM (Human Interface Module) on the drive, if available – Connected Components Workbench software, version 1.02 or later – DriveExplorer software, version 2.01 or later
– DriveExecutive software, version 3.01 or later
Additionally, you can use a BOOTP server to configure the network address for the adapter.
Status indicators that report the status of the drive communications, the adapter, and network. They are visible when the drive cover is open or closed. Parameter-configured I/O (Logic Command/Reference and up to four pairs of Datalinks) to accommodate application requirements. Explicit Messaging support.
Master-Slave or Peer-to-Peer hierarchy that can be configured to transmit data to and from either a controller or another PowerFlex drive on the network.
User-defined fault actions to determine how the adapter and connected PowerFlex drive respond to the following:
– I/O messaging communication disruptions (Comm Flt Action) – Controllers in idle mode (Idle Flt Action)
Web pages, viewed by using a web browser, that show information about the adapter, its connected host drive, and DPI devices connected to the drive. Configurable e-mail messaging to desired addresses when selected drive faults occur and/or are cleared, and/or when the adapter takes a communication or idle fault action.
Access to any PowerFlex drive and its connected peripherals on the network to which the adapter is connected.
20-COMM-E Adapter Operation With
Series
Firmware
Revision
DPI External Comms Kit
(20-XCOMM-DC-BASE)
Optional I/O Board
(20-XCOMM-IO-OPT1)
A 2.xxx and earlier No No
B 3.xxx and later Y es Y es
Getting Started 1-3
20-COMM-E EtherNet/IP Adapter User Manual
Publication 20COMM-UM010H-EN-P
Compatible Products At the time of publication, the adapter is compatible with the following products:
Required Equipment Some of the equipment that is required for use with the adapter is shipped with the adapter, but some you must supply yourself.
Equipment Shipped with the Adapter
When you unpack the adapter, verify that the package includes the following:
User-Supplied Equipment
To install and configure the adapter, you must supply the following:
PowerFlex 70 drives with standard or enhanced control PowerFlex 750-Series drives (1) PowerFlex 700 drives with standard or vector control PowerFlex Digital DC drives PowerFlex 700H drives DPI External Comms Kit
PowerFlex 700S drives with Phase I or Phase II control SMC™ Flex smart motor controllers PowerFlex 700L drives with 700 vector control or 700S control SMC-50 smart motor controllers (1) The 20-COMM-E adapter can be used with PowerFlex 750-Series drives, but the drive must have firmware revision 4.001 or later. Also, the 20-COMM-E adapter has the following limitations and differences:
- Only the first 16 bits of the Logic Command and Logic Status words are used. - Speed Reference and Feedback scaling are Hz (or RPM) x 1000 (depending on the setting of drive parameter 300 - [Speed Units].
Instead of using the 20-COMM-E adapter with the PowerFlex 753 drive, the 20-750-ENETR Dual-port EtherNet/IP option module should be used whenever possible. Please see the PowerFlex 750-Series AC Drives Programming Manual, publication 750-PM001, for drive parameter information and the 20-750-ENETR Dual-Port EtherNet/IP Option Module User Manual, publication 750COM-UM008, for network communication module information. For a PowerFlex 755 drive, it is recommended to use its embedded EtherNet/IP adapter instead of the 20-COMM-E adapter and its inherent limitations. ❑ One 20-COMM-E EtherNet/IP adapter
❑ One 2.54 cm (1 in.) long and one 15.24 cm (6 in.) long Internal Interface cable (only one cable is needed to connect the adapter to the drive; for which cable to use, see Figure 2.2 on page 2-4) ❑ One PowerFlex 7-Class DPI (Drive Peripheral Interface) Network Communication Adapter Installation Instructions, publication 20COMM-IN004
TIP: When mounting the 20-COMM-E adapter in a PowerFlex 750-Series drive, you must use a 20-750-20COMM or 20-750-20COMM-F1 Communication Carrier Card, publication 750COM-IN001—and the 20-COMM-E adapter must have firmware revision 4.001 or later. ❑ A small flathead screwdriver
❑ Ethernet cable (for details, see the EtherNet/IP Media Planning and Installation Manual, ODV A publication 148 available on the ODV A website at http://odva.org/Home/ODV ATECHNOLOGIES/EtherNetIP/ EtherNetIPLibrary/tabid/76/Default.aspx)
►
1-4 Getting Started
20-COMM-E EtherNet/IP Adapter User Manual
Publication 20COMM-UM010H-EN-P
❑ Ethernet switch (for details, see the Ethernet Design Considerations Reference Manual, publication ENET-RM002)
❑ Drive and adapter configuration tool, such as the following:
– PowerFlex 20-HIM-xx HIM
– Connected Components Workbench software, version 1.02 or later Connected Components Workbench is the recommended
stand-alone software tool for use with PowerFlex drives. You can obtain a free copy by:
Internet download at http://www.ab.com/support/abdrives/ webupdate/software.html
Requesting a DVD at http://www.ab.com/onecontact/controllers/ micro800/
Your local distributor may also have copies of the DVD available.
Connected Components Workbench software cannot be used to configure SCANport-based drives or Bulletin 160 drives. – DriveExplorer software, version 2.01 or later
This software tool has been discontinued and is now available as freeware at http://www.ab.com/support/abdrives/webupdate/ software.html. There are no plans to provide future updates to this tool and the download is being provided ‘as-is’ for users that lost their DriveExplorer CD, or need to configure legacy products not supported by Connected Components Workbench software.
– DriveExecutive software, version 3.01 or later
A Lite version of DriveExecutive software ships with RSLogix 5000, RSNetWorx MD, FactoryTalk AssetCentre, and
ItelliCENTER software. All other versions are purchasable items:
9303-4DTE01ENE Drive Executive software
9303-4DTS01ENE DriveTools SP Suite (includes
DriveExecutive and DriveObserver software)
9303-4DTE2S01ENE DriveExecutive software upgrade to
DriveTools SP Suite (adds DriveObserver software)
DriveExecutive software updates (patches, and so forth) can be obtained at http://www.ab.com/support/abdrives/webupdate/ software.html. It is highly recommended that you periodically check for and install the latest update.
– BOOTP Server, version 2.1 or later, for network setup only ❑ Controller configuration tool, such as RSLogix 5, RSLogix500, or RSLogix 5000 software
❑ A computer connection to the EtherNet/IP network
Getting Started 1-5
20-COMM-E EtherNet/IP Adapter User Manual
Publication 20COMM-UM010H-EN-P
Safety Precautions Please read the following safety precautions carefully. !
ATTENTION: Risk of injury or death exists. The PowerFlex drive may contain high voltages that can cause injury or death.
Remove all power from the PowerFlex drive, and then verify power has been discharged before installing or removing an adapter.
!
ATTENTION: Risk of injury or equipment damage exists. Only personnel familiar with drive and power products and the associated machinery should plan or implement the installation, start up, configuration, and subsequent maintenance of the product using an adapter. Failure to comply may result in injury and/or equipment damage.
!
ATTENTION: Risk of equipment damage exists. The adapter contains electrostatic discharge (ESD) sensitive parts that can be damaged if you do not follow ESD control procedures. Static control precautions are required when handling the adapter. If you are unfamiliar with static control procedures, see Guarding Against Electrostatic Damage, publication 8000-4.5.2.
!
ATTENTION: Risk of injury or equipment damage exists. If the adapter is transmitting control I/O to the drive, the drive may fault when you reset the adapter. Determine how your drive will respond before resetting an adapter.
!
ATTENTION: Risk of injury or equipment damage exists.
Parameters 21 - [Comm Flt Action], 22 - [Idle Flt Action], and 41 - [Peer Flt Action] let you determine the action of the adapter and connected drive if communication is disrupted or the controller is idle. By default, these parameters fault the drive. You may configure these parameters so that the drive continues to run, however, precautions should be taken to verify that the settings of these parameters do not create a risk of injury or equipment damage. When commissioning the drive, verify that your system responds correctly to various situations (for example, a disconnected cable or a controller in idle state).
!
ATTENTION: Risk of injury or equipment damage exists.
When a system is configured for the first time, there may be unintended or incorrect machine motion. Disconnect the motor from the machine or process during initial system testing. !
ATTENTION: Risk of injury or equipment damage exists. The examples in this publication are intended solely for purposes of example. There are many variables and requirements with any application. Rockwell Automation does not assume responsibility or liability (to include intellectual property liability) for actual use of the examples shown in this publication.
1-6 Getting Started
20-COMM-E EtherNet/IP Adapter User Manual
Publication 20COMM-UM010H-EN-P
Quick Start This section is provided to help experienced users quickly start using the adapter. If you are unsure how to complete a step, refer to the referenced chapter.
Step Action See
1 Review the safety precautions for the adapter. Throughout this manual 2 Verify that the PowerFlex drive is properly installed. Drive User Manual 3 Install the adapter.
a. Verify that the PowerFlex drive is not powered.
b. Connect the adapter to the drive with the Internal Interface cable.
c. Use the captive screws to secure and ground the adapter to the drive.
d. Connect the adapter to the network with an Ethernet cable.
NOTE: When installing the adapter in either of the following products, see the listed publication for instructions:
DPI External Comms Kit—see the 20-XCOMM-DC-BASE
Installation Instructions, publication 20COMM-IN001, supplied with the kit.
PowerFlex 750-Series drive—see the 20-750-20COMM and
20-750-20COMM-F1 Communication Carrier Cards
Installation Instructions, publication 750COM-IN001, supplied with the card.
PowerFlex 7-Class DPI
Network Communication
Adapter Installation
Instructions, publication
20COMM-IN004, and
Chapter 2
,
Installing the Adapter
4 Apply power to the adapter.
a. Verify that the adapter is installed correctly.
The adapter receives power from the drive.
b. Apply power to the drive.
The status indicators should be green. If they flash red, there is a problem. See Chapter 7, Troubleshooting.
c. Configure and verify key drive parameters.
Chapter 2,
Installing the Adapter
5 Configure the adapter for your application.
Set adapter parameters for the following functions as required by your application:
IP address, subnet mask, and gateway address
Data rate
I/O configuration
Master-Slave or Peer-to-Peer hierarchy
Fault actions
Chapter 3,
Configuring the Adapter
6 Configure the controller to communicate with the adapter.
Use a controller configuration tool, such as RSLogix software, to configure the master on the network to recognize the adapter and drive.
Chapter 4,
Configuring the I/O
7 Create a ladder logic program.
Use a controller configuration tool, such as RSLogix software, to create a ladder logic program that enables you to do the following:
Control the connected drive, via the adapter, by using I/O. Monitor or configure the drive by using explicit messages.
Chapter 5
,
Using the I/O
Chapter 6,
Using Explicit
Messaging
20-COMM-E EtherNet/IP Adapter User Manual
Publication 20COMM-UM010H-EN-P
Chapter 2
Installing the Adapter
This chapter provides instructions for installing the adapter in a PowerFlex 7-Class drive. The 20-COMM-E Series B adapter, firmware revision 3.xxx or later, can also be installed in a DPI External Comms Kit. In this case, see Chapter 9 or the 20-XCOMM-DC-BASE Installation Instructions, publication 20COMM-IN001, supplied with the kit.
Preparing for an Installation Before installing the adapter, do the following:
Make sure the Ethernet switch is the correct type. A ‘managed’ switch that supports IGMP snooping is usually recommended. An ‘unmanaged’ switch can be used instead if RSLogix 5000 software, version 18.00 or later, is used and all devices on the network are configured for ‘unicast’ I/O. For more details, see the following documents:
– EtherNet/IP Media Planning and Installation Manual,
ODV A publication 148
– EtherNet/IP Network Infrastructure Guidelines,
ODV A publication 35
– Ethernet Design Considerations Reference Manual,
publication ENET-RM002
Understand IGMP Snooping/Ethernet Switches
The 20-COMM-E adapter is a multicast device. In most situations, an IGMP snooping (managed) switch is required. If more than one or two 20-COMM-E adapters are connected to the switch, a managed switch is required—otherwise the drive may fault on a DPI Port x network loss.
The 20-COMM-E Series B adapter, firmware 4.001 or later, RSLogix 5000 software, version 18.00 or later, and a ControlLogix or CompactLogix controller will support unicast. Unicast setup is required when adding the drive to the I/O. When all adapters are set up as unicast devices, then an IGMP snooping (managed) switch is not needed.
Topic Page
Preparing for an Installation 2-1
Setting the Web Pages Switch (only Series B Adapter, Firmware 3.xxx or Later) 2-2 Connecting the Adapter to the Drive 2-3
Connecting the Adapter to the Network 2-6
Applying Power 2-6
Commissioning the Adapter 2-8
2-2 Installing the Adapter
20-COMM-E EtherNet/IP Adapter User Manual
Publication 20COMM-UM010H-EN-P
Much of EtherNet/IP implicit (I/O) messaging uses IP multicast to distribute I/O control data, which is consistent with the CIP producer/ consumer model. Historically, most switches have treated multicast packets the same as broadcast packets. That is, all multicast packets are re-transmitted to all ports.
IGMP snooping constrains the flooding of multicast traffic by dynamically configuring switch ports so that multicast traffic is forwarded only to ports associated with a particular IP multicast group.
Switches that support IGMP snooping (managed switches) ‘learn’ which ports have devices that are part of a particular multicast group and only forward the multicast packets to the ports that are part of the multicast group.
Be careful as to what level of support a switch has of IGMP snooping.
Some layer 2 switches that support IGMP snooping require a router (which could be a layer 3 switch) to send out IGMP polls to learn what devices are part of the multicast group. Some layer 2 switches can use IGMP snooping without a router sending polls. If your control system is a standalone network or is required to continue performing if the router is out of service, make sure the switch you are using supports IGMP snooping without a router being present.
See Appendix
A for the number of CIP connections supported by the
20-COMM-E adapter.
Verify that you have all required equipment. See Required Equipment on page 1-3.
Setting the Web Pages
Switch (only Series B
Adapter, Firmware 3.xxx or
Later)
To use the adapter web pages, the Web Pages Switch (not supplied on the Series A adapter) must be set to its ‘Enable Web’ position. For information to enable or disable web pages for a Series A adapter, see Setting Web Access Control on page 3-15.
Important: A new switch setting is recognized only when power is applied to the adapter, or the adapter is reset. If you change a switch setting, cycle power or reset the adapter to apply the change.
Set the Web Pages Switch (SW2 in Figure 2.1) to enable or disable the adapter web pages. By default, the adapter web pages are disabled. For complete details on adapter web pages, see Viewing the Adapter Web Pages on page 8-1.
!
ATTENTION: Risk of equipment damage exists. The adapter contains electrostatic discharge (ESD) sensitive parts that can be damaged if you do not follow ESD control procedures. Static control precautions are required when handling the adapter. If you are unfamiliar with static control procedures, see Guarding Against Electrostatic Damage, publication 8000-4.5.2.
Installing the Adapter 2-3
20-COMM-E EtherNet/IP Adapter User Manual
Publication 20COMM-UM010H-EN-P
Figure 2.1 Setting Web Pages Switch (only Series B Adapter)
Connecting the Adapter to
the Drive
1. Remove power from the drive.
2. Use static control precautions.
3. Remove the drive cover or open the drive door.
4. Connect the Internal Interface cable to the DPI port on the drive and then to the DPI connector on the adapter (see Figure 2.2).
5. Secure and ground the adapter to the drive (see Figure 2.3) by doing the following:
– On a PowerFlex 70 drive, fold the Internal Interface cable behind the adapter and mount the adapter on the drive using the four captive screws.
– On a PowerFlex 700, PowerFlex 700H or PowerFlex 700S drive, mount the adapter on the drive using the four captive screws.
Important: Tighten all screws to properly ground the adapter.
Recommended torque is 0.9 Nm (8.0 lbin).
SW2 Setting Description
Down (OFF) position Disables the adapter web pages (default setting) Up (ON) position Enables the adapter web pages
21O
N
Unused
Switch
Web Pages
Switch
Enable Web
Position
Disable Web
Position
!
ATTENTION: Risk of injury or death exists. The PowerFlex drive may contain high voltages that can cause injury or death.
Remove power from the drive, and then verify power has been discharged before installing or removing the adapter.
2-4 Installing the Adapter
20-COMM-E EtherNet/IP Adapter User Manual
Publication 20COMM-UM010H-EN-P
Figure 2.2 DPI Ports and Internal Interface Cables
➋
➌
➍
➊
X1
X2
➍
20-COMM-E Adapter
PowerFlex 700 Frames 0 and 1
PowerFlex 700S Frames 0 and 1
PowerFlex 70 - All Frames
PowerFlex 700 Frames 2 and Larger
PowerFlex 700S Frames 2 through 6
HIM panel opens to
allow access to DPI
interface. To open
panel, remove screws
on left side of HIM
panel and swing open.
PowerFlex 700H Frames 9 and Larger
PowerFlex 700S Frames 9 and Larger
Item Description
➊ 15.24 cm (6 in.) Internal Interface cable
➋ DPI Connector
➌ Ethernet cable
➍ 2.54 cm (1 in.) Internal Interface cable
0 ,,..,_
0 II
00000
00000
gcgggg
00000
LJ
0 0
0 ff
0 0
-
I
0 0
0 0
Installing the Adapter 2-5
20-COMM-E EtherNet/IP Adapter User Manual
Publication 20COMM-UM010H-EN-P
Figure 2.3 Mounting and Grounding the Adapter
NOTE: When installing the adapter in a PowerFlex 750-Series drive, see the 20-750-20COMM and 20-750-20COMM-F1 Communication Carrier Cards Installation Instructions, publication 750COM-IN001, supplied with the card.
X1
X2
Drive
Adapter
Internal Interface Cable
folded behind the adapter
and in front of the drive.
PowerFlex 70 - All Frame Sizes
(Adapter mounts in drive.)
Verify metal ground tab is bent 90° and
is under the adapter before tightening
screw. After tightening the screw, verify
continuity exists between the head of
the screw and drive ground.
Ground Tab Detail
PowerFlex 700 Frames 0 and 1
PowerFlex 700S Frames 0 and 1
(Adapter mounts on door.)
PowerFlex 700 Frames 2 and Larger
PowerFlex 700S Frames 2 through 6
(Adapter mounts in drive.)
0.9 N•m
(8.0 lb•in)
4 Places
Verify metal ground tab is bent 90° and
is under the adapter before tightening
screw. After tightening the screw, verify
continuity exists between the head of
the screw and drive ground.PowerFlex 700H Frames 9 and Larger PowerFlex 700S Frames 9 and Larger
(Adapter mounts behind HIM panel.)
Ground Tab Detail
0.9 N•m
(8.0 lb•in)
4 Places
0.9 N•m
(8.0 lb•in)
4 Places
2-6 Installing the Adapter
20-COMM-E EtherNet/IP Adapter User Manual
Publication 20COMM-UM010H-EN-P
Connecting the Adapter to
the Network
1. Remove power from the drive.
2. Use static control precautions.
3. Connect one end of an Ethernet cable to the network.
See Figure 2.4 for an example of wiring to an EtherNet/IP network.
Figure 2.4 Connecting the Ethe rnet Cable to the Network
4. Route the other end of the Ethernet cable through the bottom of the PowerFlex drive (Figure 2.3) and insert its Ethernet cable plug into the mating adapter connector.
Applying Power
Install the drive cover or close the drive door, and apply power to the drive.
The adapter receives its power from the connected drive. When you apply power to the adapter for the first time, its topmost ‘PORT’ status indicator should be steady green or flashing green after an initialization. If it is red, there is a problem. See Chapter 7
, Troubleshooting.
Start-Up Status Indications
Status indicators for the drive and communication adapter can be viewed on the front of the drive (Figure 2.5) after power has been applied. Possible start-up status indications are shown in Table 2.A.
!
ATTENTION: Risk of injury or death exists. The PowerFlex drive may contain high voltages that can cause injury or death.
Remove power from the drive, and then verify power has been discharged before installing or removing the adapter.
Ethernet
Switch
Controller
(ControlLogix shown with
1756-ENBT Bridge)
PowerFlex 7-Class Drives
(each with a 20-COMM-E Adapter)
!
ATTENTION: Risk of equipment damage, injury, or death
exists. Unpredictable operation may occur if you fail to verify that parameter settings are compatible with your application.
Verify that settings are compatible with your application before applying power to the drive.
D
00000
00000
00000
00000
00000
00000
00000
00000
Installing the Adapter 2-7
20-COMM-E EtherNet/IP Adapter User Manual
Publication 20COMM-UM010H-EN-P
Figure 2.5 Drive and Adapter Status In dicators (location on drive may vary) Table 2.A Drive and Adapter Start-Up Status Indications For more details on status indicator operation, see page 7-2 and page 7-3. ➋
➊
PORT
MOD
STS
NET A
NET B
Item Name Color State Description
Drive STS Indicator
➊ STS
(Status)
Green Flashing Drive ready but not running, and no faults are present.
Steady Drive running, no faults are present.
Y ellow Flashing,
drive stopped
An inhibit condition exists – the drive cannot be started. Check drive Parameter 214 - [Start Inhibits].
Flashing,
drive running
An intermittent type 1 alarm condition is occurring. Check drive Parameter 211 - [Drive Alarm 1].
Steady,
drive running
A continuous type 1 alarm condition exists. Check drive Parameter 211 - [Drive Alarm 1].
Red Flashing A fault has occurred.
Steady A non-resettable fault has occurred.
Adapter Status Indicators
➋ PORT Green Flashing Normal operation. The adapter is establishing an I/O connection to the drive. It will turn steady green or red.
Steady Normal operation. The adapter is properly connected and communicating with the drive.
MOD Green Flashing Normal operation. The adapter is operating but is not transferring I/O data to a controller.
Steady Normal operation. The adapter is operating and transferring I/O data to a controller.
NET A — Off Normal operation. BOOTP is enabled or a valid IP address is not set.
Green Flashing Normal operation. BOOTP is disabled, the adapter is properly connected, has an IP address, and is connected to an EtherNet/IP network but does not have an I/O connection.
Steady Normal operation. The adapter is properly connected and communicating on the network to a controller.
NET B — Off Normal operation. The adapter is properly connected but is idle.
Green Flashing Normal operation. The adapter is properly connected, BOOTP is enabled, and the adapter is transmitting data packets on the network. 00000
00000
00000
00000
00000
0 G) Al/en·Brad/ey
PowerF!ex
10\
2-8 Installing the Adapter
20-COMM-E EtherNet/IP Adapter User Manual
Publication 20COMM-UM010H-EN-P
Configuring and Verifying Key Drive Parameters
The PowerFlex 7-Class drive can be separately configured for the control and Reference functions in various combinations. For example, you could set the drive to have its control come from a peripheral or terminal block with the Reference coming from the network. Or you could set the drive to have its control come from the network with the Reference coming from another peripheral or terminal block. Or you could set the drive to have both its control and Reference come from the network.
The following steps in this section assume that the drive will receive the Logic Command and Reference from the network.
1. Use drive Parameter 090 - [Speed Ref A Sel] to set the drive speed Reference to ‘22’ (DPI Port 5).
2. If hard-wired discrete digital inputs are not used to control the drive, verify that unused digital input drive Parameters 361 - [Dig In1 Sel] and 362 - [Dig In2 Sel] are set to ‘0’ (Not Used).
3. Verify that drive Parameter 213 - [Speed Ref Source] is reporting that the source of the Reference to the drive is ‘22’ (DPI Port 5).
This ensures that any Reference commanded from the network can be monitored by using drive Parameter 002 - [Commanded Speed]. If a problem occurs, this verification step provides the diagnostic capability to determine whether the drive/adapter or the network is the cause.
Commissioning the Adapter To commission the adapter, you must set a unique IP address on the network. See the Glossary for details about IP addresses. After installing the adapter and applying power, you can set the IP address by using a BOOTP server or adapter parameters. See Using Parameters to Set the IP Address, Subnet Mask, and Gateway Address on page 3-5 for details.
By default, the adapter is configured so that you must set the IP address using a BOOTP server. To use adapter parameters, you must disable the BOOTP feature. For details, see Disable the BOOTP Feature on page 3-5.
Important: New settings for some adapter parameters (for example, Parameters 04 - [IP Addr Cfg 1] through 07 - [IP Addr Cfg 4]) are recognized only when power is applied to the adapter or it is reset. After you change parameter settings, cycle power or reset the adapter.
TIP: For PowerFlex 750-Series drives, use drive Parameter 545 - [Speed Ref A Sel] to set the drive speed Reference:
a. Set the Port field to ‘0 - PowerFlex 75x’.
b. Set the Parameter field to point to the port (slot) in which the 20-COMM-E adapter/20-750-20COMM Communication Carrier
Card are installed (for this example, ‘876 - Port 6 Reference’).
The number ‘876’ in the Parameter field of the example is the parameter in the drive that points to the port.
►
20-COMM-E EtherNet/IP Adapter User Manual
Publication 20COMM-UM010H-EN-P
Chapter 3
Configuring the Adapter
This chapter provides instructions and information for setting the parameters in the adapter.
For a list of parameters, see Appendix B, Adapter Parameters. For definitions of terms in this chapter, see the Glossary.
Configuration Tools The adapter stores parameters and other information in its own nonvolatile storage (NVS) memory. You must, therefore, access the adapter to view and edit its parameters. The following tools can be used to access the adapter parameters.
Topic Page
Configuration Tools 3-1
Using the PowerFlex 7-Class HIM to Access Parameters 3-2 Using BOOTP Server to Set the IP Address, Subnet Mask, and Gateway Address 3-3 Using Parameters to Set the IP Address, Subnet Mask, and Gateway Address 3-5 Setting the Data Rate 3-7
Setting the I/O Configuration 3-7
Selecting Master-Slave or Peer-to-Peer Hierarchy 3-8
Setting the Reference Adjustment 3-13
Setting a Fault Action 3-14
Setting Web Access Control 3-15
Resetting the Adapter 3-16
Viewing the Adapter Status Using Parameters 3-17
Updating the Adapter Firmware 3-17
Tool See
PowerFlex 7-Class HIM page 3-2
BOOTP Server page 3-3
Connected Components Workbench
software, version 1.02 or later
http://www.ab.com/support/abdrives/webupdate/
software.html, or online help (installed with the software) DriveExplorer software,
version 2.01 or later
http://www.ab.com/drives/driveexplorer, or online help
(installed with the software)
DriveExecutive software,
version 3.01 or later
http://www.ab.com/drives/drivetools
, or online help
(installed with the software)
3-2 Configuring the Adapter
20-COMM-E EtherNet/IP Adapter User Manual
Publication 20COMM-UM010H-EN-P
Using the P owerFlex 7-Class
HIM to Access Parameters
If your drive has either an LED or LCD HIM (Human Interface Module), it can be used to access parameters in the adapter as shown below. We recommend that you read through the steps for your HIM before performing the sequence. For additional information, see the drive documentation or the PowerFlex 7-Class HIM Quick Reference, publication 20HIM-QR001.
Using an LED HIM
Using an LCD HIM
NOTE: All configuration procedures throughout this chapter use the PowerFlex 7-Class LCD HIM to access parameters in the adapter and show example LCD HIM screens.
Step Example Screens
1. Press the key and then the Device (Sel) key to
display the Device Screen.
2. Press the or key to scroll to the adapter.
Letters represent files in the drive, and numbers represent ports. The adapter is usually connected to port 5.
3. Press the (Enter) key to enter your selection.
A parameter database is constructed, and then the first parameter is displayed.
4. Edit the parameters using the same techniques that you use to edit drive parameters.
Step Example Screens
1. In the main menu, press the or key to scroll to
Device Select.
2. Press the (Enter) key to enter your selection.
3. Press the or key to scroll to the adapter
(20-COMM-E).
4. Press the (Enter) key to select the adapter.
A parameter database is constructed, and then the main
menu for the adapter is displayed.
5. Edit the parameters using the same techniques that you use to edit drive parameters.
ALT Sel
F-> Stopped Auto
0.00 Hz
Main Menu:
Diagnostics
Parameter
Device Select
Port 5 Device
20-COMM-E
Main Menu:
Diagnostics
Parameter
Device Select
TIP: When using a PowerFlex 20-HIM-A6 or 20-HIM-C6S HIM, see its User Manual, publication 20-HIM-UM001.
- -
0 0
0 0
►
Configuring the Adapter 3-3
20-COMM-E EtherNet/IP Adapter User Manual
Publication 20COMM-UM010H-EN-P
Using BOOTP Server to Set
the IP Address, Subnet
Mask, and Gateway Address
By default, the adapter is configured so that you can set its IP address, subnet mask, and gateway address with a BOOTP server. There is a variety of BOOTP servers available. The following instructions use Rockwell Automation’s BOOTP Server, version 2.3 or later, a free standalone program that incorporates the functionality of standard BOOTP utilities with a graphical interface. It is available from http:// www.software.rockwell.com/support/download/detail.cfm?ID=3390. See the Readme file and online Help for directions and more information.
1. On the adapter label, note the adapter’s hardware Ethernet Address (MAC), which will be used in step 6.
2. On a computer connected to the EtherNet/IP network, start the BOOTP software.
The BOOTP Server window appears.
3. Select Tools > Network Settings to display the Network Settings window.
TIP: You can disable BOOTP and configure the IP address, subnet mask, and gateway address with adapter parameters. For details, see Using Parameters to Set the IP Address, Subnet Mask, and Gateway Address on page 3-5.
►
i,'jj BOOTPIOHCP Serve, 2. 3 ['Jfc l'.8)
File Tools~
Rec,.,ed.Histoiv
(IY:rrWuec] j T.)?!
IWl!II
13:30:59
13:30:54
13:30:51
s, ...
AequestHistorv
Rel.-funUd.
New I Jooe I
EthernetAdd:ess 1t.1"'M
IP Addiess Hostname
il I H I
lPAddless Hosuwne Oescr'
EthetnetAdaets MAC IPAddleu
Network Settings ~
Defds
Sl.tlnelMe$k.: 255 . 255 . 248
Gal:eway: 10 91 96
p I C Pri'MlyDNS: 131 . 200 78
1,- SecondaiyDNS; 131 . 2 00 78 12
DtmfflNarne:: lna.home .ra-int.com
~~
J
Entries
0~256
I
3-4 Configuring the Adapter
20-COMM-E EtherNet/IP Adapter User Manual
Publication 20COMM-UM010H-EN-P
To properly configure devices on your EtherNet/IP network, you must configure settings in the BOOTP software to match the network.
4. Edit the following boxes as required by your application.
5. Click OK to apply the settings.
Devices on the network issuing BOOTP requests appear in the BOOTP Request History list.
6. In the BOOTP Request History list, either double-click the adapter’s Ethernet Address (MAC) noted in step 1, or click New in the Relation List.
The New Entry dialog box appears.
In the first case, the Ethernet Address (MAC) is automatically entered.
In the latter case, you must manually enter it.
7. Edit the following:
8. Click OK to apply the settings.
Box Setting
Subnet Mask (1)
(1) For definitions of these terms, see the Glossary.
The subnet mask for the adapter’s network.
Gateway (1) The IP address of the gateway device on the adapter’s network.
Primary DNS The address of the primary DNS server to be used on the local end of the link for negotiating with remote devices.
Secondary DNS Optional — the address of the secondary DNS server to be used on the local end of the link for negotiating with remote devices when the primary DNS server is unavailable.
Domain Name The text name corresponding to the numeric IP address that was assigned to the server that controls the network.
Box Setting
IP Address (1)
(1) For a definition of this term, see the Glossary.
A unique IP address for the adapter
Host Name Optional
Description Optional
New Entry ~
Ethernet Address [MAC): loo:OO:BC:08:60:09
IP Address I 10 . 91 . 100 79
Hostname: j20COMME6 21A
Description jBldg 6 Floor 2 Fan 1A
~ ~
Configuring the Adapter 3-5
20-COMM-E EtherNet/IP Adapter User Manual
Publication 20COMM-UM010H-EN-P
The adapter appears in the Relation List with the new settings.
9. To assign this configuration to the adapter permanently, select the device in the Relation List and click Disable BOOTP/DHCP.
When power is cycled on the adapter, it will use the configuration you assigned it and not issue new BOOTP requests.
10. Select File > Save to save the Relation List.
Using Parameters to Set the
IP Address, Subnet Mask,
and Gateway Address
By default, the adapter is configured so that you set its IP address, subnet mask, and gateway address using a BOOTP server. To use adapter parameters instead, you must first disable BOOTP and then set the adapter address parameters.
Disable the BOOTP Feature
1. Set the value of Parameter 03 - [BOOTP] to ‘0’ (Disabled).
2. Reset the adapter (see Resetting the Adapter on page 3-16).
After disabling the BOOTP feature, you can configure the IP address, subnet mask, and gateway address using adapter parameters.
TIP: To enable BOOTP for an adapter that has had BOOTP disabled, first select the adapter in the Relation List, then click Enable BOOTP, and lastly reset the adapter or power cycle the drive.
Value Setting
0 Disabled
1 Enabled (Default)
Port 5 Device
20-COMM-E
Parameter #: 03
BOOTP
0 Disabled
►
!iii BOOTP/ DHCP Server 2.3 ~ (Q 0
File Tools H~
RequestHistorc~ ------------------------~
Clear Hi tory I Add to Relation ,t J
lhr:min:secl I Tvoe
13:31 :00
13:30:59
13:30:54
13:30 :5 1
Relation list
I Ethernet Address fMACl
00:00:BC:0B:60:09
00:00:BC:08:60:09
00:00:BC:08:60:09
00:00 :BC:08:60:09
I IPAddress
10.91 .100.79
New I Delete I Enable B00TP I Enable DHCP I 01::able B00TP/DHCP I EthernetAddressfMACI I Tyoe I IPAdd1ess I Hostname
I Hostname
20COMME621A
I Descriotion
H ■ IA@#iYJl·W mtOOliDJNI·
~ r '"'';"7
_J ~ of256 _J
3-6 Configuring the Adapter
20-COMM-E EtherNet/IP Adapter User Manual
Publication 20COMM-UM010H-EN-P
Set the IP Address
1. Verify that Parameter 03 - [BOOTP] is set to ‘0’ (Disabled).
2. Set the value of Parameters 04 - [IP Addr Cfg 1] through 07 - [IP Addr Cfg 4] to a unique IP address.
3. Reset the adapter (see Resetting the Adapter on page 3-16).
The NET A status indicator will be steady green or flashing green if the IP address is correctly configured, and is connected to an operating ethernet network.
Set the Subnet Mask
1. Verify that Parameter 03 - [BOOTP] is set to ‘0’ (Disabled).
2. Set the value of Parameters 08 - [Subnet Cfg 1] through 11 - [Subnet Cfg 4] to the desired value for the subnet mask.
3. Reset the adapter (see Resetting the Adapter on page 3-16).
Set the Gateway Address
1. Verify that Parameter 03 - [BOOTP] is set to ‘0’ (Disabled).
2. Set the value of Parameters 12 - [Gateway Cfg 1] through 15 - [Gateway Cfg 4] to the IP address of the gateway device.
3. Reset the adapter (see Resetting the Adapter on page 3-16).
Port 5 Device
20-COMM-E
Parameter #: 04
IP Addr Cfg 1
0 0 <> 255
Default = 0.0.0.0 255.255.255.255
[IP Addr Cfg 1]
[IP Addr Cfg 2]
[IP Addr Cfg 3]
[IP Addr Cfg 4]
Port 5 Device
20-COMM-E
Parameter #: 08
Subnet Cfg 1
0 0 <> 255
Default = 0.0.0.0 255.255.255.255
[Subnet Cfg 1]
[Subnet Cfg 2]
[Subnet Cfg 3]
[Subnet Cfg 4]
Port 5 Device
20-COMM-E
Parameter #: 12
Gateway Cfg 1
0 0 <> 255
Default = 0.0.0.0 255.255.255.255
[Gateway Cfg 1]
[Gateway Cfg 2]
[Gateway Cfg 3]
[Gateway Cfg 4]
I I
I I
I I
Configuring the Adapter 3-7
20-COMM-E EtherNet/IP Adapter User Manual
Publication 20COMM-UM010H-EN-P
Setting the Data Rate By default, the adapter is set to autodetect, so it automatically detects the data rate and duplex setting used on the network. If you need to set a specific data rate and duplex setting, the value of Parameter 16 - [EN Rate Cfg] determines the Ethernet data rate and duplex setting that the adapter will use to communicate. For definitions of data rate and duplex, see the Glossary.
1. Set the value of Parameter 16 - [EN Rate Cfg] to the data rate at which your network is operating.
2. Reset the adapter (see Resetting the Adapter on page 3-16).
Setting the I/O
Configuration
The I/O configuration determines the data that is sent to and from the drive.
Logic Command/Status, Reference/Feedback, and Datalinks may be enabled or disabled. (Datalinks allow you to read/write directly to parameters in the drive using implicit I/O.) A ‘1’ enables the I/O and a ‘0’ disables the I/O.
1. Set the bits in Parameter 23 - [DPI I/O Cfg].
Bit 0 is the right-most bit. It is highlighted above and equals ‘1’.
2. If a controller is used to control the drive, set adapter Parameters 35 - [M-S Input] and 36 - [M-S Output] for Master-Slave Hierarchy.
For details, see Setting a Master-Slave Hierarchy (Scanner-to-Drive Communication) on page 3-8.
3. If Logic Command/Reference is enabled, configure the parameters in the drive to accept the Logic Command and Reference from the adapter.
Value Data Rate
0 Autodetect (default)
1 10 Mbps Full
2 10 Mbps Half
3 100 Mbps Full
4 100 Mbps Half
Port 5 Device
20-COMM-E
Parameter #: 16
EN Rate Cfg
0 Autodetect
TIP: Auto detection of baud rate and duplex works properly only if the device (usually a switch) on the other end of the cable is also set to automatically detect the baud rate/duplex. If one device has the baud rate/duplex hard-coded, the other device must be hard-coded to the same settings.
Bit Description
0 Logic Command/Reference (Default)
1D a t a l i n k A
2D a t a l i n k B
3D a t a l i n k C
4D a t a l i n k D
5…15 Not Used
Port 5 Device
20-COMM-E
Parameter #: 23
DPI I/O Cfg
xxxxxxxxxxx0000
1 Cmd/Ref b00
►
I
3-8 Configuring the Adapter
20-COMM-E EtherNet/IP Adapter User Manual
Publication 20COMM-UM010H-EN-P
For example, set Parameter 90 - [Speed Ref A Sel] in a PowerFlex 70 or 700 drive to ‘22’ (DPI Port 5) so that the drive uses the Reference from the adapter. Also, verify that the mask parameters (for example, Parameter 276 - [Logic Mask]) in the drive are configured to receive the desired logic from the adapter. See the documentation for your drive for details.
4. If you enabled one or more Datalinks, configure parameters in the drive to determine the source and destination of data in the Datalinks.
When using Datalinks, up to 8 drive [Data In xx] parameters (300…307) and/or up to 8 [Data Out xx] parameters (310…317) must be assigned to point to the appropriate drive parameters for your application. See Chapter 4
for an example.
5. Reset the adapter (see Resetting the Adapter on page 3-16).
The adapter is ready to receive I/O. You must now configure the adapter to receive I/O from a master or peer device. See Selecting Master-Slave or Peer-to-Peer Hierarchy. If you select a Master-Slave hierarchy, you must also configure the master to communicate with the adapter. See Chapter 4, Configuring the I/O.
Selecting Master-Slave or
Peer-to-Peer Hierarchy
A hierarchy determines the type of device with which the adapter exchanges data. In a Master-Slave hierarchy, the adapter exchanges data with a master, such as a scanner or bridge (1756-ENBT, 1756-EN2T, 1747-L5-xxx, and so forth). In a Peer-to-Peer hierarchy, the adapter exchanges data with one or more EtherNet/IP adapters in other drives. (The drives must have compatible Logic Command/Status words.)
For both Master-Slave and Peer-to-Peer hierarchies, the devices exchanging data must be on the same IP subnet. See ‘IP Addresses’ in the Glossary for information about IP subnets.
Setting a Master-Slave Hierarchy (Scanner-to-Drive Communication)
1. Enable the desired I/O in Parameter 23 - [DPI I/O Cfg].
See Setting the I/O Configuration on page 3-7.
2. Set the bits in Parameter 35 - [M-S Input].
This parameter determines the data received from the master by the drive. A ‘1’ enables the I/O and a ‘0’ disables the I/O.
Bit Description
0 Logic Command/Reference (Default)
1 Datalink A Input
2 Datalink B Input
3 Datalink C Input
4 Datalink D Input
5…15 Not Used
Port 5 Device
20-COMM-E
Parameter #: 35
M-S Input
xxxxxxxxxxx0000 1
Cmd/Ref b00 I
Configuring the Adapter 3-9
20-COMM-E EtherNet/IP Adapter User Manual
Publication 20COMM-UM010H-EN-P
Bit 0 is the right-most bit. It is highlighted above and equals ‘1’.
3. Set the bits in Parameter 36 - [M-S Output].
This parameter determines the data transmitted from the drive to the scanner. A ‘1’ enables the I/O and a ‘0’ disables the I/O.
Bit 0 is the right-most bit. It is highlighted above and equals ‘1’.
4. Reset the adapter (see Resetting the Adapter on page 3-16).
The adapter is ready to receive I/O from the master (that is, scanner). You must now configure the scanner to recognize and transmit I/O to the adapter.
See Chapter 4, Configuring the I/O.
Setting the Adapter to Transmit Peer-to-Peer Data (Drive-to-Drive Communication)
1. Verify that Parameter 51 - [Peer Out Enable] is set to ‘0’ (Off).
This parameter must be Off while you configure peer output parameters.
2. Set Parameter 49 - [Peer A Output] to select the source of the data to output to the network.
Bit Description
0 Status/Feedback (Default)
1 Datalink A Output
2 Datalink B Output
3 Datalink C Output
4 Datalink D Output
5…15 Not Used
Port 5 Device
20-COMM-E
Parameter #: 36
M-S Output
xxxxxxxxxxx0000 1
Status/Fdbk b00
Value Setting
0 Off (Default)
1O n
Port 5 Device
20-COMM-E
Parameter #: 51
Peer Out Enable
0 Off
Port 5 Device
20-COMM-E
Parameter #: 49
Peer A Output
1 Cmd/Ref
Value Description
0 Off (Default)
1 Logic Command/Reference
2…5 Datalink A, B, C, or D Input
6…9 Datalink A, B, C, or D Output
I
3-10 Configuring the Adapter
20-COMM-E EtherNet/IP Adapter User Manual
Publication 20COMM-UM010H-EN-P
3. If desired, set Parameter 50 - [Peer B Output] to select an additional source of the data to output to the network.
4. Set Parameters 52 - [Peer Out Time] and 53 - [Peer Out Skip] to establish the minimum and maximum intervals between peer messages.
Because the adapter transmits peer messages when a change-of-state condition occurs, minimum and maximum intervals are required. – The minimum interval ensures that the adapter does not transmit messages on the network too often, thus minimizing network traffic.
Set the minimum interval with Parameter 52 - [Peer Out Time]. – The maximum interval ensures that the adapter transmits messages often enough so that the receiving adapter(s) can receive recent data and verify that communications are working or, if communications are not working, can timeout. The maximum interval is the value of Parameter 52 - [Peer Out Time] multiplied by the value of Parameter 53 - [Peer Out Skip].
In the example below, the minimum interval is set to 2.00 seconds (Parameter 52 - [Peer Out Time]), and the maximum interval is set to
4.00 seconds (2.00 x ‘2’ setting of Parameter 53 - [Peer Out Skip]).
5. Set Parameter 51 - [Peer Out Enable] to ‘1’ (On).
The adapter will transmit the data selected in Parameters 49 - [Peer A Output] and 50 - [Peer B Output] to the network. Another adapter must be configured to receive the peer I/O data.
Port 5 Device
20-COMM-E
Parameter #: 50
Peer B Output
2 DL A Input
Value Description
0 Off (Default)
1 Logic Command/Reference
2…5 Datalink A, B, C, or D Input
6…9 Datalink A, B, C, or D Output
Port 5 Device
20-COMM-E
Parameter #: 52
Peer Out Time
2.00 s
0 <> 10.00
Port 5 Device
20-COMM-E
Parameter #: 53
Peer Out Skip
2 1 <>16
Default = 10.00 s Default = 1
Configuring the Adapter 3-11
20-COMM-E EtherNet/IP Adapter User Manual
Publication 20COMM-UM010H-EN-P
Setting the Adapter to Receive Peer-to-Peer Data
1. Verify that Parameter 47 - [Peer Inp Enable] is set to ‘0’ (Off).
This parameter must be Off while you configure the peer input parameters.
2. Set Parameters 42 - [Peer Inp Addr 1] through 45 - [Peer Inp Addr 4] to the IP address of the node from which you want to receive data.
Valid nodes must have 20-COMM-E adapters connected to drives with compatible Logic Command/Status words.
3. Set Parameter 38 - [Peer A Input] to select the destination of the data that is input to the drive as Peer A.
With the Series A adapter, revision 2.xxx or earlier, if you select a Reference or Datalink as an input, note the following:
– If a drive that uses a 32-bit Reference and 32-bit Datalinks receives a 16-bit Reference or Datalink, it uses the data in its most significant word, and its least significant word is zero.
– If a drive that uses a 16-bit Reference and 16-bit Datalinks receives a 32-bit Reference or Datalink, it uses the data in the most significant word of the 32-bit Reference or Datalink and ignores the data in the least significant word.
With the Series B adapter, revision 3.xxx and later, data is used from the least significant word in the event of a mismatch in Reference or Datalink sizes.
Value Setting
0 Off (Default)
1O n
Port 5 Device
20-COMM-E
Parameter #: 47
Peer Inp Enable
0 Off
Port 5 Device
20-COMM-E
Parameter #: 42
Peer Inp Addr 1
0 0 <> 255 Default = 0.0.0.0
255.255.255.255
[Peer Inp Addr 1]
[Peer Inp Addr 2]
[Peer Inp Addr 3]
[Peer Inp Addr 4]
IP Address of Node
Transmitting Peer I/O
Port 5 Device
20-COMM-E
Parameter #: 38
Peer A Input
1 Cmd/Ref
Value Description
0 Off (Default)
1 Logic Command/Reference
2…5 Datalink A, B, C, or D Input
I I
3-12 Configuring the Adapter
20-COMM-E EtherNet/IP Adapter User Manual
Publication 20COMM-UM010H-EN-P
4. If desired, set Parameter 39 - [Peer B Input] to select the destination of the data to input to the drive as Peer B.
5. If the adapter receives a Logic Command, set the bits in Parameter 40 - [Peer Cmd Mask] that the drive should use.
The bit definitions for the Logic Command word will depend on the drive to which the adapter is connected. See Appendix D or the drive documentation.
If the adapter receives a Logic Command from both a master device and a peer device, each command bit must have only one source. The source of command bits set to ‘0’ will be the master device. The source of command bits set to ‘1’ will be the peer device.
6. Reset the adapter (see Resetting the Adapter
on page 3-16) so that
changes to Parameter 40 - [Peer Cmd Mask] take effect.
7. Set Parameter 46 - [Peer Inp Timeout] to the maximum amount of time the adapter will wait for a message before timing out.
Important: This value must be greater than the product of Parameter 52 - [Peer Out Time] multiplied by Parameter 53 - [Peer Out Skip] in the adapter from which you are receiving I/O.
For example, if the value of Parameter 52 - [Peer Out Time] is 2.00 seconds and the value of Parameter 53 - [Peer Out Skip] is 2 (see example screen in step 4 on page 3-10), then Parameter 46 - [Peer Inp Timeout] needs to have a value greater than 4.00, such as 5.00 in the example screen below.
Port 5 Device
20-COMM-E
Parameter #: 39
Peer B Input
2 DL A Input
Value Description
0 Off (Default)
1 Logic Command/Reference
2…5 Datalink A, B, C, or D Input
Value Description
0 Ignore this command bit. (Default)
1 Use this command bit.
Port 5 Device
20-COMM-E
Parameter #: 40
Peer Cmd Mask
000000000000000
0 Bit 0 B00
Port 5 Device
20-COMM-E
Parameter #: 46
Peer Inp Timeout
5.00 s
0.01 <> 10.00
Default = 10.00 s
I
Configuring the Adapter 3-13
20-COMM-E EtherNet/IP Adapter User Manual
Publication 20COMM-UM010H-EN-P
8. Set Parameter 41 - [Peer Flt Action] to the action that the adapter will take if it times out.
For more details, see Setting a Fault Action on page 3-14.
9. Set Parameter 47 - [Peer Inp Enable] to ‘1’ (On).
The adapter is now configured to receive peer I/O from the specified node.
Ensure that the specified node is configured to transmit peer I/O.
Setting the Reference
Adjustment
A Reference Adjustment is a percent scaling factor for the Reference from the network. It can be set between 0.00…200.00% to allow the drive’s Reference to either match the network Reference (equal to 100.00%), scale below the network Reference (less than 100.00%), or scale above the network Reference (more than 100.00%).
If the adapter is receiving a Reference, set Parameter 37 - [Ref Adjust] to the desired scaling factor.
The adjustment takes effect as soon as it is entered.
!
ATTENTION: Risk of injury or equipment damage exists.
Parameter 41 - [Peer Flt Action] lets you determine the action of the adapter and connected drive if peer communication is disrupted. By default, this parameter faults the drive. You can set this parameter so that the drive continues to run, however, precautions should be taken to ensure that the setting of this parameter does not create a hazard of injury or equipment damage. When commissioning the drive, verify that your system responds correctly to various situations (for example, a disconnected cable).
Port 5 Device
20-COMM-E
Parameter #: 41
Peer Flt Action
0 Fault
Value Description
0 Fault (Default)
1S t o p
2 Zero Data
3 Hold Last
4 Send Flt Cfg
!
ATTENTION: To guard against equipment damage and/or
personal injury, note that changes to adapter Parameter 37 - [Ref Adjust] take effect immediately. A drive receiving its Reference from the adapter will receive the newly scaled Reference, resulting in a change of speed.
Port 5 Device
20-COMM-E
Parameter #: 37
Ref Adjust
100.00 %
0.00 <> 200.00
Default = 100.00%
3-14 Configuring the Adapter
20-COMM-E EtherNet/IP Adapter User Manual
Publication 20COMM-UM010H-EN-P
Setting a Fault Action By default, when I/O communication is disrupted (for example, a cable is disconnected) or the controller is idle (in program mode or faulted), the drive responds by faulting if it is using I/O from the network. You can configure a different response to these faults:
Disrupted I/O communication by using Parameter 21 - [Comm Flt Action]
An idle controller by using Parameter 22 - [Idle Flt Action] Changing the Fault Action
Set the values of Parameters 21 - [Comm Flt Action] and 22 - [Idle Flt Action] to an action that meets your application requirements.
Changes to these parameters take effect immediately. A reset is not required.
If communication is disrupted and then is re-established, the drive will automatically take commands from the network again.
!
ATTENTION: Risk of injury or equipment damage exists.
Parameters 21 - [Comm Flt Action] and 22 - [Idle Flt Action] let you determine the action of the adapter and connected drive if I/O communication is disrupted or the controller is idle. By default, these parameters fault the drive. You can set these parameters so that the drive continues to run, however, precautions should be taken to verify that the settings of these parameters do not create a risk of injury or equipment damage.
When commissioning the drive, verify that your system responds correctly to various situations (for example, a disconnected cable or faulted controller).
Value Action Description
0 Fault The drive is faulted and stopped. (Default)
1 Stop The drive is stopped, but not faulted.
2 Zero Data The drive is sent ‘0’ values for data. This does not command a stop. 3 Hold Last The drive continues in its present state.
4 Send Flt Cfg The drive is sent the data that you set in the fault configuration parameters (Parameters 25 - [Flt Cfg Logic] through 34 - [Flt Cfg D2 In]).
Port 5 Device
20-COMM-E
Parameter #: 21
Comm Flt Action
0 Fault
Port 5 Device
20-COMM-E
Parameter #: 22
Idle Flt Action
0 Fault
Configuring the Adapter 3-15
20-COMM-E EtherNet/IP Adapter User Manual
Publication 20COMM-UM010H-EN-P
Setting the Fault Configuration Parameters
When setting Parameter 21 - [Comm Flt Action] or 22 - [Idle Flt Action] to ‘Send Flt Cfg’, the values in the following parameters are sent to the drive after an I/O communication fault and/or idle fault occurs. You must set these parameters to values required by your application.
Changes to these parameters take effect immediately. A reset is not required.
Setting Web Access Control By using a web browser to access the IP address set for the adapter, you can view the adapter’s web pages for information about the adapter, its connected drive, and other DPI devices connected to the drive, such as HIMs or converters. Additionally, the adapter can be configured to automatically send e-mail messages to desired addresses when selected drive faults occur and/or are cleared, and/or when the adapter takes a communication or idle fault action. For more details on the adapter’s web pages, see Chapter
8, Viewing the Adapter Web Pages.
Series A Adapter (Firmware Revision 2.002 or Earlier)
By default, the Series A adapter web pages are enabled. To disable the adapter web pages, use Parameter 54 - [Access Control] to set the Web Enable Bit 0 value to ‘0’ (Disabled). To protect the configured settings for adapter e-mail messaging, use Parameter 54 - [Access Control] to set the E-mail Config Bit 1 value to ‘0’ (Disabled). E-mail messaging will remain active regardless of whether or not its settings are protected—unless e-mail messaging was never configured. For more information about configuring adapter e-mail messaging, see Configure E-mail Notification Web Page on
page 8-6).
Bit 0 is the right-most bit. It is highlighted above and equals ‘1’.
Changes to this parameter take effect immediately. A reset is not required.
Parameter Description
25 - [Flt Cfg Logic] A 16-bit value sent to the drive for Logic Command. 26 - [Flt Cfg Ref] A 32-bit value (0…4294967295) sent to the drive as a Reference or Datalink.
Important: If the drive uses a 16-bit Reference or 16-bit Datalinks, the most significant word of the value must be set to zero (0) or a fault will occur. 27 - [Flt Cfg x1 In]
through
34 - [Flt Cfg x2 In]
TIP: Series A adapter web pages are accessed differently than Series B web pages. Enabling and disabling e-mail configuration is also different.
Bit Description
0 Web Enable (Default = 1 = Enabled)
1 E-mail Config (Default = 0 = Disabled)
2…31 Not Used
Port 5 Device
20-COMM-E
Parameter #: 54
Access Control
xxxxxxxxxxxxxx0
1 Web Enable b00
►
I
3-16 Configuring the Adapter
20-COMM-E EtherNet/IP Adapter User Manual
Publication 20COMM-UM010H-EN-P
Series B Adapter (Firmware Revision 3.xxx or Later)
By default, the Series B adapter web pages are disabled. See Figure 2.1 and set the Web Pages Switch (SW2) to the ‘Enable Web’ (up) position.
Important: For a change to the switch setting to take effect, the adapter must be reset (see Resetting the Adapter on page 3-16).
Bit 0 of Parameter 56 - [Web Features] is used to protect the configured settings for e-mail messaging. By default, settings are not protected and the user can make changes. To protect the configured settings, set the value of E-mail Cfg Bit 0 to ‘0’ (Disabled). You can unprotect the configuration by changing Bit 0 back to ‘1’ (Enabled). E-mail messaging will always remain active regardless of whether or not its settings are protected—unless e-mail messaging was never configured. For more information about configuring adapter e-mail messaging or to stop e-mail messages, see Configure E-mail Notification Web Page on page 8-6.
Bit 0 is the right-most bit. It is highlighted above and equals ‘1’.
Changes to this parameter take effect immediately. A reset is not required.
Resetting the Adapter Changes to switch settings and some adapter parameters require that you reset the adapter before the new settings take effect. You can reset the adapter by power cycling the drive or by using Parameter 20 - [Reset Module].
Set Parameter 20 - [Reset Module] to ‘1’ (Reset Module).
When you enter ‘1’ (Reset Module), the adapter will be immediately reset.
When you enter ‘2’ (Set Defaults), the adapter will set all adapter parameters to their factory-default values. After performing a Set Defaults, enter ‘1’ (Reset Module) so that the new values take effect. The value of this parameter will be restored to ‘0’ (Ready) after the adapter is reset.
Bit Description
0 E-mail Cfg (Default = 1 = Enabled)
1…7 Not Used
Port 5 Device
20-COMM-E
Parameter #: 56
Web Features
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxx 1
E-mail Cfg b00
!
ATTENTION: Risk of injury or equipment damage exists. If the adapter is transmitting control I/O to the drive, the drive may fault when you reset the adapter. Determine how your drive will respond before resetting a connected adapter.
Value Description
0 Ready (Default)
1 Reset Module
2 Set Defaults
Port 5 Device
20-COMM-E
Parameter #: 20
Reset Module
1 Reset Module
I
Configuring the Adapter 3-17
20-COMM-E EtherNet/IP Adapter User Manual
Publication 20COMM-UM010H-EN-P
Viewing the Adapter Status
Using Parameters
The following parameters provide information about the status of the adapter. You can view these parameters at any time.
Updating the Adapter
Firmware
The adapter firmware can be updated over the network or serially through a direct connection from a computer to the drive using a 1203-USB or 1203-SSS serial converter.
When updating firmware over the network, you can use the Allen-Bradley ControlFLASH software tool, the built-in update capability of DriveExplorer Lite or Full software, or the built-in update capability of DriveExecutive software.
When updating firmware through a direct serial connection from a computer to a drive, you can use the same Allen-Bradley software tools described above, or you can use HyperTerminal software set to the X-modem protocol.
To obtain a firmware update for this adapter, go to http://www.ab.com/ support/abdrives/webupdate. This website contains all firmware update files and associated Release Notes that describe the following items:
Firmware update enhancements and anomalies
How to determine the existing firmware revision
How to update firmware using ControlFLASH, DriveExplorer, DriveExecutive, or HyperTerminal software
Parameter Description
17 - [EN Rate Act] The data rate used by the adapter.
18 - [Ref/Fdbk Size] The size of the Reference/Feedback. It will either be 16 bits or 32 bits. It is set in the drive and the adapter automatically uses the correct size. 19 - [Datalink Size] The size of the Datalinks. It will either be 16 bits or 32 bits. It is set in the drive and the adapter automatically uses the correct size. 24 - [DPI I/O Act] The Reference/Feedback and Datalinks used by the adapter. This value is the same as Parameter 23 - [DPI I/O Cfg] unless the parameter was changed and the adapter was not reset.
48 - [Peer Inp Status] The status of the consumed peer input connection.
Values
0 = Off
1 = Waiting
2 = Running
3 = Faulted
Bit
Definition
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Datalink D
Datalink C
Datalink B
Datalink A
Cmd/Ref
D e f a u l t xxx00001
B i t 76543210
0 = I/O disabled
1 = I/O enabled1 111 1 111
3-18 Configuring the Adapter
20-COMM-E EtherNet/IP Adapter User Manual
Publication 20COMM-UM010H-EN-P
Notes:
20-COMM-E EtherNet/IP Adapter User Manual
Publication 20COMM-UM010H-EN-P
Chapter 4
Configuring the I/O
This chapter provides instructions on how to configure a Rockwell Automation ControlLogix, PLC-5, SLC 500, or MicroLogix 1100/1400 controller to communicate with the adapter and connected PowerFlex drive.
Using RSLinx Classic
Software
RSLinx Classic software, in all its variations (Lite, Gateway, OEM, and so forth), is used to provide a communication link between the computer, network, and controller. RSLinx Classic software requires its network-specific driver to be configured before communication is established with network devices. To configure the RSLinx driver, follow this procedure.
1. Start RSLinx Classic software and select Communications > Configure Drivers to display the Configure Drivers screen.
2. From the Available Driver Types pull-down menu, choose EtherNet/IP Driver.
3. Click Add New… to display the Add New RSLinx Driver screen.
4. Use the default name or type a new name and click OK.
The ‘Configure driver:’ screen appears.
5. Depending on your application, select either the browse local or remote subnet option.
6. Click OK.
Topic Page
Using RSLinx Classic Software 4-1
ControlLogix Controller Example 4-2
Limitations Using a PLC-5, SLC 500, or MicroLogix 1100/1400 Controller 4-22 PLC-5 Controller Example 4-23
SLC 500 Controller Example 4-31
MicroLogix 1100/1400 Controller Example 4-39
4-2 Configuring the I/O
20-COMM-E EtherNet/IP Adapter User Manual
Publication 20COMM-UM010H-EN-P
The Configure Drivers screen reappears with the new driver in the Configured Drivers list.
7. Click Close to close the Configure Drivers screen.
8. Keep RSLinx running and verify that the computer recognizes the drive. a. Select Communications > RSWho.
b. In the menu tree, click ‘+’ next to the Ethernet driver.
If the ‘EtherNet/IP driver’ cannot see your drive, as an alternative, use either the ‘Ethernet devices’ or ‘Remote Devices via Linx Gateway’ RSLinx driver.
ControlLogix Controller
Example
After the adapter is configured, the connected drive and adapter will be a single node on the network. This section provides the steps needed to configure a simple EtherNet/IP network (see Figure 4.1). In our example, we will configure a ControlLogix controller with 1756-ENBT (Series A) bridge to communicate with a drive using Logic Command/Status, Reference/ Feedback, and 16 Datalinks (8 to read and 8 to write) over the network.
Figure 4.1 Example ControlLogix Controller EtherNet/IP Network IP Address 10.91.100.80
ControlLogix Controller
with 1756-ENBT Bridge
IP Address 10.91.100.79
PowerFlex 70 Drive with
20-COMM-E Adapter
Computer with
Ethernet Connection
Ethernet
Switch
TIP: Information for PowerFlex 750-Series drives has been added to this manual where it is applicable.
Configure Drivers IT)~
[ Available Driver Types:
I EtherNet/lP Driver Add New ..
Close
Help
ConfiguredDrive,s -------------------
Name and Description I Status I
AB_ETHIP-1 A-8 Ethernet RUNNING Running Configure
Startup
Start
Stop
Delete
•
-
0 D
►
Configuring the I/O 4-3
20-COMM-E EtherNet/IP Adapter User Manual
Publication 20COMM-UM010H-EN-P
Adding the Bridge to the I/O Configuration
To establish communications between the controller and adapter over the network, you must first add the ControlLogix controller and its bridge to the I/O configuration. This procedure is similar for all RSLogix 5000 versions.
1. Start RSLogix 5000 software.
2. Select File > New to display the New Controller screen. a. Choose the appropriate selections for the fields in the screen to match your application.
b. Click OK.
The RSLogix 5000 window reappears with the treeview in the left pane.
3. In the treeview, right-click the I/O Configuration folder and choose New Module.
The Select Module screen appears.
4. Expand the Communications group to display all of the available communication modules.
5. In the list, select the EtherNet/IP bridge used by your controller.
New Controller [8]
Vendoi: Allen-Bradley
T_ype: 11756-L63 Controllogix5563 Cont1oller ..:l I OK
Revision· rs""""..:] Cancel
r Redundancy Enabled Help
Name: lv16_E i-:ample_using_20COMM E
Description: Example showing how to control a PowerFlex 70 EC drive with a 20-COMM-E EtherNet/lP adapter using
RSLogix 5000 vl 6 software.
Chassis T _ype: 11756-A? 7-Slot Controllogix Chassis ..:l Slot: lo"3:l Safety Partne, Slot
Create In: lc:\RSLogix 5000\Projects 81owse ..
• Select Module ~
Module IDe~lon
1756-0HRIO/C 1756 DH+ Bridge/RIO Scanner
1756-0HRIO,tl 1756 DH+ Bridge/RIO Scanner
1756-0NB
1756-ENZT/A
liii#;aii HI·
1756 DeviceNet Scanner
1756 10/ 100 Mbps Ethernet Bridge, Twisted-Pair Media
ftffl tlMDP1M¥·Ni @MM@ii&H@&
1756 Ethern e t Communica tion Interface
1756 Ethernet Communication Interface
1756-El\lET/A
1756-ENET/B
1756-f.WEB/A
1756-SVNCH/A
1756 10/ 100 Mbps Ethernet Bridge w/Enhanced Web Services Synchlink Interface
(E Controllers
!±! Digital
!±I Drives
!±I Motion
~
ByCategory I ByVendor I Favorites I
Find
iVendOf
Allen-Bradley
Allen-Bradley
Allen-Bradley
Allen-Bradley
·!rffl·tff114Mi
Allen-Bradley
Allen-Bradley
Allen-Bradley
Allen-Bradley
Add Favorite
I
~-□-K-~ __ c_an_ce_l ~ __ He_lP_~I A
4-4 Configuring the I/O
20-COMM-E EtherNet/IP Adapter User Manual
Publication 20COMM-UM010H-EN-P
In this example, we use a 1756-ENBT EtherNet/IP Bridge (Series A), so the 1756-ENBT/A option is selected.
6. Click OK.
7. In the Select Major Revision pop-up dialog box, select the major revision of its firmware.
8. Click OK.
The bridge’s New Module screen appears.
9. Edit the following:
10. Click OK.
The bridge is now configured for the EtherNet/IP network and added to the RSLogix 5000 project. It appears in the I/O Configuration folder. In our example, a 1756-ENBT bridge appears under the I/O Configuration folder with its assigned name.
For convenience, keep the project open. Later in this chapter the project will need to be downloaded to the controller.
Box Setting
Name A name to identify the EtherNet/IP bridge.
Description Optional – description of the EtherNet/IP bridge.
IP Address The IP address of the EtherNet/IP bridge.
Host Name Not used.
Slot The slot of the EtherNet/IP bridge in the rack.
Revision The minor revision of the firmware in the bridge. (Y ou already set the major revision by selecting the bridge series in step 5.)
Electronic
Keying
Compatible Keying. The ‘Compatible Keying’ setting for Electronic Keying ensures the physical module is consistent with the software configuration before the controller and bridge make a connection. Therefore, be sure that you have set the correct revision in this screen. See the online Help for additional information on this and other Electronic Keying settings.
Open
Module
Properties
When this box is checked, clicking OK opens additional module properties screens to further configure the bridge. When unchecked, clicking OK closes the bridge’s New Module screen. For this example, uncheck this box.
New Module ~
1756-ENBT/A 175610/100MbptElhefnet 8ridge.
Twisled.P!ISMe<ia
Vendor: Alen·Br,dey
P!l(ent: Local
Name IMy_EthefNeUP _Bridge
Description
Adltess / H0$1: N~me
r♦' IPAddreu::: I 10 91 100 _ 80
r Hott NM!«
Slot ls"°33
R~i""" fJ"3 16""33 Elect1oric KeJM'!i I Con-patible Keying r OpeoModule-Ploperties
El @ll 1/0 Configuration
EJ ·IIII 1756 Backplane, 1756-Al
L .•. ~ [OJ 1756-l63 v 16_Example_using_20COMME
El ~ [5] 1756-ENBT /A My _EtherNet_IP _Bridge
le Ethernet
Configuring the I/O 4-5
20-COMM-E EtherNet/IP Adapter User Manual
Publication 20COMM-UM010H-EN-P
There are three ways to add the adapter into the I/O configuration:
Drive Add-on Profiles (RSLogix 5000 software, version 16.00 or later) Classic Profile (RSLogix 5000 software, versions 13.00…15.00) Generic Profile (RSLogix 5000 software, all versions) These are described in separate sections below. If your version of RSLogix 5000 software supports drive Add-on Profiles, we recommend that you use this method.
Using RSLogix 5000 Drive Add-on Profiles, Version 16.00 or Later When compared to using the RSLogix 5000 Classic Profile (versions
13.00…15.00) or Generic Profile (all versions), the RSLogix 5000 drive Add-on Profiles provide the following advantages:
Profiles for specific drives that provide descriptive controller tags for basic control I/O words (Logic Command/Status and Reference/ Feedback) and Datalinks. Additionally, Datalinks automatically take the name of the drive parameter to which they are assigned. These profiles virtually eliminate I/O mismatch errors and substantially reduce drive configuration time.
New Drive tab eliminates the need for a separate drive software configuration tool.
Drive configuration settings are saved as part of the RSLogix 5000 software, version 16.00 or later, project file (.ACD) and also downloaded to the controller.
Unicast connection (requires RSLogix 5000 software, version 18.00 or later, and 20-COMM-E Series B adapter firmware 4.001 or later) Drive Add-on Profiles can be updated anytime. When a new drive is used, or to benefit from new updates for Add-on Profiles, you will need the newest Add-on Profile update. Go to http://www.ab.com/support/ abdrives/webupdate to download the latest RSLogix 5000 drive Add-on Profile. To determine your drive Add-on Profile version, see Allen-Bradley Knowledgebase document #65882.
Add the Drive/Adapter to the I/O Configuration
To transmit data between the bridge and the drive, you must add the drive as a child device to the parent bridge. In this example, RSLogix 5000 software, version 16.00 is used with drive Add-on Profile version 3.01.
1. In the treeview, right-click on the bridge and choose New Module… to display the Select Module screen.
4-6 Configuring the I/O
20-COMM-E EtherNet/IP Adapter User Manual
Publication 20COMM-UM010H-EN-P
In our example, we right-click on the 1756-ENBT/A bridge. Expand the Drives group to display all of the available drives with their communication adapters.
2. From the list, select the drive and its connected adapter.
For this example, we selected ‘PowerFlex 70 EC-E’.
3. Click OK.
The drive’s New Module screen appears.
4. On the General tab, edit the following data about the drive/adapter.
5. On the New Module screen in the Module Definition section, click Change… to launch the Module Definition screen and begin the drive/ adapter configuration process.
TIP: If the PowerFlex drive is not shown, go to http://www.ab.com/ support/abdrives/webupdate and download the latest RSLogix 5000 drive Add-on Profile.
Box Setting
Name A name to identify the drive.
Description Optional – description of the drive/adapter.
IP Address The IP address of the adapter.
►
• Select Modu le (g)
Module
ill
1397DigitalDCDrive-EN 1
2364F RGU-EN 1
Powerflex 4-E
Powerf lex 40-E
Powerf lex 40P-E
@iiti#ft,, ■ si
Powerf lex 70-E
Powerf lex 400-E
Powerflex 700 Vector -200V-E
Powerf lex 700 Vector-400 V-E
Powerf lex 700 Vector -600V-E
Powerflex 700-200V-E
Powerf lex 700-400\J -E
IDesaintion
1397 Digital DC Drive via 1203-ENl
2364F Regen Bus Supply via 1203-EN 1
Powerf lex 4 Drive via 22-COMM-E
Powerf lex 40 Drive via 22-COMM-E
Powerfl ex 40P Drive via 22-COMM-E
Ml#M,•Hi IM¥&f1•ii @§I
Powerf lex 70 Drive via 20-COMM-E
Powerf lex 400 Drive via 22-COMM-E
Powerfl ex 700 Vector Drive {208/ 240V} via 20-COMM-E
Powerf lex 700 Vector Drive {400/ 480V) via 20-COMM-E
Powerfl ex 700 Vector Drive {600V} via 20-COMM-E
Powerf lex 700 Drive (208/ 240\J) via 20-COMM-E
Powerf lex 700 Drive (400/480\J) via 20-COMM-E
.!.I
~
Find... Add Favo,ite
By Category I By Vendor I Favorites I
OK Cancel Help
• New Module ~
Generci' I Connection" I Module Info' I P01t Corliguration' ] Drive' I Type: PoweiFlex 70 EC-E AC Drive via 20-COMM-E
Venda!: Alen-Bradley
Name IMy PowerFlex 70 EC Drive
Description
MOO"JleDefinilion
Series
Revitiort
Electror.c:Keying
Connection
Dnlnf ormnl
Status: Creating
3.2 Compatible Module
Pnrnmet= vinOnlnli'lks
Pnrnmeter~
EtheinetAdo-ess
O Prival:eNetW01k: 192.168.1. CJ
0 1PAdO"ess: I 10 91 . HID . 79 I
0 Host Nome
Configuring the I/O 4-7
20-COMM-E EtherNet/IP Adapter User Manual
Publication 20COMM-UM010H-EN-P
In this example, Datalinks are used to do the following.
6. In the Module Definition screen, edit the following information.
Read… Write to…
Output Current (Parameter 3) Accel Time 1 (Parameter 140) DC Bus Voltage (Parameter 12) Decel Time 1 (Parameter 142) Fault 1 Code (Parameter 243) High Resolution Reference (Parameter 308) TIP: To get the latest RSLogix 5000 drive Add-on Profile, go to http:// www.ab.com/support/abdrives/webupdate.
Box Setting
Revision The major and minor revision of the firmware (database) in the drive. If the drive’s major and minor revision is not available, the drive database is not installed on your computer. To get the correct database revision, use one of the following buttons at the bottom left of the Module Definition screen:
Create Database: Creates a database from an online network drive. Clicking this button displays an RSLinx software RSWho window. Browse to the online drive (for this example, PowerFlex 70 EC), select it, and click OK. The database will be uploaded and stored on the computer. Thereafter, close the Module Definition screen and then re-open it to display the new revision. Web Update: When a drive is not available online, opens the Allen-Bradley Drives Web Updates website to download a specific database file. After downloading the file, close the Module Definition screen and then re-open it to display the new revision.
Match Drive: Use this button when the drive being added to the network matches the drive profile (revision, rating, configuration settings, and so forth) of an existing online network drive. Click this button to conveniently create a duplicate drive profile from the online drive, and automatically load this identical information into the Module Definition screen. This eliminates the need to manually enter the information each time a new drive with a matching profile is added to the network.
Electronic
Keying
Compatible Module. The ‘Compatible Module’ setting for Electronic Keying ensures that the physical module is consistent with the software configuration before the controller and bridge make a connection. Therefore, ensure that you have set the correct revision in this screen. See the online Help for additional information on this and other Electronic Keying settings. If keying is not required, select ‘Disable Keying’. Drives do not require keying, and so ‘Disable Keying’ is recommended.
►
Module Defm1tion• ~
Revision:
Electronic Keying:
OriveA-,iing:
Connection
DntaFor11111l
~ ~ ,l.;;.o._,._rin_k1,l••.;;.P"'...,,;..°'-" ------,lc-O "~''"~'~°'~"~-- -- _- ~- I I Ccwrpattje Module v I .~l~=~ =e!=~art=:.:~--~ ~:w;::;:~eq □ '
o o
.., UseNetwort.Reference
v Aeee1Tme1 - uo
0 Sortl~/OIJ:~selectioo istsb','PaiaireleiNMJe
/4\ DANGER: Unexpected, hazardous ~ion of maelYle!y ~ oceU" t...:.l,l'Kten~operlyusn;iscttwaietoeonl9-'ee1drive .
PaiaineternamesselectedforthelnputandOIJ:~Dataappearas
merrber names in the 0-ive Module·Defned Data Twes and defines neeenary Dataln<. parameters in the RSlogix 5COO project. Actual data tramtei between ecrlrole! and 0-ive is deterITll"led by DatalU parameters
Yoorr(lstoowrioadeonligurationtothedrivetoens1.Methatthe controlfer,driveandcorrm..inicationmoduleconligu-~ionsaie consisteotwitheaehothet
DO ~ ~
4-8 Configuring the I/O
20-COMM-E EtherNet/IP Adapter User Manual
Publication 20COMM-UM010H-EN-P
When a 32-bit parameter is selected for Input Data or Output Data for a drive with 16-bit Datalinks, two contiguous Datalinks (for example, x1 and x2, where x = A, B, C or D) are automatically assigned as a pair to represent that parameter. See Datalink examples in the screen shown on the previous page. For more information on Datalinks, see Using Datalinks on page 5-9.
On the Module Definition screen, notice that the automatically-assigned controller tags DriveStatus, OutputFreq, DriveLogicRslt, and CommandedFreq are always used.
When a Datalink is enabled, the following 20-COMM-E adapter I/O parameters are automatically set:
– Parameter 23 - [DPI I/O Cfg] turns on the enabled Datalink bit so the 20-COMM-E adapter will communicate that Datalink’s
information with the drive.
– Parameter 35 - [M-S Input] turns on the enabled Datalink bit so the 20-COMM-E adapter will input that Datalink’s information from the controller.
– Parameter 36 - [M-S Output] turns on the enabled Datalink bit so the 20-COMM-E adapter will output that Datalink’s information to the controller.
7. Click OK on the Module Definition screen to save the drive and adapter configuration and close the screen.
The drive’s New Module screen reappears.
Drive
Rating
The voltage and current rating of the drive. If the drive rating is not listed, the drive database is not installed on your computer. To get the correct drive rating, use the Create Database, Web Update, or Match Drive button described above.
Connection Parameters via Datalinks. When selecting ‘Parameters via Datalinks’ (default), the controller tags for the Datalinks use the drive parameter names to which they are assigned. When selecting ‘Datalinks’, the controller tags for the Datalinks have non-descriptive UserDefinedData[n] names like those used in RSLogix 5000 software, version 15.00.
Data
Format
Parameters. When the Connection field is set to ‘Parameters via Datalinks’, ‘Parameters’ is automatically selected. When the Connection field is set to ‘Datalinks’, you must select the number of Datalinks required for your application in the ‘Data Format’ field.
Datalink
A, B, C, D
In the Input Data column, assigns selected drive parameters to be READ by the controller. In the Output Data column, assigns selected drive parameters to be WRITTEN by the controller.
Sort Input/
Output
selection…
When this box is checked, sorts the Input Data and Output Data assigned parameters by name and then by number, and enables parameter search by name. When unchecked, sorts the assigned parameters by parameter number and then by name, and enables parameter search by number.
Use
Network
Reference
Conveniently selects the speed reference for the drive to come from the network. This box is checked by default.
Box Setting
Configuring the I/O 4-9
20-COMM-E EtherNet/IP Adapter User Manual
Publication 20COMM-UM010H-EN-P
8. On the New Module screen, click the Connection tab.
9. In the ‘Requested Packet Interval (RPI)’ box, set the value to 5.0 milliseconds or greater.
This value determines the maximum interval that a controller should use to move data to and from the adapter. To conserve bandwidth, use higher values for communicating with low priority devices.
The ‘Inhibit Module’ box, when checked, inhibits the module from communicating with the RSLogix 5000 project. When the ‘Major Fault on …’ box is checked, a major controller fault will occur when the module’s connection fails while the controller is in the Run Mode. For this example, leave the ‘Inhibit Module’ and ‘Major Fault On …’ boxes unchecked.
Important: Unicast support has been added to RSLogix 5000 software, version 18.00 or later. However, to also support unicast, the controller firmware must be version 18.00 or later, and the 20-COMM-E Series B adapter firmware must be revision
4.001 or later. Unicast is recommended whenever possible.
For the benefits of unicast operation, see Preparing for an Installation on page 2-1. If unicast is selected and the 20-COMM-E adapter does not support it, the connection
will be rejected. In this case, either update the 20-COMM-E firmware to revision 4.001 or later, or uncheck the ‘Use Unicast Connection over EtherNet/IP’ checkbox.
Screen for
RSLogix 5000
software, version
16.00 or 17.00
Screen for
RSLogix 5000
software, version
18.00 or later
• Module Properties . My_EtherNet_lP _Bndge (Powerflex 70 EC E 3.2) ~(Q]rg) --------------- ----------------
General Connection I Module Info I Port Configuration J Drive I Requested Packet Interval (RPI): ~ ~ ms (2.0. 9999.9)
□ Inhibit Module
D Major Fault On Controller If Connection Fails "While in Run Mode Module Fault
Status: Offline
• New Module rg)
~ Connection I Module Info ~ Port Confi!;iuration ~ Drive I RequestedPacketlnterval(RPI): ~~ ms[20-9999.9)
0 1nhibKModule
D Major Fault On Controller If Connection Fails "While in Run Mode ~ Use Unicast Connection over EtherNel/lP
Module Fault
Status: Creating DO ~~
4-10 Configuring the I/O
20-COMM-E EtherNet/IP Adapter User Manual
Publication 20COMM-UM010H-EN-P
10. On the New Module screen, click the Port Configuration tab.
11. In the Port Configuration tab screen, edit the following information.
12. Click Set to save the Port Configuration information which sets the corresponding offline Subnet Cfg x and Gateway Cfg x parameters in the adapter.
13. Click OK on the New Module screen.
The new node (‘My_PowerFlex_70_EC_Drive’ in this example) now appears under the bridge (‘My_EtherNet_IP_Bridge’ in this example) in the I/O Configuration folder. If you double-click the Controller Tags, you will see that module-defined data types and tags have been automatically created (Figure 4.2
). Note that all tag names are defined
and Datalinks include the assigned drive parameter name. After you save and download the configuration, these tags allow you to access the Input and Output data of the drive via the controller’s ladder logic.
Box Setting
IP Address The IP address of the adapter that was already set in the General tab. This field is not configurable (grayed out).
Subnet Mask The Subnet Mask configuration setting of the network. This setting must match the setting of other devices on the network (for example, 255.255.255.0).
Gateway
Address
The Gateway Address configuration setting of the network. This setting must match the setting of other devices on the network (for example, 10.91.100.1).
Enable BootP When this box is checked, BOOTP is enabled in the adapter and will ignore the IP address set in the General tab. When unchecked, the controller uses the set IP address. This is another method to enable/disable BOOTP in the adapter. For this example, leave this box unchecked.
• New Module LJ[g]~
General J Com edian I Module nfo Port Configuration I Drive J !P Address
Subne<Mask, I
!dateway Address: ~1-0 _____ _
r Enable~P
Status: Olfline
Configuring the I/O 4-11
20-COMM-E EtherNet/IP Adapter User Manual
Publication 20COMM-UM010H-EN-P
Figure 4.2 Controller Tags
Save the I/O Configuration to the Controller
After adding the bridge and drive/adapter to the I/O configuration, you must download the configuration to the controller. You should also save the configuration to a file on your computer.
1. In the RSLogix 5000 window, select Communications > Download.
The Download dialog box appears.
Name t::. I Value +- Force Mask +- Style I Data Type
_ - My_PowerFlex_70_EC_Drive:I .---'-{ •" -'-' ,-,l ,... _ _,_{ •" -'-' ,-,l ,----, AB:PowerFlex70E. l-'-2t~O~O~OO~.-'-' '--I' f---f-F~---l lNT _ + My_PowerFlex_70_EC_Drive:I.DriveStatus Binary ----
----
---
-
-
-
-
-
My_PowerFlex_70_EC_Drive:I.DriveStatus_Ready
My_PowerFlex_70_EC_Drive:I.DriveStatus_Active
My_PowerFlex_70_EC_Drive:I.D1iveStatus_CommandDir
My_PowerFlex_70_EC_Drive:I.DriveStatus_ActualDir
My_PowerFlex_70_EC_Drive:I.DriveStatus_Accelerating
My_PowerFlex_70_EC_Drive:I.DriveStatus_Decelerating
My_PowerFlex_70_EC_Drive:I.DriveStatus_Alarm
My_PowerFlex_70_EC_Drive:I.D1iveStatus_Faulted
My_PowerFlex_70_EC_Drive:I.DriveStatus_AtSpeed
My_PowerFlex_70_EC_Drive:I.DriveStatus_LocallDO
My_PowerFlex_70_EC_Drive:I.DriveStatus_Loca11D1
My_PowerFlex_70_EC_Drive:I.DriveStatus_loca11D2
My_PowerFlex_70_EC_Drive:I.D,iveStatus_SpdRef1DO
My_PowerFlex_70_EC_Drive:I.DriveStatus_SpdReflD1
My_PowerFlex_70_EC_Drive:I.DriveStatus_SpdRef1D2
My_PowerFlex_70_EC_Drive:1.D,iveStatus_SpdReflD3
+ My_PowerFlex_70_EC_Drive:I.OutputFreq
+ My_PowerFlex_70_EC_Drive:I.OutputCurrent
+ My_PowerFlex_70_EC_Drive:I.DCBusVoltage
Decimal BOOL 1--------,f--------,f-----j
Decimal BOOL 1--------,f--------,f------+
Decimal BOOL 1--------,f--------,f------+
Decimal BOOL 1--------,f--------,f------+
Decimal 1------'--lf---f-F=---! BOOL
Decimal BOOL 1--------,f--------,f-----j
Decimal BOOL 1--------,f--------,f------+
Decimal BOOL 1--------,f--------,f------+
Decimal BOOL 1--------,f--------,f------+
Decimal 1------'--lf---f-F=---! BOOL
Decimal BOOL 1--------,f--------,f-----j
Decimal BOOL 1--------,f--------,f------+
Decimal BOOL 1--------,f--------,f------+
Decimal BOOL 1--------,f--------,f------+
Decimal BOOL t--------,f--------,f------+
1------'--lf---f-F~---l BOOL
INT 1--------,f--------,f------+
Decimal
Decimal
Decimal DINT 1--------,f--------,f------+
Decimal INT t--------,f--------,f------+
_ + My_PowerFlex_70_EC_Drive:I.Fault1 Code
_ - My_PowerFlex_70_EC_Drive:O
Decimal INT ~--~~--~r--~
.---'-{ ._._. ,-,l ,--~......,,...---, AB:PowerFlex70E { .. . } _ + My_PowerFlex_70_EC_Drive:O.DrivelogicRslt Binary ,_u~o_o_oo_._ . ...,· f--------,f-~----+ 1NT ---
-
---
--
--
My_PowerFlex_70_EC_Drive:O.DrivelogicRslt_Stop
My_PowerFlex_70_EC_Drive:O.DrivelogicRslt_Start
My_PowerFlex_70_EC_Drive:O.DrivelogicRslt_Jog
My_PowerFlex_70_EC_Drive:O.DrivelogicRslt_ClearFault
My_PowerFlex_70_EC_Drive:O.DrivelogicRslt_Forward
My_PowerFlex_70_EC_Drive:O.DrivelogicRslt_Reverse
My_PowerFlex_70_EC_Drive:O.DrivelogicRslt_LocalContrl
My_PowerFlex_70_EC_Drive:O.DrivelogicRslt_MOPlnc
My_PowerFlex_70_EC_Drive:O.DrivelogicRslt_Accel1
My_PowerFlex_70_EC_Drive:O.DrivelogicRslt_Accel2
My_PowerFlex_70_EC_Drive:O.DrivelogicRslt_Decel1
My_PowerFlex_70_EC_Drive:O.DrivelogicRslt_Decel2
My_PowerFlex_70_EC_Drive:O.DrivelogicRslt_SpdReflDO
My PowerFlex 70 EC Drive:O.DrivelogicRslt SpdReflDl
Decimal BOOL 1--------,f--------,f------+
Decimal BOOL t--------,f--------,f------+
Decimal 1------'--lf---f-F=---! BOOL
Decimal BOOL 1------'--lf---f-F~---l
Decimal BOOL 1--------,f--------,f------+
Decimal BOOL 1--------,f--------,f------+
Decimal BOOL t--------,f--------,f------+
Decimal 1------'--lf---f-F=---! BOOL
Decimal BOOL 1------'--lf---f-F~---l
Decimal BOOL 1--------,f--------,f------+
Decimal BOOL 1--------,f--------,f------+
Decimal BOOL t--------,f--------,f------+
Decimal 1------'--lf---f-F=---! BOOL
Decimal BOOL
Download [8J
Download offline project 'v16_Example_using_20COMME' to the contioller.
Connected Controllei:
Name: v16_E,ample_using_20COMME
Type: 1756-L63/A Controll ogix5563 Controller
Path: Ethernet\ 10.91.100.80\Backplane\O
Serial Number: 002A4880
Security: No Protection
ffi DANGER: Unexpected hazardous motion of machinery may occur.
Some devices maintain independent configuration settings that are not loaded to the device during the download of the controller.
Verify these devices (drives, network devices, 3rd party products) have been properly loaded before placing the controller into run mode.
Failure to load proper configuration could ,esult in misaligned data and unexpected equipment operation
Download Cancel Help
4-12 Configuring the I/O
20-COMM-E EtherNet/IP Adapter User Manual
Publication 20COMM-UM010H-EN-P
2. Click Download to download the configuration to the controller.
When the download is successfully completed, RSLogix 5000 software goes into the Online mode and the I/O Not Responding box in the upper-left of the window should be flashing green. Also, a yellow warning symbol should be displayed on the I/O Configuration folder in the treeview and on the drive profile.
If the controller was in Run Mode before clicking Download, RSLogix 5000 software prompts you to change the controller mode back to Remote Run. In this case, choose the appropriate mode for your application. If the controller was in Program Mode before clicking Download, this prompt will not appear.
3. Select File > Save.
If this is the first time you saved the project, the Save As dialog box appears.
a. Navigate to a folder.
b. Type a file name.
c. Click Save to save the configuration to a file on your computer.
To be sure that the present project configuration values are saved, RSLogix 5000 software prompts you to upload them. Click Yes to upload and save the values.
Correlate the Drive with the Controller
You must now correlate the drive settings to the RSLogix 5000 project I/O settings so that they match. This requires loading the project I/O settings into the drive.
1. In the treeview under I/O Configuration, right-click on the drive profile (for this example, My_PowerFlex_70_EC_Drive) and choose Properties.
TIP: If a message box reports that RSLogix 5000 software is unable to go online, select Communications > Who Active to find your controller in the Who Active screen. After finding and selecting the controller, click Set Project Path to establish the path. If your controller does not appear, you need to add or configure the EtherNet/IP driver with RSLinx software. See Using RSLinx Classic Software on page 4-1 and RSLinx online help for details.
►
Configuring the I/O 4-13
20-COMM-E EtherNet/IP Adapter User Manual
Publication 20COMM-UM010H-EN-P
2. Click the Drive tab.
3. Click Connect to Drive to begin the correlation process.
The Connect To Drive screen appears.
4. Browse the communication path to the drive and select the drive.
5. Click OK.
After the drive configuration data has been verified, a pop-up dialog box appears, which synchronizes ports from the online drive to the project to be sure that correct Datalinks are assigned.
6. Click OK.
If the Differences Found screen appears—which is typical, click Download. This will download the project settings from the controller to the drive and its connected adapter. If Upload is clicked, the drive and adapter settings are uploaded to the controller.
7. When the Reset Comm Module screen appears, click Yes to reset the communication adapter so that the new I/O settings take effect.
TIP: On subsequent connections to the drive (after initial download), click Upload.
►
• Module Properties: My_EtherNet_lP _Bndge (PowerFlex 70 EC E 3.2) ~~~ General I Corned.ion I Module Ho I Port Corfigu-ation Drive I I
Drive: Not Comected I Comect to Drive .I
~ Correlation with online drive has not been completed. No drive ._,data can be displayed uni~ correlation has compl~ed successluHy Click the Comect to Drive button to begi1 correlation
L
Status: Faulted
Differences Found --~~ ['g]
~nces were found between the project and the drive.
l ow do you want to proceed>
Upload Download Cancel Help
r Show Details
Reset Comm Module ~
i
Datalink enable values have been downloaded to the Comm module Downloading new Datalink enable values requires the Comm module to be reset before the new settings will be activated.
Do you want to reset the Comm module now?
._ __ Ye;;;;s_..,i ~[ __ N_o_ ~
4-14 Configuring the I/O
20-COMM-E EtherNet/IP Adapter User Manual
Publication 20COMM-UM010H-EN-P
After resetting the communication module, which may take up to a minute to complete, the I/O OK box in the upper-left of the RSLogix 5000 window should now be steady green and the yellow warning symbols in the treeview under the I/O Configuration folder and drive profile should be gone.
8. The Module Properties Drive Tab screen re-appears.
You can view the drive’s Parameter List, Diagnostic Items List, and lists for any connected peripheral, including the 20-COMM-E adapter.
While connected to the drive, you can dynamically change values of parameters. Diagnostic items and diagram views can be used for troubleshooting. Table 7.A on page 7-4 provides diagnostic items for troubleshooting the adapter.
9. Click OK when finished to close the Module Properties screen for the drive.
Using the RSLogix 5000 Classic Profile, Versions 13.00…15.00 When compared to using the RSLogix 5000 Generic Profile (all versions), the RSLogix 5000 Classic Profile provides these advantages:
Profiles for specific drives (Figure 4.3) that provide descriptive controller tags for basic control I/O words (Logic Command/Status and Reference/ Feedback). The controller tags for Datalinks, however, have non-descriptive UserDefinedData[n] names.
Improved I/O configuration—no I/O assembly configuration required.
Basic control I/O is defined, but Datalinks still need to be configured/ mapped.
TIP: If the yellow warning symbol for your drive remains displayed, first try power cycling the drive. Otherwise, double-click the drive under the I/O tree and click the Connection tab to find the cause of the problem. ►
• Module Properties: My_EtherNet_ lP _Bndge (Powerflex 70 EC E 2.3) ~(Q}~ --- ----------------------
General I Connection I Module Info I Port Configuration D,ive I @ ~ ~ ~ [@ J,E ~ ~ Drive:
s /!!. My_PowerFle~_70_EC_0rive
8 ~ 0 PowerFlek 70 EC
"'Diagrams
~ Parameter list
~ Diagnostic Item List
El ~ 1 20-HIM-xx SERB
~ Device Parameters
~ Diagnosticltemlist
S ~ 5 20·C0MM-E
fiW Device Parameters
~ Diagnostic Item list
I >
Status: Running
Connect to Drive
My_PowerFlex_70_
PowerFlex 70 EC
480V 2.1A
Revision : 2.003
Faul ted
Configuring the I/O 4-15
20-COMM-E EtherNet/IP Adapter User Manual
Publication 20COMM-UM010H-EN-P
The Setup tab includes a DriveExecutive icon link to conveniently launch DriveExecutive software (when installed on computer) to match the adapter I/O configuration with the controller, and to assign the Datalink parameters in the drive. This reduces I/O mismatches.
Figure 4.3 Classic Profile Screens for Drives
When Datalinks are used, you must enable the desired Datalinks and assign names to their non-descriptive controller tags. When a Datalink is enabled, you must set the following adapter I/O parameters:
Parameter 23 - [DPI I/O Cfg] turns on the enabled Datalink bit so the 20-COMM-E adapter will communicate that Datalink’s information with the drive.
Parameter 35 - [M-S Input] turns on the enabled Datalink bit so the 20-COMM-E adapter will input that Datalink’s information from the controller.
Parameter 36 - [M-S Output] turns on the enabled Datalink bit so the 20-COMM-E adapter will output that Datalink’s information to the controller.
When using Datalinks, up to 8 drive [Data In xx] parameters (300…307) and/or up to 8 [Data Out xx] parameters (310…317) must be assigned to point to the appropriate drive parameters for your application.
TIP: Because the RSLogix 5000 Classic Profile has been significantly improved upon by RSLogix 5000 Drive Add-on Profiles, version 16.00 or later, we recommend using RSLogix 5000 Drive Add-on Profiles to take advantage of their benefits (more intuitive, time saving, and less likely to make I/O configuration errors).
►
• Select Module ~
Module Desai ion
El Drives
ByC
150 SMC Flex-E
1.305-ACDrive-EN 1
1336E-IMPACTDrive-EN 1
1336F-PLUSIIDrive-EN1
1336R--REGENBrake-EN 1
1336T -fORCEDriveCNA-EN 1
1336T-FORCEDrivePLC-EN1
1336T-fORCEDr iveStd-EN1
150 SMC Flex via 20-COMM-E
1305 AC Drive via 1203-ENl
1336 IMPACT Drive via 1203-ENl
1336 PLUS II Drive via 1203-ENl
1336 REGEN Brake via 1203-ENl
1336 FORCE Drive (ControlNet Adapter) via 1203-EN 1
B36 FORCE Drive (PLC Comm Adapter) via 1203-ENl
1336 FORCE Drive {Standard Adapter) via 1203-ENl
1397 Digital DC Drive via 1203-EN 1
M,H, l#i Hiil&f1 ii l?'§t
PowerFlex 70 Drive via 20-COMM.f
PowerFlex 700 Vector Drive 208 240
General I Connection I Module Info J Power J Setup J
Type: PowerFlex 70 EC-E PowerFlex 70 EC Drive via 20-COMM-E Vendor Allen-Bradley
rlM~y_~P~ow- ,~,F~l,-,_~70~_~EC~_~D~,;v-, -- Address / Host Name-------, DescriQtion r. IP8ddress I 10 91 100 79
r t!ostName:
CommEormat: le
Qatalinks: ~ ~;~~s~~~1~:0h:~t~~~
flevision
,.,-----------, size: (16-bit)
Elect,onic 1eying: I Compatible Keying ..:J
Status: Offline
4-16 Configuring the I/O
20-COMM-E EtherNet/IP Adapter User Manual
Publication 20COMM-UM010H-EN-P
Using the RSLogix 5000 Generic Profile, All Versions
We recommend that you use the basic RSLogix 5000 Generic Profile for only the following reasons:
A specific drive profile in other versions of RSLogix 5000 software is unavailable.
Users are already familiar with a drive Generic Profile and do not want to convert an existing project to a Classic Profile, versions 13.00…15.00, or to a drive Add-on Profile (RSLogix 5000 software, version 16.00 or later).
A project must maintain specific revision level control. The controller cannot be taken offline. RSlogix 5000 software, version
16.00 or later, enables the drive Generic Profile to be added while the controller is online and in the Run mode.
Add the Drive/Adapter to the I/O Configuration
To transmit data between the bridge and the drive, you must add the drive as a child device to the parent bridge.
1. In the treeview, right-click the bridge and select New Module… to display the Select Module screen.
In our example, we right-click on the 1756-ENBT/A bridge.
2. Expand the Communications group to display all of the available communication modules.
3. Select ‘ETHERNET-MODULE’ from the list to configure the drive and its connected 20-COMM-E adapter.
4. Click OK.
• Select Module ~
Module
1769-L.35E Ethernet Port
1788-EN2DN/A
17ll8-ENBT/A
1788-EWEB/A
1794·AENT/A
Drivelogix5730 Ethernet Port
ETI-iERNET -BRIDGE
l:111!;; 1ilai§r : :• I
Ether Net/I P
PH..PSSCENA/A
l±l Drives
l±l HMI
ill
IDesaiot:ion
10/ 100 Mbps Ethernet Port on Compactlog ix 5335E
1788 Ethernet to DeviceNet Linking Device
1788 10/ 100 Mbps Ethernet Bridge, Twisted-Pair Media
1788 10/ 100 Mbps Ethernet Bridge wJEnhanced Web Services 1794 10/ 100 Mbps Ethernet Adapte r, Twisted-Pair Media 10/ 100 Mbps Ethernet Port on Drivelog ix5730
Generic EtherNet/IP CIP Bridge
§§,j§,j-j,fil§rffl&I
Soft1.ogix5800 EtherNet/IP
Ethernet Adapte r, Twisted-Pair Media
.!J
~
Find Add Favorite
B.Y Categor,Y I BJ Vendor I Favorites I
~-□-K_~ __ c_a_nc_e_l ~ __ H_,l_o_~l /2
Configuring the I/O 4-17
20-COMM-E EtherNet/IP Adapter User Manual
Publication 20COMM-UM010H-EN-P
The drive’s New Module screen appears.
5. Edit the following information about the drive and adapter.
6. Under Connection Parameters, edit the following information.
Depending on the size of the drive’s Reference/Feedback and the number of Datalinks used in your I/O configuration, Table 4.A, Table 4.B, or Table 4.C defines the number of 16-bit words that you need to enter for the Input Size and Output Size boxes.
Box Setting
Name A name to identify the drive and adapter.
Description Optional – description of the drive/adapter.
Comm Format Data - INT (This setting formats the data in 16-bit words.) IP Address The IP address of the adapter.
Open Module
Properties
When this box is checked, clicking OK opens additional module properties screens to further configure the drive/adapter. When unchecked, clicking OK closes the drive’s New Module screen. For this example, check this box.
Box Assembly Instance Size
Input 1 (This value is required.) The value will vary based on your application (setting of Parameters 23 - [DPI I/O Cfg] and 36
- [M-S Output]) and the size (16-bit or 32-bit) of
the Reference/Feedback and Datalinks in the
drive. See Table 4.A
, Table 4.B, or Table 4.C on
page 4-18.
Output 2 (This value is required.) The value will vary based on your application (setting of Parameters 23 - [DPI I/O Cfg] and 35
- [M-S Input]) and the size (16-bit or 32-bit) of
the Reference/Feedback and Datalinks in the
drive. See Table 4.A
, Table 4.B, or Table 4.C on
page 4-18.
Configuration 6 (This value is required.) 0 (This value is required.) New Module ~
Type· ETHERNET-MODULE Generic Ethernet Module
Vendoi: Allen-Bradley
Parent My_EtherNet_lP_Bridge
Name: IMy_PowerFle:,c_70_EC_Drive
Desc,;plim I
Comm Format:~lo-,,-, - ,-N,-----~3
Address/ Host Name--
r- IPAddress: ~1-,-0--9-1 - 1-00--7-9- I
r Host Name: I
P° Open Module Propertie:s:
Connection Parameters
Assembly
Instance: Size
Input r,-- ~ [16-bit)
Output ~ ~ [16-bit)
Configuration: ~ I □ :B [8-bit)
Statu, lnptrt ~ I
Statu~ Output ~
4-18 Configuring the I/O
20-COMM-E EtherNet/IP Adapter User Manual
Publication 20COMM-UM010H-EN-P
Table 4.A Drives with 16-bit Reference/Feedback and 16-bit Datalinks These products include the following:
Table 4.B Drives with 16-bit Reference/Feedback and 32-bit Datalinks These products include the following:
Table 4.C Drives with 32-bit Reference/Feedback and 32-bit Datalinks These products include the following:
PowerFlex 70 drives with standard or enhanced control SMC Flex smart motor controllers PowerFlex 700 drives with standard control SMC-50 smart motor controllers PowerFlex 700H drives
Logic
Command/
Status
Ref/Fdbk
(16-bit)
Datalinks (16-bit) User Configured Settings
ABCD
Size in Words Par. 23 -
[DPI I/O Cfg]
Par. 35 -
[M-S Input]
Par. 36 -
[M-S Output]Input Output
✔✔ 4 2 …0 0001 …0 0001 …0 0001
✔✔ ✔ 6 4 …0 0011 …0 0011 …0 0011
✔✔ ✔ ✔ 8 6 …0 0111 …0 0111 …0 0111
✔✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ 10 8 …0 1111 …0 1111 …0 1111
✔ ✔ ✔✔✔✔ 12 10 …1 1111 …1 1111 …1 1111
PowerFlex 700 drives with vector control PowerFlex Digital DC drives PowerFlex 700L drives with 700 control
Logic
Command/
Status
Ref/Fdbk
(16-bit)
Datalinks (32-bit) User Configured Settings
ABCD
Size in Words Par. 23 -
[DPI I/O Cfg]
Par. 35 -
[M-S Input]
Par. 36 -
[M-S Output]Input Output
✔✔ 4 2 …0 0001 …0 0001 …0 0001
✔✔ ✔ 8 6 …0 0011 …0 0011 …0 0011
✔✔ ✔ ✔ 12 10 …0 0111 …0 0111 …0 0111
✔✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ 16 14 …0 1111 …0 1111 …0 1111
✔✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ 20 18 …1 1111 …1 1111 …1 1111
PowerFlex 700S drives with Phase I or Phase II control PowerFlex 753 drives PowerFlex 700L drives with 700S control PowerFlex 755 drives Logic
Command/
Status
Ref/Fdbk
(32-bit)
Datalinks (32-bit) User Configured Settings
ABCD
Size in Words Par. 23 -
[DPI I/O Cfg]
Par. 35 -
[M-S Input]
Par. 36 -
[M-S Output]Input Output
✔✔ 6 4 …0 0001 …0 0001 …0 0001
✔✔ ✔ 10 8 …0 0011 …0 0011 …0 0011
✔✔ ✔ ✔ 14 12 …0 0111 …0 0111 …0 0111
✔✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ 18 16 …0 1111 …0 1111 …0 1111
✔ ✔ ✔✔✔✔22 20 …1 1111 …1 1111 …1 1111
TIP: For instructions on configuring the I/O for the adapter using Parameter 23 - [DPI I/O Cfg] and its Master-Slave Hierarchy using Parameters 35 - [M-S Input] and 36 - [M-S Output], see
Setting the I/O Configuration on page 3-7.
►
Configuring the I/O 4-19
20-COMM-E EtherNet/IP Adapter User Manual
Publication 20COMM-UM010H-EN-P
When using Datalinks, up to 8 drive [Data In xx] parameters (300…307) and/or up to 8 [Data Out xx] parameters (310…317) must be assigned to point to the appropriate drive parameters for your application.
7. After setting the information in the drive’s New Module screen, click OK.
The Module Properties screen appears.
8. Click the Connection tab.
9. In the ‘Requested Packet Interval (RPI)’ box, set the value to 5.0 milliseconds or greater.
This value determines the maximum interval that a controller should use to move data to and from the adapter. To conserve bandwidth, use higher values for communicating with low priority devices. For this example, leave the ‘Inhibit Module’ and ‘Major Fault …’ boxes unchecked.
10. Click OK.
The new node (‘My_PowerFlex_70_EC_Drive’ in this example) now appears under the bridge (‘My_EtherNet_IP_Bridge’ in this example) in the I/O Configuration folder. If you double-click the Controller Tags, you will see that module-defined data types and tags have been automatically created (Figure 4.4). After you save and download the configuration, these tags allow you to access the Input and Output data of the drive via the controller’s ladder logic.
For this example, all Datalinks (A, B, C, and D) are enabled. The Input Size is set to 12 words and the Output Size is set to 10 words. Also, the following adapter I/O parameters are set to the following values.
11. Reset the adapter (see Resetting the Adapter on page 3-16) or power cycle the drive.
Adapter Parameter No. Setting
23 - [DPI I/O Cfg] xxxx xxxx xxx1 1111
35 - [M-S Input] xxxx xxxx xxx1 1111
36 - [M-S Output] xxxx xxxx xxx1 1111
• Module Properties: My_EtherNet_lP _Bridge (ETHERNET-MODULE 1.1) [8) General Connection I Module Info I
fiequested Packet Interval (RPI): ~ ms (1.0 - 3200.0 ms) r !nhibit Module
r Maior Fault On Cont,oller If Connection Fails While in Run Mode r ]Jse Scheduled Connection over ConlrolNet
Status: Offline OK Cancel .A.pply Help
4-20 Configuring the I/O
20-COMM-E EtherNet/IP Adapter User Manual
Publication 20COMM-UM010H-EN-P
For the drive speed reference and Datalink parameter values and the adapter setup parameter values, see Drive and Adapter Parameter Settings on page 5-14.
Figure 4.4 Controller Tags
Save the I/O Configuration to the Controller
After adding the bridge and drive/adapter to the I/O configuration, you must download the configuration to the controller. You should also save the configuration as a file on your computer.
1. In the RSLogix 5000 window, select Communications > Download.
The Download dialog box appears.
TIP: When using RSLogix 5000 software, version 16.00 or later, you can add the I/O configuration of a Generic Profile while the controller is online and in the Run mode.
TIP: If a message box reports that RSLogix 5000 software is unable to go online, select Communications > Who Active to find your controller in the Who Active screen. After finding and selecting the controller, click Set Project Path to establish the path. If your controller does not appear, you need to add or configure the EtherNet/IP driver with RSLinx software. See Using RSLinx Classic Software on page 4-1 and RSLinx online help for details.
►
►
Name (:, Value ~
i- + M.Y_PowerFlex_70_EC_Drive:C { ... )
I- - M!,i_PowerFlex_70_EC_Drive:I { ... )
-
- M!,i_PowerFlex_70_EC_Orive:I.Data { . .. )
+ M!,i_PowerFlex_70_EC_Drive:I.Data(O] 0
- + M!,i_PowerFlex_70_EC_Drive:l.Data(1] 0
--
+ M.Y_PowerFlex_70_EC_Drive:I.Data(2] 0
-
+ M.Y_PowerFlex_70_EC_Drive:I.Data(3] 0
+ M!,i_PowerFlex_70_EC_Drive:I.Data(4] 0
- + M.Y_PowerFlex_70_EC_Drive:I.Data(5] 0
-
-
+ M.Y_PowerFlex_70_EC_Drive:I.Data(6] 0
-
+ M!,i_PowerFlex_70_EC_Drive:I.Data(7] 0
-
+ M!,i_PowerFlex_70_EC_Drive:I.Data(8] 0
+ M!,i_PowerFlex_70_EC_Drive:I.Data(9] 0
- + M!,i_PowerFlex_70_EC_Drive:l.Data(1 OJ 0
-
-
+ M.Y_PowerFlex_70_EC_Drive:I.Data(11] 0
i- - M.Y_PowerFlex_70_EC_Drive:O { ... }
-
- M!,i_PowerFlex_70_EC_Orive:O.Data { . .. )
-
+ M!,i_PowerFlex_70_EC_Drive:O.Data[O] 0
+ M!,i_PowerFlex_70_EC_Drive:O.Data[1] 0
-
-
+ M!,i_PowerFlex_70_EC_Drive:O.Data[2] 0
-
+ M.Y_PowerFlex_70_EC_Drive:O.Data[3] 0
-
+ M.Y_PowerFlex_70_EC_Drive:O.Data[4] 0
+ M!,i_PowerFlex_70_EC_Drive:O.Data[5] 0
- + M!,i_PowerFlex_70_EC_Drive:O.Data[6] 0
--
+ M!,i_PowerFlex_70_EC_Drive:O.Data[7] 0
-
+ M!,i_PowerFlex_70_EC_Drive:O.Data[8] 0
+ M.Y PowerFlex 70 EC Drive:O.Data[9] 0
Download L8J
Download offline project 'v 15_E Mample_ using_20CO MME' to the controller
Connected Controller:
Name: <no name>
Type 1756·L63/A Controllogik5563 Controller
Path Ethernet\10.91.100.80\Backplane\0
Serial Numbe1 0026.4888
Security No Protection
Force Mask +. StJle Data TJpe
{ ... } AB:ETHERNET -
{ . .. ) _ AB ETHERNET_.
{ . .. ) Decimal INT(12(
Decimal INT
Decimal INT
Decimal INT
Decimal INT
Decimal INT
Decimal INT
Decimal INT
Decimal INT
Decimal INT
Decimal INT
Decimal INT
Decimal INT
{ ... } AB:ETHERNET -
{ . .. } Decimal INT(lO(
Decimal INT
Decimal INT
Decimal INT
Decimal INT
Decimal INT
Decimal INT
Decimal INT
Decimal INT
Decimal INT
Decimal INT
Configuring the I/O 4-21
20-COMM-E EtherNet/IP Adapter User Manual
Publication 20COMM-UM010H-EN-P
2. Click Download to download the configuration to the controller.
When the download is successfully completed, RSLogix 5000 software goes into the Online mode and the I/O OK box in the upper-left of the screen should be steady green.
3. Select File > Save.
If this is the first time you saved the project, the Save As dialog box appears.
a. Navigate to a folder.
b. Type a file name.
c. Click Save to save the configuration as a file on your computer.
To be sure that the present project configuration values are saved, RSLogix 5000 software prompts you to upload them. Click Yes to upload and save the values.
4. Configure any Datalinks in the drive (for example, Datalink parameters 300…317 in PowerFlex 70/700 driv es) that were enabled in the controller and adapter during I/O configuration (Table 4.A, Table 4.B, or Table 4.C).
Each Datalink being used must be assigned to a specific parameter in the drive or connected peripheral. If this is not done, the controller will receive or send placeholder data instead of actual drive or peripheral parameter values.
5. Place the controller in Remote Run or Run Mode.
4-22 Configuring the I/O
20-COMM-E EtherNet/IP Adapter User Manual
Publication 20COMM-UM010H-EN-P
Limitations Using a PLC-5,
SLC 500, or MicroLogix
1100/1400 Controller
Controlling I/O with explicit messages is relatively complex compared to normal implicit I/O control.
ControlLogix and CompactLogix controllers with EtherNet/IP provide the easiest and most integrated form of implicit I/O control for a PowerFlex drive. RSLogix 5000 software, version 16.00 or later, for ControlLogix and CompactLogix controllers contains integrated profiles for PowerFlex drives that, with a few clicks of the mouse, automatically create all controller tags and an implicit connection at the specified Requested Packet Interval to control the drive. This connection is monitored at both ends to verify that the controller and drive are communicating. A watchdog will cause a drive fault if the drive does not respond within approximately 100 milliseconds.
Therefore, using a ControlLogix or CompactLogix controller is by far the much preferred method of controlling drives on EtherNet/IP.
If you are not using either of these type of controllers, then PowerFlex drives on EtherNet/IP can be controlled with explicit messages using PLC-5, SLC 500, or MicroLogix 1100/1400 controllers with the following limitations:
An explicit message is a much slower form of control and is non-deterministic. This means that you cannot guarantee how long the drive will take to start up or stop when the command is given. Therefore, all equipment used in this manner should be subject to a risk assessment, taking into account the mechanical and electrical implementation. A timeout value (in seconds) in the EtherNet/IP adapter will issue a drive fault if a message is not received from the controller within the specified time. However, the controller has no way of detecting a loss of communication to the drive until the next cycle of explicit messages.
This is another factor in the risk assessment.
Any additional drives to be controlled will require additional explicit messages for their control, and they need to be carefully sequenced.
Most controllers have small communication queues (see its User Manual), which need to be carefully managed if messages are not to be lost.
Each controller has a limited number of communication connections (see its User Manual for maximum connections), which will limit the number of drives that can be connected.
In summary, unlike a ControlLogix or CompactLogix controller, programming a PLC-5, SLC 500, or MicroLogix 1100/1400 controller by using RSLogix 5 or RSLogix 500 software with explicit messages is more difficult, and produces a more complex program.
Configuring the I/O 4-23
20-COMM-E EtherNet/IP Adapter User Manual
Publication 20COMM-UM010H-EN-P
PLC-5 Controller Example Important: The PLC-5 controller must be Series E (Rev. D.1 or higher) to support the MultiHop feature that routes messaging to the drive.
After the adapter is configured, the connected drive and adapter will be a single node on the network. This section provides the steps needed to configure a simple EtherNet/IP network (see Figure 4.5
). In our example, we
will configure a PLC-5/40E controller to communicate with a drive using Logic Command/Status, Reference/Feedback, and Datalinks over the network.
Figure 4.5 Example PLC-5 Cont roller EtherNet/IP Network Configuring Parameters for Network I/O
Because the I/O for the drive is message-based, there is no need to configure any I/O inside the RSLogix 5 project, version 7.00 or later, until using the I/O as described in Chapter 5.
However, to get the adapter to operate with the I/O created in Chapter 5, you need to configure the adapter to accept the I/O and the drive to point to the appropriate Datalinks.
1. Set adapter Parameters 23 - [DPI I/O Cfg], 35 - [M-S Input], and 36 - [M-S Output] to values that meet your application requirements.
For this example, the adapter I/O parameters are set to these values.
2. Reset the adapter (see Resetting the Adapter on page 3-16) or power cycle the drive.
For the drive speed reference and Datalink parameter values and the adapter setup parameter values, see Drive and Adapter Parameter Settings on page 5-21.
IP Address 10.91.100.80
PLC-5/40E Controller with Embedded Ethernet
IP Address 10.91.100.79
PowerFlex 70 Drive with
20-COMM-E Adapter
Computer with
Ethernet Connection
Ethernet
Switch
TIP: Information for PowerFlex 750-Series drives has been added to this manual where it is applicable.
Adapter Parameter No. Setting
23 - [DPI I/O Cfg] xxxx xxxx xxx1 1111
35 - [M-S Input] xxxx xxxx xxx1 1111
36 - [M-S Output] xxxx xxxx xxx1 1111
[J
►
4-24 Configuring the I/O
20-COMM-E EtherNet/IP Adapter User Manual
Publication 20COMM-UM010H-EN-P
Creating RSLogix 5 Project, Version 7.00 or Later
To transmit (read and write) data between the controller and drive, you must create message instructions that allocate data table addresses in the controller for Logic Command/Status, Reference/Feedback, and Datalinks.
Note that three messages need to be configured. The timeout message has to be executed first before the Logic Command, Reference, and Datalink In/ Out messages will work.
Select the Controller
1. Start RSLogix 5 software.
The RSLogix 5 window appears.
2. Select File > New to display the Select Processor Type screen.
3. Assign a name for the processor.
4. From the pull-down menus, choose the appropriate selections to match your PLC-5 controller and application.
5. Click OK.
The RSLogix 5 project window appears.
Select Processor Type tgJ
Processor Name:IEX6.MPLE
Platform: ,..Pr_o_ce_s_so_r: __ .., Series· Memo,_y·
J r-E-th_e_rn-et ___ ..:.J.., JPLC5/ 40E ..:.J J E · 2000 Files/Extended Forci..:.J J49152 ..:.l Revision- ~
- Communication setlings--------~---------~
Driver
jEthemet
P,ocessor Node:
..:Jr Decimal (=1
Octal)
Who Active ..
Reply Timeout:
r;-o-- 1sec)
OK
Cancel
Help
Configuring the I/O 4-25
20-COMM-E EtherNet/IP Adapter User Manual
Publication 20COMM-UM010H-EN-P
Create PLC-5 Ladder Logic for the Control Timeout
1. In the RSLogix 5 project window treeview under Program Files double-click on LAD 2.
2. Insert a ladder rung.
3. Double-click the rung to display the rung editor.
4. Enter MSG MGxx:n, where:
xx is an unused data file number (for example, MG10:n), and n is an unused element of the data file chosen for xx (for example, MG10:0)
5. Press Enter.
6. Insert another separate rung.
7. Double-click the rung to display the rung editor.
8. Enter BST XIC MGxx:n/DN NXB XIC MGxx:n/ER BND OTU
MGxx:n/EN, where:
xx and n must correspond to the assigned data file number and element (for example, MG10:0) for the message created in steps 2…5.
Important: The information must be entered with appropriate numbers for ‘xx’ and ‘n’ for your application, and with spaces and forward slashes exactly as shown.
9. Press Enter.
10. In the MSG instruction (Figure 4.6), double-click Setup Screen to launch the message configuration screen (Figure 4.7).
Figure 4.6 PLC-5 Ladder Logic for the Control Timeout
11. Configure the General tab fields by entering or verifying the information shown in the message configuration screen.
Steps 2…5
Steps 6…9
Step 10
ER
MSG
Read/W • C nte Message
ontro l MGJO·O
Setup Screen •
- -\--- MG 10:0 u
EN
4-26 Configuring the I/O
20-COMM-E EtherNet/IP Adapter User Manual
Publication 20COMM-UM010H-EN-P
Figure 4.7 PLC-5 Message Configuration Screens for the Control Timeout General Tab Box Setting
This PLC-5
Communication Command PLC-5 Typed Write. The controller type and command type for the controller to write the control timeout value to the drive.
Data Table Address (1) N20:0. An unused controller data table address containing the control timeout value to be written.
Size in Elements (2) 1. Number of elements (words) to be transferred. Each element size is a 16-bit integer.
Port Number 2. Controller port to which the network is connected.
Target Device (data for adapter/drive)
Data Table Address
(3) N42:3. Specific starting address of the destination file in the drive.
MultiHop Yes. Enables communication to allow network messaging to be routed to the adapter/drive. When ‘Y es’ is selected, a MultiHop tab appears on the message configuration screen.
MultiHop Tab Box Setting
To Address 10.91.100.79. The IP address of the adapter connected to the drive. (1) For details on data table addresses for this example project, see Table 5.G…Table 5.J starting on page 5-23. (2) For details to determine element size for a specific drive, see Understanding Controller Data Table Addresses on page 5-22. (3) For details on setting the control timeout value and its function, see N-Files on page C-10. The Control Timeout (N42:3) is stored in RAM. If the 20-COMM-E adapter is power cycled, the Control Timeout Message must be re-sent. If the Control Timeout is not changed from a non-zero value, the control message (page 4-29) will error out.
TIP: The Control Timeout (N42:3) must be changed to a non-zero value (5…20 seconds recommended). If the Control Timeout is not changed from a non-zero value, the control message (page 4-29) will error out. The Control Timeout is stored in RAM. If the adapter is power cycled, the Control Timeout Message must be re-sent.
►
u MSG - Rung #2:0 - MG10:0 GJ[g]['gj
This PLC-5 ------~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~-1
Communication Command: IPLC-5 Typed Write
Data Table Address IN20:0 [
Size in Elements rr==J
PortNumber ~
Target Device------------~
Data Table Address: ==---
lns=AddHop
Control Bits ------
lgnore if timed out [TO):[[]
To be ret,ied (NRJ: [[)
Awaiting Execution {EW): [[]
Continuous Run [CO):([]
Error [ER):[]
Message done (DN): {[]
Message Transmitting (ST):{[]
Message Enabled [EN):[[]
Del= Remove Hop
From Device From Port To Address T e To Address
his LC5 Ethe1Net l Device(slr:) 10.91.100.79
Configuring the I/O 4-27
20-COMM-E EtherNet/IP Adapter User Manual
Publication 20COMM-UM010H-EN-P
Create PLC-5 Ladder Logic for the Logic Status, Feedback, and Datalink Out
1. Insert another separate rung.
2. Double-click the rung to display the rung editor.
3. Enter MSG MGxx:n, where:
xx is an unused data file number (for example, MG11:n), and n is an unused element of the data file chosen for xx (for example, MG11:0)
4. Press Enter.
5. Insert another separate rung.
6. Double-click the rung to display the rung editor.
7. Enter BST XIC MGxx:n/DN NXB XIC MGxx:n/ER BND OTU
MGxx:n/EN, where:
xx and n must correspond to the assigned data file number and element (for example, MG11:0) for the message created in steps 1…4.
Important: The information must be entered with appropriate numbers for ‘xx’ and ‘n’ for your application, and with spaces and forward slashes exactly as shown.
8. Press Enter.
9. In the MSG instruction (Figure 4.8), double-click Setup Screen to launch the message configuration screen (Figure 4.9).
Figure 4.8 PLC-5 Ladder Logic for th e Logic Status, Feedback, and Datalink Out
10. Configure the General tab fields by entering or verifying the information shown in the message configuration screen.
Steps 1…4
Steps 5…8
Step 9
MSG-
Read/W • C nte Message
ontrol MG 11 ·O
Setup Screen •
DN~----l !
MGll :O
ER
4-28 Configuring the I/O
20-COMM-E EtherNet/IP Adapter User Manual
Publication 20COMM-UM010H-EN-P
Figure 4.9 PLC-5 Message Configurat ion Screens for the Logic Status, Feedback, and Datalink Out
General Tab Box Setting
This PLC-5
Communication Command PLC-5 Typed Read. The controller type and command type for the controller to read data from the drive.
Data Table Address (1) N20:1. An unused controller data table address containing the data to be read from the drive.
Size in Elements (2) 19. Number of elements (words) to be transferred. Each element size is a 16-bit integer.
Port Number 2. Controller port to which the network is connected.
Target Device (data for adapter/drive)
Data Table Address
(3) N41:0. Specific starting address of the source file in the drive.
MultiHop Yes. Enables communication to allow network messaging to be routed to the adapter/drive. When ‘Y es’ is selected, a MultiHop tab appears on the message configuration screen.
MultiHop Tab Box Setting
To Address 10.91.100.79. The IP address of the adapter connected to the drive. (1) For details on data table addresses for this example project, see Table 5.G…Table 5.J starting on page 5-23. (2) For details to determine element size for a specific drive, see Understanding Controller Data Table Addresses on page 5-22. (3) For N-File details, see N-Files on page C-10.
0 MSG - Rung #2:2 - MG11 :0 G][g]r8j
MultiHop I
ThisPLC-5----- --========::::i
Communication Command: IPLC-5 Typed Read
Control Bits------,
Ignore if limed out (TO): II)
To be retried (NA):[)
Awaiting Execution (EW): [[]
Continuous Run (CO): [Q]
Error (ER)[]
Message done (DN): [QJ
Message T ,ansmitting (ST): [QJ
Message Enabled (EN): [QJ
Data Table Address: IN20:1 I
SizeinElements: BL:)
Po,t Number: ~
I
T arget Device
Data Table Address: ~INcc4,c1 :Oe._ __
MuttiHop:~
Ins =Add Hop
From Device F,omPo,t
This PLC5
Del= Remove Hop
To Address T e To Address
Ethe,Net IP. Device (str:) 10.91.100.79
Configuring the I/O 4-29
20-COMM-E EtherNet/IP Adapter User Manual
Publication 20COMM-UM010H-EN-P
Create PLC-5 Ladder Logic for the Logic Command, Reference, and Datalink In
1. Insert another separate rung.
2. Double-click the rung to display the rung editor.
3. Enter MSG MGxx:n, where:
xx is an unused data file number (for example, MG12:n), and n is an unused element of the data file chosen for xx (for example, MG12:0)
4. Press Enter.
5. Insert another separate rung.
6. Double-click the rung to display the rung editor.
7. Enter BST XIC MGxx:n/DN NXB XIC MGxx:n/ER BND OTU
MGxx:n/EN, where:
xx and n must correspond to the assigned data file number and element (for example, MG12:0) for the message created in steps 1…4.
Important: The information must be entered with appropriate numbers for ‘xx’ and ‘n’ for your application, and with spaces and forward slashes exactly as shown.
8. Press Enter.
9. In the MSG instruction (Figure 4.10), double-click Setup Screen to launch the message configuration screen (Figure 4.11).
Figure 4.10 PLC-5 Ladder Logic for the Logic Command, Reference, and Datalink In
10. Configure the General tab fields by entering or verifying the information shown in the message configuration screen.
Steps 1…4
Steps 5…8
Step 9
MSG --
Read/W • C nte Message
ontrol MG 12·0
Setup Screen •
ER
MG12:0
u
EN
4-30 Configuring the I/O
20-COMM-E EtherNet/IP Adapter User Manual
Publication 20COMM-UM010H-EN-P
Figure 4.11 PLC-5 Message Configuration Screens for the Logic Command, Reference, and Datalink In
General Tab Box Setting
This PLC-5
Communication Command PLC-5 Typed Write. The controller type and command type for the controller to write data to the drive.
Data Table Address (1) N20:20. An unused controller data table address containing the data to be written to the drive.
Size in Elements (2) 19. Number of elements (words) to be transferred. Each element size is a 16-bit integer.
Port Number 2. Controller port to which the network is connected.
Target Device (data for adapter/drive)
Data Table Address
(3) N41:0. Specific starting address of the destination file in the drive.
MultiHop Yes. Enables communication to allow network messaging to be routed to the adapter/drive. When ‘Y es’ is selected, a MultiHop tab appears on the message configuration screen.
MultiHop Tab Box Setting
To Address 10.91.100.79. The IP address of the adapter connected to the drive. (1) For details on data table addresses for this example project, see Table 5.G…Table 5.J starting on page 5-23. (2) For details to determine element size for a specific drive, see Understanding Controller Data Table Addresses on page 5-22. (3) For N-File details, see N-Files on page C-10.
TIP: This message will error out if the Control Timeout value is not changed from a non-zero value. See page 4-25 for writing a value to the Control Timeout.
TIP: If the controller is controlling more than one drive, it is recommended to intersperse the control I/O messaging for each drive to conserve network bandwidth and decrease response time. That is, sequence the message instructions for each drive so that its group of messages will occur at a different time than those for another drive.
►
►
u MSG - Rung #2:4 - MG12:0 ~[gj [gj
This PLC-5i----- ----========::::
Communication Command: IPLC·5 Typed Write
DataTableAddress: IN20:20 I
Size in Elements: 01:::J
Port Number: ~
I
T arget Device
Data Table Address:. <;;IN=41=, □=--
MultiHop. ~
Ins =Add Hop
From Device From Port
llid1 C5
Control Bits, ------,
Ignore if timed out (TO):[)
To be retried [NR): [)
Awaiting Execution (EWJ: [)
Continuous Run (CO):[)
E<ror (ERi, [I
Message done [DN): [)
Message Transmitting (STJ: [)
Message Enabled (EN]:[)
Del= Remove Hop
Configuring the I/O 4-31
20-COMM-E EtherNet/IP Adapter User Manual
Publication 20COMM-UM010H-EN-P
SLC 500 Controller Example After the adapter is configured, the connected drive and adapter will be a single node on the network. This section provides the steps needed to configure a simple EtherNet/IP network (see Figure 4.12). In our example, we will configure a SLC 500 controller to communicate with a drive using Logic Command/Status, Reference/Feedback, and Datalinks over the network.
Figure 4.12 Example SLC 500 Controller EtherNet/IP Network Configuring Parameters for Network I/O
Because the I/O for the drive is message-based, there is no need to configure any I/O inside the RSLogix 500 project, version 7.00 or later, until using the I/O as described in Chapter 5
.
However, to get the adapter to operate with the I/O created in Chapter 5, we need to configure the adapter to accept the I/O and drive to point to the appropriate Datalinks.
1. Set adapter Parameters 23 - [DPI I/O Cfg], 35 - [M-S Input], and 36 - [M-S Output] to values that meet your application requirements.
For this example, the adapter I/O parameters are set to these values.
2. Reset the adapter (see Resetting the Adapter on page 3-16) or power cycle the drive.
For the drive speed reference and Datalink parameter values and the adapter setup parameter values, see Drive and Adapter Parameter Settings on page 5-21.
IP Address 10.91.100.80
SLC 500 Controller with Embedded Ethernet
IP Address 10.91.100.79
PowerFlex 70 Drive with
20-COMM-E Adapter
Computer with
Ethernet Connection
Ethernet
SwitchTIP: Information for PowerFlex 750-Series drives has been added to this manual where it is applicable.
Adapter Parameter No. Setting
23 - [DPI I/O Cfg] xxxx xxxx xxx1 1111
35 - [M-S Input] xxxx xxxx xxx1 1111
36 - [M-S Output] xxxx xxxx xxx1 1111
►
4-32 Configuring the I/O
20-COMM-E EtherNet/IP Adapter User Manual
Publication 20COMM-UM010H-EN-P
Creating RSLogix 500 Project, Version 7.00 or Later
To transmit (read and write) data between the controller and drive, you must create message instructions that allocate data table addresses in the controller for Logic Command/Status, Reference/Feedback, and Datalinks.
Select the Controller
1. Start RSLogix 500 software.
The RSLogix 500 window appears.
2. Select File > New to display the Select Processor Type screen.
3. Assign a name for the processor.
4. In the list, select a 1747-L55x type controller.
5. Choose the appropriate selections for the fields in the screen to match your application.
6. Click OK.
The RSLogix 500 project window appears.
Select Processor Type ~
Processor Name:IEXAMPLE
174 7-l5 52B/ C 5/05 CPU - 32K Mem
1747-LSSlB / C S/ 05 CPU - 16K Mem.
1747-1553 5/ 05 CPU - 64K Mem .
174 7-1552 S/ 05 CPU - 32K Mem .
1747-1551 S/05 CPU - 16K Mem.
1747-1553 5/ 05 CPU - 64K Mem
174 7-1552 S/ 05 CPU - 32K Mem.
1747-1551 5/ 05 CPU - 16K Mem.
1747-l543C S/ 04 CPU - 64K Mem
1747-l542C S/ 04 CPU - 32K Mem.
1747-l541C S/ 04 CPU - 16K Mem .
1747-1543 S/ 04 CPU - 64K Mem .
1747-l542B S/ 04 CPU - 32K Mem.
Communication settings
Driver Processor Node
OS501
OS501
OS501
OS501
OS501
OS500
OS500
OS500
OS401
OS401
OS401
OS401
OS401
Ser ies C
Series C
Series C
Series C
Series C
)Ethernet ..:.J 1'49 Decimal
(=61 Octal]
Who Active ..
Reply Timeout
~ (Sec.)
Configuring the I/O 4-33
20-COMM-E EtherNet/IP Adapter User Manual
Publication 20COMM-UM010H-EN-P
Create SLC 500 Ladder Logic for the Control Timeout
1. In the RSLogix 500 project window treeview under Program Files double-click on LAD 2.
2. Insert a ladder rung.
3. Double-click the rung to display the rung editor.
4. Enter MSG WRITE 500CPU LOCAL Nxx:n, where:
xx is an unused data file number (for example, N10:n), and n is an unused element of the data file chosen for xx (for example, N10:0)
5. Press Enter.
6. Insert another separate rung.
7. Double-click the rung to display the rung editor.
8. Enter BST XIC Nxx:n/DN NXB XIC Nxx:n/ER BND OTU Nxx:n/ EN, where:
xx and n must correspond to the assigned data file number and element (for example, N10:0) for the message created in steps 2…5.
Important: The information must be entered with appropriate numbers for ‘xx’ and ‘n’ for your application, and with spaces and forward slashes exactly as shown.
9. Press Enter.
10. In the MSG instruction (Figure 4.13), double-click Setup Screen to launch the message configuration screen (Figure 4.14).
Figure 4.13 SLC 500 Ladder Logic for the Control Timeout
11. Configure the General tab fields by entering or verifying the information shown in the message configuration screen.
Steps 6…9
Step 10
Steps 2…5
MSG
Read/W • nte Message
Type Read/Write Peer-To-Peer
Target Device Write
Local/Remote 500CPU
Control Block Local
Control Block L NJO:O ength 51
Semp Screen
EN
DN>
ER>-
D~N~ -i---------- ~ 1 ____ ~
NW,O
mo o u~--EN
ER
4-34 Configuring the I/O
20-COMM-E EtherNet/IP Adapter User Manual
Publication 20COMM-UM010H-EN-P
Figure 4.14 SLC 500 Message Configuration Screens for the Control Timeout
General Tab Box Setting
This Controller
Communication Command This setting is unavailable (grayed out) and is established when the message is created in the ladder rung .
Data Table Address (1) N20:0. An unused controller data table address containing the control timeout value to be written.
Size in Elements (2) 1. Number of elements (words) to be transferred. Each element size is a 16-bit integer.
Channel 1. Controller port to which the network is connected.
Target Device (data for adapter/drive)
Message Timeout 5. Message timeout duration in seconds.
Data Table Address
(3) N42:3. Specific starting address of the destination file in the drive.
MultiHop Yes. Enables communication to allow network messaging to be routed to the adapter/drive. When ‘Y es’ is selected, a MultiHop tab appears on the message configuration screen.
MultiHop Tab Box Setting
To Address 10.91.100.79. The IP address of the adapter connected to the drive. (1) For details on data table addresses for this example project, see Table 5.G…Table 5.J starting on page 5-23. (2) For details to determine element size for a specific drive, see Understanding Controller Data Table Addresses on page 5-22. (3) For details on setting the control timeout value and its function, see N-Files on page C-10. The Control Timeout (N42:3) is stored in RAM. If the 20-COMM-E adapter is power cycled, the Control Timeout Message must be re-sent. If the Control Timeout is not changed from a non-zero value, the control message (page 4-37) will error out.
TIP: The Control Timeout (N42:3) must be changed to a non-zero value (5…20 seconds recommended). If the Control Timeout is not changed from a non-zero value, the control message (page 4-37) will error out. The Control Timeout is stored in RAM. If the adapter is power cycled, the Control Timeout Message must be re-sent.
►
0 MSG - Rung #2:0 - N10:0 i';J(gj~
MultiHop J
ThisController-------========:::i
Communication Command: aal5=00=C=PU=W==rit=• = - -~I
Data Table Address: !;;IN=20=,o.-_ __,
Size in Elements: II:]
Channel:: II:]
Target Device------------~
Message Timeout: ae=====a
Data Table Address: ~IN:.::42sc,3'------'
Local /Remote: ~ MultiHop: ~
Control Bits-----
lgnore if timed out /TO):[[]
To be retried (NA): [QJ
Awaiting Execution (EW): [[]
Continuous Aun ICOJ: [[]
E"°' {ERJ [)
Message done (DN): [[]
Message Transmitting (ST): I[]
Message Enabled [EN):[[]
Wailing for Queue Space:[[]
0 MSG - Rung #2:0 - N10:0 G](g)IBJ
General
Ins =Add Hop Del= Remove Hop
From Device From Port To Address T e To Address
Thi Processor Lhe,Ne IP evic (str:l...t.__1QJ1.100.79
Configuring the I/O 4-35
20-COMM-E EtherNet/IP Adapter User Manual
Publication 20COMM-UM010H-EN-P
Create SLC 500 Ladder Logic for the Logic Status, Feedback, and Datalink Out
1. Insert another separate rung.
2. Double-click the rung to display the rung editor.
3. Enter MSG READ 500CPU LOCAL Nxx:n, where:
xx is an unused data file number (for example, N11:n), and n is an unused element of the data file chosen for xx (for example, N11:0)
4. Press Enter.
5. Insert another separate rung.
6. Double-click the rung to display the rung editor.
7. Enter BST XIC Nxx:n/DN NXB XIC Nxx:n/ER BND OTU Nxx:n/ EN, where:
xx and n must correspond to the assigned data file number and element (for example, N11:0) for the message created in steps 1…4.
Important: The information must be entered with appropriate numbers for ‘xx’ and ‘n’ for your application, and with spaces and forward slashes exactly as shown.
8. Press Enter.
9. In the MSG instruction (Figure 4.15), double-click Setup Screen to launch the message configuration screen (Figure 4.16).
Figure 4.15 SLC 500 Ladder Logic for the Logic Status, Feedback, and Datalink Out
10. Configure the General tab fields by entering or verifying the information shown in the message configuration screen.
Steps 1…4
Steps 5…8
Step 9
ER
MSG
Read/W • Type nte Message
Read/Write Peer-To-Peer
Target Device Read
Local/Remote SOOCPU
Control Block Local
Control Block L N 11 :0 ength
Setup Screen 51
4-36 Configuring the I/O
20-COMM-E EtherNet/IP Adapter User Manual
Publication 20COMM-UM010H-EN-P
Figure 4.16 SLC 500 Message Configuration Screens for the Logic Status, Feedback, and Datalink Out
General Tab Box Setting
This Controller
Communication Command This setting is unavailable (grayed out) and is established when the message is created in the ladder rung.
Data Table Address (1) N20:1. An unused controller data table address containing the data to be read from the drive.
Size in Elements (2) 19. Number of elements (words) to be transferred. Each element size is a 16-bit integer.
Channel 1. Controller port to which the network is connected.
Target Device (data for adapter/drive)
Message Timeout 5. Message timeout duration in seconds.
Data Table Address
(3) N41:0. Specific starting address of the source file in the drive.
MultiHop Yes. Enables communication to allow network messaging to be routed to the adapter/drive. When ‘Y es’ is selected, a MultiHop tab appears on the message configuration screen.
MultiHop Tab Box Setting
To Address 10.91.100.79. The IP address of the adapter connected to the drive. (1) For details on data table addresses for this example project, see Table 5.G…Table 5.J starting on page 5-23. (2) For details to determine element size for a specific drive, see Understanding Controller Data Table Addresses on page 5-22. (3) For N-File details, see N-Files on page C-10.
0 MSG - Rung #2:2 - N 11 :0 l'J/'g)rgj
--------
MultiHop I
This Controller------========::::i
Communication Command· ~l5~00~C~PU~R•~•~d==, __ _JI
Data Table Address: e:IN'-"20ec:1c_ _ __,
Size in Elements: l1LJ
Channel:: ~
Target Device,------------~
Message Timeout: 1el5~===
Data Table Address: e:INcc41'-":0'------
Local /Remote: ~ MultiHop: ~
Control Bits,-----
lgnore if timed out /TO):[[]
To be 1etried (NA):[[)
Awaiting Execution (EW): [[]
Continuous Run {CO): I[]
E"o' [ER):[)
Message done [ON): I[]
Message Transmitting (ST): [[]
Message Enabled (EN):[[]
Wailing lor Queue Space : I[]
0 MSG - Rung #2:2 - N11:0 l'J/'g)[gj
General
Ins =Add Hop Del= Remove Hop
From Device From Port To Address T e
his Processo, Ethe,Net le Device~)
Configuring the I/O 4-37
20-COMM-E EtherNet/IP Adapter User Manual
Publication 20COMM-UM010H-EN-P
Create SLC 500 Ladder Logic for the Logic Command, Reference, and Datalink In
1. Insert another separate rung.
2. Double-click the rung to display the rung editor.
3. Enter MSG WRITE 500CPU LOCAL Nxx:n, where:
xx is an unused data file number (for example, N12:n), and n is an unused element of the data file chosen for xx (for example, N12:0)
4. Press Enter.
5. Insert another separate rung.
6. Double-click the rung to display the rung editor.
7. Enter BST XIC Nxx:n/DN NXB XIC Nxx:n/ER BND OTU Nxx:n/ EN, where:
xx and n must correspond to the assigned data file number and element (for example, N12:0) for the message created in steps 1…4.
Important: The information must be entered with appropriate numbers for ‘xx’ and ‘n’ for your application, and with spaces and forward slashes exactly as shown.
8. Press Enter.
9. In the MSG instruction (Figure 4.17), double-click Setup Screen to launch the message configuration screen (Figure 4.18).
Figure 4.17 SLC 500 Ladder Logic for the Logic Command, Reference, and Datalink In
10. Configure the General tab field by entering or verifying the information shown in the message configuration screen.
Steps 1…4
Steps 5…8
Step 9
DN
Nl2:0
ER
MSG
Read/Write M Type es sage
Read/Write Peer-To-Peer
Target Device Write
Local/Remote SOOCPU
Control Block Local
Control Block L Nl2:0 ength
Setup Screen 51
4-38 Configuring the I/O
20-COMM-E EtherNet/IP Adapter User Manual
Publication 20COMM-UM010H-EN-P
Figure 4.18 SLC 500 Message Configuration Screens for the Logic Command, Reference, and Datalink In
General Tab Box Setting
This Controller
Communication Command This setting is unavailable (grayed out) and is established when the message is created in the ladder rung.
Data Table Address
(1) N20:20. An unused controller data table address containing the data to be written to the drive.
Size in Elements (2) 19. Number of elements (words) to be transferred. Each element size is a 16-bit integer.
Channel 1. Controller port to which the network is connected.
Target Device (data for adapter/drive)
Message Timeout 5. Message timeout duration in seconds.
Data Table Address
(3) N41:0. Specific starting address of the destination file in the drive.
MultiHop Yes. Enables communication to allow network messaging to be routed to the adapter/drive. When ‘Y es’ is selected, a MultiHop tab appears on the message configuration screen.
MultiHop Tab Box Setting
To Address 10.91.100.79. The IP address of the adapter connected to the drive. (1) For details on data table addresses for this example project, see Table 5.G…Table 5.J starting on page 5-23. (2) For details to determine element size for a specific drive, see Understanding Controller Data Table Addresses on page 5-22. (3) For N-File details, see N-Files on page C-10.
TIP: This message will error out if the Control Timeout value is not changed from a non-zero value. Refer to page 4-33 for writing a value to the Control Timeout.
TIP: If the controller is controlling more than one drive, it is recommended to intersperse the control I/O messaging for each drive to conserve network bandwidth and decrease response time. That is, sequence the message instructions for each drive so that its group of messages will occur at a different time than those for another drive.
►
►
0 MSG - Rung #2:4 - N12:0 G]g]l'.8]
MultiHopl
This Controller---:-::-----: ---;:::=======:::;i
Communication Command: al5=00=C=PU===W=rit=e=--~I
Data Table Address· ~IN~20~:2,eO __ _J
Size in Elements: [IL]
Channel·· u::=J
Target Device•------------~
Message Timeout: =5=====
DataTableAddress· eclNc:,41-'-'□"------
Local /Remote: ~ MultiHop: ~
Control Bits-----~
Ignore if timed out (TO): [QJ
To be retried [NA):[[]
Awaiting E)!ecution (EWJ:@J
Continuous Run (CO}:[[]
Error (ER):@]
Message done [ON):[[]
Message Transmitting (ST):[[]
Message Enabled (EN): [[]
Waiting fo, Queue Space: [QJ
0 MSG - Rung #2:4 - N 12:0 ~[g]l'.8]
General
Ins =Add Hop Del= Remove Hop
From Device From Port
This Processor
Configuring the I/O 4-39
20-COMM-E EtherNet/IP Adapter User Manual
Publication 20COMM-UM010H-EN-P
MicroLogix 1100/1400
Controller Example
After the adapter is configured, the connected drive and adapter will be a single node on the network. This section provides the steps needed to configure a simple EtherNet/IP network (see Figure 4.19). In our example, we will configure a MicroLogix 1100 controller to communicate with a drive using Logic Command/Status, Reference/Feedback, and Datalinks over the network.
Figure 4.19 Example MicroLogix 1100/1400 Controller EtherNet/IP Network Configuring Parameters for Network I/O
Because the I/O for the drive is message-based, there is no need to configure any I/O inside the RSLogix 500 project, version 7.00 or later, until using the I/O as described in Chapter 5
.
However, to get the adapter to operate with the I/O created in Chapter 5, we need to configure the adapter to accept the I/O and drive to point to the appropriate Datalinks.
1. Set adapter Parameters 23 - [DPI I/O Cfg], 35 - [M-S Input], and 36 - [M-S Output] to values that meet your application requirements.
For this example, the adapter I/O parameters are set to these values.
2. Reset the adapter (see Resetting the Adapter on page 3-16) or power cycle the drive.
For the drive speed reference and Datalink parameter values and the adapter setup parameter values, refer to Drive and Adapter Parameter Settings on page 5-21.
IP Address 10.91.100.81
MicroLogix 1100/1400 Controller
IP Address 10.91.100.79
PowerFlex 70 Drive with
20-COMM-E Adapter
Computer with
Ethernet Connection
Ethernet
Switch
TIP: Information for PowerFlex 750-Series drives has been added to this manual where it is applicable.
Adapter Parameter No. Setting
23 - [DPI I/O Cfg] xxxx xxxx xxx1 1111
35 - [M-S Input] xxxx xxxx xxx1 1111
36 - [M-S Output] xxxx xxxx xxx1 1111
►
4-40 Configuring the I/O
20-COMM-E EtherNet/IP Adapter User Manual
Publication 20COMM-UM010H-EN-P
Creating RSLogix 500 Project, Version 7.00 or Later
To transmit (read and write) data between the controller and drive, you must create message instructions that allocate data table addresses in the controller for Logic Command/Status, Reference/Feedback, and Datalinks.
Select the Controller
1. Start RSLogix 500 software.
The RSLogix 500 window appears.
2. Select File > New to display the Select Processor Type screen.
3. Assign a name for the processor.
4. In the list, select the MicroLogix 1100 controller.
5. Choose the appropriate selections for the fields in the screen to match your application.
6. Click OK.
The RSLogix 500 project window appears.
Select Processor Type i:g)
Processor Name:IEXo.MPLE
Bul 1764
Bul 1764
Bul 1762
Bul 1762
Bul 1762
Bul 1761
Bul 1761
Bul . 1761
1747-l40A
1747-1408
1747-L40C/F
1747-l40E
1747-1401
Micrologix 1500 LSP Series B
MicroLogix 1500 LSP Series A
MicroLogix 1200 Series C ( 1 or 2 Comm Ports)
MicroLogix 1200 Series B
MicroLoqix 1200 Series A
MicroLogix 1000 Analog
MicroLogix 1000 DH-4 8 5/ HDSlave
MicroLogix 1000
24-115 VAC In . 16-RLY Out
24-115 VAC In , 16-TRIAC Out
2 4-DC SNK In . 16-RLY Out
2 4-DC SNK In , 16-TRANS SRC Out
2 4-DC SRC In . 16-TRANS SNI< Out
0 Communication settings-- -
Driver
I Ethernet
Processor Node:
..:.J 149 Decimal
(=61 Octal)
Who Active ..
Reply Timeout:
iw-- (Sec)
Configuring the I/O 4-41
20-COMM-E EtherNet/IP Adapter User Manual
Publication 20COMM-UM010H-EN-P
Create MicroLogix 1100/1400 Ladder Logic for the Control Timeout
1. In the RSLogix 500 project window treeview under Program Files double-click on LAD 2.
2. Insert a ladder rung.
3. Double-click the rung to display the rung editor.
4. Enter MSG MGxx:n, where:
xx is an unused data file number (for example, MG10:n), and n is an unused element of the data file chosen for xx (for example, MG10:0)
5. Press Enter.
6. Insert another separate rung.
7. Double-click the rung to display the rung editor.
8. Enter BST XIC MGxx:n/DN NXB XIC MGxx:n/ER BND OTU
MGxx:n/EN, where:
xx and n must correspond to the assigned data file number and element (for example, MG10:0) for the message created in steps 2…5.
Important: The information must be entered with appropriate numbers for ‘xx’ and ‘n’ for your application, and with spaces and forward slashes exactly as shown.
9. Press Enter.
10. In the MSG instruction (Figure 4.20), double-click Setup Screen to launch the message configuration screen (Figure 4.21).
Figure 4.20 MicroLogix 1100/1400 Ladder Logic for the Control Timeout
11. Configure the General tab fields by entering or verifying the information shown in the message configuration screen.
Steps 2…5
Steps 6…9
Step 10
ER
MSG
Read/W • MSG . nte Message
File MGJ0·0
Setup Screen •
4-42 Configuring the I/O
20-COMM-E EtherNet/IP Adapter User Manual
Publication 20COMM-UM010H-EN-P
Figure 4.21 MicroLogix 1100/1400 Message Configuration Screens for the Control Timeout
General Tab Box Setting
This Controller (data for MicroLogix 1100 controller)
Channel 1 (integral). Controller port to which the network is connected.
Communication Command 500CPU Write. The controller type and command type for the controller to read or write data. Because the MicroLogix 1100 controller is part of the SLC-500 controller family, the ‘500CPU’ controller type was selected. The ‘Write’ command type was selected to write the control timeout value to the drive.
Data Table Address (1) N20:0. An unused controller data table address containing the control timeout value to be written.
Size in Elements (2) 1. Number of elements (words) to be transferred. Each element size is a 16-bit integer.
Target Device (data for adapter/drive)
Message Timeout 5. Message timeout duration in seconds.
Data Table Address (3) N42:3. Specific starting address of the destination file in the drive.
Routing Information File RI9:0. An unused routing information file for the controller.
MultiHop Tab Box Setting
To Address 10.91.100.79. The IP address of the adapter connected to the drive. (1) For details on data table addresses for this example project, see Table 5.G…Table 5.J starting on page 5-23. (2) For details to determine element size for a specific drive, see Understanding Controller Data Table Addresses on page 5-22. (3) For details on setting the control timeout value and its function, see N-Files on page C-10. The Control Timeout (N42:3) is stored in RAM. If the 20-COMM-E adapter is power cycled, the Control Timeout Message must be re-sent. If the Control Timeout is not changed from a non-zero value, the control message (page 4-45) will error out.
TIP: The Control Timeout (N42:3) must be changed to a non-zero value (5…20 seconds recommended). If the Control Timeout is not changed from a non-zero value, the control message (page 4-45) will error out. The Control Timeout is stored in RAM. If the adapter is power cycled, the Control Timeout Message must be re-sent.
►
0 MSG - Rung #2:0 - MG10:0 G][gj[8)
MultiHop I
This Controller---------------~
Channel: 11 (Integral)
Communication Command: l500CPU Write
Data Table Address: i"IN"'2o"'o"""""'lc'------~
Size in Elements: Ir==]
r
la1getDev1~eessageT1meoul 15
Data Table Address ~IN~42=3~-~
Local/ Remote ~ MultiHop: ~
Routing Information File ~
Control Bits------a l
Ignore if timed oul [TO]:@]
Break Connection (BKJ: [QJ
Awaiting E)(ecution [EWJ: [[]
E"m[ERJ,[l
Message done (DN): [[]
Message Transmitting (ST):[[]
Message Enabled [EN):[[]
r Error-------~ 1
0 MSG - Rung #2:0 - MG10:0 ['J[gjrgj
General
Ins :Add Hop Del:: Remove Hop
From Device From Port To Address T e To Address
This Proce ssor Ethe,Net IP Device (sir:) 10.91 .100.79 Configuring the I/O 4-43
20-COMM-E EtherNet/IP Adapter User Manual
Publication 20COMM-UM010H-EN-P
Create MicroLogix 1100/1400 Ladder Logic for the Logic Status, Feedback, and Datalink Out
1. Insert another separate rung.
2. Double-click the rung to display the rung editor.
3. Enter MSG MGxx:n, where:
xx is an unused data file number (for example, MG11:n), and n is an unused element of the data file chosen for xx (for example, MG11:0)
4. Press Enter.
5. Insert another separate rung.
6. Double-click the rung to display the rung editor.
7. Enter BST XIC MGxx:n/DN NXB XIC MGxx:n/ER BND OTU
MGxx:n/EN, where:
xx and n must correspond to the assigned data file number and element (for example, MG11:0) for the message created in steps 1…4.
Important: The information must be entered with appropriate numbers for ‘xx’ and ‘n’ for your application, and with spaces and forward slashes exactly as shown.
8. Press Enter.
9. In the MSG instruction (Figure 4.22), double-click Setup Screen to launch the message configuration screen (Figure 4.23).
Figure 4.22 MicroLogix 1100/1400 Ladder Logic for the Logic Status, Feedback, and Datalink Out
10. Configure the General tab fields by entering or verifying the information shown in the message configuration screen.
Steps 1…4
Steps 5…8
Step 9
MSG--
Read/W • MSG y~1te Message
I e MGll ·O
Setup Screen •
- --+--- MGll :O u
EN
ER
4-44 Configuring the I/O
20-COMM-E EtherNet/IP Adapter User Manual
Publication 20COMM-UM010H-EN-P
Figure 4.23 MicroLogix 1100/1400 Message Configuration Screens for the Logic Status, Feedback, and Datalink Out
General Tab Box Setting
This Controller (data for MicroLogix 1100 controller)
Channel 1 (integral). Controller port to which the network is connected.
Communication Command 500CPU Read. The controller type and command type for the controller to read or write data.
Because the MicroLogix 1100 controller is part of the SLC-500 controller family, the ‘500CPU’ controller type was selected. The ‘Read’ command type was selected to read data from the drive.
Data Table Address (1) N20:1. An unused controller data table address containing the data to be read from the drive.
Size in Elements (2) 19. Number of elements (words) to be transferred. Each element size is a 16-bit integer.
Target Device (data for adapter/drive)
Message Timeout 5. Message timeout duration in seconds.
Data Table Address (3) N41:0. Specific starting address of the source file in the drive.
Routing Information File RI9:1. An unused routing information file for the controller.
MultiHop Tab Box Setting
To Address 10.91.100.79. The IP address of the adapter connected to the drive. (1) For details on data table addresses for this example project, see Table 5.G…Table 5.J starting on page 5-23. (2) For details to determine element size for a specific drive, see Understanding Controller Data Table Addresses on page 5-22. (3) For N-File details, see N-Files on page C-10.
0 MSG - Rung #2:2 - MG11 :0 GJ[gj[8)
- --------- -- -
MultiHop I
This Controller---------------~
Channel: j1 (Integral]
Communication Commandj -'5=00a,Ca.PU=R•=•>"'d------~
D ala Table Address· ~
Size in Elements· IIi:::J
r
Target Devi~8essage T 1meout
Data Table Address ~IN~41=, □~-~
Local/ Aemole ~ MultiHop:~
Routing Information File ~
Control Bits------ -1
Ignore if timed out (TO):[[]
Break Connection (BK):[[]
Awaiting Execution (EW): [QJ
Er1or (ERJ []
Message done (DN): [[]
Message Transmitting (ST):[[]
Message Enabled (EN):[[]
Error--------;
0 MSG - Rung #2:2 - MG11:0 GJ[gj('gj
Ins =Add Hop Del= Remove Hop
From Device From Port T □ Address T e To Address
1-'T""h"-is,cPrecoce,e"'ss"'orc.-_____ .,__,1 __ ._,E,,_lhe,er,,N"'el-"IP...,Dc,ec.evi=ce (st,:) 10.91.100. 79 Configuring the I/O 4-45
20-COMM-E EtherNet/IP Adapter User Manual
Publication 20COMM-UM010H-EN-P
Create MicroLogix 1100/1400 Ladder Logic for the Logic Command, Reference, and Datalink In
1. Insert another separate rung.
2. Double-click the rung to display the rung editor.
3. Enter MSG MGxx:n, where:
xx is an unused data file number (for example, MG12:n), and n is an unused element of the data file chosen for xx (for example, MG12:0)
4. Press Enter.
5. Insert another separate rung.
6. Double-click the rung to display the rung editor.
7. Enter BST XIC MGxx:n/DN NXB XIC MGxx:n/ER BND OTU
MGxx:n/EN, where:
xx and n must correspond to the assigned data file number and element (for example, MG12:0) for the message created in steps 1…4.
Important: The information must be entered with appropriate numbers for ‘xx’ and ‘n’ for your application, and with spaces and forward slashes exactly as shown.
8. Press Enter.
9. In the MSG instruction (Figure 4.24), double-click Setup Screen to launch the message configuration screen (Figure 4.25).
Figure 4.24 MicroLogix 1100/1400 Ladder Logic for the Logic Command, Reference, and Datalink In
10. Configure the General tab fields by entering or verifying the information shown in the message configuration screen.
Steps 1…4
Steps 5…8
Step 9
ER
MSG
Read/W • MSG . nte Message
File MG12·0
Setup Screen •
- --\----- MG12:0 u
EN
4-46 Configuring the I/O
20-COMM-E EtherNet/IP Adapter User Manual
Publication 20COMM-UM010H-EN-P
Figure 4.25 MicroLogix 1100/1400 Message Configuration Screens for the Logic Command, Reference, and Datalink In
General Tab Box Setting
This Controller (data for MicroLogix 1100 controller)
Channel 1 (integral). Controller port to which the network is connected.
Communication Command 500CPU Write. The controller type and command type for the controller to read or write data.
Because the MicroLogix 1100 controller is part of the SLC-500 controller family, the ‘500CPU’ controller type was selected. The ‘Write’ command type was selected to write data to the drive.
Data Table Address (1) N20:20. An unused controller data table address containing the data to be written to the drive.
Size in Elements (2) 19. Number of elements (words) to be transferred. Each element size is a 16-bit integer.
Target Device (data for adapter/drive)
Message Timeout 5. Message timeout duration in seconds.
Data Table Address (3) N41:0. Specific starting address of the destination file in the drive.
Routing Information File RI9:2. An unused routing information file for the controller.
MultiHop Tab Box Setting
To Address 10.91.100.79. The IP address of the adapter connected to the drive. (1) For details on data table addresses for this example project, see Table 5.G…Table 5.J starting on page 5-23. (2) For details to determine element size for a specific drive, see Understanding Controller Data Table Addresses on page 5-22. (3) For N-File details, see N-Files on page C-10.
TIP: This message will error out if the Control Timeout value is not changed from a non-zero value. Refer to page 4-41 for writing a value to the Control Timeout.
TIP: If the controller is controlling more than one drive, it is recommended to intersperse the control I/O messaging for each drive to conserve network bandwidth and decrease response time. That is, sequence the message instructions for each drive so that its group of messages will occur at a different time than those for another drive.
►
►
0 MSG - Rung #2:4 - MG12:0 (';]~ [8)
p}er1eiar11 MultiHop I
This Contfoller---------------~
Channel: 11 [Integral]
Communication Command: aal5;a00a,C;,,;PU._W=riti'-e ------~ Data Table Address: ~
Size in Elements [3L]
Ta,getOevice ------__ -_ -_-_-_-_-~_:;------~
Message Timeout 15 I
Data Table Address: IN41:0 I
Local/ Remote ~ MultiHop: ~
Routing Information File: ~
Control Bits------~ •
Ignore if timed out [TO): @]
Break Connection (BK):[)
Awaiting Execution [EWJ: [QJ
Erro, [ER[,[]
Message done (DNJ:@J
Message Transmitting (ST):[[]
Message Enabled [EN):@]
I
1 Error-------~ 11
0 MSG - Rung #2:4 - MG12:0 ~[gj rgj
Ins =Add Hop Del= Remove Hop
From Device From Poet To Address T e To Address
This P1ocesso1 Ethe,NetlP. Device sti:) 10.91.100.79
20-COMM-E EtherNet/IP Adapter User Manual
Publication 20COMM-UM010H-EN-P
Chapter 5
Using the I/O
This chapter provides information and examples that explain how to control, configure, and monitor a PowerFlex 7-Class drive using the configured I/O.
About I/O Messaging On CIP-based networks, including EtherNet/IP, I/O connections are used to transfer the data which controls the PowerFlex drive and sets its Reference.
I/O can also be used to transfer data to and from Datalinks in PowerFlex 7-Class drives.
The adapter provides many options for configuring and using I/O, including the following:
Configuring the size of I/O by enabling or disabling the Logic Command/Reference and Datalinks.
Setting a Master-Slave or Peer-to-Peer hierarchy.
Chapter 3, Configuring the Adapter, and Chapter 4, Configuring the I/O, discuss how to configure the adapter and controller on the network for these options. The Glossary defines the different options. This chapter discusses how to use I/O after you have configured the adapter and controller.
Topic Page
About I/O Messaging 5-1
Understanding the I/O Image 5-2
Using Logic Command/Status 5-6
Using Reference/Feedback 5-6
Using Datalinks 5-9
Example Ladder Logic Program Information 5-11
ControlLogix Controller Example 5-11
PLC-5, SLC 500, or MicroLogix 1100/1400 Controller Example 5-21 !
ATTENTION: Risk of injury or equipment damage exists. The examples in this publication are intended solely for purposes of example. There are many variables and requirements with any application. Rockwell Automation does not assume responsibility or liability (to include intellectual property liability) for actual use of the examples shown in this publication.
5-2 Using the I/O
20-COMM-E EtherNet/IP Adapter User Manual
Publication 20COMM-UM010H-EN-P
Understanding the I/O Image The terms ‘input’ and ‘output’ are defined from the controller’s point of view. Therefore, output I/O is data that is produced by the controller and consumed by the adapter. Input I/O is status data that is produced by the adapter and consumed as input by the controller. The I/O image will vary based on the following:
Size (either 16-bit or 32-bit) of the Reference/Feedback words and Datalink words used by the drive. To determine the size of the Reference/Feedback and Datalinks, view adapter Parameters 18 - [Ref/ Fdbk Size] and 19 - [Datalink Size]. For information to access parameters, see Using the PowerFlex 7-Class HIM to Access Parameters on page 3-2.
Configuration of I/O (Parameter 23 - [DPI I/O Cfg]). If all I/O is not enabled, the image is truncated. The image always uses consecutive words starting at word 0.
ControlLogix/CompactLogix Controllers only—The drive profile used in RSLogix 5000 software (drive Add-on Profile in version 16.00 or later, Classic Profile in versions 13.00…15.00, or Generic Profile in all versions).
ControlLogix Controller Image
Because the drive Add-on Profile in RSLogix 5000 software, version 16.00 or later, and the Classic Profile, versions 13.00…15.00, provide descriptive controller tags, the I/O image (tag size and location) is automatically configured based on the drive being used. When using the Generic Profile (page 4-16
) in RSLogix 5000 software, however, controller tags are not descriptive or defined.
The ControlLogix controller I/O image changes depending on the size of the drive’s Reference/Feedback and Datalinks, and the number of Datalinks used. Table 5.A, Table 5.B, and Table 5.C show the I/O image when using various PowerFlex drives, and all Datalinks enabled.
Using the I/O 5-3
20-COMM-E EtherNet/IP Adapter User Manual
Publication 20COMM-UM010H-EN-P
Table 5.A ControlLogix Controller I/O Image for Drives with 16-bit Reference/ Feedback and 16-bit Datalinks – Using Generic Profile
These products include the following:
Table 5.B ControlLogix Controller I/O Image for Drives with 16-bit Reference/ Feedback and 32-bit Datalinks – Using Generic Profile
These products include the following:
PowerFlex 70 drives with standard or enhanced control SMC Flex smart motor controllers PowerFlex 700 drives with standard control SMC-50 smart motor controllers PowerFlex 700H drives
Word Output I/O Word Input I/O
0 Logic Command 0 Pad Word
1 Reference 1 Pad Word
2 Datalink In A1 2 Logic Status
3 Datalink In A2 3 Feedback
4 Datalink In B1 4 Datalink Out A1
5 Datalink In B2 5 Datalink Out A2
6 Datalink In C1 6 Datalink Out B1
7 Datalink In C2 7 Datalink Out B2
8 Datalink In D1 8 Datalink Out C1
9 Datalink In D2 9 Datalink Out C2
10 Datalink Out D1
11 Datalink Out D2
PowerFlex 700 drives with vector control PowerFlex Digital DC drives PowerFlex 700L drives with 700 control
Word Output I/O Word Input I/O
0 Logic Command 0 Pad Word
1 Reference 1 Pad Word
2 Datalink In A1 (LSW) 2 Logic Status
3 Datalink In A1 (MSW) 3 Feedback
4 Datalink In A2 (LSW) 4 Datalink Out A1 (LSW)
5 Datalink In A2 (MSW) 5 Datalink Out A1 (MSW)
6 Datalink In B1 (LSW) 6 Datalink Out A2 (LSW)
7 Datalink In B1 (MSW) 7 Datalink Out A2 (MSW)
8 Datalink In B2 (LSW) 8 Datalink Out B1 (LSW)
9 Datalink In B2 (MSW) 9 Datalink Out B1 (MSW)
10 Datalink In C1 (LSW) 10 Datalink Out B2 (LSW)
11 Datalink In C1 (MSW) 11 Datalink Out B2 (MSW)
12 Datalink In C2 (LSW) 12 Datalink Out C1 (LSW)
13 Datalink In C2 (MSW) 13 Datalink Out C1 (MSW)
14 Datalink In D1 (LSW) 14 Datalink Out C2 (LSW)
15 Datalink In D1 (MSW) 15 Datalink Out C2 (MSW)
16 Datalink In D2 (LSW) 16 Datalink Out D1 (LSW)
17 Datalink In D2 (MSW) 17 Datalink Out D1 (MSW)
18 Datalink Out D2 (LSW)
19 Datalink Out D2 (MSW)
5-4 Using the I/O
20-COMM-E EtherNet/IP Adapter User Manual
Publication 20COMM-UM010H-EN-P
Table 5.C ControlLogix Controller I/O Image for Drives with 32-bit Reference/ Feedback and 32-bit Datalinks – Using Generic Profile
These products include the following:
PLC-5, SLC 500, or MicroLogix 1100/1400 Controller Image The I/O image for these controllers always has 19 words of output and 19 words of input. However, depending on the size of the drive’s Reference/ Feedback and Datalinks, and the number of Datalinks used, specific words in the I/O image may not be used. Table 5.D
, Table 5.E, and Table 5.F show
the I/O image when using various PowerFlex drives, and all Datalinks enabled.
PowerFlex 700S drives with Phase I or Phase II control PowerFlex 753 drives PowerFlex 700L drives with 700S control PowerFlex 755 drives Word Output I/O Word Input I/O
0 Logic Command 0 Pad Word
1 Not Used 1 Pad Word
2 Reference (LSW) 2 Logic Status
3 Reference (MSW) 3 Not Used
4 Datalink In A1 (LSW) 4 Feedback (LSW)
5 Datalink In A1 (MSW) 5 Feedback (MSW)
6 Datalink In A2 (LSW) 6 Datalink Out A1 (LSW)
7 Datalink In A2 (MSW) 7 Datalink Out A1 (MSW)
8 Datalink In B1 (LSW) 8 Datalink Out A2 (LSW)
9 Datalink In B1 (MSW) 9 Datalink Out A2 (MSW)
10 Datalink In B2 (LSW) 10 Datalink Out B1 (LSW)
11 Datalink In B2 (MSW) 11 Datalink Out B1 (MSW)
12 Datalink In C1 (LSW) 12 Datalink Out B2 (LSW)
13 Datalink In C1 (MSW) 13 Datalink Out B2 (MSW)
14 Datalink In C2 (LSW) 14 Datalink Out C1 (LSW)
15 Datalink In C2 (MSW) 15 Datalink Out C1 (MSW)
16 Datalink In D1 (LSW) 16 Datalink Out C2 (LSW)
17 Datalink In D1 (MSW) 17 Datalink Out C2 (MSW)
18 Datalink In D2 (LSW) 18 Datalink Out D1 (LSW)
19 Datalink In D2 (MSW) 19 Datalink Out D1 (MSW)
20 Datalink Out D2 (LSW)
21 Datalink Out D2 (MSW)
Using the I/O 5-5
20-COMM-E EtherNet/IP Adapter User Manual
Publication 20COMM-UM010H-EN-P
Table 5.D PLC-5, SLC 500, or MicroLogix 1100/1400 Controller I/O Image for Drives with 16-bit Reference/Feedback and 16-bit Datalinks
These products include the following:
Table 5.E PLC-5, SLC 500, or MicroLogix 1100/1400 Controller I/O Image for Drives with 16-bit Reference/Feedback and 32-bit Datalinks
These products include the following:
PowerFlex 70 drives with standard or enhanced control SMC Flex smart motor controllers PowerFlex 700 drives with standard control SMC-50 smart motor controllers PowerFlex 700H drives
Word Output I/O Word Input I/O
0 Logic Command 0 Logic Status
1 Not used 1 Not used
2 Reference (MSW) 2 Feedback (MSW)
3 Not used 3 Not used
4 Datalink In A1 (MSW) 4 Datalink Out A1 (MSW)
5 Not used 5 Not used
6 Datalink In A2 (MSW) 6 Datalink Out A2 (MSW)
7 Not used 7 Not used
8 Datalink In B1 (MSW) 8 Datalink Out B1 (MSW)
9 Not used 9 Not used
10 Datalink In B2 (MSW) 10 Datalink Out B2 (MSW)
11 Not used 11 Not used
12 Datalink In C1 (MSW) 12 Datalink Out C1 (MSW)
13 Not used 13 Not used
14 Datalink In C2 (MSW) 14 Datalink Out C2 (MSW)
15 Not used 15 Not used
16 Datalink In D1 (MSW) 16 Datalink Out D1 (MSW)
17 Not used 17 Not used
18 Datalink In D2 (MSW) 18 Datalink Out D2 (MSW)
PowerFlex 700 drives with vector control PowerFlex Digital DC drives PowerFlex 700L drives with 700 control
Word Output I/O Word Input I/O
0 Logic Command 0 Logic Status
1 Not used 1 Not used
2 Reference (MSW) 2 Feedback (MSW)
3 Datalink In A1 (LSW) 3 Datalink Out A1 (LSW)
4 Datalink In A1 (MSW) 4 Datalink Out A1 (MSW)
5 Datalink In A2 (LSW) 5 Datalink Out A2 (LSW)
6 Datalink In A2 (MSW) 6 Datalink Out A2 (MSW)
7 Datalink In B1 (LSW) 7 Datalink Out B1 (LSW)
8 Datalink In B1 (MSW) 8 Datalink Out B1 (MSW)
9 Datalink In B2 (LSW) 9 Datalink Out B2 (LSW)
10 Datalink In B2 (MSW) 10 Datalink Out B2 (MSW)
11 Datalink In C1 (LSW) 11 Datalink Out C1 (LSW)
12 Datalink In C1 (MSW) 12 Datalink Out C1 (MSW)
13 Datalink In C2 (LSW) 13 Datalink Out C2 (LSW)
14 Datalink In C2 (MSW) 14 Datalink Out C2 (MSW)
15 Datalink In D1 (LSW) 15 Datalink Out D1 (LSW)
16 Datalink In D1 (MSW) 16 Datalink Out D1 (MSW)
17 Datalink In D2 (LSW) 17 Datalink Out D2 (LSW)
18 Datalink In D2 (MSW) 18 Datalink Out D2 (MSW)
5-6 Using the I/O
20-COMM-E EtherNet/IP Adapter User Manual
Publication 20COMM-UM010H-EN-P
Table 5.F PLC-5, SLC 500, or MicroLogix 1100/1400 Controller I/O Image for Drives with 32-bit Reference/Feedback and 32-bit Datalinks
These products include the following:
Using Logic Command/
Status
The Logic Command is a 16-bit word of control data produced by the controller and consumed by the adapter. The Logic Status is a 16-bit word of status data produced by the adapter and consumed by the controller.
PowerFlex 750-Series drives have a 32-bit Logic Command/Status—but when using a 20-COMM-E adapter, only the first 16 bits can be used.
This manual contains the bit definitions for most compatible products available at the time of publication in Appendix
D, Logic Command/Status
Words. For other products, see their documentation.
Using Reference/Feedback The Reference is produced by the controller and consumed by the adapter.
The Feedback is produced by the adapter and consumed by the controller.
The size of the Reference/Feedback is determined by the drive and displayed with adapter Parameter 18 - [Ref/Fdbk Size].
When the Reference and Feedback are enabled and a ControlLogix controller with a drive Add-on Profile or Classic Profile is used, specific controller tags are automatically created, sized (16-bit or 32-bit), and placed in the I/O image.
PowerFlex 700S drives with Phase I or Phase II control PowerFlex 753 drives PowerFlex 700L drives with 700S control PowerFlex 755 drives Word Output I/O Word Input I/O
0 Logic Command 0 Logic Status
1 Reference (LSW) 1 Feedback (LSW)
2 Reference (MSW) 2 Feedback (MSW)
3 Datalink In A1 (LSW) 3 Datalink Out A1 (LSW)
4 Datalink In A1 (MSW) 4 Datalink Out A1 (MSW)
5 Datalink In A2 (LSW) 5 Datalink Out A2 (LSW)
6 Datalink In A2 (MSW) 6 Datalink Out A2 (MSW)
7 Datalink In B1 (LSW) 7 Datalink Out B1 (LSW)
8 Datalink In B1 (MSW) 8 Datalink Out B1 (MSW)
9 Datalink In B2 (LSW) 9 Datalink Out B2 (LSW)
10 Datalink In B2 (MSW) 10 Datalink Out B2 (MSW)
11 Datalink In C1 (LSW) 11 Datalink Out C1 (LSW)
12 Datalink In C1 (MSW) 12 Datalink Out C1 (MSW)
13 Datalink In C2 (LSW) 13 Datalink Out C2 (LSW)
14 Datalink In C2 (MSW) 14 Datalink Out C2 (MSW)
15 Datalink In D1 (LSW) 15 Datalink Out D1 (LSW)
16 Datalink In D1 (MSW) 16 Datalink Out D1 (MSW)
17 Datalink In D2 (LSW) 17 Datalink Out D2 (LSW)
18 Datalink In D2 (MSW) 18 Datalink Out D2 (MSW)
Size Valid Values
16-bit -32768 to 32767
32-bit -2147483648 to 2147483647
Using the I/O 5-7
20-COMM-E EtherNet/IP Adapter User Manual
Publication 20COMM-UM010H-EN-P
PowerFlex 70/700/700H and PowerFlex 700L Drives with 700 Control The Reference/Feedback value is a scaled engineering value; it is not in Hertz or RPM. The Reference uses a ‘32767’ scale. The ‘32767’ endpoint of the scale is equal to the value of drive parameter 55 - [Maximum Freq], which has a default value of 130 Hz. For these drives, default scaling is 0…15123 which is equal to 0…60.0 Hz. This is based on the formula shown below. Reference/Feedback scaling is limited by drive parameter 82 - [Maximum Speed]. If the default value of 60 Hz. for parameter 82 - [Maximum Speed] is changed, the speed Reference/Feedback scaling also changes. To determine Reference/Feedback scaling, use the following formula:
(Parameter 82 ÷ Parameter 55) * 32767 = Scaling
Using drive parameter 82 and 55 default values, speed Reference/Feedback scaling is:
(60 Hz ÷ 130 Hz) * 32767 = 15123
Therefore, 0…15123 = 0…60.0 Hz.
If parameter 82 - [Maximum Speed] is changed to 90 Hz, then:
(90 Hz ÷ 130 Hz) * 32767 = 22685
Therefore, 0…22685 = 0…90.0 Hz.
A graphic representation of this Reference/Feedback scaling is shown below.
For PowerFlex 70 drives with enhanced control, firmware 2.xxx or later, or PowerFlex 700 drives with vector control, firmware 3.xxx or later, drive parameter 298 - [DPI Ref Select] was added to simplify scaling for the speed Reference/Feedback. When drive parameter 298 - [DPI Ref Select] is set to its default ‘0’ (Max Freq), the speed Reference/Feedback scaling is as shown above. However, when parameter 298 - [DPI Ref Select] is set to ‘1’ (Max Speed), the speed Reference/Feedback scaling is equal to parameter 82 - [Max Speed]:
Parameter 82 = Scaling
Using the parameter 82 default value, speed Reference/Feedback scaling is:
0…32767 = 0…60.0 Hz.
If parameter 82 - [Maximum Speed] is changed to 90 Hz, then:
90 Hz = 32767
Speed Feedback uses the same scaling as the speed Reference. 0 0 Hz
Par. 55 - [Maximum Freq]
Par. 82 - [Maximum Speed]
130 Hz
90 Hz
60 Hz
327672268515123
Scaling = (Parameter 82 ÷ Parameter 55) * 32767
5-8 Using the I/O
20-COMM-E EtherNet/IP Adapter User Manual
Publication 20COMM-UM010H-EN-P
PowerFlex 700S and PowerFlex 700L Drives with 700S Control The Reference/Feedback value is:
32767 = Base Motor Speed
The base speed is set using drive parameter 4 - [Motor RPM]. To set a speed Reference/Feedback above base speed, a value greater than 32767 must be entered.
For 16-bit processors, such as PLC-5 and SLC 500 controllers, the data requires manipulation to set a speed Reference above 32767 or below -32767. Please see the PowerFlex 700S AC Drives Phase II Control Reference Manual, publication PFLEX-RM003, in the Chapter 1 ‘Communications’ section. Then go to the ‘PLC 5 or SLC System’ subsection and see the ‘Reference/Feedback Programming’ sub-subsection.
PowerFlex 753/755 Drives
The Reference/Feedback value is Hz x 1000 or RPM x 1000. Drive parameter 300 - [Speed Units] determines whether the scaling is Hz or RPM. The default scaling is Hz, where 0…60,000 equates to 0…60.000 Hz.
When parameter 300 is set to RPM, then 0…1,765,000 equates to 0…1765.000 RPM.
For 16-bit processors, such as PLC-5 and SLC 500 controllers, the data requires manipulation to set a speed Reference above 32767 or below -32767. Please see the PowerFlex 700S AC Drives Phase II Control Reference Manual, publication PFLEX-RM003, in the Chapter 1 ‘Communications’ section. Then go to the ‘PLC 5 or SLC System’ subsection and see the ‘Reference/Feedback Programming’ sub-subsection.
PowerFlex Digital DC Drives
The Reference/Feedback value is:
25000 = Maximum Reference Speed
The maximum Reference speed is set using drive parameter 45 - [Max Ref Speed].
TIP: For PowerFlex 700 drives with vector control, firmware 3.xxx or later, parameter 299 - [DPI Fdbk Select] enables you to select the feedback data coming from the drive over DPI. The default is ‘Speed Fdbk’ in Hz or RPM determined by parameter 079 - [Speed Units]. The data selection for parameter 299 is also displayed on the 1st line of the HIM and on DriveExplorer and DriveExecutive software screens in the drive status area of the screen.
►
Using the I/O 5-9
20-COMM-E EtherNet/IP Adapter User Manual
Publication 20COMM-UM010H-EN-P
Using Datalinks A Datalink is a mechanism used by PowerFlex drives to transfer data to and from the controller. Datalinks allow a drive parameter value to be read or written without using an Explicit Message. When enabled, each Datalink occupies two 16-bit or 32-bit words in both the input and output image. Use adapter Parameter 19 - [Datalink Size] to determine whether the drive uses 16-bit or 32-bit words for Datalinks.
Rules for Using Datalinks
Each set of Datalink parameters in a PowerFlex drive can be used by only one adapter. If more than one adapter is connected to a single drive, multiple adapters cannot use the same Datalink.
Parameter settings in the drive determine the data passed through the Datalink mechanism. See the documentation for your drive. When you use a Datalink to change a value, the value is not written to the Nonvolatile Storage (NVS) memory. The value is stored in volatile memory and lost when the drive loses power. Thus, use Datalinks when you need to change a value of a parameter frequently.
Datalink Scaling
PowerFlex 70/700/700H Drives and PowerFlex 700L Drives with 700 Control When using RSLogix 5000 software, version 16.00 or later, Datalink scaling is done automatically. However, when using RSLogix 5000 software, version 15.00 or earlier—or when using a PLC-5, SLC 500, or MicroLogix 1100/1400 controller—Dat alink scaling is not automatic and uses whole numbers (INTs or DINTs). See the drive documentation to determine the unit resolution for the associated parameter Datalink. For example, PowerFlex 700VC drive parameter 3 - [Output Current] has a 0.1 unit resolution. Because Datalink scaling uses whole numbers, the Output Current value is multiplied by 10 in the adapter and then sent over the network. Suppose the actual Output Current value is 35.5 amps. Reading the associated parameter Datalink received by the controller, the value would be 355. By using ladder logic, divide the value by 10 in the controller to get the correct scaling. See the drive documentation to determine if the Datalink parameter is a 16-bit or 32-bit parameter.
PowerFlex 700S, PowerFlex 700L with 700S Control, PowerFlex 753/755, and PowerFlex Digital DC Drives
When using RSLogix 5000 software, version 16.00 or later, Datalink scaling is done automatically. However, when using RSLogix 5000 software, version 15.00 or earlier—or when using a PLC-5, SLC 500, or MicroLogix 1100/1400 controller—D atalinks require scaling in the following way. Parameters are either 16-bit or 32-bit integers or REALs.
When the parameter is a 32-bit integer, the data needs to be copied using a COP command to a DINT tag. (Because PLC-5, SLC 500, and MicroLogix 5-10 Using the I/O
20-COMM-E EtherNet/IP Adapter User Manual
Publication 20COMM-UM010H-EN-P
1100/1400 controllers do not support 32-bit integers, the data must be separated into two 16-bit integers.) When the parameter is a REAL, the data needs to be copied using a COP command to a REAL tag. See subsequent sections in this chapter for ladder logic examples. See the drive documentation to determine if the Datalink parameter is a 16-bit or 32-bit integer parameter, or a REAL parameter.
Using 16-Bit Datalinks to Read/Write 32-Bit Parameters
This subsection only pertains to PowerFlex 70 (standard or enhanced control), PowerFlex 700 (standard control), and PowerFlex 700H drives which use 16-bit Datalinks. To read or write a 32-bit parameter using 16-bit Datalinks, typically both Datalinks of a pair (A, B, C, D) are set to the same 32-bit parameter. For example, to read parameter 10 - [Elapsed Run Time] in a PowerFlex 70 drive, both Datalink A1 Out (Parameter 310) and Datalink A2 Out (Parameter 311) are set to ‘10’. Datalink A1 Out will contain the least significant word (LSW) and Datalink A2 Out will contain the most significant word (MSW).
32-bit data is stored in binary as follows:
In this example, the parameter 10 - [Elapsed Run Time] value of 6553.9 Hrs is read as ‘6553.9’ in Datalink A1 Out (Parameter 310) and Datalink A2 Out (Parameter 311).
Conversion Example:
Parameter 010 - [Elapsed Run Time] = 6553.9 Hrs
MSW = 0001hex = 0001binary = 216 = 65536
LSW = 0003hex =3
Engineering Value = 65536 + 3 = 65539
Parameter 10 Displayed Value = 6553.9 Hrs
Regardless of the Datalink combination, Datalink x1 Out will always contain the LSW and Datalink x2 Out will always contain the MSW. In the following example, the PowerFlex 70 drive parameter 242 - [Power Up Marker] contains a value of 88.4541 hours.
MSW 2 31 through 216
LSW 2 15 through 20
Datalink Word Parameter Data (Hex)
A1 Out LSW 10 0003
A2 Out MSW 10 0001
Datalink Word Parameter Data (Hex)
A2 Out MSW 242 000D
B1 Out LSW 242 7F3D
I I
I I
Using the I/O 5-11
20-COMM-E EtherNet/IP Adapter User Manual
Publication 20COMM-UM010H-EN-P
Conversion Example:
Parameter 242 - [Power Up Marker] = 88.4541 hours
MSW = 000Dhex = 1101binary = 219 + 218 + 216 = 851968
LSW = 7F3Dhex = 32573
Engineering Value = 851968 + 32573 = 884541
Parameter 242 Displayed Value = 88.4541 Hrs
Example Ladder Logic
Program Information
The example ladder logic programs in the sections of this chapter are intended for and operate PowerFlex 7-Class drives.
Functions of the Example Programs
The example programs enable you to do the following:
Receive Logic Status information from the drive.
Send a Logic Command to control the drive (for example, start, stop). Send a Reference to the drive and receive Feedback from the drive. Send/receive Datalink data to/from the drive.
Logic Command/Status Words
These examples use the Logic Command word and Logic Status word for PowerFlex 70/700 drives. Information for PowerFlex 750-Series drives has been added to the examples where applicable. See Appendix D to view details. The definition of the bits in these words may vary if you are using a different DPI drive. See the documentation for your drive.
ControlLogix Controller
Example
Any version of RSLogix 5000 software can be used to create the ladder logic. The Generic Profile (in all versions) and the drive Add-on Profile (in versions 16.00 or later) are described in the following separate subsections.
If your version of RSLogix 5000 software supports drive Add-on Profiles, which is discussed first, we recommend that you use this method.
Creating Ladder Logic Using the RSLogix 5000 Drive Add-on Profiles, Version 16.00 or Later
Because the drive Add-on Profile automatically created descriptive controller tags (Figure 4.2) for the entire I/O image in Chapter 4, you can use these tags to directly control and monitor the drive without creating any ladder logic program. However, if you intend to use Human Machine Interface devices (PanelView, and so forth) to operate the drive and view its status, you will need to create descriptive user-defined Program tags (Figure 5.1 ) and a ladder
logic program that will pass the Controller tag data to the Program tags. 5-12 Using the I/O
20-COMM-E EtherNet/IP Adapter User Manual
Publication 20COMM-UM010H-EN-P
Figure 5.1 ControlLogix Program Tags for Drive Add-on Profile Ladder Logic Program Example
An example ladder logic program that uses the automatically created descriptive Controller tags and passes their data to the user-defined Program tags is shown in Figure 5.2 and Figure 5.3. Note that the prefix for the drive Controller tags is determined by the name assigned when configuring the I/O (Chapter 4).
Depending on the drive being used, see one of the following subsections for information on speed Reference and Feedback scaling.
Figure 5.2 ControlLogix Example Ladder Logic Program Using a Drive Add-on Profile for Logic Status/Feedback
Subsection Page
PowerFlex 70/700/700H and PowerFlex 700L Drives with 700 Control 5-7 PowerFlex 700S and PowerFlex 700L Drives with 700S Control 5-8 PowerFlex 753/755 Drives 5-8
PowerFlex Digital DC Drives 5-8
Nomo o. Styl• 0-!ta Type
Commond_CI ... _F""lts Decimal BOOL
Commend_Fo,wiud_Reve,se BOOL
Command_Jog BOOL
Command_Start BOOL
Command_Stop BOOL
+ Speed_Fee<iback DINT
+ Speed_A eterence DINT
Status_Active BOO L
Statu,_At_Speed BOO L
Status_Fded BOO L
St.!itus_FOJW~rd BOOL
St.!itus_Aeacl_y BOOL
Status_Aeverse BOOL
My _PowerFlex _ Drive: I. DriveStatus _ Ready Status_Ready My_PowerFlex_Orive:I.DriveStatus_Active Status_ Active
My _PowerFlex _Drive: I. DriveStatus _ Actual Dir Status_Forward My_PowerFlex_Drive:I.DriveStatus_ActualDir Status_Reverse e-----------a / e---------------------
My_PowerFlex_Orive:I.DriveStatus_Faulted Status_Faulted My_PowerFlex_Drive:I.DriveStatus_AtSpeed Status_ At_ Speed ------- -MOV------~
Move
Source My_PowerFlex_Drive: I OutputFreq
O•
Dest Speed Feedback
- O •
Using the I/O 5-13
20-COMM-E EtherNet/IP Adapter User Manual
Publication 20COMM-UM010H-EN-P
Figure 5.3 ControlLogix Example Ladder Logic Program Using a Drive Add-on Profile for Logic Command/Reference
Creating Ladder Logic Using the RSLogix 5000 Classic Profile, Versions 13.00…15.00
Because the RSLogix 5000 Classic Profile has been significantly improved upon by RSLogix 5000 drive Add-on Profiles, version 16.00 or later, we recommend using the RSLogix 5000 drive Add-on Profiles to take advantage of their benefits (more intuitive, time saving, and less likely to make ladder logic program errors).
Command_ Stop My_ PowerFlex_ Drive: 0. Drivelog ic Rstt_ Stop Command_ Start My_PowerFlex_Drive :O.Drivelog icRstt_Start Command_Jo g My_Powe rFlex_Drive:O.DriveLogicRstt_Jog
Command_ Clear _Faults My_PowerFlex_Drive:O .Drivel ogicRstt_ClearFautt Command_Forward_Reverse My_Powe rFlex_Drive:O.D riveLogicRstt_Forward Command_Forward_Reverse My_PowerFlex_Drive:O.Drive LogicRstt_Reverse f--------, / f------------------.z )-----------,
~--------MOV-------~
Move
Source Speed_Reference
0•
Dest My_PowerFlex_Drive:O .CommandedFreq
0•
5-14 Using the I/O
20-COMM-E EtherNet/IP Adapter User Manual
Publication 20COMM-UM010H-EN-P
Creating Ladder Logic Using the RSLogix 5000 Generic Profile, All Versions
Drive and Adapter Parameter Settings
The following drive and adapter settings were used for the example ladder logic program in this section.
Device Parameter Value Description
PowerFlex 70 EC
Drive
90 - [Speed Ref A Sel] 22 (DPI Port 5) Assigns 20-COMM-E to be used for the Reference. 300 - [Data In A1] 140 Points to Par. 140 - [Accel Time 1] 301 - [Data In A2] 142 Points to Par. 142 - [Decel Time 1] 302 - [Data In B1] 100 Points to Par. 100 - [Jog Speed] 303 - [Data In B2] 155 Points to Par. 155 - [Stop Mode A] 304 - [Data In C1] 101 Points to Par. 101 - [Preset Speed 1] 305 - [Data In C2] 102 Points to Par. 102 - [Preset Speed 2] 306 - [Data In D1] 103 Points to Par. 103 - [Preset Speed 3] 307 - [Data In D2] 104 Points to Par. 104 - [Preset Speed 4] 310 - [Data Out A1] 140 Points to Par. 140 - [Accel Time 1] 311 - [Data Out A2] 142 Points to Par. 142 - [Decel Time 1] 312 - [Data Out B1] 100 Points to Par. 100 - [Jog Speed] 313 - [Data Out B2] 155 Points to Par. 155 - [Stop Mode A] 314 - [Data Out C1] 101 Points to Par. 101 - [Preset Speed 1] 315 - [Data Out C2] 102 Points to Par. 102 - [Preset Speed 2] 316 - [Data Out D1] 103 Points to Par. 103 - [Preset Speed 3] 317 - [Data Out D2] 104 Points to Par. 104 - [Preset Speed 4] PowerFlex
750-Series
Drive
(1)
545 - [Spd Ref A Sel] Port 0: Port 6 Reference Assigns 20-COMM-E to be used for the Reference. 895 - [Data In A1] Port 0: Accel Time 1 Points to Par. 535 in the drive. 896 - [Data In A2] Port 0: Testpoint Sel 1 Points to Par. 970 in the drive. 897 - [Data In B1] Port 5: Anlg Out1 Hi Points to Par. 90 in Port 5 (I/O module). 905 - [Data Out A1] Port 0: DC Bus Volts Points to Par. 11 in the drive. 906 - [Data Out A2] Port 0: Open Loop Fdbk Points to Par. 137 in the drive. 907 - [Data Out B1] Port 5: Anlg Out0 Data Points to Par. 77 in Port 5 (I/O module). 20-COMM-E
Adapter
04 - [IP Addr Cfg 1]
07 - [IP Addr Cfg 4]
10.91.100.79 IP address for the adapter.
08 - [Subnet Cfg 1]
11 - [Subnet Cfg 4]
255.255.248.0 Subnet mask for the adapter.
23 - [DPI I/O Cfg] xxx1 1111 Enables Cmd/Ref and Datalinks A…D. 35 - [M-S Input] xxx1 1111 Configures the I/O Data to be transferred from the controller on the network to the drive.
36 - [M-S Output] xxx1 1111 Configures the I/O Data to be transferred from the drive to the controller on the network.
(1) In this example, the 20-COMM-E adapter/20-750-20COMM Communication Carrier Card is installed in Port 6, and a 24V I/O module is installed in Port 5. Also, Data In B2…D2 (Parameters 898…902) and Data Out B2…D2 (Parameters 908…912) are enabled, but not used. ……
TIP: Data In parameters are inputs into the drive that come from controller outputs (for example, data to write to a drive parameter). Data Out parameters are outputs from the drive that go to controller inputs (for example, data to read a drive parameter).
►
Using the I/O 5-15
20-COMM-E EtherNet/IP Adapter User Manual
Publication 20COMM-UM010H-EN-P
Controller Tags
When you add the adapter and drive to the I/O configuration (Chapter 4), RSLogix 5000 software automatically creates generic (non-descriptive) controller tags for them. In this example program, the following controller tags are used.
Figure 5.4 ControlLogix Controller Tags for Drive Generic Profile Example Ladder Logic Program
You can expand the Input and Output tags to reveal the input and output configuration.
Figure 5.5 ControlLogix Input Image for Drive Generic Profile Example Ladder Logic Program
PowerFlex 70 Drive
16-bit Speed Feedback and
Datalinks
PowerFlex 750-Series Drive
32-bit Speed Feedback and
Datalinks
Name b. I Data Type Description
-
+ My_PowerFlex_Drive:C AB:ETHER ...
-
+ My_PowerFlex_Drive:I AB:ETHER ...
+ My PowerFlex Drive:O AB:ETHER ...
Name b. I Data Type Description
- My_PowerFlex_Drive:I AB:ETHER ...
--
- My_PowerFlex_Drive:I.Data INT[12] Input Image
-
+ My_PowerFlex_Drive:I.Data[O] INT Pad Word
-
+ My_PowerFlex_Drive:I.Data[1) INT Pad Word
-
+ My_PowerFlex_Drive:I.Data[2] INT Logic Status
-
+ My_PowerFlex_Drive:I.Data[3] INT Speed Feedback
-
+ My_PowerFlex_Drive:I.Data[4) INT Datalink Out A 1
-
+ My_PowerFlex_Drive:I.Data[5) INT Datalink Out A2
-
+ My_PowerFlex_Drive:I.Data[6] INT Datalink Out 81
-
+ My_PowerFlex_Drive:I.Data[7] INT Datalink Out 82
-
+ My_PowerFlex_Drive:I.Data[8) INT Datalink Out C1
-
+ My_PowerFlex_Drive:I.Data[9) INT Datalink Out C2
-
+ My_PowerFlex_Drive:I.Data[10] INT Datalink Out D1
+ My_PowerFlex_Drive:I.Data[11] INT Datalink Out D2
Name "' [ Data Type Description
-
- My_PowerFlex_Drive:I A8:ETHER ...
-
- My_PowerFlex_Drive:I.Data INT(22] Input Image
-
+ My_PowerFlex_Drive:I.Data[O) INT Pad Word
-
+ My_PowerFlex_Drive:I.Data[1) INT Pad Word
+ My_PowerFlex_Drive:I.Data[2) INT Logic Status
-..... + My_PowerFlex_Drive:I.Data[3) INT Not Used
-
+ My_PowerFlex_Drive:I.Data[4) INT Feed8ack (LSW)
-
+ My_PowerFlex_Drive:I.Data[5) INT Feedback (MSW)
-
+ My_PowerFlex_Drive:I.Data[6) INT Datalink Out A1 (LSWJ -
+ My_PowerFlex_Drive:I.Data[7) INT Datalink Out A1 (MSW) + My_PowerFlex_Drive:I.Data[8) INT Datalink Out A2 (LSWJ -..... + My_PowerFlex_Drive:I.Data[9) INT Datalink Out A2 (MSW) ..... + My_PowerFlex_Drive:I.Data[10] INT Datalink Out B1 (LSWJ -
+ My_PowerFlex_Drive:I.Data[11] INT Datalink Out 81 (MSW) -
+ My_PowerFlex_Drive:I.Data[12] INT Datalink Out 82 (LSWJ -
+ My_PowerFlex_Drive:I.Data[13] INT Datalink Out B2 (MSW) + My_PowerFlex_Drive:I.Data[14] INT Datalink Out C1 (LSWJ -..... + My_PowerFlex_Drive:I.Data[15] INT Datalink Out C1 (MSW) -
+ My_PowerFlex_Drive:I.Oata[16] INT Datalink Out C2 (LSWJ -
+ My_PowerFlex_Drive:I.Data[17] INT Datalink Out C2 (MSW) -
+ My_PowerFlex_Drive:I.Data[18] INT Datalink Out D1 (LSW) + My_PowerFlex_Drive:I.Data[19] INT Datalink Out D1 (MSW) -..... + My_PowerFlex_Drive:I.Data[20] INT Datalink Out D2 (LSW) i-- ~ My_PowerFlex_Drive:I.Data[21] INT Datalink Out 02 (MSW) 5-16 Using the I/O
20-COMM-E EtherNet/IP Adapter User Manual
Publication 20COMM-UM010H-EN-P
Figure 5.6 ControlLogix Output Image for Drive Generic Profile Example Ladder Logic Program
Program Tags
To use the Controller tags that are automatically created, you need to create the following Program tags for this example program.
Figure 5.7 ControlLogix Program Tags for Drive Generic Profile Example Ladder Logic Program
PowerFlex 70 Drive
16-bit Speed Reference and
Datalinks
PowerFlex 750-Series Drive
32-bit Speed Reference and
Datalinks
Name b. I Data Type Description
,_ - My_Powe1Fle>1_Drive:O AB:ETHER ...
,_ - My_PowerFlex_Drive:O.Data INTl10] Output Image
,_ + My_PowerFle>1_D1ive:O.Data[O] INT Logic Command
,_ + My_PowerFlex_Drive:O.Dalal1] INT Speed Reference
+ My_PowerFlex_Drive:O.DataI2] INT Datalink In A 1 ,-
+ My_PowerFle>1_D1ive:O.Data[3] INT Datalink In A2 ,-,_ + My_PowerFle>1_D1ive:O.Data[4] INT Datalink In Bl ,_ + My_PowerFlex_Drive:O.DataI5] INT Datalink In 82
..... + My_PowerFlex_Drive:O.DataI6] INT Datalink In C1 + My_PowerFlex_Drive:O.DataI7] INT Datalink In C2 ,-
,- + My_PowerFlex_Drive:O.DatalB] INT Datalink In D1
+ My PowerFle>1 D,ive:O.Data[9] INT Datalink In D2
Name t, I Data Type Description
-
- My_PowerFle>1_Drive:O AB:ETHER ...
-
- My_PowerFle>1_Drive:O.Data INT(20( Output Image
-
+ My_PowerFle>1_Drive:O.Data[O) INT Logic Command
-
+ My_PowerFle>1_Drive:O.Data[1) INT Not Used
-
+ My_PowerFle>1_Drive:O.Data[2) INT Reference (LSW)
-
+ My_PowerFle>1_Drive:O.Data[3) INT A eference (MSW)
-
+ My_PowerFle>1_Drive:O.Data[4) INT Datalink In A 1 (LSW) -
+ My_PowerFle>1_Drive:O.Data[5) INT Datafink lnA1 (MSW) -
+ My_PowerFle>1_Drive:O.Data[6) INT Datalink lnA2 [LSW) -
+ My_PowerFle>1_0rive:O.Data[7) INT Datalink In A2 (MSW) -
+ My_PowerFle>1_Drive:O.Data[8) INT Datalink In B1 [LSW) -
+ My_PowerFle>1_Drive:O.Data[9) INT Datalink In B1 (MSW) -
+ My_PowerFle>1_Drive:O.Data[10] INT Datalink In B2 (LSW) -
+ My_PowerFle>1_Drive:O.Data[11] INT Datalink In B2 [MSW) -
+ My_PowerFle>1_Drive:O.Oata[12] INT Datalink In Cl (LSW) -
+ My_PowerFle>1_Drive:O.Data[13] INT Datalink In C1 (MSW) -
+ My_PowerFle>1_Drive:O.Data[14] INT Datalink In C2 (LSW) -
+ My_PowerFle>1_Drive:O.Data[15] INT Datalink In C2 [MSW) -
+ My_PowerFle>1_Drive:O.Data[16] INT Datalink In D1 (LSW) -
+ My_PowerFle>1_Drive:O.Data[17] INT Datalink In Dl (MSW) -
+ My_PowerFle>1_Drive:O.Data[18] INT Datalink In D2 [LSW) + My PowerFle>1 Drive:O.Data[19] INT Datalink In D2 (MSW) - - - - Name t, Style Data Type
Command_Clear_Faults Decimal BOOL
--
Command_Forward_Reverse Decimal BOOL
-
Command_Jog Decimal BOOL
-
Command_Start Decimal BOOL
Command_Stop Decimal BOOL
--
+ Speed_Feedback Decimal DINT
-
+ Speed_Reference Decimal DINT
-
Status_Active Decimal BOOL
-
Status_At_Speed Decimal BOOL
-
Status_Faulted Decimal BOOL
-
Status_Forward Decimal BOOL
-
Status_Ready Decimal BOOL
Status_Reverse Decimal BOOL
Using the I/O 5-17
20-COMM-E EtherNet/IP Adapter User Manual
Publication 20COMM-UM010H-EN-P
Depending on the drive being used, see one of the following subsections for information on speed Reference and Feedback scaling.
Figure 5.8 ControlLogix Example Ladder Logic Program Using a Drive Generic Profile for Logic Status/Feedback
Subsection Page
PowerFlex 70/700/700H and PowerFlex 700L Drives with 700 Control 5-7 PowerFlex 700S and PowerFlex 700L Drives with 700S Control 5-8 PowerFlex 753/755 Drives 5-8
PowerFlex Digital DC Drives 5-8
PowerFlex 70
and PowerFlex
750-Series
Drives
PowerFlex 70
Drive Speed
Feedback
PowerFlex
750-Series
Drive Speed
Feedback
My_PowerFlex_Drive:1.Datal2J.0 Status_Ready
My _PowerFlex_Drive: I Oata l21 .1 Status_Active
My_PowerFlex_Drive:I.Datal2J.3 Status_Forward
My_PowerFlex_Drive:IOata l2J.3 Status_Reverse
r-------, / r------------------------<
My_PowerFlex_Drive:I.Datal2J.7
My_PowerFlex_Drive:I.Datal2J.8
Status_Faulted
Status_At_Speed
~------MOV'-----~
Move
Source My_PowerFlex_Drive:IOatal31
0•
Dest Speed_Feedback
0•
~------ ~-OP-------~
Copy File
Souroe My_Pow,erFlex_Drive:IData[4]
Dest Speed_F,eedl>aok
Leng!lh 2
5-18 Using the I/O
20-COMM-E EtherNet/IP Adapter User Manual
Publication 20COMM-UM010H-EN-P
Figure 5.9 ControlLogix Example Ladder Logic Program Using a Drive Generic Profile for Logic Command/Reference
Example Datalink Data
The Datalink data used in the example program is shown in Figure 5.10.
Note that to describe the parameters to which the Datalinks are assigned, you may want to add descriptions to the automatically-created generic controller tags or create a User Defined Data Types (UDDT).
PowerFlex 70
and PowerFlex
750-Series
Drives
PowerFlex 70
Drive Speed
Reference
PowerFlex
750-Series
Drive Speed
Reference
Command_Stop My_PowerFlex_Drive•O.Data[0].0
Command_Start My_PowerFlex_Drive•O.Data[0].1
Command_Jog My_PowerFlex_Drive•O.Data[0].2
Command_ Clear _Faults My_PowerFlex_Drive•O.Data[0].3
Command _Forward_ Reverse My_PowerFlex_Drive•O.Data[0).4 Command_Forward_Reverse My_PowerFlex_Drive•O.Data[0).5
f-------< / f----------------------(
~-----MOV-----~
Move
Source Speed_Reference
0•
Dest My_PowerFlex_Drive•O.Data[1I
0•
~----- CO i-'------~
Copy File
Sou roe S.peed_Refer,enoe
Dest My_PowerFlex_Drive:O.Data[2]
Length 2
Using the I/O 5-19
20-COMM-E EtherNet/IP Adapter User Manual
Publication 20COMM-UM010H-EN-P
Figure 5.10 ControlLogix Example Datalinks for Ladder Logic Program Using a Drive Generic Profile
For PowerFlex 7-Class drives, the scaling may need to be multiplied by 10 or 100, depending on the parameter. For more information, see Datalink Scaling on page 5-9.
PowerFlex 70 Drive
PowerFlex 750-Series Drive
- My_Powe,Flex_D,ive:I.Data
+ My_PowerFlex_Drive:I.Data[O)
+ My_PowerFlex_Drive:1.Data[l )
+ My_PowerFlex_Drive:I.Data[2)
+ My_PowerFlex_Drive:I.Data[3)
+ My_PowerFlex_Drive:1.Data[4)
+ My_PowerFlex_Drive:I.Data[5)
+ My_PowerFlex_Drive:I.Data[6)
+ My_PowerFlex_Drive:1.Data[7)
+ My_PowerFlex_Drive:I.Data[B)
+ My_PowerFlex_Drive:I.Data[9)
+ My_PowerFlex_Drive:I.Data[1 OJ
+ My_PowerFlex_Drive:I.Data[11)
- My_Powe,Flex_D,ive:O.Data
+ My_PowerFlex_Drive:O.Data[O]
+ My_PowerFlex_Drive:O.Data[l ]
+ My_PowerFlex_Drive:O.Data[2]
+ My_PowerFlex_Drive:O.Data[3]
+ My_PowerFlex_Drive:O.Data[4]
+ My_PowerFlex_Drive:O.Data[5]
+ My_PowerFlex_Drive:O.Data[6]
+ My_PowerFlex_Drive:O.Data[7]
+ My_PowerFlex_Drive:O.Data[B]
+ My_PowerFlex_Drive:O.Data[9]
- My_PowerFlex_Drive:I.Data
+ My_PowerFlex_Drive:I.Data(O]
+ My_PowerFlex_Drive:I.Data(l]
+ My_PowerFlex_Drive:I.Data(2J
+ My_PowerFlex_Drive:I.Data(3]
+ My_PowerFlex_Drive:I.Data(4]
+ My_PowerFlex_Drive:I.Data(5J
+ My_PowerFlex_Drive:I.Data(6J
+ My_PowerFlex_Drive:I.Data(71
+ My_PowerFlex_Drive:I.Data(8]
+ My_PowerFlex_Drive:I.Data(9]
+ My_PowerFlex_Drive:I.Data(lO]
+ My_PowerFlex_Drive:I.Data(l l I
+ My_PowerFlex_Drive:I.Data(l 2]
+ My_PowerFlex_Drive:I.Data(13]
+ My_PowerFlex_Drive:I.Data(l 4]
+ My_PowerFlex_Drive:I.Data(15]
+ My_PowerFlex_Drive:I.Data(l 6]
+ My_PowerFlex_Drive:I.Data(l 7]
+ My_PowerFlex_Drive:I.Data(l8]
+ My_PowerFlex_Drive:I.Data(19]
+ My_PowerFlex_Drive:I.Data(20]
+ My_PowerFlex_Drive:I.Data(21]
- My_PowerFlex_Drive:O.Data
+ My_PowerFlex_Drive:O.Oata(O)
+ My_PowerFlex_Drive:O.Data(l)
+ My_PowerFlex_Drive:O.Oata(2)
+ My_PowerFlex_Drive:O.Data(3)
+ My_PowerFlex_Drive:O.Oata(4)
+ My_PowerFlex_Drive:O.Data(5)
+ My_PowerFlex_Drive:O.Oata(6J
+ My_PowerFlex_Drive:O.Data(7)
+ My_PowerFlex_Drive:0.Data(8)
+ My_PowerFlex_Drive:O.Data(9)
+ My_PowerFlex_Drive:O.Data(l O]
lJ. Value • Data Type Description
.. } AB:ETHER
INT[l 2) Input lmaQe
Pad Word
Pad Word
Logic Status
Speed Feedback
Datalink Out Al
Datalink OutA2
Datalink Out B1
Datalink Out 82
Datalink Out Cl
Datalink Out C2
Datalink Out 01
Datalink Out 02
Output Image
Logic Command
Speed Reference
Datalink lnA1
Datalink lnA2
Datalink In Bl
Datalink In 82
Datalink In Cl
Datalink In C2
Datalink In D1
Datalink In D2
Description
Input Image
PadW01d
PadWo,d
Lo9icStatus
Not Used
Feedback [LSWJ
Feedback [MSW)
DatalinkOutAl (LSWJ
DatalinkOutAl (MSW]
Datalink Out A2 (LSW)
Datalink Out A2 (MSW]
Datalink Out B1 (LSW)
Datalink Out Bl (MSW]
Datalink Out 82 (LSWJ
Datalink Out 82 (MSW)
Datalink Out Cl (LSW]
Datalink Out Cl (MSW)
Datalink Out C2 (LSW)
Datalink Out C2 (MSW)
Datalink Out Dl (LSW)
Datalink Out 01 [MSW)
Datalink Out 02 (LSW)
Datalink Out 02 [MSW)
Output Image
Logic Command
Not Used
Reference [LSWJ
Reference [MSW)
_ ..__+ ... M:..,Y-c..;PowerFlex_Drive:O.Oatc::,(.,;11.,_J --------'-''"'- Datalink In Al (LSWJ
Datalink In Al (MSW]
Datalink lnA2 (LSW)
Datalink In A2 (MSW]
Datalink In 81 (LSW)
Datalink In Bl (MSW]
Datalink In 82 (LSWJ
Datalink In 82 (MSW]
5-20 Using the I/O
20-COMM-E EtherNet/IP Adapter User Manual
Publication 20COMM-UM010H-EN-P
Figure 5.11 ControlLogix Example Ladder Logic Program Using a Drive Generic Profile for PowerFlex 750-Series Drives Datalink Scaling For PowerFlex 750-Series drives, the destination tag can be a REAL or DINT. Make the destination tag the same data type as the parameter being read. For information on Datalink scaling, see page 5-9.
TIP: When using a drive that has 16-bit Datalinks (PowerFlex 70, PowerFlex 700, and PowerFlex 700H drives) to transfer a 32-bit parameter, two contiguous drive Datalink parameters (for example, Data Out A1/A2, B1/B2, and so forth) are required. To determine if a parameter is a 32-bit parameter, see the Parameter section in the drive documentation and look for a symbol in the ‘No.’ column . (All parameters in PowerFlex 700 Series B drives are 32-bit parameters.) For example, parameter 3 - [Output Current] in a PowerFlex 70 EC drive is a 32-bit parameter. When using a drive that has 32-bit Datalinks (PowerFlex 700 VC, PowerFlex 700S, and PowerFlex 750-Series drives), only one drive Datalink parameter is required to transfer any parameter.
32 ►
_op
Co,py File -
Sourc e My _Pow erFlex_D rive: I. D·ata [6)
Dest DC_Bus_v oltage
Length 2
_op
Co,py File -
Sou roe My_Pow erFlex_Drive:I.Dataf8)
Dest Open_Loop_Fdbk
Leng~h 2
_op
Copy File -
Sourc e My_PowerFlex_Drive:I. Data[1 OJ
Dest Anlg _Out0_Data
Len~h 2
con
Copy File
-Sour ce Accel_Time_ 1
Dest My_Pow erFlex_Drive:O.D·ata[4J
Len~h 2
con
Copy File
-Sourc e T-estp oint_Sel_ 1
Dest t.ly_Pow erFlex_Drive:O.Data[6)
Len~h 2
con
Copy File
-Sourc e A nlg_Out1_ Hi
Dest My_PowerFlex_Drive:O.DatafBJ
Len¢h 2
Using the I/O 5-21
20-COMM-E EtherNet/IP Adapter User Manual
Publication 20COMM-UM010H-EN-P
PLC-5, SLC 500, or
MicroLogix 1100/1400
Controller Example
Drive and Adapter Parameter Settings
The following drive and adapter settings were used for the example ladder logic program in this section.
Device Parameter Value Description
PowerFlex 70 EC
Drive
90 - [Speed Ref A Sel] 22 (DPI Port 5) Assigns 20-COMM-E to be used for the Reference. 300 - [Data In A1] 140 Points to Par. 140 - [Accel Time 1] 301 - [Data In A2] 142 Points to Par. 142 - [Decel Time 1] 302 - [Data In B1] 100 Points to Par. 100 - [Jog Speed] 303 - [Data In B2] 155 Points to Par. 155 - [Stop Mode A] 304 - [Data In C1] 101 Points to Par. 101 - [Preset Speed 1] 305 - [Data In C2] 102 Points to Par. 102 - [Preset Speed 2] 306 - [Data In D1] 103 Points to Par. 103 - [Preset Speed 3] 307 - [Data In D2] 104 Points to Par. 104 - [Preset Speed 4] 310 - [Data Out A1] 140 Points to Par. 140 - [Accel Time 1] 311 - [Data Out A2] 142 Points to Par. 142 - [Decel Time 1] 312 - [Data Out B1] 100 Points to Par. 100 - [Jog Speed] 313 - [Data Out B2] 155 Points to Par. 155 - [Stop Mode A] 314 - [Data Out C1] 101 Points to Par. 101 - [Preset Speed 1] 315 - [Data Out C2] 102 Points to Par. 102 - [Preset Speed 2] 316 - [Data Out D1] 103 Points to Par. 103 - [Preset Speed 3] 317 - [Data Out D2] 104 Points to Par. 104 - [Preset Speed 4] PowerFlex
750-Series
Drive (1)
545 - [Spd Ref A Sel] Port 0: Port 6 Reference Assigns 20-COMM-E to be used for the Reference. 895 - [Data In A1] Port 0: Accel Time 1 Points to Par. 535 in the drive. 896 - [Data In A2] Port 0: Testpoint Sel 1 Points to Par. 970 in the drive. 897 - [Data In B1] Port 5: Anlg Out1 Hi Points to Par. 90 in Port 5 (I/O module). 905 - [Data Out A1] Port 0: DC Bus Volts Points to Par. 11 in the drive. 906 - [Data Out A2] Port 0: Open Loop Fdbk Points to Par. 137 in the drive. 907 - [Data Out B1] Port 5: Anlg Out0 Data Points to Par. 77 in Port 5 (I/O module). 20-COMM-E
Adapter
04 - [IP Addr Cfg 1]
07 - [IP Addr Cfg 4]
10.91.100.79 IP address for the adapter.
08 - [Subnet Cfg 1]
11 - [Subnet Cfg 4]
255.255.248.0 Subnet mask for the adapter.
23 - [DPI I/O Cfg] xxx1 1111 Enables Cmd/Ref and Datalinks A…D. 35 - [M-S Input] xxx1 1111 Configures the I/O Data to be transferred from the controller on the network to the drive.
36 - [M-S Output] xxx1 1111 Configures the I/O Data to be transferred from the drive to the controller on the network.
(1) In this example, the 20-COMM-E adapter/20-750-20COMM Communication Carrier Card is installed in Port 6, and a 24V I/O module is installed in Port 5. Also, Data In B2…D2 (Parameters 898…902) and Data Out B2…D2 (Parameters 908…912) are enabled, but not used. ……
TIP: Data In parameters are inputs into the drive that come from controller outputs (for example, data to write to a drive parameter). Data Out parameters are outputs from the drive that go to controller inputs (for example, data to read a drive parameter).
►
5-22 Using the I/O
20-COMM-E EtherNet/IP Adapter User Manual
Publication 20COMM-UM010H-EN-P
Understanding Controller Data Table Addresses
Because PLC-5, SLC 500, and MicroLogix 1100/1400 controllers are 16-bit platforms and are used with the 32-bit 20-COMM-E adapter, the data will be transposed from the least-significant word (LSW) to the most-significant word (MSW) in the controller.
When the I/O was configured (Chapter 4), an available data table address (N20) was used. Figure 5.12 shows the entire data file address structure for this example.
Figure 5.12 Data File Table for Example Ladder Logic Program Important: The N20:0 data table address in this example is used to set a control timeout value (in seconds) which determines how long it will take the adapter to detect a communication loss. Enter a valid value (1…32767) for N20:0. A value of zero (0) is not valid, because it disables the timeout and all I/O connections (Logic Command/Status, Reference/Feedback, and Datalinks) intended for the drive will not execute. A timeout value of 5…20 seconds is recommended.
Depending on the drive, Table 5.G, Table 5.H, Table 5.I, Table 5.J, Table 5.K, or Table 5.L show the I/O definitions as they relate to the N20 data table addresses in Figure 5.12 being used in this example.
TIP: When using a drive that has 16-bit Datalinks (PowerFlex 70, PowerFlex 700, and PowerFlex 700H drives) to transfer a 32-bit parameter, two contiguous drive Datalink parameters (for example, Data Out A1/A2, B1/B2, and so forth) are required. To determine if a parameter is a 32-bit parameter, see the Parameter section in the drive documentation and look for a symbol in the ‘No.’ column . (All parameters in PowerFlex 700 Series B drives are 32-bit parameters.) For example, parameter 3 - [Output Current] in a PowerFlex 70 EC drive is a 32-bit parameter. When using a drive that has 32-bit Datalinks (PowerFlex 700 VC, PowerFlex 700S, and PowerFlex 750-Series drives), only one drive Datalink parameter is required to transfer any parameter.
32 ►
20 : 20 0 1512 3
20 : 30 0 0
ill ill
N20:0
Symbol:
R adi<: I Decimal ..:.J ::=::::::::==============~ Columns:[,'o"'..:.J Desc:
jmo....:.J
....:.J ,Eroperties .!:!_sage
Using the I/O 5-23
20-COMM-E EtherNet/IP Adapter User Manual
Publication 20COMM-UM010H-EN-P
PowerFlex 70, PowerFlex 700 with Standard Control, and PowerFlex 700H Drives When using any of these products—whi ch all contain INT (16-bit format) data types—you will read from and writ e to the MSW data table address in the controller.
Table 5.G Controller Data Table Addresses for:
PowerFlex 70 Drives with Standard or Enhanced Control
PowerFlex 700 Drives with Standard Control
PowerFlex 700H Drives
Data Table Address Description
N20:1 Logic Status (see Appendix D)
N20:2 Reserved
N20:3 Speed Feedback
N20:4 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 310 [Data Out A1] LSW N20:5 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 310 [Data Out A1] MSW N20:6 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 311 [Data Out A2] LSW N20:7 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 311 [Data Out A2] MSW N20:8 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 312 [Data Out B1] LSW N20:9 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 312 [Data Out B1] MSW N20:10 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 313 [Data Out B2] LSW N20:11 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 313 [Data Out B2] MSW N20:12 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 314 [Data Out C1] LSW N20:13 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 314 [Data Out C1] MSW N20:14 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 315 [Data Out C2] LSW N20:15 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 315 [Data Out C2] MSW N20:16 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 316 [Data Out D1] LSW N20:17 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 316 [Data Out D1] MSW N20:18 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 317 [Data Out D2] LSW N20:19 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 317 [Data Out D2] MSW N20:20 Logic Command (see Appendix
D)
N20:21 Reserved
N20:22 Speed Reference
N20:23 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 300 [Data In A1] LSW N20:24 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 300 [Data In A1] MSW N20:25 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 301 [Data In A2] LSW N20:26 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 301 [Data In A2] MSW N20:27 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 302 [Data In B1] LSW N20:28 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 302 [Data In B1] MSW N20:29 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 303 [Data In B2] LSW N20:30 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 303 [Data In B2] MSW N20:31 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 304 [Data In C1] LSW N20:32 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 304 [Data In C1] MSW N20:33 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 305 [Data In C2] LSW N20:34 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 305 [Data In C2] MSW N20:35 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 306 [Data In D1] LSW N20:36 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 306 [Data In D1] MSW N20:37 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 307 [Data In D2] LSW N20:38 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 307 [Data In D2] MSW 5-24 Using the I/O
20-COMM-E EtherNet/IP Adapter User Manual
Publication 20COMM-UM010H-EN-P
PowerFlex 700 Drives with Vector Control and PowerFlex 700L Drives with 700 Control
When using these drives, which contain DINT (32-bit format) data types, you will read from and write to the LSW data table address in the controller.
Table 5.H Controller Data Table Addresses for:
PowerFlex 700 Drives with Vector Control
PowerFlex 700L Drives with 700 Control
Data Table Address Description
N20:1 Logic Status (see Appendix D)
N20:2 Reserved
N20:3 Speed Feedback
N20:4 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 310 [Data Out A1] LSW N20:5 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 310 [Data Out A1] MSW N20:6 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 311 [Data Out A2] LSW N20:7 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 311 [Data Out A2] MSW N20:8 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 312 [Data Out B1] LSW N20:9 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 312 [Data Out B1] MSW N20:10 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 313 [Data Out B2] LSW N20:11 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 313 [Data Out B2] MSW N20:12 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 314 [Data Out C1] LSW N20:13 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 314 [Data Out C1] MSW N20:14 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 315 [Data Out C2] LSW N20:15 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 315 [Data Out C2] MSW N20:16 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 316 [Data Out D1] LSW N20:17 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 316 [Data Out D1] MSW N20:18 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 317 [Data Out D2] LSW N20:19 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 317 [Data Out D2] MSW N20:20 Logic Command (see Appendix D)
N20:21 Reserved
N20:22 Speed Reference
N20:23 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 300 [Data In A1] LSW N20:24 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 300 [Data In A1] MSW N20:25 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 301 [Data In A2] LSW N20:26 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 301 [Data In A2] MSW N20:27 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 302 [Data In B1] LSW N20:28 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 302 [Data In B1] MSW N20:29 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 303 [Data In B2] LSW N20:30 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 303 [Data In B2] MSW N20:31 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 304 [Data In C1] LSW N20:32 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 304 [Data In C1] MSW N20:33 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 305 [Data In C2] LSW N20:34 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 305 [Data In C2] MSW N20:35 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 306 [Data In D1] LSW N20:36 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 306 [Data In D1] MSW N20:37 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 307 [Data In D2] LSW N20:38 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 307 [Data In D2] MSW Using the I/O 5-25
20-COMM-E EtherNet/IP Adapter User Manual
Publication 20COMM-UM010H-EN-P
PowerFlex 700S, PowerFlex 700L with 700S Control, PowerFlex 750-Series, and PowerFlex Digital DC Drives
When using any of these drives, which contain both DINT (32-bit format) and REAL (floating point format) data types, you will always read from and write to the LSW data table address in the controller first. Then if the data value exceeds 16 bits, the remaining value will be in the MSW data table address.
Table 5.I Controller Data Table Addresses for PowerFlex 700S Drives (Phase I Control) Data Table Address Description
N20:1 Logic Status (see Appendix D)
N20:2 Speed Feedback LSW
N20:3 Speed Feedback MSW
N20:4 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 724/725 [Data Out A1] LSW N20:5 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 724/725 [Data Out A1] MSW N20:6 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 726/727 [Data Out A2] LSW N20:7 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 726/727 [Data Out A2] MSW N20:8 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 728/729 [Data Out B1] LSW N20:9 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 728/729 [Data Out B1] MSW N20:10 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 730/731 [Data Out B2] LSW N20:11 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 730/731 [Data Out B2] MSW N20:12 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 732/733 [Data Out C1] LSW N20:13 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 732/733 [Data Out C1] MSW N20:14 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 734/735 [Data Out C2] LSW N20:15 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 734/735 [Data Out C2] MSW N20:16 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 736/737 [Data Out D1] LSW N20:17 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 736/737 [Data Out D1] MSW N20:18 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 738/739 [Data Out D2] LSW N20:19 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 738/739 [Data Out D2] MSW N20:20 Logic Command (see Appendix
D)
N20:21 Speed Reference LSW
N20:22 Speed Reference MSW
N20:23 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 707/708 [Data In A1] LSW N20:24 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 707/708 [Data In A1] MSW N20:25 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 709/710 [Data In A2] LSW N20:26 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 709/710 [Data In A2] MSW N20:27 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 711/712 [Data In B1] LSW N20:28 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 711/712 [Data In B1] MSW N20:29 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 713/714 [Data In B2] LSW N20:30 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 713/714 [Data In B2] MSW N20:31 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 715/716 [Data In C1] LSW N20:32 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 715/716 [Data In C1] MSW N20:33 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 717/718 [Data In C2] LSW N20:34 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 717/718 [Data In C2] MSW N20:35 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 719/720 [Data In D1] LSW N20:36 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 719/720 [Data In D1] MSW N20:37 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 721/722 [Data In D2] LSW N20:38 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 721/722 [Data In D2] MSW 5-26 Using the I/O
20-COMM-E EtherNet/IP Adapter User Manual
Publication 20COMM-UM010H-EN-P
Table 5.J Controller Data Table Addresses for:
PowerFlex 700S Drives with Phase II Control
PowerFlex 700L Drives with 700S Control
Data Table Address Description
N20:1 Logic Status (see Appendix D)
N20:2 Speed Feedback LSW
N20:3 Speed Feedback MSW
N20:4 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 660 [DPI Data Out A1] LSW N20:5 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 660 [DPI Data Out A1] MSW N20:6 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 661 [DPI Data Out A2] LSW N20:7 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 661 [DPI Data Out A2] MSW N20:8 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 662 [DPI Data Out B1] LSW N20:9 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 662 [DPI Data Out B1] MSW N20:10 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 663 [DPI Data Out B2] LSW N20:11 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 663 [DPI Data Out B2] MSW N20:12 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 664 [DPI Data Out C1] LSW N20:13 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 664 [DPI Data Out C1] MSW N20:14 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 665 [DPI Data Out C2] LSW N20:15 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 665 [DPI Data Out C2] MSW N20:16 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 666 [DPI Data Out D1] LSW N20:17 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 666 [DPI Data Out D1] MSW N20:18 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 667 [DPI Data Out D2] LSW N20:19 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 667 [DPI Data Out D2] MSW N20:20 Logic Command (see Appendix D)
N20:21 Speed Reference LSW
N20:22 Speed Reference MSW
N20:23 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 651 [DPI Data In A1] LSW N20:24 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 651 [DPI Data In A1] MSW N20:25 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 652 [DPI Data In A2] LSW N20:26 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 652 [DPI Data In A2] MSW N20:27 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 653 [DPI Data In B1] LSW N20:28 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 653 [DPI Data In B1] MSW N20:29 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 654 [DPI Data In B2] LSW N20:30 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 654 [DPI Data In B2] MSW N20:31 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 655 [DPI Data In C1] LSW N20:32 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 655 [DPI Data In C1] MSW N20:33 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 656 [DPI Data In C2] LSW N20:34 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 656 [DPI Data In C2] MSW N20:35 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 657 [DPI Data In D1] LSW N20:36 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 657 [DPI Data In D1] MSW N20:37 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 658 [DPI Data In D2] LSW N20:38 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 658 [DPI Data In D2] MSW Using the I/O 5-27
20-COMM-E EtherNet/IP Adapter User Manual
Publication 20COMM-UM010H-EN-P
Table 5.K Controller Data Table Addresses for PowerFlex 750-Series Drives Data Table Address Description
N20:1 Logic Status (see Appendix D)
N20:2 Speed Feedback LSW
N20:3 Speed Feedback MSW
N20:4 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 905 [Data Out A1] LSW N20:5 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 905 [Data Out A1] MSW N20:6 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 906 [Data Out A2] LSW N20:7 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 906 [Data Out A2] MSW N20:8 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 907 [Data Out B1] LSW N20:9 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 907 [Data Out B1] MSW N20:10 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 908 [Data Out B2] LSW N20:11 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 908 [Data Out B2] MSW N20:12 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 909 [Data Out C1] LSW N20:13 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 909 [Data Out C1] MSW N20:14 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 910 [Data Out C2] LSW N20:15 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 910 [Data Out C2] MSW N20:16 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 911 [Data Out D1] LSW N20:17 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 911 [Data Out D1] MSW N20:18 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 912 [Data Out D2] LSW N20:19 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 912 [Data Out D2] MSW N20:20 Logic Command (see Appendix D)
N20:21 Speed Reference LSW
N20:22 Speed Reference MSW
N20:23 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 895 [Data In A1] LSW N20:24 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 895 [Data In A1] MSW N20:25 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 896 [Data In A2] LSW N20:26 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 896 [Data In A2] MSW N20:27 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 897 [Data In B1] LSW N20:28 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 897 [Data In B1] MSW N20:29 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 898 [Data In B2] LSW N20:30 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 898 [Data In B2] MSW N20:31 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 899 [Data In C1] LSW N20:32 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 899 [Data In C1] MSW N20:33 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 900 [Data In C2] LSW N20:34 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 900 [Data In C2] MSW N20:35 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 901 [Data In D1] LSW N20:36 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 901 [Data In D1] MSW N20:37 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 902 [Data In D2] LSW N20:38 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 902 [Data In D2] MSW 5-28 Using the I/O
20-COMM-E EtherNet/IP Adapter User Manual
Publication 20COMM-UM010H-EN-P
With any drive, you can use the controller data table addresses to directly control and monitor the drive without creating any ladder logic program.
However, if you intend to use Human Machine Interface devices (PanelView, and so forth) to operate the drive and view its status, you will need to create descriptive controller data table addresses (Table 5.M and
Table 5.N) and a ladder logic program that will pass that data to the data table addresses used for messaging.
Table 5.L Controller Data Table Addresses for PowerFlex Digital DC Drives Data Table Address Description
N20:1 Logic Status (see Appendix D)
N20:2 Speed Feedback LSW
N20:3 Speed Feedback MSW
N20:4 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 618 [Data Out A1] LSW N20:5 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 618 [Data Out A1] MSW N20:6 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 619 [Data Out A2] LSW N20:7 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 619 [Data Out A2] MSW N20:8 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 620 [Data Out B1] LSW N20:9 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 620 [Data Out B1] MSW N20:10 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 621 [Data Out B2] LSW N20:11 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 621 [Data Out B2] MSW N20:12 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 622 [Data Out C1] LSW N20:13 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 622 [Data Out C1] MSW N20:14 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 623 [Data Out C2] LSW N20:15 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 623 [Data Out C2] MSW N20:16 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 624 [Data Out D1] LSW N20:17 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 624 [Data Out D1] MSW N20:18 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 625 [Data Out D2] LSW N20:19 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 625 [Data Out D2] MSW N20:20 Logic Command (see Appendix D)
N20:21 Speed Reference LSW
N20:22 Speed Reference MSW
N20:23 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 610 [Data In A1] LSW N20:24 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 610 [Data In A1] MSW N20:25 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 611 [Data In A2] LSW N20:26 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 611 [Data In A2] MSW N20:27 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 612 [Data In B1] LSW N20:28 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 612 [Data In B1] MSW N20:29 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 613 [Data In B2] LSW N20:30 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 613 [Data In B2] MSW N20:31 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 614 [Data In C1] LSW N20:32 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 614 [Data In C1] MSW N20:33 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 615 [Data In C2] LSW N20:34 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 615 [Data In C2] MSW N20:35 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 616 [Data In D1] LSW N20:36 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 616 [Data In D1] MSW N20:37 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 617 [Data In D2] LSW N20:38 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 617 [Data In D2] MSW Using the I/O 5-29
20-COMM-E EtherNet/IP Adapter User Manual
Publication 20COMM-UM010H-EN-P
Table 5.M Controller and Program Data Table Address Descriptions for Example Logic Status/Feedback Ladder Logic Program
Table 5.N Program and Controller Data Table Address Descriptions for Example Logic Command/Reference Ladder Logic Program
An example ladder logic program that uses these descriptive controller data table addresses and passes their data to the descriptive program data table addresses is shown in Figure 5.13, Figure 5.14, Figure 5.15, and Figure 5.16.
Figure 5.13 PLC-5, SLC 500, or MicroLogix 1100/1400 Example Ladder Logic Program for Logic Status
Description Controller Data
Table Address Description Program Data
Table Address
Drive Ready N20:1/0 Status Ready B3:1/0
Drive Active N20:1/1 Status Active B3:1/1
Actual Direction (XIO) N20:1/3 Status Forward B3:1/3
Actual Direction (XIC) N20:1/3 Status Reverse B3:1/4
Drive Faulted N20:1/7 Status Faulted B3:1/7
Drive At Speed N20:1/8 Status At Speed B3:1/8
Speed Feedback N20:3 Speed Feedback B30:3
Description Program Data
Table Address Description Controller Data
Table Address
Command Stop B3:20/0 Drive Stop N20:20/0
Command Start B3:20/1 Drive Start N20:20/1
Command Jog B3:20/2 Drive Jog N20:20/2
Command Clear Faults B3:20/3 Drive Clear Faults N20:20/3 Command Forward Reverse (XIO) B3:20/4 Drive Forward N20:20/4 Command Forward Reverse (XIC) B3:20/4 Drive Reverse N20:20/5 Speed Reference N30:22 Speed Reference N20:22
PowerFlex 70
and PowerFlex
750-Series
Drives
Drive Ready Stanis Ready
N20:l B3:1
0 Drive Active Starus Active
N20:l B3:1
Acnial Direction Status Forward
N20:l B3:1
Acmal Direction Starus Reverse
N20:l B3 :1
4 Drive Faulted Stanis Faulted
N20:l B3:1
Drive At S eed Starns At SJ:>eed
N20:l B3 :1
8 5-30 Using the I/O
20-COMM-E EtherNet/IP Adapter User Manual
Publication 20COMM-UM010H-EN-P
Figure 5.14 PLC-5, SLC 500, or MicroLogix 1100/1400 Example Ladder Logic Program for Speed Feedback
PowerFlex 70
Drive Speed
Feedback
PowerFlex
750-Series
Drive Speed
Feedback
Ori\·: ~?==CF:-=tb:.:·k
Lili_,&. \\"o,t
MOV
1------------------------------1 :Mov,:
.\·:ft ~.~f~b :.:k tl'..:. t i:. (1) 16bil ir.t:g:f:. into ,= 31 bi1:fl0=.tingpoin1 t-:20:l = ~~F:=r!.bi:kLS \\" (•:•~U!!.1:.)
t-:20:3 = ~~ F:=r!.bi:k MSW {,:ou.:r.t:.)
F8:0 = 3] bitfl~po i!!.I ~~F=C!.bi:k (cou.-11.t:.). X lOOD Drit·: S~F~bi:. t.:
L O"-,;:·\\·orc
RT ---~
>--------1 GtaeterTJ,.,,,.(A>B)
Sou.re• A N10:1
O<
Sou.rcaB 0
O<
T), i,- ::. ~p:?-?t ~-=th:. ·'!.·
Lo,,.·\\"ort
EQU ---~
~ I
Sou.rca A N"20:1
O<
Souse-:! B -3'l i6 0
-3271i&.O<
D!i\·: S?==tF::-:tbi:_1.:
Low\\"ort
LIM
Li:nit Te:.t
Lo-r,,;.·Ll!D -3-27$7.0
-317 .O<
T•st N2 :2
O<
Higl!Len -LO
Drin S~F~b! :k
Lo,...-\\·orc
-LO<
LIM
Li:nitTe~t
Loi.vLi::D
Te:.t
0.0 0.0<
N20:1
O<
Hig1!.Ll!D 3276i7.0
327$7.0<
D!iP ~?==tF-=tbi·'!.·
Low\\"ort
LES
L<.s Than (A<B)
Source A N20:1
O<
Sou.rc.B 0
O<
Drin ,~F~ ln :k
H igh \\"orG
EQU ---~
£.Gu::il
Sousc-:!A
Sou.rc•A
Sou.rc•B
Sou.rc•A
Sou.re.A
Sou.rc.B
N'l :3
15123<
-I
-! <
N10:3
Ul13 <
-I
-I<
N20:3
Ul13 <
-I
-I<
N20 :3
15123<
0 O<
N20:3
1;113<
0 O<
Source N20:3
151'l3<
D=:.t N30:3
S1W-C F~t.:.:t
H:nz or RPM
X I ~~~
1;113<
SUB ---~
S.u.bt:ra-ct
Souse-:! A N2 :2
O<
Sou.fc,:B 6553 ii.O
6; 53il.O<
°"" n :o
,~F~1": k
H~t: or RPM
XI ~~~
MOV
0.0<
-3"2i61!.0
-3"2 61!.0<
D:, t
,~F~t..:k
H~t: orRPM
XI ~~~
MOV
Mov,:
Sou.roe
D:, t
,~F~1" :l:
H<rt.:or RP~!
XD ~
MOV
Move
'Sou.re:
D:st
!~F~t .:k
H~tzorRP 1[
XI ~~
n :o
0.0<
N2 :1
O<
Fi :O
0.0<
N1 :1
O<
Fa:O
0.0<
,\DD ---~
A<!,1!
Source A N20:1
O<
Souscc:B 0553 0
6553ii.O<
n :o
0.0<
Using the I/O 5-31
20-COMM-E EtherNet/IP Adapter User Manual
Publication 20COMM-UM010H-EN-P
Depending on the drive being used, see one of the following subsections for information on speed Reference and Feedback scaling.
Figure 5.15 PLC-5, SLC 500, or MicroLogix 1100/1400 Example Ladder Logic Program for Logic Command
Subsection Page
PowerFlex 70/700/700H and PowerFlex 700L Drives with 700 Control 5-7 PowerFlex 700S and PowerFlex 700L Drives with 700S Control 5-8 PowerFlex 753/755 Drives 5-8
PowerFlex Digital DC Drives 5-8
PowerFlex 70
and PowerFlex
750-Series
Drives
Commm~
B3:20
Command Start
B3:20
Command Jog
B3:20
Command Clear Faults
B3:20
Command Forward
Reverse
B3:20
Command Forward
Reverse
B3:20
Drive Stop
N20:20
Drive Start
N20:20
Drive Jog
N20:20
Drive Clear faults
N20:20
Drive Forward
N20:20
Drive Reverse
N20:20
5-32 Using the I/O
20-COMM-E EtherNet/IP Adapter User Manual
Publication 20COMM-UM010H-EN-P
Figure 5.16 PLC-5, SLC 500, or MicroLogix 1100/1400 Example Ladder Logic Program for Speed Reference
(Continued on next page.)
PowerFlex 70
Drive Speed
Reference
PowerFlex
750-Series
Drive Speed
Reference
Drin ~~
R:f--:1~:.:
Higl". Wort
:MOV
Mo\-a
Sou.re~ N30:2'.1
O<
Dest N10:12
Cor.i.:~ t.; 3 2 bit :floHi:r.g pc-i:r.t S.?=GR~~- =-= ir.to {2) 16 bit i:r.t:g~:, F8:1 = 32 bit :flo;tit:.gpoit:.I S.jP-:GR~ ~n:.:{C01J,1tt:-) X 1000 )';JO: Jl = ~.~cRaerer .:, LS'i'.· ,:our.ts)
:K20:22 = ~.p::GR:kr~ .:.:A ~,w (cou.1:.t:-)
Dfi •c: 1~
R:..iY.~:.:
1~R:i:f:r. :e
HY-t:z 0f P.P1f
XI D
LES ---~
L,;; TJ,..,. (A<B)
LOti.· Worc
ADD ---~
Add
Sou,c;,A F8:l
45000.0<
Soo1ceA F8:l
45000.0<
'Sou.rca:B -3'l75Jt 0 ·s.o-u.rc~B $5535..0
-31151>.0<
Dri\·: S~
R:f--:1~.:.:
De;t
$~R:ef~. :.: Dr!\·: $~
H~t.z or P.P1[ R:ef~. :.:
XI ODD L,ow\\"o, c
EQU ---~ :MOV
E.qu.:~I f--~----, Mov-:
$5535..0<
N10:11
-1053 6<
-I
-I<
N10:22
O<
Sou,c,, A FS: I Sou,c, FS: I
45000.0< 45000.0<
Sou,c;, B -311 ·a.o De; t N20:1 l
-31iM.O< -2053 lk
IJ:;t
-I
-I<
N'20:22
O<
O<
Using the I/O 5-33
20-COMM-E EtherNet/IP Adapter User Manual
Publication 20COMM-UM010H-EN-P
PowerFlex
750-Series
Drive Speed
Reference
(Continued from previous page.)
!?=t R:f"er:r.:,
H~t..: 01 RP)..f
XI ~~
ill[ -----,
Li:DitTe:.t
I.m-.· Li:D -3·2 7 S&.O
-3176g_O<
Te:.t F8::l
4;000.0<
HigjtL i!ll -1.0
! ?=tR:f""'"'"- "
H:rtz 01 RP~[
XI ~~~
-1.0<
ill[ -----,
Li!I!itTe:.t
Lo";:Li!D 0.0
0.0<
n :1
45000.0<
Higl'. Li!O 31767.0
' ?=tR:f",cfW >
H:rt.:c, RP~f
XI ~~~
32 .O<
Lo,·.-Worc
MOV
Move
·Source
D,; t
D,; t
D,i ,·•~?=t
R:P-1'~.::
~ ,;:Wort
MOV
Movi:!
Sou:rce
D,;t
D,;t
Dri,·• !?=t
R :.-i:.r:,,, •:.
Lo-,.:·Worc
n :l
4; 000.0<
l'<"l O:'ll
-wrn;<
-I
-! <
N10:12
O<
FS:l
45000.0<
N10:11
-1053 6<
0 O<
N10:11
O<
SUB ---~
>--~--< Su.b~ct
Sw,o;, A Fa:!
4; 000.0< 4; 000.0<
Sou.rceB 32 71) .0
31 )5 .O<
Sw,o;; B 0; ; 36.Q
D,;t
D,i ,·•!?=t
R~~~-==
D,; t
6553 O<
N10:ll
-·20535<
0 O<
N10:1'l
O<
5-34 Using the I/O
20-COMM-E EtherNet/IP Adapter User Manual
Publication 20COMM-UM010H-EN-P
Notes:
20-COMM-E EtherNet/IP Adapter User Manual
Publication 20COMM-UM010H-EN-P
Chapter 6
Using Explicit Messaging
This chapter provides information and examples that explain how to use Explicit Messaging to configure and monitor the adapter and connected PowerFlex 7-Class drive or PowerFlex 750-Series drive.
Important: When used in a PowerFlex 750-Series drive, the 20-COMM-E adapter must have firmware 4.001 or later to support explicit messaging to drive parameters (Port 0). Furthermore, the adapter requires firmware 4.002 or later for explicit messaging to parameters of peripherals in drive Ports 1…14.
See Chapter 5 for information about the I/O Image, using Logic Command/ Status, Reference/Feedback, and Datalinks.
Topic Page
About Explicit Messaging 6-2
Performing Explicit Messages 6-3
ControlLogix Controller Examples 6-4
PLC-5 Controller Examples 6-23
SLC 500 Controller Examples 6-29
MicroLogix 1100/1400 Controller Examples 6-53
!
ATTENTION: Risk of injury or equipment damage exists. The examples in this publication are intended solely for purposes of example. There are many variables and requirements with any application. Rockwell Automation does not assume responsibility or liability (to include intellectual property liability) for actual use of the examples shown in this publication.
!
ATTENTION: Risk of equipment damage exists. If Explicit Messages are programmed to write parameter data to Nonvolatile Storage (NVS) frequently, the NVS will quickly exceed its life cycle and cause the drive to malfunction. Do not create a program that frequently uses Explicit Messages to write parameter data to NVS. Datalinks do not write to NVS and should be used for frequently changed parameters.
6-2 Using Explicit Messaging
20-COMM-E EtherNet/IP Adapter User Manual
Publication 20COMM-UM010H-EN-P
About Explicit Messaging Explicit Messaging is used to transfer data that does not require continuous updates. With Explicit Messaging, you can configure and monitor a slave device’s parameters on the network.
Important: When an explicit message is performed, by default no connection is made because it is an ‘unconnected’ message.
When timing of the message transaction is important, you can create a dedicated message connection between the controller and drive by checking the ‘Connected’ box on the
Communications tab message configuration screen during
message setup. These message connections are in addition to the I/O connection. However, the trade off for more message connections is decreased network performance. If your
application cannot tolerate this, we recommend to not check the ‘Connected’ box.
Important: PowerFlex 7-Class and PowerFlex 750-Series drives have explicit messaging limitations. Table 6.A
shows the EtherNet/
IP Object Class code compatibilities for these drives.
Table 6.A Explicit Messaging Class Code Compatibility with Drives EtherNet/IP Object
Class Code
PowerFlex
7-Class Drives
PowerFlex
750-Series Drives
Explicit Messaging Function
Parameter Object
0x0F
Y es No Single parameter reads/writes
DPI Parameter
Object 0x93
Ye s Ye s
(1)
with limitations
(1) Enables access to drive parameters (Port 0), DPI device parameters (Ports 1…6 only), and Host parameters (Ports 7…14 only). For example, DPI Parameter Object Class code 0x93 can access a 20-COMM-E adapter in Port 6. However, Class code 0x93 cannot access, for example, the Host parameters in a 24V I/O option module in Port 5. See DPI Parameter Object
on page C-16 for instance (parameter) numbering.
Single and scattered parameter
reads/writes
Host DPI Parameter
Object 0x9F
No Y es
(2)
with limitations
(2) Enables access to drive parameters (Port 0) and Host parameters for all ports (1…14). Host DPI Parameter Object Class code 0x9F cannot access DPI (device) parameters. For example, if a 20-750-DNET option module is in Port 4, its Host parameters can be accessed, but not its DPI (device) parameters. See Host DPI Parameter Object on page C-30 for instance (parameter) numbering.
Single and scattered parameter
reads/writes
Using Explicit Messaging 6-3
20-COMM-E EtherNet/IP Adapter User Manual
Publication 20COMM-UM010H-EN-P
Performing Explicit
Messages
There are five basic events in the Explicit Messaging process. The details of each step will vary depending on the type of controller being used. See the documentation for your controller.
Important: There must be a request message and a response message for all Explicit Messages, whether you are reading or writing data.
Figure 6.1 Explicit Message Process
For information on the maximum number of Explicit Messages that can be executed at a time, see the documentation for the scanner or bridge and/or controller that is being used.
Event Description
➊ Y ou format the required data and set up the ladder logic program to send an Explicit Message request to the scanner or bridge module (download). ➋ The scanner or bridge module transmits the Explicit Message Request to the slave device over the network.
➌ The slave device transmits the Explicit Message Response back to the scanner. The data is stored in the scanner buffer.
➍ The controller retrieves the Explicit Message Response from the scanner’s buffer (upload). ➎ The Explicit Message is complete.
➎
➊
➋➌➍
Complete Explicit
Message
Retrieve Explicit
Message Response
Set up and send Explicit
Message Request
Ethernet
Switch
'-------------r- ~-----
• I
I
~-r------ : •
I
I
I
I ~---------+< I
~ - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - _I
6-4 Using Explicit Messaging
20-COMM-E EtherNet/IP Adapter User Manual
Publication 20COMM-UM010H-EN-P
ControlLogix Controller
Examples
For supported classes, instances, and attributes, see Appendix C, EtherNet/ IP Objects.
Read a Single Parameter
ControlLogix Controller Example Ladder Logic Program to Read a Single Parameter Using RSLogix 5000 Software, Version 15.00 or Later
A Parameter Read message is used to read a single parameter. This read message example reads the value of parameter 003 - [Output Current] in a PowerFlex 7-Class drive.
Important: Parameter Object Class code 0x0F is not supported in PowerFlex 750-Series drives. To do a single parameter read, follow the RSLogix 5000 software (any version) single read example on page 6-6
.
Table 6.B Example Controller Tags to Read a Single Parameter Figure 6.2 Example Ladder Logic to Read a Single Parameter TIP: To display the Message Configuration screen in RSLogix 5000 software, add a message instruction (MSG), create a new tag for the message (Properties: Base tag type, MESSAGE data type, controller scope), and click the button in the message instruction.
Operand Controller Tags for Single Read Message Data Type XIC Execute_Single_Read_Message BOOL
MSG Single_Read_Message MESSAGE
►
Execute_Single_Read_Message ~-------MSG-------~
r-------- ------, Message
Message Control Single_Read_Message D EN~ DN )---
ER )---
Using Explicit Messaging 6-5
20-COMM-E EtherNet/IP Adapter User Manual
Publication 20COMM-UM010H-EN-P
ControlLogix Controller – Formatting a Message to Read a Single Parameter Using RSLogix 5000 Software, Version 15.00 or Later
Figure 6.3 Parameter Read Single Message Configuration Screens The following table identifies the data that is required in each box to configure a message to read a single parameter.
Configuration Tab Example Value Description
Message Type
Service Type (1)
Service Code (1)
Class
Instance
(2)
Attribute
Destination
CIP Generic
Parameter Read
e (Hex.)
f (Hex.)
3 (Dec.)
1 (Hex.)
Output_Current
(4)
Used to access the Parameter Object in the adapter.
This service is used to read a parameter value.
Code for the requested service.
Class ID for the DPI Parameter Object.
Instance number is the same as parameter number.
Attribute number for the Parameter Value attribute.
The tag where the data that is read is stored.
Communication Tab Example Value Description
Path (3) My_PowerFlex_Drive The path is the route that the message will follow.
Tag Tab Example Value Description
Name Single_Read_Message The name for the message.
(1) The default setting for Service Type is ‘Custom’, enabling entry of a Service Code not available from the Service Type pull-down menu. When choosing a Service Type other than ‘Custom’ from the pull-down menu, an appropriate Hex. value is automatically assigned to the Service Code box which is dimmed (unavailable). (2) Only drive parameters (Port 0) can be read using Parameter Object Class code 0x0F . To read a parameter of a peripheral in another port, use DPI Parameter Object Class code 0x93 (see page 6-6). (3) Click Browse to find the path, or type in the name of the device listed in the I/O Configuration folder. (4) In this example, Output Current is a 32-bit integer parameter requiring the Data Type field to be set to ‘DINT’ when creating the controller tag. If the parameter being read is a 16-bit integer, the tag Data Type field must be set to ‘INT’. When using a PowerFlex 700S drive, Output Current is a floating point number requiring the Data Type field to be set to ‘REAL ’ when creating the controller tag. See the drive documentation to determine the size of the parameter and its data type (16-bit or 32-bit integer or REAL).
Configuration Corram.mication I Tag I
Configuration J Communication I Tag
Message Type· lc1P Generic
..:.l
Service
Code: r;---(Hex) Class: V (Hex)
lnstance: r Attribute:p (Hex)
O Enable 0 Enable Waling O Start
Q Em,Code , Extended Error Code·
Erro,Path
Error Text:
OK
..:.l
Source Element: I
Source Length i:B
Destination IOutpul_Cunent
New Tag ..
0 Done Done Length: 0
r Timed Out +-
Caned IL App!y I
Browse ...
~I
(Bytes)
3 Help
Help
Help
6-6 Using Explicit Messaging
20-COMM-E EtherNet/IP Adapter User Manual
Publication 20COMM-UM010H-EN-P
ControlLogix Controller Example Ladder Logic Program to Read a Single Parameter Using RSLogix 5000 Software, Any Version
A Get Attribute Single message is used to read a single parameter. This read message example reads the value of parameter 003 - [Output Current] in a PowerFlex 7-Class drive.
Important: See Table 6.A on page 6-2
for limitations of PowerFlex 7-Class
and PowerFlex 750-Series drives when using DPI Parameter Object Class code 0x93 or Host DPI Parameter Object Class code 0x9F for explicit messaging.
Table 6.C Example Controller Tags to Read a Single Parameter Figure 6.4 Example Ladder Logic to Read a Single Parameter Operand Controller Tags for Single Read Message Data Type XIC Execute_Single_Read_Message BOOL
MSG Single_Read_Message MESSAGE
Execute_ Single _Read_ Message ~------- -MSr ,_-------- Message
Message Control Single_Read_Message D EN ~ DN)-
ER)-
Using Explicit Messaging 6-7
20-COMM-E EtherNet/IP Adapter User Manual
Publication 20COMM-UM010H-EN-P
ControlLogix Controller – Formatting a Message to Read a Single Parameter Using RSLogix 5000 Software, Any Version
Figure 6.5 Get Attribute Single Message Configuration Screens The following table identifies the data that is required in each box to configure a message to read a single parameter.
Configuration Tab Example Value Description
Message Type
Service Type (1)
Service Code (1)
Class
Instance
(2)
Attribute
Destination
CIP Generic
Get Attribute Single
e (Hex.)
93 or 9F (Hex.)
(4)
3 (Dec.)
9 (Hex.)
Output_Current (5)
Used to access the Parameter Object in the adapter.
This service is used to read a parameter value.
Code for the requested service.
Class ID for the DPI Parameter Object.
Instance number is the same as parameter number.
Attribute number for the Parameter Value attribute.
The tag where the data that is read is stored.
Communication Tab Example Value Description
Path (3) My_PowerFlex_Drive The path is the route that the message will follow.
Tag Tab Example Value Description
Name Single_Read_Message The name for the message.
(1) The default setting for Service Type is ‘Custom’, enabling entry of a Service Code not available from the Service Type pull-down menu. When choosing a Service Type other than ‘Custom’ from the pull-down menu, an appropriate Hex. value is automatically assigned to the Service Code box which is dimmed (unavailable). (2) The instance is the parameter number in the drive (Port 0). To read a parameter in another port, see DPI Parameter Object on page C-16 (Class code 0x93) or Host DPI Parameter Object on page C-30 (Class code 0x9F) to determine the instance number. For example, to read parameter 4 of a peripheral in Port 5 of a PowerFlex 750-Series drive, the instance would be 21504 + 4 = 21508.
(3) Click Browse to find the path, or type in the name of the device listed in the I/O Configuration folder. (4) See Table 6.A on page 6-2 for limitations of PowerFlex 7-Class and PowerFlex 750-Series drives when using DPI Parameter Object Class code 0x93 or Host DPI Parameter Object Class code 0x9F for explicit messaging. (5) In this example, Output Current is a 32-bit integer parameter requiring the Data Type field to be set to ‘DINT’ when creating the controller tag. If the parameter being read is a 16-bit integer, the tag Data Type field must be set to ‘INT’. When using a PowerFlex 700S or PowerFlex 750-Series drive, Output Current is a floating point number requiring the Data Type field to be set to ‘REAL ’ when the creating controller tag. See the drive documentation to determine the size of the parameter and its data type (16-bit or 32-bit integer or REAL).
Configuration CommLn1ication I Tag I
Path: jMy_powerRex_Drive Browse
Configuration I Communication I Tag
Message Type: lc1P Genenc 3
Service I Get Attribute Single 3 Source Element 3 T.','pe:
Source Length: ro-:B (Bytes)
Service r [Hei-:] Class: ~ (He,) I Output_Current 3
Help Code Destination
lnstance: p Attribute:r (Hei-:) New Tag ... I
0 Enable 0 Enable Wa,_,g OStart Done Done Length: 0
Help
0 EmirCode: Extended Error Code: r Timed Out .
Error Path:
ErrorText
OK Cancel Appl.',' Help
6-8 Using Explicit Messaging
20-COMM-E EtherNet/IP Adapter User Manual
Publication 20COMM-UM010H-EN-P
Write a Single Parameter
ControlLogix Controller Example Ladder Logic Program to Write a Single Parameter Using RSLogix 5000 Software, Version 15.00 or Later
A Parameter Write message is used to write to a single parameter. This write message example writes a value to parameter 140 - [Accel Time 1] in a PowerFlex 7-Class drive.
Important: Parameter Object Class code 0x0F is not supported in PowerFlex 750-Series drives. To do a single parameter write, follow the RSLogix 5000 software (any version) single write example on page 6-10
.
Table 6.D Example Controller Tags to Write a Single Parameter Figure 6.6 Example Ladder Logic to Write a Single Parameter Important: If the explicit message single write must be written continuously, use DPI Parameter Object Class code 0x93 or Host DPI Parameter Object Class code 0x9F and attribute A (10 decimal; see page 6-11
). This writes to RAM—not NVS
(EEPROM) memory. This example single write message using Class code F writes to NVS. Over time, continuous writes will exceed the EEPROM life cycle and cause the drive to
malfunction.
Operand Controller Tags for Single Write Message Data Type XIC Execute_Single_Write_Message BOOL
MSG Single_Write_Message MESSAGE
Execute_ Single_ Write_ Message ~------- -MSG- -------~ r--------------< Message
Message Control Single_Wrrte_Message D EN~ DN )---
ER)---
Using Explicit Messaging 6-9
20-COMM-E EtherNet/IP Adapter User Manual
Publication 20COMM-UM010H-EN-P
ControlLogix Controller – Formatting a Message to Write a Single Parameter Using RSLogix 5000 Software, Version 15.00 or Later
Figure 6.7 Parameter Write Single Message Configuration Screens The following table identifies the data that is required in each box to configure a message to write a single parameter.
Configuration Tab Example Value Description
Message Type
Service Type (1)
Service Code (1)
Class
Instance
(2)
Attribute
Source Element
Source Length
CIP Generic
Parameter Write
10 (Hex.)
f (Hex.)
140 (Dec.)
1 (Hex.)
Accel_Time_1
(4)
2 (4)
Used to access the Parameter Object in the adapter.
This service is used to write a parameter value.
Code for the requested service.
Class ID for the DPI Parameter Object.
Instance number is the same as parameter number.
Attribute number for the Parameter Value attribute.
Name of the tag for any service data to be sent from the scanner or bridge to the adapter/drive.
Number of bytes of service data to be sent in the message.
Communication Tab Example Value Description
Path (3) My_PowerFlex_Drive The path is the route that the message will follow.
Tag Tab Example Value Description
Name Single_Write_Message The name for the message.
(1) The default setting for Service Type is ‘Custom’, enabling entry of a Service Code not available from the Service Type pull-down menu. When choosing a Service Type other than ‘Custom’ from the pull-down menu, an appropriate Hex. value is automatically assigned to the Service Code box which is dimmed (unavailable). (2) Only drive parameters (Port 0) can be written to using Parameter Object Class code 0x0F . To write to a parameter of a peripheral in another port, use DPI Parameter Object Class code 0x93 (see page 6-10 ).
(3) Click Browse to find the path, or type in the name of the device listed in the I/O Configuration folder. (4) In this example, Accel Time 1 is a 16-bit integer parameter requiring the tag Data Type field to be set to ‘INT’ when creating the controller tag. If the parameter being written to is a 32-bit integer, the tag Data Type field must be set to ‘DINT’. Also, the Source Length field on the Message Configuration screen must correspond to the selected Data Type in bytes (for example, 4 bytes for a DINT or a REAL). When using a PowerFlex 700S drive or PowerFlex 750-Series drive, Accel Time 1 is a floating point number requiring the Data Type field to be set to ‘REAL ’ when creating the controller tag. See the drive documentation to determine the size of the parameter and its data type (16-bit or 32-bit integer or REAL).
Configuration I Communication Tag
Name· JSingle_Wrtte_Message
Configuration Communication I Tag
Path: jMy_PowerFlex_Drive
Configuration I Communication I Tag
Message Type: jCIP Genenc
..:l
~~~v~ce Ro" [Hex] Class: µ (Hex)
Instance: fi°4o" Attribute:r (Hex)
..:l
Source Element
Source Length:
Destrnat1on
Browse ...
IAccel Time_ 1 _;]
r"""3 (Bytes)
I ..:l
New Tag ... I
0 Enable 0 Enable Waiting 0 Start 0 Done D one Length: 0 0 Error Code· &:tended Error Code: r Timed Out +-
Error Path·
Error Text:
OK Cancel II Appl.11 Help
Help
6-10 Using Explicit Messaging
20-COMM-E EtherNet/IP Adapter User Manual
Publication 20COMM-UM010H-EN-P
ControlLogix Controller Example Ladder Logic Program to Write a Single Parameter Using RSLogix 5000 Software, Any Version
A Set Attribute Single message is used to write to a single parameter. This write message example writes a value to parameter 140 - [Accel Time 1] in a PowerFlex 7-Class drive.
Important: See Table 6.A on page 6-2
for limitations of PowerFlex 7-Class
and PowerFlex 750-Series drives when using DPI Parameter Object Class code 0x93 or Host DPI Parameter Object 0x9F for explicit messaging.
Table 6.E Example Controller Tags to Write a Single Parameter Figure 6.8 Example Ladder Logic to Write a Single Parameter Operand Controller Tags for Single Write Message Data Type XIC Execute_Single_Write_Message BOOL
MSG Single_Write _Message MESSAGE
Execute_ Single_ Wrrte _ Message ~------- -MSG- -------~ r--------------< Message
Message Control Single_Wrrte_Message D EN ~ DN)---
ER)---
Using Explicit Messaging 6-11
20-COMM-E EtherNet/IP Adapter User Manual
Publication 20COMM-UM010H-EN-P
ControlLogix Controller – Formatting a Message to Write a Single Parameter Using RSLogix 5000 Software, Any Version
Figure 6.9 Set Attribute Single Message Configuration Screens The following table identifies the data that is required in each box to configure a message to write a single parameter.
Configuration Tab Example Value Description
Message Type
Service Type (1)
Service Code (1)
Class
Instance
(2)
Attribute (3)
Source Element
Source Length
CIP Generic
Set Attribute Single
10 (Hex.)
93 or 9F (Hex.)
(5)
140 (Dec.)
9 or A (Hex.)
Accel_Time_1 (6)
2 (6)
Used to access the Parameter Object in the adapter.
This service is used to write a parameter value.
Code for the requested service.
Class ID for the DPI Parameter Object.
Instance number is the same as parameter number.
Attribute number for the Parameter Value attribute.
Name of the tag for any service data to be sent from the scanner or bridge to the adapter/drive.
Number of bytes of service data to be sent in the message.
Communication Tab Example Value Description
Path (4) My_PowerFlex_Drive The path is the route that the message will follow.
Tag Tab Example Value Description
Name Single_Write_Message The name for the message.
(1) The default setting for Service Type is ‘Custom’, enabling entry of a Service Code not available from the Service Type pull-down menu. When choosing a Service Type other than ‘Custom’ from the pull-down menu, an appropriate Hex. value is automatically assigned to the Service Code box which is dimmed (unavailable). (2) The instance is the parameter number in the drive (Port 0). To write to a parameter in another port, see DPI Parameter Object on page C-16 (Class code 0x93) or Host DPI Parameter Object on page C-30 (Class code 0x9F) to determine the instance number. For example, to write to parameter 4 of a peripheral in Port 5 of a PowerFlex 750-Series drive, the instance would be 21504 + 4 = 21508. (3) Setting the Attribute value to ‘9’ will write the parameter value to the drive’s Nonvolatile Storage (EEPROM) memory, which retains the parameter value even after the drive is power cycled. Important: When set to ‘9’, the EEPROM may quickly exceed its life cycle and cause the drive to malfunction. Setting the Attribute value to ‘A’ (10 decimal) will write the parameter value to temporary memory, which deletes the parameter value after the drive is power cycled. When frequent write messages are required, we recommend using the ‘A’ (10 decimal) setting. (4) Click Browse to find the path, or type in the name of the device listed in the I/O Configuration folder. (5) See Table 6.A on page 6-2 for limitations of PowerFlex 7-Class and PowerFlex 750-Series drives when using DPI Parameter Object Class code 0x93 or Host DPI Parameter Object Class code 0x9F for explicit messaging. (6) In this example, Accel Time 1 is a 16-bit integer parameter requiring the tag Data Type field to be set to ‘INT’ when creating the controller tag. If the parameter being written to is a 32-bit integer, the tag Data Type field must be set to ‘DINT’. Also, the Source Length field on the Message Configuration screen must correspond to the selected Data Type in bytes (for example, 4 bytes for a DINT or a REAL). When using a PowerFlex 700S or PowerFlex 750-Series drive, Accel Time 1 is a floating point number requiring the Data Type field to be set to ‘REAL ’ when creating the controller tag. See the drive documentation to determine the size of the parameter and its data type (16-bit or 32-bit integer or REAL).
Configuration I Communication Tag
Configuration Communication I Tag
Configuration J Communication J Tag
Message Type jc1P Generic ..:.l
Service I set Attribute Single ..:.l Source Element: 1Acce1_ Time_ 1 3 Type:
Source Length ~ {Bytes)
Service Jio" (Hex) Class: ~ (He, ) Code: Destination I 3 Help Instance: ~ Attribute:r (Hex) New Tag.
0 Enable 0 Enable Waiting 0 Start 0 Done Done length: 0 Help 0 ErrorCode· Extended Error Code: r Tlmed Out ~
Error Path:
Error Text:
OK Cancel App!y Help
6-12 Using Explicit Messaging
20-COMM-E EtherNet/IP Adapter User Manual
Publication 20COMM-UM010H-EN-P
ControlLogix Controller – Explanation of Request and Response Data for Read/Write Multiple Messaging Using RSLogix 5000 Software, Any Version The data structures in Figure 6.10 and Figure 6.11 use 16-bit words and can accommodate up to 22 parameters in a single message. In the Response Message, a parameter number with the high bit set indicates that the associated parameter value field contains an error code (parameter number in response data will be negative).
Important: See Table 6.A on page 6-2
for limitations of PowerFlex 7-Class
and PowerFlex 750-Series drives when using Class code 0x93 or Class code 0x9F for explicit messaging.
Figure 6.10 Data Structures for Scattered Read Messages Figure 6.11 Data Structures for Scattered Write Messages Request (Source Data) Response (Destination Data)
Word 0 Parameter Number Word 0 Parameter Number
1 Pad Word 1 Parameter Value LSW
2 Pad Word 2 Parameter Value MSW
3 Parameter Number 3 Parameter Number
4 Pad Word 4 Parameter Value LSW
5 Pad Word 5 Parameter Value MSW
6 Parameter Number 6 Parameter Number
7 Pad Word 7 Parameter Value LSW
8 Pad Word 8 Parameter Value MSW
9 Parameter Number 9 Parameter Number
10 Pad Word 10 Parameter Value LSW
11 Pad Word 11 Parameter Value MSW
12 Parameter Number 12 Parameter Number
13 Pad Word 13 Parameter Value LSW
14 Pad Word 14 Parameter Value MSW
...
...
63 Parameter Number 63 Parameter Number
64 Pad Word 64 Parameter Value LSW
65 Pad Word 65 Parameter Value MSW
Request (Source Data) Response (Destination Data)
Word 0 Parameter Number Word 0 Parameter Number
1 Parameter Value LSW 1 Pad Word
2 Parameter Value MSW 2 Pad Word
3 Parameter Number 3 Parameter Number
4 Parameter Value LSW 4 Pad Word
5 Parameter Value MSW 5 Pad Word
6 Parameter Number 6 Parameter Number
7 Parameter Value LSW 7 Pad Word
8 Parameter Value MSW 8 Pad Word
9 Parameter Number 9 Parameter Number
10 Parameter Value LSW 10 Pad Word
11 Parameter Value MSW 11 Pad Word
12 Parameter Number 12 Parameter Number
13 Parameter Value LSW 13 Pad Word
14 Parameter Value MSW 14 Pad Word
...
...
63 Parameter Number 63 Parameter Number
64 Parameter Value LSW 64 Pad Word
65 Parameter Value MSW 65 Pad Word
Using Explicit Messaging 6-13
20-COMM-E EtherNet/IP Adapter User Manual
Publication 20COMM-UM010H-EN-P
Read Multiple Parameters
ControlLogix Controller Example Ladder Logic Program to Read Multiple Parameters Using RSLogix 5000 Software, Any Version
A Scattered Read message is used to read the values of multiple parameters.
Up to 22 parameters can be read. This read message example reads the values of these five parameters.
See DPI Parameter Object on page C-16 (Class code 0x93) or Host DPI Parameter Object on page C-30 (Class code 0x9F) for parameter numbering.
Important: See Table 6.A on page 6-2 for limitations of PowerFlex 7-Class and PowerFlex 750-Series drives when using DPI Parameter Object Class code 0x93 or Host DPI Parameter Object Class code 0x9F for explicit messaging.
Table 6.F Example Controller Tags to Read Multiple Parameters Figure 6.12 Example Ladder Logic to Read Multiple Parameters PowerFlex 7-Class Drive PowerFlex 750-Series Drive
Parameter 001 - [Output Freq]
Parameter 003 - [Output Current]
Parameter 006 - [Output Voltage]
Parameter 012 - [DC Bus Voltage]
Parameter 017 - [Analog In1 Value]
Parameter 001 - [Output Freq]
Parameter 007 - [Output Current]
Parameter 137 - [Open Loop Fdbk]
Parameter 21581 - [Port 5: Analog Out 0 Data]
Parameter 260 - [Analog In0 Value]
Operand Controller Tags for Read Multiple Message Data Type XIC Execute_Scattered_Read_Message BOOL
MSG Scattered_Rea d_Message MESSAGE
Execute_Scattered_Read_Message ~-------- MS<S---------~ Message
Message Control Scattered_Read_Message D EN ~ DN)---
ER)---
6-14 Using Explicit Messaging
20-COMM-E EtherNet/IP Adapter User Manual
Publication 20COMM-UM010H-EN-P
ControlLogix Controller – Formatting a Message to Read Multiple Parameters Using RSLogix 5000 Software, Any Version
Figure 6.13 Scattered Read Message Configuration Screens The following table identifies the data that is required in each box to configure a message to read multiple parameters.
Configuration Tab Example Value Description
Message Type
Service Type (1)
Service Code (1)
Class
Instance
Attribute
Source Element
Source Length
Destination
CIP Generic
Custom
4b (Hex.)
93 or 9F (Hex.)
(3)
0 (Dec.)
0 (Hex.)
Scattered_Read_Request (4)
30 (4)
Scattered_Read_Response
Used to access Parameter Object in the adapter.
Required for scattered messages.
Code for the requested service.
Class ID for the DPI Parameter Object.
Required for scattered messages.
Required for scattered messages.
Name of the tag for any service data to be sent from
scanner or bridge to the adapter/drive.
Number of bytes of service data to be sent in the message.
The tag where the data that is read is stored.
Communication Tab Example Value Description
Path (2) My_PowerFlex_Drive The path is the route that the message will follow.
Tag Tab Example Value Description
Name Scattered_Read_Message The name for the message.
(1) The default setting for Service Type is ‘Custom’, enabling entry of a Service Code not available from the Service Type pull-down menu. When choosing a Service Type other than ‘Custom’ from the pull-down menu, an appropriate Hex. value is automatically assigned to the Service Code box which is dimmed (unavailable). (2) Click Browse to find the path, or type in the name of the device listed in the I/O Configuration folder. (3) See Table 6.A on page 6-2 for limitations of PowerFlex 7-Class and PowerFlex 750-Series drives when using DPI Parameter Object Class code 0x93 or Host DPI Parameter Object Class code 0x9F for explicit messaging. (4) In this example, we are reading five parameters. Each parameter being read requires an array of three INT registers. Therefore, a controller tag was created with its Data Type field set to ‘INT[15]’. Also, the Source Length field on the Message Configuration screen must correspond to the selected Data Type in bytes (for this example, 30 bytes for an INT[15] array). Scattered read messages always assume that every parameter being read is a 32-bit integer, regardless of its actual data type. Maximum length is 132 bytes or 66 words which equates to 22 parameters. For parameter numbering, see DPI Parameter Object on page C-16
(Class code 0x93) or Host DPI Parameter Object on page C-30 (Class code 0x9F).
Configuration I Communication Tag I
Name· Jscattered_Read_Message
' ·· ·
Configuration Communication I Tag I
Path: jMv_PowerRex_Drive
' ···
Configuration J Communication J Tag
Message Type· lc 1P Genertc
Instance: ~ Attribute:~ (He>:)
0 Enable 0 Enable Waiting 0 Start
0 ErrorCode· Ext.ended Error Code:
Error Path:
Error Text:
OK
Source Element
Source Length:
Destination
0 Done
Cane~
Browse ...
) Scattered Read Rec_;)
~ [Bytes[
j Scattered_Read_Re,_;)
New Tag ...
Done Length: 0
r Timed Out +-
ApplJ I~
Help
Help
Using Explicit Messaging 6-15
20-COMM-E EtherNet/IP Adapter User Manual
Publication 20COMM-UM010H-EN-P
ControlLogix Controller Example Scattered Read Request Data In this message example, we use the data structure in Figure 6.14 or Figure 6.15 in the source tag named Scattered_Read_Request to read these five parameters.
See DPI Parameter Object on page C-16 (Class code 0x93) or Host DPI Parameter Object on page C-30 (Class code 0x9F) for parameter numbering.
Figure 6.14 Example Scattered Read Request Data for PowerFlex 7-Class Drive Figure 6.15 Example Scattered Read Request Data for PowerFlex 750-Series Drive PowerFlex 7-Class Drive PowerFlex 750-Series Drive
Parameter 001 - [Output Freq]
Parameter 003 - [Output Current]
Parameter 006 - [Output Voltage]
Parameter 012 - [DC Bus Voltage]
Parameter 017 - [Analog In1 Value]
Parameter 001 - [Output Freq]
Parameter 007 - [Output Current]
Parameter 137 - [Open Loop Fdbk]
Parameter 21581 - [Port 5: Analog Out 0 Data]
Parameter 260 - [Analog In0 Value]
Name ti Value .,. Datalype Description
,- - Scattered_Read_Request { ... J INT[15]
..... + Scattered_Read_Request[O) 1 INT Parameter Number [decimal) ..... + Scattered_Read_Request[1) o INT Pad Word
,- + Scattered_Read_Request[2) o INT Pad Word
+ Scattered_Read_Request[3) 3 INT Parameter Number [decimal) ,- ..... + Scattered_Read_Request[4) o INT Pad Word
..... + Scattered_Read_Request[5) o INT Pad Word
,- + Scattered_Read_Request[6) 6 INT Parameter Number [decimal) + Scattered_Read_Request[7) o INT Pad Word ,-
..... + Scattered_Read_Request[8) o INT Pad Word
..... + Scattered_Read_Request[9) 12 INT Parameter Number [decimal) ,- + Scattered_Read_Request[1 OJ o INT Pad Word
+ Scattered_Read_Request[11) o INT Pad Word ,-
..... + Scattered_Read_Request[12) 17 INT Parameter Number [decimal) ..... + Scattered_Read_Request[1 3) o INT Pad Word
+ Scattered Read Request[14) o INT Pad Word
Name C. Value .. Data Type Description
-
- Scaltered_Read_Request { . . . l INT[15[
-
+ Scattered_Read_Request[O] 1 INT Parameter Number (decimal) -
+ Scattered_Read_Request[1] o INT Pad Wmd
-
+ Scattered_Read_Request[2] 0 INT Pad W01d
-
+ Scattered_Read_Request[3] 7 INT Parameter Number (decimal) -
+ Scattered_Read_Request[4] 0 INT Pad W01d
-
+ Scattered_Read_Request[5] O INT Pad W01d
-
+ Scattered_Read_Request[6] 137 INT Parameter Number (decimal) -
+ Scattered_Read_Request[7] o INT Pad Wo,d
-
+ Scattered_Read_Request[8] 0 INT Pad W01d
+ Scattered_Read_Request[9] 21581 INT Parameter Number (decimal) ,.... -
+ Scattered_Read_Request[1 O] 0 INT Pad W01d
,.... + Scattered_Read_Request[11] O INT Pad W01d
-
+ Scattered_Read_Request[12] 260 INT Parameter Number (decimal) ,.... + Scattered_Read_Request[13] o INT Pad Wo,d
+ Scattered_Read_Request[14] 0 INT Pad W01d
6-16 Using Explicit Messaging
20-COMM-E EtherNet/IP Adapter User Manual
Publication 20COMM-UM010H-EN-P
ControlLogix Controller Example Scattered Read Response Data The Scattered Read Request message reads the multiple parameters and returns their values to the destination tag (Scattered_Read_Response).
Figure 6.16 or Figure 6.17 shows the parameter values.
Figure 6.16 Example Scattered Read Response Data for PowerFlex 7-Class Drive In this message example, the parameters have the following values.
Figure 6.17 Example Scattered Read Response Data for PowerFlex 750-Series Drive The PowerFlex 750-Series drive uses 32-bit integer and REAL parameters.
A COP command must be used to copy the Scattered_Read_Response integer array to a 32-bit integer or REAL tag. Figure 6.18 shows the ladder logic used for this example. If the parameter data type is a REAL, then the destination tag is a REAL. If the parameter data type is a 32-bit integer, then the destination tag is a DINT. See the drive documentation to determine the parameter data type (32-bit integer or REAL).
PowerFlex 7-Class Drive Parameter Read Value
1 - [Output Freq] 32.5 Hz
3 - [Output Current] 0.01 Amp
6 - [Output Voltage] 118.7V AC
12 - [DC Bus Voltage] 329.2V DC
17 - [Analog In2 Value] 8.318 mA
Name t.. Value +- Data T_ype Description
,- - Scattered_Read_Response { .. . } INT(15]
..... + Scattered_Read_Response[O) 1 INT Parameter Number (decimal) ..... + Scattered_Read_Response[l) 325 INT Parameter Value LSW ..... + Scattered_Read_Response[2) 0 INT Parameter Value MSW ,- + Scattered_Read_Response[3) 3 INT Parameter Number (decimal) + Scattered_Read_Response[4) 1 INT Parameter Value LSW ,- ..... + Scattered_Read_Response[5) o INT Parameter Value MSW ..... + Scattered_Read_Response[6) 6 INT Parameter Number (decimal) ,- + Scattered_Read_Response[7) 118 7 INT Parameter Value LSW + Scattered_Read_Response[8) o INT Parameter Value MSW ,- ..... + Scattered_Read_Response[9) 12 INT Parameter Number (decimal) ..... + Scattered_Read_Response[lO) 3292 INT Parameter Value LSW ,- + Scattered_Read_Response[l 1) o INT Parameter Value MSW + Scattered_Read_Response[12) 17 INT Parameter Number (decimal) ,- ..... + Scattered_Read_Response[l 3) 8318 INT Parameter Value LSW + Scattered_Read_Response[14) o INT Parameter Value MSW Name t.. Value ~ Data Type Description
-
- Scattered_Read_Response { . . . } INT(15]
..... + Scattered_Read_Response[O] 1 INT Parameter Number (decimal) -
+ Scattered_Read_Response[l] 0 INT Parameter Value LSW
..... + Scattered_Read_Response[2] 1694 8 INT Parameter Value MSW -
+ Scattered_Read_Response[3] 7 INT Parameter Number (decimal) ..... + Scattered_Read_Response[4] - 15729 INT Parameter Value LSW -
+ Scattered_Read_Response[5] 156 05 INT Parameter Value MSW -
+ Scattered_Read_Response[6] 137 INT Parameter Number (decimal) ..... + Scattered_Read_Response[7] 2369 8 INT Parameter Value LSW + Scattered_Read_Response[8] 26035 INT Parameter Value MSW -..... + Scattered_Read_Response[9] 21581 INT Parameter Number (decimal) -
+ Scattered_Read_Response[1 OJ O INT Parameter Value LSW ..... + Scattered_Read_Response[11) 16948 INT Parameter Value MSW -
+ Scattered_Read_Response[12) 260 INT Parameter Number (decimal) ..... + Scattered_Read_Response[13) - 943 7 INT Parameter Value LSW + Scattered Read Response[14) 16661 INT Parameter Value MSW Using Explicit Messaging 6-17
20-COMM-E EtherNet/IP Adapter User Manual
Publication 20COMM-UM010H-EN-P
Figure 6.18 Example Ladder Logic to Copy Response Data for PowerFlex 750-Series Drive
In this message example, the parameters have the following values.
PowerFlex 750-Series Drive Parameter Read Value Data Type 1 - [Output Freq] 45.0 Hz REAL
7 - [Output Current] 0.03 Amp REAL
137 - [Open Loop Fdbk] 1706253458 DINT
21581 - [Port 5: Analog Out 0 Data] 45.0 Hz REAL
260 - [Analog In0 Value] 9.366 Volts REAL
-op
Copy File ~
Source Scattered_Read_Response [1J
Dest Output_Freq uency
Length 2
::op
Copy File ,---
Source Scattered_Read_Response [4J
Dest 0 utp ut_ Current
Length 2
::O P
Copy File ~
Source Scattered_Read_Response [7]
Dest Open_Loop_Fdbk
Length 2
:op
Copy File ~
Source Scattered_Read_Response [1 OJ
Dest An alog_OutO_Data
Length 2
OP
Copy File ,---
Sourc e Scattered_Read_Response [13J
Dest An alog_lnO_ V alue
Length 2
6-18 Using Explicit Messaging
20-COMM-E EtherNet/IP Adapter User Manual
Publication 20COMM-UM010H-EN-P
Write Multiple Parameters
ControlLogix Controller Example Ladder Logic Program to Write Multiple Parameters Using RSLogix 5000 Software, Any Version
A Scattered Write message is used to write to multiple parameters. This write message example writes the following values to these five parameters.
See DPI Parameter Object on page C-16 (Class code 0x93) or Host DPI Parameter Object on page C-30 (Class code 0x9F) for parameter numbering.
Important: See Table 6.A on page 6-2 for limitations of PowerFlex 7-Class and PowerFlex 750-Series drives when using DPI Parameter Object Class code 0x93 or Host DPI Parameter Object Class code 0x9F for explicit messaging.
Table 6.G Example Controller Tags to Write Multiple Parameters Figure 6.19 Example Ladder Logic to Write Multiple Parameters Important: If the explicit message scattered write must be written continuously, then use a separate explicit message single write for each parameter using DPI Parameter Object Class code 0x93 or Host DPI Parameter Object Class code 0x9F and
attribute A (10 decimal; see page 6-11). Attribute A writes to RAM—not NVS (EEPROM) memory. This example scattered
write message using attribute 0 writes to NVS. Over time, continuous writes will exceed the EEPROM life cycle and cause the drive to malfunction.
PowerFlex 7-Class
Drive Parameter
Write Value PowerFlex 750-Series
Drive Parameter
Write Value
141 - [Accel Time 2] 11.1 Sec. 536 - [Accel Time 2] 11.1 Sec. 143 - [Decel Time 2] 22.2 Sec. 538 - [Decel Time 2] 22.2 Sec. 105 - [Preset Speed 5] 33.3 Hz. 725 - [Zero Position] 33 106 - [Preset Speed 6] 44.4 Hz. 21555 - [Port 5: Analog In0 Hi] 5.5 107 - [Preset Speed 7] 55.5 Hz. 780 - [PTP Setpoint] -75,555 Operand Controller Tags for Write Multiple Message Data Type XIC Execute_Scattered_Write_Message BOOL
MSG Scattered_Write_Message MESSAGE
Execute_ Scattered_ Wrrte _ Message ~-------- MSG---------- , r-------< e--------------1 Message
Message Control Scattered_Write_Message D EN~ DN)---
ER )---
Using Explicit Messaging 6-19
20-COMM-E EtherNet/IP Adapter User Manual
Publication 20COMM-UM010H-EN-P
ControlLogix Controller – Formatting a Message to Write Multiple Parameters Using RSLogix 5000 Software, Any Version
Figure 6.20 Scattered Write Multiple Message Configuration Screens The following table identifies the data that is required in each box to configure a message to write multiple parameters.
Configuration Tab Example Value Description
Message Type
Service Type (1)
Service Code (1)
Class
Instance
Attribute
Source Element
Source Length
Destination
CIP Generic
Custom
4c (Hex.)
93 or 9F (Hex.)
(3)
0 (Dec.)
0 (Hex.)
Scattered_Write_Request
(4)
30 (4)
Scattered_Write_Response
Used to access Parameter Object in the adapter.
Required for scattered messages.
Code for the requested service.
Class ID for the DPI Parameter Object.
Required for scattered messages.
Required for scattered messages.
Name of the tag for any service data to be sent from
scanner or bridge to the adapter/drive.
Number of bytes of service data to be sent in the message.
The tag where the data that is read is stored.
Communication Tab Example Value Description
Path (2) My_PowerFlex_Drive The path is the route that the message will follow.
Tag Tab Example Value Description
Name Scattered_Write_Message The name for the message.
(1) The default setting for Service Type is ‘Custom’, enabling entry of a Service Code not available from the Service Type pull-down menu. When choosing a Service Type other than ‘Custom’ from the pull-down menu, an appropriate Hex. value is automatically assigned to the Service Code box which is dimmed (unavailable). (2) Click Browse to find the path, or type in the name of the device listed in the I/O Configuration folder. (3) See Table 6.A on page 6-2 for limitations of PowerFlex 7-Class and PowerFlex 750-Series drives when using DPI Parameter Object Class code 0x93 or Host DPI Parameter Object Class code 0x9F for explicit messaging. (4) In this example, we are writing to five parameters. Each parameter being written to requires an array of three INT registers.
Therefore, a controller tag was created with its Data Type field set to ‘INT[15]’. Also, the Source Length field on the Message Configuration screen must correspond to the selected Data Type in bytes (for this example, 30 bytes for an INT[15] array).
Scattered write messages always assume that every parameter being written to is a 32-bit integer, regardless of its actual data type. Maximum length is 132 bytes or 66 words which equates to 22 parameters. For parameter numbering, see DPI Parameter Object on page C-16 (Class code 0x93) or Host DPI Parameter Object on page C-30 (Class code 0x9F).
Configuration I Communication Tag I
Name· )scattered_Write_Message
Configuration I Communication I Tag
Message Type: lc 1P Genenc
Instance: ~ Attlibute:~ [Hex]
0 Enable 0 Enable Waitng O Sian
0 Erro< Code: Extended Error Code:
Error Path:
ErrorText
OK
..:.l
Source Element
Source Length:
Destination
0 Done
I ~
I Scattered Write Req...:.)
po""":B (Bytes)
I Scatte1ed_ Write_Re:_;)
New Tag ... I
Done Length: 0
r TimedOut+-
Apply Help
Help
Help
6-20 Using Explicit Messaging
20-COMM-E EtherNet/IP Adapter User Manual
Publication 20COMM-UM010H-EN-P
ControlLogix Controller Example Scattered Write Request Data In this message example, we use the data structure in Figure 6.21 or Figure 6.24 in the source tag (Scattered_Write_Request) to write new values to these parameters.
See DPI Parameter Object on page C-16 (Class code 0x93) or Host DPI Parameter Object on page C-30 (Class code 0x9F) for parameter numbering.
Figure 6.21 or Figure 6.24 shows the parameter values.
Figure 6.21 Example Scattered Write Request Data for PowerFlex 7-Class Drive ControlLogix Controller Example Scattered Write Response Data The results of the message appear in the destination tag named Scattered_Write_Response (Figure 6.22
). Values of ‘0’ indicate no errors
occurred.
PowerFlex 7-Class
Drive Parameter
Write Value PowerFlex 750-Series
Drive Parameter
Write Value Data
Type
141 - [Accel Time 2] 11.1 Sec. 536 - [Accel Time 2] 11.1 Sec. REAL 143 - [Decel Time 2] 22.2 Sec. 538 - [Decel Time 2] 22.2 Sec. REAL 105 - [Preset Speed 5] 33.3 Hz. 725 - [Zero Position] 33 DINT 106 - [Preset Speed 6] 44.4 Hz. 21555 - [Port 5: Analog In0 Hi] 5.5 REAL 107 - [Preset Speed 7] 55.5 Hz. 780 - [PTP Setpoint] -75,555 REAL Name t,. Value +- Data T~pe Description
-
- Scattered_ Write_Request { . . . } INT[15]
+ Scattered_ Write_Request[O] 141 INT Parameter Number [decimal] - + Scattered_ Write_Request[1] 111 INT Parameter Value LSW - + Scattered_ Write_Request[2] 0 INT Parameter Value MSW - + Scattered_ Write_Request[3] 143 INT Parameter Number [decimal] - + Scattered_ Write _Request[ 4] 222 INT Parameter Value LSW - + Scattered_ Write_Request[5] 0 INT Parameter Value MSW - + Scattered_ Write_Request[6] 1 05 INT Parameter Number [decimal] - + Scattered_ Write_Request[7] 333 INT Parameter Value LSW - + Scattered_ Write_Request[8] 0 INT Parameter Value MSW - + Scattered_ Write_Request[9] 106 INT Parameter Number [decimal] - + Scattered_ Write_Request[1 O] 444 INT Parameter Value LSW - + Scattered_ Write_Request[11] 0 INT Parameter Value MSW - + Scattered_ Write_Request[12] 1 07 INT Parameter Number [decimal] - + Scattered_ Write_Request[13] sss INT Parameter Value LSW - + Scattered Write Request[14] 0 INT Parameter Value MSW Using Explicit Messaging 6-21
20-COMM-E EtherNet/IP Adapter User Manual
Publication 20COMM-UM010H-EN-P
Figure 6.22 Example Scattered Write Response Data for PowerFlex 7-Class Drive The PowerFlex 750-Series drive uses 32-bit integer and REAL parameters.
A COP command must be used to copy the 32-bit integer and REAL values to the Scattered_Write_Request integer array. Figure 6.23 shows the ladder logic used for this example. If the parameter data type is a REAL, then the source tag is a REAL. If the parameter data type is a 32-bit integer, then the source tag is a DINT. See the drive documentation to determine the parameter data type (32-bit integer or REAL).
Figure 6.23 Example Ladder Logic to Copy Request Data for PowerFlex 750-Series Drive
Name t:, Value .. Data Type Description
-
- Scattered_ Write_Response { ... J INT[15)
+ Scattered_ Write_Response[O) 141 INT Parameter Number (decimal) ,_ + Scattered_ Write_Response[1) 0 INT Pad Word or Error Code 1- -
+ Scattered_ Write_Response[2) 0 INT Pad Word
+ Scattered_ Write_Response[3) 143 INT Parameter Number (decimal) - + Scattered_ Write_Response[4) 0 INT Pad Word or Error Code - + Scattered_ Write_Response[5) 0 INT Pad Word
--
+ Scattered_ Write_Response[6) 105 INT Parameter Number (decimal) + Scattered_ Write_Response[7) 0 INT Pad Word or Error Code - + Scattered_ Write_Response[8) 0 INT Pad Word
--
+ Scattered_ Write_Response[9) 106 INT Parameter Number (decimal) -
+ Scattered_ Write_Response[1 OJ 0 INT Pad Word or Error Code + Scattered_ Write_Response[11) 0 INT Pad Word
- + Scattered_ Write_Response[12) 107 INT Parameter Number (decimal) - + Scattered_ Write_Response[13) 0 INT Pad Word or Error Code - + Scattered Write Response[14) 0 INT Pad Word
::op
Copy File -
Source Acoe l_ Time2
Dest Scatterecl_Write_Re,:iuest[1J
Length 2
'.:OP
Copy File -
Source D eoel_ Time2
Dest Scattered_Write_Re,:iuest[4J
Length 2
::op
Copy File -
Source Zero_position
Dest Scattered_Write_Re,:iuest[7)
Length 2
'.:OP
Copy File -
Source Analog_lnO_Hi
Dest Scattered_Write_Requesl[1 OJ
Length 2
-O P
Copy File -
Source PTP _Setpoint
Dest Scattered_Write_Request[13J
Length 2
6-22 Using Explicit Messaging
20-COMM-E EtherNet/IP Adapter User Manual
Publication 20COMM-UM010H-EN-P
Figure 6.24 Example Scattered Write Request Data for PowerFlex 750-Series Drive The results of the explicit message appear in the destination tag Scattered_Write_Response (Figure 6.25). Values of ‘0’ indicate no errors occurred.
Figure 6.25 Example Scattered Write Response Data for PowerFlex 750-Series Drive Name t, Value .. Data Type Description
-
- Scattered_ Write_Request { ... } INT[15] I 3
-
+ Scattered_ Write_Request[O] 536 INT Parameter Number ( decimal) + Scattered_ Write_Request[1] - 26214 INT Parameter Value LSW --
+ Scattered_ Write_Request[2] 1668 9 INT Parameter Value MSW + Scattered_ Write_Request[3] 538 INT Parameter Number ( decimal) --
+ Scattered_ Write_Request[4] - 26214 INT Parameter Value LSW -
+ Scattered_ Write_Request[5] 16817 INT Parameter Value MSW + Scattered_ Write_Request[6] 72 5 INT Parameter Number ( decimal) - -
-
+ Scattered_ Write_Request[?] 33 INT Parameter Value LSW -
+ Scattered_ Write_Request[B) 0 INT Parameter Value MSW -
+ Scattered_ Write_Request[9) 21555 INT Parameter Number ( decimal) + Scattered_ Write_Request[10] 0 INT Parameter Value LSW --
+ Scattered_ Write_Request[11 I 16 560 INT Parameter Value MSW -
+ Scattered_ Write_Request[12] 780 INT Parameter Number ( decimal) -
+ Scattered_ Write_Request[13] - 10 019 INT Parameter Value LSW + Scattered Write Request[14] - 2 INT Parameter Value MSW - n.....-. - -
Name t, Value .. Data Type Description
Ir - Scattered_ Write_Response { . . . } INT[15] . --
+ Scattered_ Write_Response[O] 536 INT Parameter Number ( decimal) + Scattered_ Write_Response[1] 0 INT Pad Word or Error Code --
+ Scattered_ Write_Response[2] 0 INT Pad Word
+ Scattered_ Write_Response[3] 538 INT Parameter Number ( decimal) --
+ Scattered_ Write_Response[4] 0 INT Pad Word or Error Code -
+ Scattered_ Write_Response[5] 0 INT Pad Word
+ Scattered_ Write_Response[6] 725 INT Parameter Number ( decimal) --
+ Scattered_ Write_Response[?] 0 INT Pad Word or Error Code + Scattered_ Write_Response[B] 0 INT Pad Word
-
-
+ Scattered_ Write_Response[9] 21555 INT Parameter Number ( decimal) -
+ Scattered_ Write_Response[1 O] 0 INT Pad Word or Error Code + Scattered_ Write_Response[11] 0 INT Pad Word
--
+ Scattered_ Write_Response[12] 780 INT Parameter Number ( decimal] + Scattered_ Write_Response[1 3] 0 INT Pad Word or Error Code -
-
__:'.: Scattered_ Write_Response[14] 0 INT Pad Word
Using Explicit Messaging 6-23
20-COMM-E EtherNet/IP Adapter User Manual
Publication 20COMM-UM010H-EN-P
PLC-5 Controller Examples Important: The PLC-5 must be Series E (Rev. D.1 or later) to support the MultiHop feature that routes messaging to the drive.
Important: Due to inherent limitations with the PCCC N-File method, only contiguous multiple parameters can be read or written using explicit messaging.
For this explicit message example, we use the N150 N-Files because they are already mapped to specific parameters in the drive and its connected peripherals. This enables direct access to any parameter. The other available N40 N-File to use for explicit messaging requires considerably more configuration to achieve the same result. Every read or write message using the N40 N-Files requires configuring a request message, inputing data into the request data table, configuring a response message, and inputing data into the response data table. However, if accessing items other than parameters (for example, drive faults or events), the N40 N-Files must be used since only parameters can be accessed using the N150 N-Files.
Important: When performing a write parameter message, the data will always be written to the drive’s Nonvolatile Storage (NVS).
Over time, continuous writes will exceed the EEPROM life cycle and cause the drive to malfunction.
For PCCC N150 N-File information, see page C-11
.
PLC-5 Controller Example Ladder Logic Program to Read a Single Parameter
A read message is used to read a single parameter. The specific N150:6 address shown in this read message example reads the value of parameter 003 - [Output Current] in a PowerFlex 7-Class drive. Footnote 2 under the Figure 6.27 table shows other N-file addressing to read various integer and REAL (floating point) parameters in PowerFlex 7-Class and PowerFlex 750-Series drives.
Figure 6.26 Example Ladder Logic to Read a Single Parameter Execute Single Read
Message
83:0
a
Single Read Message
MSG ---
Read/Write Message
Control MG1 3:0
Setup Screen <
EN~ DN)--
ER)--
6-24 Using Explicit Messaging
20-COMM-E EtherNet/IP Adapter User Manual
Publication 20COMM-UM010H-EN-P
PLC-5 Controller – Formatting a Message to Read a Single Parameter Figure 6.27 Read Single Message Configuration Screens
The following table identifies the data that is required in each box to configure a message to read a parameter.
General Tab Example Value Description
Communication Command
Data Table Address
Size in Elements
Port Number
Data Table Address
MultiHop
PLC-5 Typed Read
N40:0
2 (1)
2 N150:6 (2)
Ye s
Controller type and command type for controller to read data from the drive.
An unused controller data table address containing the message instruction. This address is the starting word of the destination file.
Number of elements (words) to be transferred. Each element size is a 16-bit integer.
Controller port to which the network is connected.
Specific starting address of the source file in the drive.
Enables communication to allow network messaging to be routed to the drive.
MultiHop Tab Example Value Description
To Address 10.91.100.79 IP address of the adapter connected to the drive. (1) Because the N-files used for the data transfer occupies two contiguous 16-bit words, the Size in Elements must always be set to 2 regardless of whether the parameter being read is a 16-bit integer or a 32-bit integer. (2) See page C-11 for N-file addressing. Below are some examples of how to address N-files:
N-File Address Data Type Description Notes
N150:6 32-bit integer Parameter 3 of PowerFlex 70 drive Example ladder logic
rungs are shown in
Figure 6.29
for these three
different parameter data
types.
N155:14 32-bit REAL Parameter 7 of PowerFlex 750-Series drive N155:200 32-bit integer Parameter 725 of PowerFlex 750-Series drive N209:154 32-bit REAL Port 5: Parameter 77 of 24V I/O module in PowerFlex 750-Series drive
N211:50 16-bit integer Port 6: Parameter 25 of 20-COMM-E adapter in PowerFlex 750-Series drive
;_:. MSG - MG13:0: (2 Elements) l'J[g]0
General
Ins =Add Hop Del= Remove Hop
FromDevice FromPort ToAddress T e ToAddress
~Tech;,,,_· i:,Ple,C;,_5 _____ ...._2 ___ c,E,cth,ee,,:eNet"-'"l~a,Dce:e,,,,~eee_-,(,,clr:),_..__,1,c0.,,_91 .100JU ;_:. MSG - MG13:0: (2 Elements) l'J[g]0
MultiHop I
Thi,PLC•5i--~-- -;::::=======
Communication Command IPLC-5 Trped Read
Data Table Address· IN40:0 I
Size in Elements EJ
Port Numbe, EJ
TargelDevice -----------
DataTableAddress 1elN~15,:;:0~6 __ _J
MultiHop:~
c_ ______________ ~
[ Eno, Descr,pt,on
No errors
Cont,olBits,-----
lgnore if limed out [TOt [QJ
To be ret1ied (NR): [QJ
Awaiting E Mecution (EW): [QJ
Continuous Run [COJ: [QJ
Eno, [ER)@]
Message done (ON): [QJ
Message Transmitting (ST): [QJ
Message Enabled [ENJ: [QJ
I EJJOJ EJJm CodelH«I 0
Using Explicit Messaging 6-25
20-COMM-E EtherNet/IP Adapter User Manual
Publication 20COMM-UM010H-EN-P
PLC-5 Controller Example Single Read Response Data
In this specific N150:6 message example, we use the data table address in Figure 6.28 to store the response value (0.13 amps) that was read from drive parameter 003 - [Output Current]. To determine the data type for the parameter and its required scaling, see the specific drive documentation.
Figure 6.28 Example Single Read Response Data File
Figure 6.29 shows example ladder logic to correctly format the three possible data types for read messages of different parameter types in the PLC-5 controller.
Figure 6.29 Example Ladder Logic to Format Parameter Data Types for Reads For 16-bit Integer
Parameters – All
PowerFlex 7-Class
Drives
For 32-bit Integer
Parameters – All
PowerFlex 7-Class
Drives
For 32-bit REAL
(Floating Point)
Parameters –
PowerFlex 700S
and PowerFlex
750-Series Drives
N40:0 Rad;x:l Decimal ..:J
Symbol:;::::====================~ Columns:~
Desc: ~---------------------------~
JNio ~ !:roperties j ~ ~
TI:~ -= i;:11032 bil ir.t:g~; ir. tl:: PLC. :.o t1t:e!t=.r~ir.; ;plit i1:.to{).) 16-bir ir.t:g~:....
K40 : ◊ = Pa.:r.:.!If:I~ \"a!Ui:! L::.u.· :ttO!ll n: r.~«k K40 : l = Pa.:r.:.!If:I~ 1,·2!Ui:! MS.\\" :D'.ct:n r~:r,.i;.·Of'k K41:J. = Pa.:r.:.!If:l~\·a!Ui:!L:;"i.\·
- hlOV
Mov1=
·Sou.re':!
Dest
N :0
O<
N41:0
O<
K41:3 = P'-f'-'I!ater,·a!u,,hlSW
r---{X)P __ - _- _- ~-~
Copy File f---
Sowc':! =N :0
Dest " N41:1
W.g tt 1
Tor: :.~ a. :fl0=.ti:r1.gpoir.t t.=.g corr-=':tly. you.!DU:.t :fit:.t ;,,;.·a.p tl't:1:ig:11.a.1:.t kw;: 16bit l!!.t:g~:..a:t!.'C tl:~ COP th: {2) ir.t: g~; i.r.to a :fl0=.ti:!T.g poir.t a.CGf: ;:.. L~ g&.. of rt:: COP i; 1 °b=,:.:.u.:.--= tlt: :floo.ti:rtg poir.t i; 3 2 bit; a.:i1~ will .a:u.t~tie:. lly t:.k: tt:.:
r.~I 16bit i.r.1:g~:tt'~ d:: s-out,:: (K4 1:5)
K40:0 = Pa.ta.!It:!I:!! vallli:! L::.u.· :n--ooi n:r.i;.·Of'k K40: 1 = Pa.ta.!If:!I:!! va.llli:! MS.\\" :&O!D. r~:t\t·Ofk K4 1:4 = ;1,,;.·a.~Pa.:r.:.!If:l:!!val'!li:!M'.:,\\ "
K4 1:5 = ;1,,;.·a.~Pa.:r.:.!If:l:!!Val'Ui:!LS.\\ "
Fii":3 = Pa.:r.:.!If:!l~Flmti.r..gPvir.t 1,·a.1~
- hlOV ---~
Mov>=
'Sou.:rc~
Dest
N :0
O<
N4U
O<
- hlOV ---~
Mov>=
S.OU.:rc~
Dest
N :1
11.38:J <
N41:4
1 3 1!::l<
r---CQP ---~
Copy File
Some•
Dest
Leng th
"N41:4
"F&:3
1 I
6-26 Using Explicit Messaging
20-COMM-E EtherNet/IP Adapter User Manual
Publication 20COMM-UM010H-EN-P
PLC-5 Controller Example Ladder Logic Program to Write a Single Parameter
A write message is used to write to a single parameter. The specific N151:30 address shown in this write message example writes the value of parameter 140 - [Accel Time 1] in a PowerFlex 7-Class drive. Footnote 2 under the Figure 6.31 table shows other N-file addressing to write various integer and REAL (floating point) parameters in PowerFlex 7-Class and PowerFlex 750-Series drives.
Figure 6.30 Example Ladder Logic to Write a Single Parameter Execute Single Write
Message
83:0
Single Write Message
MSG ----~
Read/Write Message
Control MG14:0
Setup Screen <
Using Explicit Messaging 6-27
20-COMM-E EtherNet/IP Adapter User Manual
Publication 20COMM-UM010H-EN-P
PLC-5 Controller – Formatting a Message to Write a Single Parameter Figure 6.31 Write Single Message Configuration Screens
The following table identifies the data that is required in each box to configure a message to write a single parameter.
General Tab Example Value Description
Communication Command
Data Table Address
Size in Elements
Port Number
Data Table Address
MultiHop
PLC-5 Typed Write
N50:0
2 (1)
2 N151:30 (2)
Ye s
Controller type and command type for controller to write data to the drive.
An unused controller data table address containing the message instruction. This address is the starting word of the source file.
Number of elements (words) to be transferred. Each element size is a 16-bit integer.
Controller port to which the network is connected.
Specific starting address of the destination file in the drive.
Enables communication to allow network messaging to be routed to the drive.
MultiHop Tab Example Value Description
To Address 10.91.100.79 IP address of the adapter connected to the drive. (1) In this example, Accel Time 1 is a 16-bit integer parameter. Because the N151 file used for the data transfer occupies two contiguous 16-bit words, the Size in Elements must always be set to 2 regardless of whether the parameter being written to is a 16-bit integer or a 32-bit integer. (2) See page C-11 for N-file addressing. Below are some examples of how to address N-files:
N-File Address Data Type Description Notes
N151:30 16-bit integer Parameter 140 of PowerFlex 70 drive Example ladder logic
rungs are shown in
Figure 6.33
for these three
different data types.
N150:50 32-bit REAL Parameter 25 of PowerFlex 750-Series drive N155:200 32-bit integer Parameter 725 of PowerFlex 750-Series drive N209:156 32-bit REAL Port 5: Parameter 78 of 24V I/O module in PowerFlex 750-Series drive
N201:14 16-bit integer Port 1: Parameter 7 of 20-HIM-A6 HIM in PowerFlex 750-Series drive
;.:, MSG - MG14:0 : (2 Elements) ~[Qj~
General
lns=Add Hop Del= Remove Hop
From Device From Port To Address T e To Address
This LC5 EtherNet Device (,,, trc,:) __ .._.,,1 0c,.91.100. 79 2' MSG - MG14:0 : (2 Elements) ~[Qj~
MultiHopl
This PLC-5----- -;:::-;:::-;:::-;:::-;:::-;:::-;:::::::; Communication Command: IPLC-5 Typed Write
Data Table Address: IN50:0 I
Size in Elements: ~
Po,t Number: ~
TargetDevice -----------
Data Table Address· lcaN=15=1 :=30~-~
MultiHop:~
Control Bits,-----~
Ignore if timed out {TO): [QJ
To be retried [NA): [QJ
Awaiting Execution (EW): [QJ
Continuous Run (CD): [QJ
Error(ER):[i
Message done [DN): []
Message Transmitting (S TJ: [QJ
Message Enabled (EN): [QJ
Error
Error Code(Hex): 0
6-28 Using Explicit Messaging
20-COMM-E EtherNet/IP Adapter User Manual
Publication 20COMM-UM010H-EN-P
PLC-5 Controller Example Single Write Request Data
In this specific N151:30 message example, we use the data table address in Figure 6.32 to store the request value (10.0 sec.) that was written to drive parameter 140 - [Accel Time 1]. To determine the data type for the parameter and its required scaling, see the specific drive documentation.
Figure 6.32 Example Single Write Request Data File
Figure 6.33 shows example ladder logic to correctly format the three possible data types for write messages of different parameter types in the PLC-5 controller.
Figure 6.33 Example Ladder Logic to Format Parameter Data Types for Writes For 16-bit Integer
Parameters – All
PowerFlex 7-Class
Drives
For 32-bit Integer
Parameters – All
PowerFlex 7-Class
Drives
For 32-bit REAL
(Floating Point)
Parameters –
PowerFlex 700S
and PowerFlex
750-Series Drives
N50:0 Radi:-t: I Decimal ..:J :=================~
Symbol·~=====================---=-Co::.lu::.m::.n::. s:~l1::.o_:..:.J=',~ Desc: ~---------------------------~
r;;;;;;;-....:..J l" "v ....:..J
A 16bit i.1!.t-:g::rp,:.r.:!ri:t::r. tll:d.E.t=. tob: v;:ritt~r : :.iC::, i.1!.1'5 B3 :0 MOV ----,
Movi:
·Sou.re:-:
D:, t
NS ! :O
65<
N5 :0
05-<
11'.::r: i:- 1"!.:iDTh.l d:.t:.typ: i.r. tl!.:PLC . :.-o to i.'i-'fit : t.1-.:d.E.tE. w: will u.:---: (1) 15bit i:nt:g::r:, !l\""31:2 = P-E.r-:!n:t::1 1;-:.lu.:L5 "'i\-
!l\""3l :3 = P-E.r-:!n: t::1 1;-:.lu.:MS"'i\.
!l\""3 :0 = P-E.r-:!n:t~ 1;-:.lu.:LSU.· ro !!.: tisvrk
!l\""3-0: 1 = P-E.r-:!n:t~ n lu.: 1[5"'i\. to r.:t1.'i-·Ofk B3 :0 P ---~
Copy File
·Sou.re-:
D:, t
Lengt],_
'oNS!:1
';NSO:O
1 To 1,'i-'fit :.:. :Hoa.ti.r.g p:ii.1!.t t=.g CO:ff~ tly. ycu :mu.:.t :ii!:-[ .... OP t."h.: :Ho:.ti.1!.g p:,i.r.l i:nto (1) i:nt:g::r:,,, tl!.:r. :,w-:.p t."h.: 1-.igl!..:.1".~ low 16bit l.f!Hg~:, F8::4 = P-E.r-:!n:t-::r Floa.ti.r.g Poi.r:.t \·a.tu.:
!l\""31:4 = :,i,'i-·a.P?-CP-E.r.:!ri: t~ ,.-alu.:1C5"'i\. !l\""31:3 = :-wa.P?-CP-E.r.:!ri:t~ \·alu.:L5 \\-
!l\""3-0:0 = P-E.r.:!ri: t~ n lu.: L5"'i\- to t."h.: r.: t1.'i-·Ofk !l\""3-0: 1 = P-E.r.:!ri: t~ n lu.: 1(5\\. to th: r.: rwe:rk B3 :0 OP ---~
Copy Fila
D:st
w .glh
=FE:4
=N51:4
MOV ---~
Mov-:
S,o-u..-rce
Dest
N51:4
1·
N50:l
l ii9!JO<
MOV ---~
M ,ovi::
~ ce
D:st
N51:5
O<
N50:0
55<
Using Explicit Messaging 6-29
20-COMM-E EtherNet/IP Adapter User Manual
Publication 20COMM-UM010H-EN-P
PLC-5 Controller Reading/Writing Multiple Parameters
You can read or write only contiguous parameters. Also, the range of contiguous parameters must be contained in the same N-File. Two elements (words) are required for each parameter being read or written. For example, to read 5 contiguous parameters, 10 elements (words) must be used.
SLC 500 Controller
Examples
When using RSLogix 500 software, version 7.10 and earlier, explicit messaging must be performed using the PCCC N-File method. For RSLogix 500 software, version 7.20 and later, the CIP messaging method has been added along with the PCCC N-File method. However, it is recommended to use the CIP method because it is easier to use and understand. For this reason, only instructions for the CIP method are provided. If you must use the PCCC N-File method, see the PLC-5 Controller Examples on page 6-23.
The CIP messaging method provides two ways to perform explicit messaging:
Read/Write Parameter Service simplifies setup by requiring less data to be entered in message configuration screens. However, the Read/Write Parameter Service can only be used to perform single parameter read or single parameter write explicit messages. (Multiple parameter reads or writes must be performed using the Generic Get/Set Attribute Service described below.)
Important: When performing a Write Parameter message, the data will always be written to the drive’s Nonvolatile Storage (NVS).
Continuous NVS writes may damage the drive’s EEPROM.
If continuous writes are necessary, use the Generic Set Attribute Single Service and attribute A (10 decimal; see page 6-40
).
Generic Get/Set Attribute Service requires more setup data to be entered in message configuration screens, but can be used to perform single parameter read or write explicit messages, or multiple parameter read or write explicit messages. Also, the Generic Set Attribute Service offers the choice of writing the data to the drive’s Nonvolatile Storage (NVS) or the drive’s Random Access Memory (RAM; for Generic Set Attribute Single service only, see page 6-40
). Note that when selecting the data to
be written to RAM, the data will be lost if the drive loses power.
For supported classes, instances, and attributes, see Appendix C, EtherNet/ IP Objects.
6-30 Using Explicit Messaging
20-COMM-E EtherNet/IP Adapter User Manual
Publication 20COMM-UM010H-EN-P
SLC 500 Controller Explicit Messaging Using the Read/Write Parameter Service
SLC 500 Controller Example Ladder Logic Program to Read a Single Parameter A Read Parameter message is used to read a single parameter. This read message example reads the value of parameter 003 - [Output Current] in a PowerFlex 7-Class drive.
Important: Parameter Object Class code 0x0F is not supported in PowerFlex 750-Series drives. To do a single parameter read, follow the SLC 500 (Generic Attribute Service) single read example on page 6-36
.
Figure 6.34 Example Ladder Logic to Read a Single Parameter Execute Single Read
Message
B3:0
0 Single Read Message
EEM --------~
EtherNet/IP Explicit Message
Control Block Nl3:0
Control Block Length 58
Setup Screen <
EN
DN>
ER>-
Using Explicit Messaging 6-31
20-COMM-E EtherNet/IP Adapter User Manual
Publication 20COMM-UM010H-EN-P
SLC 500 Controller – Formatting a Message to Read a Single Parameter Using Read/Write Parameter Service
Figure 6.35 Read Parameter Message Configuration Screens The following table identifies the data that is required in each box to configure a message to read a single parameter.
General Tab Example Value Description
Size in Words
Data Table Address
Service (1)
Instance (2)
2 (3)
N40:0
Read Parameter
3 (Dec.)
Number of words to be transferred. Each word size is a 16-bit integer.
An unused controller data table address containing the message instruction. This address is the starting word of the destination file.
Code for the requested service.
Instance number is the same as the parameter number.
MultiHop Tab Example Value Description
To Address 10.91.100.79 IP address of the adapter connected to the drive. (1) The default setting for Service is ‘Custom’, enabling entry of a Service Code not available from the Service pull-down menu.
When choosing a Service other than ‘Custom’ from the pull-down menu, an appropriate Hex. value is automatically assigned to the Service Code box which is dimmed (unavailable).
(2) Only drive parameters (Port 0) can be read using Parameter Object Class code 0x0F . To read a parameter of a peripheral in another port, use DPI Parameter Object Class code 0x93 (see page 6-36 ).
(3) In this example, Output Current is a 32-bit integer parameter requiring the Size in Words field to be set to ‘2’. If the parameter being read is a 16-bit integer, the Size in Words must be set to ‘1’. When using a PowerFlex 700S or PowerFlex 750-Series drive, Output Current is a floating point number requiring the Size in Words to be set to ‘2’. See the drive documentation to determine the size of the parameter and its data type (16-bit or 32-bit integer or REAL). ,_, EEM N13.0, (58 Elements) [~]g]@
Generol ["MuiiiHOP]I Send Dat-, I Receive Dota I
Ins - Add Hop Del • Remove Hop
From Device FromPort ToAddressT e ToAddress
TMSLC500 EtherNeVIPDevicel~ 10.91 .100.79
,_, EE/A N13.0 • (58 Elements) r;:)[§1'8)
f""Ge"ii"ei:ii]I MultiHop] Send Data ] Receive Oat-, I
[
Hu Conl,oll~
Channel:LJ
Size in Words(ReceiveData):LJ
Data TableAddress(ReceiveData): ~
T0<oetD evice
(SendDatat LJ
(Send Datai ~
Service: IReadPaiameter
Messa9C Timeout [xl sec]:~
MultiHop: ~
IServiceCode(hexJ: D
Class (hex)LJ(d ec)GI::J
lnstance(hex]: ILJ(dec)LJ
AttriboJte(hex): LJ(dec) : LJ
[
Error Description
No errors
I
Message Corirol B~s~
lg,ofe l timedoi.J (TOt.[j
Awafrig Execution (EW): []
Continuous Run (CO]:[]
Error (ERJ:[l
Done (ON):[]
Tr,,nsrntti~(STt.[QJ
EMbledlEN~[] I
Waiting forQueue Spaee :[l
1'""
1 ErrorCode[hex):o
_J
~
6-32 Using Explicit Messaging
20-COMM-E EtherNet/IP Adapter User Manual
Publication 20COMM-UM010H-EN-P
SLC 500 Controller Example Read Single Response Data
In this message example, we use the data table address in Figure 6.36 to store the response value (0.13 amps) that was read from drive parameter 003 - [Output Current]. To determine the data type for the parameter and its required scaling, see the specific drive documentation.
Figure 6.36 Example Read Single Response Data File
Figure 6.37 shows example ladder logic to correctly format the three possible data types for read messages of different parameter types in the SLC 500 controller.
Figure 6.37 Example Ladder Logic to Format Parameter Data Types for Reads For 16-bit Integer
Parameters – All
PowerFlex 7-Class
Drives
For 32-bit Integer
Parameters – All
PowerFlex 7-Class
Drives
For 32-bit REAL
(Floating Point)
Parameters –
PowerFlex 700S
and PowerFlex
750-Series Drives
:CN:::40:::0::::::====================: Radid Decimal ..:.J S_ymbol Columns: ~
Desc: ~---------------------------~
"""....:J I' " " ....:J
ift"::r: i :> !!.O 32 bit i.r"t:g::r:, i.:!!. 11"": s.LC. ;.o tli.=~ ~1:::m. i.1!.;, ;.plit i.1!.to (2) 16--bit i.!!.t-!g:,!f;,_ N-40:0 == P-.::r-a:t~ i.-.:lu.: Lsu.· i cai r:::tt.,;,·Of'k N-40: l == P-.::r-a:t~ i.·.: l1P- MSU.. :&-00! 1:.:t 1,,,.-.~,r'k 1'41:l ; !)-.ra, t..- ,-.,1,..u \\-
N41:3 == P-.::r-a:t~ 1,·.: lu.:MS.U..
MOV ---~
Mo.,.
Sou.!( )! N :0
O<
N41:0
O<
=N :0
=N41:2
2 ifor ::.~.: :fto:.tir:.g: poi.1:.t t:.g,:orr::tty. ~"-O"J.:::rru.:-t fint ;,·w-:.p th: li.igh .::rr.'C to,i;- 16 bit i.:!!.t:g:-::r~ .;;..-1!.lt t?i.::1:. "'OP tl'!.: (2) i:r.t:g-!!:> into ,;. :fto:.tin g: poi:r:.t -=. :Ur:;,;,.. L!r..g:tli. of tli.: ,..OP i;, 1 b::::u.;.: tl:.:: ilo.:.ti.1!.g: poi:r..t i;, 3 2 bit;. .:'.f:.~ ,,.·ill .;.u.tO!IE:ti ::.lly t?J.:: Ui.:
:r"&t 16bit i.fl.t!g!!:&-OOI th-:: ;.OU.K:{1'41: 5)
N-40:0 == P--.::r-a:t~ i.·.: l'TJ.! Ls.u.· i cai r::: tt.,;,·Of"r.
N-40: l == P-.::r-a:t~ 1,·.: l'!P- MS\\. :&-O!I! 1:.:t,,;,·lf.r:
N4 l : 4 == ;.,,;."-:.~ P-.::r-a-:t~ 1:,: lu.: MS.U..
N41: 5 == ;.,t".:.~ P-.::r-a-:t~ 1:.;.l1P-LS.U.
FS::3 ; P.::r-a:t-!!Floo___!igPoi.:n.t 1,·.;;tu.:
MOV ---~
Mov.
S<.mrc.
Dest
N :0
O<
N41:5
O<
MOV ---~
N :I
17382<
Dest N41:4
I i382<
=N41:4
Dest =F8:3
leng tlt I
Using Explicit Messaging 6-33
20-COMM-E EtherNet/IP Adapter User Manual
Publication 20COMM-UM010H-EN-P
SLC 500 Controller Example Ladder Logic Program to Write a Single Parameter Using Read/Write Parameter Service
A Write Parameter message is used to write to a single parameter. This write message example writes a value to parameter 140 - [Accel Time 1] in a PowerFlex 7-Class drive.